P243: Work Plans July 2004 Version
The information in this document is the property of Bell Canada and may not be used, reproduced or disseminated without Bell Canada’s written permission.
Welcome Legend Feeder cable Distribution cable
Module 2 : Cables representation
Crossconnecting Box 12
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Central Office 7 1 3
4
Module 3 : Underground network
2 5
Module 4 : Splicing 6 9
Fish River
11
Module 5 : Aerial & building networks
8
10
Module 6 : Buried and submarine networks
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Welcome
Specifications for the instructor ONLY Materials required
Installation by the Instructor
The following materials are required for this course: •
Flipcharts with sheets and felt markers;
•
Boards and dry-erase markers;
•
A multimedia projector and a computer;
•
A poster of the outside plant and adhesive cards with the names of the modules to paste on it;
•
The game chart for Lesson 1 of the Introduction and adhesive cards;
•
Assorted pieces of cable;
•
Scale models of manholes.
N.B.: Before the course, you must: •
Post on a wall: -
The game chart that will be used in Lesson 1 of the Introduction Module;
-
The poster of the outside plant that will be used in Lesson 1 of Module 1.
The adhesive cards for the poster and chart should be within easy reach.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
i
Welcome
Instructor's notes
When you see “Instructor's notes” in italics in the left margin of your guide, it means that instructions and suggestions follow. These only appear in the Instructor’s Guide. In your guide, the answers follow the exercises and under the "Answers" tab in the Student's guide. The job aids are located under the "Job Aid" tab in your guide and in the Student's guide. The symbols on the left mean the following: Use one of the PowerPoint presentations. Use the posters
Plan
Use a work plan.
Show the scale models of the manholes. EX P ER U O C R IS G E
Group exercise.
Use the job aid.
Use a pad board
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
ii
Welcome
Welcome Duration
30 minutes
Instructor's notes
Introduce yourself and ask the participants to tell the group a little bit about themselves (name, position, seniority, etc.) and to state their expectations regarding this course. Explain the logistics (e.g., time class starts and ends, number of breaks, duration of lunch break) and the rules of conduct (e.g., punctuality, right to ask questions). Write these rules on the board. Present the course objectives set out below.
A work plan analysis course
In course P243 – Work Plans –, you will gain the knowledge and skills required to analyze Bell Canada work plans showing work to be performed in the existing network. The information used to design a work plan comes from different sources and is used to prepare the draft you receive from your manager or coordinator. A draft is a printout of a part of the network map (NetworkX) on which your manager has added elements by hand.
N.B.: The NetworkX system contains the map of the Bell Canada network (Québec and Ontario).
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Possible sources: Power companies, cable companies, municipalities, Governments.
1
Welcome
Instructor's notes Plan
Course objectives
Show an example of a work plan. Explain that a work plan is used to illustrate work to be performed on network elements.
To produce a work plan in NetworkX, you must first read and interpret the draft and make sure you have received all the required information. You must also detect and correct any discrepancies.
More specifically, at the end of the course, you should be able to: •
Read and interpret work plans* where underground, aerial, building and submarine cables, as well as the structures supporting them are illustrated;
•
Read and interpret work plans* where terminals are illustrated;
•
Detect discrepancies on these plans;
•
Correct the discrepancies.
* Means reading and interpreting the network map and drafts of plans.
Prerequisite
The following course is a prerequisite to the actual course: •
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
P242 – Introduction to NP&P.
2
Welcome
Instructor's notes
Before examining the work plans, it is important to take a look at each network element. Go immediately to Lesson 1 of the Introduction Module. After the first part of Lesson 1, you will be instructed to go back to the Table of Contents and the course outline. Therefore: Do not introduce the Table of Contents and the course outline right away. Tell the participants that you will come back to these items after they have taken a look at the network elements illustrated on the plans. This will allow them to better understand how the course will be presented.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2(a)
Welcome
Table of Contents P243 - Work Plans DAY 1 (Monday)
Welcome Introduction
Introduction to the Module Lesson 1 – Overview of the Network • Network
Lesson 2 – Importance of Work Plans • Importance of Work Plans Introduction to Module 1 Module 1: Basic Work Plan Elements Lesson 1 – Caption Stamp and References • Caption stamp • Right of way • Work plan numbering • References
Module 2: Illustrating Cables
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Page Duration 1 30 Intro.i Intro.1.1 30 Intro 1.3 Intro.2.1 25 Intro 2.2 1.i 1.1.1 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.9 1.1.14
35
Lesson 2 – Work Location • Work location • Landbase
1.2.1 1.2.3 1.2.15
Introduction to Module 2 Lesson 1 – Cable Characteristics • Types of cables • Network categories • Copper cables • Optical fibre cables
2.i 2.1.1 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6
Lesson 2 – Alphanumeric Cable Sequence • Cable identification • Alphanumeric sequence of copper cables • Alphanumeric sequence of optical fibre cables
2.2.1 2.2.3 2.2.6
Lesson 3 – Cable Numbering • Cable numbering ¾ Local cables ¾ Trunk cables ¾ Tool cables ¾ Fibre ring cables ¾ Local fibre ring cables ¾ Fibre partnership cables
2.3.1 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.3.9 2.3.10
35
Lesson 4 – Pair and Fibre Numbering • Difference between pairs, fibres and cables • Pair and Fibre numbering • Cable size
2.4.1 2.4.3
20
3
30
37
30
2.2.8
2.4.5 2.4.9
Welcome
Table of Contents P243 - Work Plans
DAY 2 (Tuesday)
Module 2: Illustrating Cables (cont'd)
Lesson 5 – Cable Origin and Length • Central Office • Direction of feed arrow ¾ Before splices/fusions ¾ At network category change points ¾ At cable ends • Cable lengths and measurements
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 plans)
Introduction to Module 3 Lesson 1 – Manholes (400 plans) • General • Duct formations • Illustrating manholes (400 plans)
Page 2.5.1 2.5.3 2.5.6 2.5.7 2.5.8 2.5.9 2.5.10 3.i 3.1.1 3.1.4 3.1.8 3.1.11
Lesson 2 – Conduits (400 plans) • General • Illustrating conduits (400 plans)
3.2.1 3.2.4 3.2.15
Module 3 (cont'd)
Module 4: Splicing
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Continuation and end of Lesson 2 Lesson 3 – Underground Cables (500 plans) • Underground cable characteristics • Lengths of underground cables and change in network category • Underground cable work • Zone of influence • Analysis method
3.3.1 3.3.3 3.3.19
33
1h05
37 3h
3.3.30 3.3.38 3.3.39
Introduction to Module 4 Lesson 1 – Splicing Overview • Splices/fusions • Pair/fibre continuity • Live and dead pairs/fibres • Types of splices/fusions
4.i 4.1.1 4.1.4 4.1.13 4.1.24 4.1.32
Lesson 2 – Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions • Straight splices/fusions • Branch splices/fusions • Splices/fusions with many cable numbers in their pair counts
4.2.1 4.2.3 4.2.14 4.2.25
4
Duration 35
1h15
1h53
Welcome
Table of Contents P243 - Work Plans Page DAY 3 Module 4 (cont'd) (Wednesday)
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 plans)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Duration 22 1h15
Continuation and end of Lesson 2 Lesson 3 – Facility Splices/Fusions (without transfer) • Facility splices/fusions • Installing, removing and replacing cables • Energizing and cutting pairs/fibres dead
4.3.1 4.3.3 4.3.8 4.3.14
Lesson 4 – Facility Splices/Fusions (with transfer) • Pair and fibre transfers • Double transfer • Slack and No cable (N/C) • Reverse feed • Check List "500 Plans –Underground"
4.4.1 4.4.3 4.4.23 4.4.38 4.4.44 4.4.48
4h15
Lesson 5 – Miscellaneous Splices • Stored Slack • Clear and cap (C&C)
4.5.1 4.5.3 4.5.5
18
Introduction to Module 5 Lesson 1 – Poles and Accessories • Poles and Accessories
5.i 5.1.1 5.1.3
35
5
Welcome
Table of Contents P243 - Work Plans Page DAY 4 (Thursday)
Module 5 (cont'd)
Continuation and end of Lesson 1 • Illustrating poles on 1-199 plans • Work on poles • Illustrating accessories on 1-199 plans • Work on accessories • “PLANS 1-199 – POLES” Checklist Lesson 2 – Aerial Cables (200 plans) • Aerial cable characteristics • Aerial cable lengths and change in network category • Work on aerial cables and their accessories • “200 PLAN – AERIAL” Checklist Lesson 3 – Building Cables (200 plans) • Building cable characteristics • Building cable lengths and network category changes • Work on building cables • “200 PLAN – BUILDING” checklist
Module 6 Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Introduction to Module 6 Lesson 1 – Buried Cables (600 plans) • Buried cable characteristics • Cable length and network category change • Work on buried cables and pedestals
6
Duration 1h45
5.1.13 5.1.23 5.1.39 5.1.50 5.1.64 5.2.1 5.2.3 5.2.6
2h
5.2.14 5.2.41 5.3.1 5.3.3 5.3.9
1h30
5.3.11 5.3.20
6.i 6.1.1 6.1.3 6.1.8 6.1.19
1h30
Welcome
Table of Contents P243 - Work Plans Page DAY 5 (Friday)
Module 6 (cont'd)
Module 7 Terminals and Wires
Continuation and end of Lesson 1 Lesson 2 – Submarine Cables (600 plans) • Characteristics of submarine cables • Example of a submarine cable (600)
6.2.1 6.2.3 6.2.7
Introduction to Module 7 Lesson 1 – Outside Terminals and Wires • Characteristics of outside terminals • Types of outside terminals • Illustrating outside terminals on work plans • Work on terminals • Definition and use of wires • Checklist concerning outside terminals
7.i 7.1.1 7.1.3 7.1.5 7.1.12
Lesson 2 – Inside Terminals • Characteristics of inside terminals • Illustrating inside terminals • Inside terminal work
7.2.1 7.2.3 7.2.7 7.2.12
Duration 15 15
2h
7.1.15 7.1.22 7.1.32 1h
Summary Exercise
Summary 3h Exercise 1
Job Sample
Job Sample 1
End.1
Closing Remarks
Job Aid
• • • • • • • •
•
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Network Category Change Basic Work Plan Elements Splicing Direction of Feed Arrow and Lengths Analysis Method Cable Numbering Manholes and Conduits Alphanumeric Sequence Landbase Elements
7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
15
Introduction Legend Feeder cable Distribution cable
Module 2 : Cables representation
Crossconnecting Box 12
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Central Office 7 1 3
4
Module 3 : Underground network
2 5
Module 4 : Splicing 6 9
Fish River
11
Module 5 : Aerial & building networks
8
10
Module 6 : Buried and submarine networks
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Introduction
Introduction Duration
5 minutes
General objective
At the end of this module, you should be able to: •
Describe the main elements of the outside plant;
•
Explain the function of these main elements and situate them in relation to each other;
•
Explain the importance of work plans.
To this end, the two parts of this introduction module will present:
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
An overview of the network;
•
The importance of work plans.
Intro.i
Lesson 1 Overview of the Network Legend Feeder cable Distribution cable
12
7 1 3
2
4
5
6 9
Fish River
11
8
10
Introduction
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network Duration
25 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Describe the main elements of the outside plant; • Explain their general function; • Situate these elements in relation to each other.
Materials
- Posters: - Diagram of the outside plant; - Associated chart of network elements 1 to 6 (locations, names, functions, images) and answer cards; - Associated chart of network elements 7 to 12 (locations, names, functions, images) and answer cards.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.1
Introduction
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Preamble Duration
5 minutes As we saw in P242 – Introduction to Network Access Service (NAS), the outside plant contains various types of cables and equipment that each plays a very important role in ensuring the smooth operation of the telephone system. Since all these network elements are illustrated on work plans, you must be well acquainted with their general characteristics and functions so that you can analyze these plans. This first part of the introduction will present an overview of the outside plant. This will allow you to review the elements you may find in the outside plant
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.2
Introduction
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
1. Network Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the outside plan diagram to introduce the different network elements. Also use the table of contents to refer to the course modules content. To do this, use the module title cards and paste them on the network poster in numerical order. Ask participants to refer to the course structure diagram and to the table of contents located in the Welcome section. This diagram is reproduced below in your guide but is not shown in the student's guide. They must refer to the Welcome section. Note : The grey cards indicate a future course module titles. Paste them on the poster telling the participants that those elements will be covered in a future course.
Legend Feeder cable Distribution cable
Module 2 : Cables representation
Crossconnecting Box 12
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Central Office 7 1 3
4
Module 3 : Underground network
2 5
Module 4 : Splicing 6 9
Fish River
11
Module 5 : Aerial & building networks
8
10
Module 6 : Buried and submarine networks
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Intro.1.3(a)
Introduction
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
1. Network Duration
20 minutes
Introduction
In course G300 - World of Bell Networks and Telecommunications and P242 – Introduction to Network Access Service (NAS), you saw the main elements of the outside plant: •
Central offices (also referred to as switching centres)
•
Cables: • Underground • Aerial • Building • Buried • Submarine
•
Splicing Splicing is not a network element but work that is performed at cable junction points that make it possible to connect cables to each other.
•
Manholes
•
Ducts
•
Poles and some of their accessories
•
Terminals
•
Wires
•
Crossconnecting boxes
•
Remote terminals
You also learned that there are two major cable categories:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
•
Feeder cables for connecting central offices to crossconnecting boxes that serve sectors.
•
Distribution cables that run from crossconnecting box to facilities located near homes and offices in defined sectors.
Specify that, sometimes, a feeder cable can also directly serve customers from the Central Office (SC). Intro.1.3
Introduction
Group exercise # 1 EX UP ER C RO IS G E
Instructor's notes
Network diagram 2 associated charts 2 groups of answer cards
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
This exercise is to help you remember the different elements of the outside plant and will be done as a group. Working together, associate the name, function and picture of each element with the right number on the network diagram.
Ask the participants to close their manuals and form teams of 4 to 6 people. Referring to the posters, explain to the participants that they must associate the name, function and picture of each element to the right number on the big diagram of the outside plant. To do so, they must use the chart and the answer cards that you distribute. Point out that the dashed lines represent cables in the feeder sector and that the solid lines represent cables in the distribution sector. First, ask each team to complete one of the two answer charts using the answer cards. Then ask each team to check if the other team correctly completed the chart. Once the exercise is completed, briefly go over the network elements on the poster, emphasizing, if applicable, the elements that were incorrectly placed on the chart. The answers appear on the following pages in your guide and under the "Answers" tab for the participants.
Network diagram
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Under the "ANSWERS" tab, you will find a schematic reproduction of the outside plant that is the same as the poster used during the exercise. You will also find the answers to the association game. The number on the left of the element name refers to the diagram of the outside plant.
Intro.1.4
Introduction
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Answers to Group exercise # 1 Legend Feeder cable Distribution cable
12
7 1 3
2
4
5
6 9
Fish River
11
8
10
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.4(a)
Introduction
#1 - Central office (Switching centre)
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Bell Canada building containing equipment used to process signals (voice and data) and route them to the requested destination.
Central office
Distribution frame in a central office that filters and distributes calls
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.4(b)
Introduction
#2 - Manhole
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Underground structure for the installation, maintenance and splicing of underground cables.
Manhole (top view) #3 - Conduit
Pipe or Duct, usually PVC, used to protect underground cables.
Conduit with underground cables Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.4(c)
Introduction
#4 – Underground cable
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Cable in ducts located between the central office and a manhole OR between two manholes OR between a manhole and a pole, pedestal or building.
Underground cable #5 - Pole
Structure used to support cables above ground.
Bell Canada line pole
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.4(d)
Introduction
#6 – Aerial cable
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Above ground cable supported by poles or exterior building walls.
Aerial cable Note : The lowest cable belongs to Bell Canada while the others belong to a Power Company.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.4(e)
Introduction
#7 – Building cable
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Cable installed inside a building.
Hole to access inside the building
Building cable #8 – Buried cable
Cable installed directly in the ground or in incidental ducts, i.e., ducts that are not part of a continuous structure connecting manholes to the central office.
Aerial cable
Buried cable
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.4(f)
Introduction
#9 – Submarine cable
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Cable used to cross a waterway.
Submarine cable #10 - Terminal
Equipment used to connect pairs of a distribution cable to subscriber wires.
QTD20AF aerial terminal Note: There are different types of terminals. This one is attached to a strand (steel wire that supports aerial cables) but others may be found on exterior walls of buildings, on poles, in pedestals and inside buildings.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.4(g)
Introduction
#11 - Wire
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Group of 4 to 24 small wires in a flexible protective sheath that connects a subscriber to an aerial or buried terminal.
Service wire Note: There are several types of wires.
Instructor's notes
Tell the participants that wires will be covered in Lesson 1 of Module 7. Later in the course, the participants will see that: 1 service wire = 2 pairs = 4 wires 1 12-pairs wire = 12 pairs = 24 wires
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.4(h)
Introduction
#12 - Crossconnecting box
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Enclosure used to crossconnect feeder cables with distribution cables.
OPI crossconnecting box
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.4(i)
Introduction
Lesson 1 : Overview of the Network
Summary Duration
5 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered: •
Instructor's notes
Main elements of the network and their function.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer participants questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.1.5
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
Introduction
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans Duration
25 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Explain the importance of work plans.
Materials
- Pad board.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.2.1
Introduction
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
1. Importance of Work Plans Duration
25 minutes
Introduction
In Course P242 – Introduction to NP&P, you saw the role and responsibilities of the Network Planning and Provisioning Teams. One of the many responsibilities of NP&P includes preparing work plans.
In the following pages you will learn why it is important to produce quality work plans for the company.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to list reasons why it is important to produce work plans and enter their ideas on the pad board. Once the discussion is over, comment on and complete the participants’ answers.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.2.2
Introduction
The usefulness of a work plan
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
When Bell Canada receives Customer Service requests from internal and/or external customers and cannot provide answers for technical reasons, the matter is transferred to NP&P group. Access Network checks the existing equipment in the outside plant and identifies the work to be performed so that the customer can obtain the service requested. In summary, once the nature of the work has been determined, the individuals responsible for designing the network provide a technical design to their associates based on which they will prepare a complete, accurate work plan in the NetworkX computer system. Consequently, as soon as work on equipment in the outside plant is required, a work plan is drafted. This plan then becomes a major tool in performing the work because it contains the information required to implement the network.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Remind the participants that the “network” job number is the same as the work order number.
Intro.2.3
Introduction
Work plan users
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
•
Access Network Once the work plan has been distributed to the various parties, Access Network is responsible for updating the plans if Expertech or Access Network Facilities request changes or when the work is completed.
•
Expertech Network Installation (ENI) ENI is a Bell contractor responsible for executing work requested by Access Network. They use the work plan to order the necessary equipment and to perform the work indicated on the plans.
•
Access Network Facilities – (ANF) The Access Network Facilities department is the Bell control centre that ensures the smooth management of cable and pair files. It is responsible for entering in its records all the data pertaining to the cables and pairs shown on the work plan.
•
ANDC The Access Network Dependability Centre (ANDC) is responsible for ensuring the smooth operation of the outside plant. The ANDC preventive maintenance group analyzes degradation in the network and keeps it in working order by replacing damaged or obsolete equipment.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.2.4
Introduction
Work plan users (cont'd)
The need for work plan details
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
•
Transmission Group Bell’s Transmission group translates the data on the work plans into theoretical performances. It obtains actual performance data from Expertech and compares them. If it finds transmission errors, the file is referred to Access Network for the necessary corrections.
•
Cable Maintenance This Bell group checks and repairs the Bell telecommunications network. It also monitors the network pressurization systems as well as the maintenance of the Megaroute systems at the customer when Bell has a contract with the customer. The work plans act as reference tools because they represent existing and new facilities in the network.
As you have no doubt noticed, various departments use the work plans as reference tools because they contain the information required to perform the work: • Equipment to install and order; • Details of the work to be performed; • Address where the work is to be executed; • Rights of way and easements; • etc. The high number of users makes it very important to prepare quality work plans, i.e., complete and accurate, in order to avoid minor or major errors that could entail unnecessary costs for the company.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.2.5
Introduction
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
Give several examples of errors that occurred in the past and the resulting consequences to impress upon the participants the impact of a poorly designed plan. You may use the examples on the next page or examples from your own personal experience. Examples: • Lack of precision: The location of the manhole was not indicated… it was winter. The technician charged time to find the manhole. • Oversight: A plug in the pressurization system was not indicated on the plan, triggering the alarm system at the central office. A team had to check and correct the situation. • Missing information: The technician had to slow down the work to complete missing information and to correctly perform the work requested.
Work plan standards
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
In order to standardize the language used by the various parties, the company has set standards using specific terminology and symbols for all the outside equipment located between the central office and the subscriber. These standards are used to draft work plans and make them easier to read and understand. When these standards are clear and applied well, communication between the departments leaves no room for interpretation and Bell can avoid unnecessary or costly activities.
Intro.2.6
Introduction
Checklist
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
Because work plans contain a lot of information that is used by several departments, it is important that they be prepared carefully and with particular attention to details. Therefore, in order to help the associates with this task, a checklist has been prepared which is now used as a complementary work tool when preparing a work plan. This list contains a series of items to check in order to identify the most common errors and omissions. During this course, you will learn how to use this checklist. Remember that it will become an indispensable tool when you go back to work, but it does not override existing practices and contracts and other agreements signed with other parties (e.g., Bell/Power company, agreement with CNCP). This checklist does not include all exceptions. In case of doubt, you must consult existing practices or agreements.
Instructor's notes
Access to the below Intranet site and present its content. Impress upon them the importance of consulting them regularly http://nms.on.bell.ca/
Other sources of information
To help you prepare work plans, a Web site is available and offers you a variety of information on equipment, new technology, practices, account codes and work plan standards. Consult it to find answers to your questions. The link is: http://nms.on.bell.ca/
See your Groups POC (Point of Contact) for local information.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.2.7
Introduction
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
Other sources of information (cont'd)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.2.8
Introduction
Other sources of information (cont'd)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
SPARE SPACE FOR PERSONAL USE
Intro.2.9
Introduction
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
Use the NP Web site and surf from there. Make some demonstrations on how to surf in the site. Briefly explain each section content.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this preamble. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.2.9(a)
Introduction
Lesson 2 : Importance of Work Plans
Summary Duration
5 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered: •
Instructor's notes
Importance of Work Plans.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work Plans
Intro.2.10
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Module 1: Basic Work Plan Elements
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements Duration
5 minutes
General objective
At the end of this module, you should be able to: •
Read and interpret information pertaining to basic work plan elements;*
•
List the basic elements of all work plans*;
•
Enter the basic elements on a draft and illustrate them on a work plan*;
•
Identify discrepancies pertaining to basic work plan elements;
•
Identify information pertaining to the basic elements to indicate or correct on a plan* based on a request.
* Means reading and interpreting the network map and drafts of plans.
The two lessons in this module will present:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
The caption stamp, plan numbering and references found on work plans and rights of way;
•
The location of work and how landbase elements are illustrated.
Show the module title that has been pasted on the poster of the outside plant.
1.i
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
Lesson 1 Caption Stamps and References Duration
30 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson you should be able to: •
Explain what the information on the caption stamp refers to and the meaning of the references found on the work plans;
•
Explain under what circumstances rights of way and easements are required and how to indicate them on a work plan;
•
Explain how to number work plans.
Materials - M1L1 PowerPoint (includes images, photos, diagrams and graphics of this lesson).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.1
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
Preamble Duration
3 minutes There are different types of work plans. However, they all share common elements such as a caption stamp and reference numbers. These elements make it easier to read and understand the project to be carried out. In this lesson, you will learn how to read the information on the caption stamp of plans. You will also see how work plans are numbered. Finally, you will learn how references are indicated.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.2
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
1. Caption stamp Duration
5 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M1L1 PowerPoint presentation to explain each box of the caption stamp. Point out that the same information is found in the exchange and SC boxes, for example: “Oshawa” in the 2 boxes. Emphasize that the name of the municipality must be indicated above the caption stamp. Also mention that when the work is performed close to a railroad, a special permission number is required and a form must be completed.
M1L1
Caption stamp information
The caption stamp is a table that contains a variety of information on implementing a project in the Bell network. It is located in the lower right-hand corner of all work plans printed with NetworkX. N.B. The name of the municipality may be entered above the caption stamp.
Issue date 1: Job issue date Issue dates 2 to 6: Date of job revision in chronological order
Originator: Name of manager responsible for the job
Telephone: Manager’s telephone number R/W: Right-of-way # and/or municipal consent and/or other authorization
CLLI*: Name of telephone exchange
Network#: Job #
Exchange: Name of telephone exchange SC: Name of switching centre * The name of the telephone exchange appears in the “CLLI” box.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.3
Plan: Plan #
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
2. Right of way Duration
5 minutes
Introduction
When installing network elements, it is important to obtain written consent from the owner: an easement, a municipal consent or authorization from the Government or other body.
You must make sure to obtain a right-of-way before beginning work on network elements. You must follow the procedures in effect in your district. For information on how to request a right-of-way or easement, consult Practice 920-1000-101 or the following Web site: http://an.on.bell.ca/liaison/HomeExL.html On the next page, you will see an example of a right-ofway request.
Instructor's notes
Briefly take a look at the right-of-way request with the participants. Explain why a right-of-way request is required in this example.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.4
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
1.1.5
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Introduction (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
In order to perform maintenance work on existing elements, you do not need to request new authorizations; however, you must indicate the previously obtained permission numbers on the work plans. You must also ensure that the owners of the properties involved have been informed before accessing the property and beginning the work. These authorizations are required for the following properties: • • •
Private Property (residential property, commercial land, industrial land, etc.); Public Property (roads, highways, lanes, bridges, municipalities, etc.); Private Property of transport companies, government organizations, First Nation Reserves (railroads, navigable waters, pipelines, provincial and federal governments, etc).
As you saw in course P242 – Introduction to Network Planning & Provisioning (NP&P), the verbal or written agreement allowing Bell Canada to access a site and build, maintain and inspect facilities is referred to as a right-of-way. We will discuss the various rights of way in the following pages.
Instructor's notes
Mention that owners are obliged to grant an acceptable right-of-way to serve their property. Emphasize the importance of a right of way and the consequences (in time and money) of not obtaining them before work is performed. Also mention that if Bell has obtained a prior consent, it is entitled to install and maintain its network above and below public property (at no charge), private property, as well as the private property of transport companies, government organizations and First Nation Reservations. Briefly review the types of rights of way in the table on the following pages.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.6
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Type of Agreement Verbal permission
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
Types of Property Concerned • •
Individuals Companies
Definition • • • •
Written • permission •
Individuals Companies
• •
Easement
• • • •
Surface rights •
Individuals Companies Developers Public organizations
•
Government organizations
•
•
• Municipal consent
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Municipalities
•
A verbal agreement between Bell Canada and an owner (an individual) with the intention of installing, maintaining and inspecting equipment. Any network modification requires a new agreement. No disbursement or compensation shall be made under this type of agreement. The agreement becomes void if ownership changes. A written permission is an agreement signed by Bell Canada and the owner allowing the installation, maintenance and inspection of equipment. This agreement is valid until a change of ownership. An easement is a charge or restriction laid on a property for the use of Bell Canada. It is established by a notarized agreement signed by the owner, Bell Canada and another utility, when required. A surface right is a notarized agreement that must be published like any other easement. It is a division of the object of a property right and is only used with government organizations. Municipal consent is an official authorization granted to Bell by a municipality, allowing it to maintain, renew and build its network on public property under the municipality’s jurisdiction without limiting Bell’s rights.
1.1.7
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Type of Agreement MTO Consent
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
Type of Property Concerned •
Ministry of Transportation Ontario
Definition • •
Permit or lease • • • • • • •
Authorization • •
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
MTO consent is an official authorization to proceed with building the network on public property under its jurisdiction. This consent must be obtained before beginning work and without conditions that could limit Bell’s rights.
Railway companies Airports Pipeline companies Canadian Coast Guard First Nations Reservations National Capital Commission International Boundary Commission
•
A permit and lease are specific agreements setting out certain requirements determining the occupancy conditions (duration, cost, location, etc.).
Ministry of the Environment (Ontario) Ministry of Agriculture (Ontario)
•
Just like with certain parties in the case of permits and leases, the authorization is an additional request that must be made to obtain rights of way from certain government organizations.
1.1.8
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
3. Work plan numbering Duration
10 minutes
Work plan numbering
The work plan number, entered in the “PLAN” box in the caption stamp, specifies the type of network in which the work is to be performed. There are 7 types of work plans:
References: Practice 920-3100-102 and CG301.2 Section 2
•
Five types of main plans: 9 1-199 Plan: Poles Illustration of work on poles and their accessories. 200 Plan: Aerial and building cables Illustration of work on aerial cables, building cables and wires. 9 400 Plan: Manholes and ducts Illustration of work on manholes, ducts and related structures.
Instructor's notes
Example of a related structure: concrete base for various types of enclosures.
9 500 Plan: Underground cables Illustration of work on underground cables, i.e., cables installed in a manhole structure and ducts connected to the central office. 9 600 Plan: Buried and submarine cables Illustration of work on buried and submarine cables.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.9
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Work plan numbering (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
•
A type of miscellaneous plans is used to provide additional details on work already illustrated on the main 100, 200, 400, 500 or 600 plans: 700 Plan: Miscellaneous information: Includes miscellaneous instructions to the main plans about the work and its location. May include diagrams for information purposes.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Emphasize that the work location must appear on all the plans. Its absence would be considered an error of quality.
1.1.10
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
Plan numbering when several types of networks are involved
A work plan is numbered according to the category of the network element on which the work will be performed. However, a plan may contain work to be performed on elements belonging to different network categories. The plan number must therefore correspond to the type of network where most of the work will take place.
Instructor's notes
Ask the question below: Answer: 200 plan (most of the work is performed in the aerial network.)
Question
A project involves connecting a new Business Customer to the Bell Canada network. To this end, 50 metres of buried cables, a pole, 500 metres of aerial cables and 10 terminals must be installed. What plan number will represent all this work? Answer: _______________
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.11
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
Instructor's notes
Use the following diagram to explain work plan numbering.
Organization of main work plans
When major work is involved in a project, you may need several work plans to illustrate it. In order to assign a number to each plan, you must: 1. Determine the category of network where most of the work illustrated on the plan will be performed and the type of corresponding plan (100, 200, 400, 500 or 600); 2. Start the numbering with the plan closest to the central office. N.B. All the work plans for a given project must have different numbers. The following diagram shows the numbering for 3 work plans of the same type (500):
CENTRAL OFFICE
501
502
503
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.12
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Organization of main work plans (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
The following is a simplified illustration of the numbering of different types of work plans:
602
202
201
601
502 501 CENTRAL
Instructor's notes
Point out to the participants that the number of the first 600 plan is 601 and not 603 as some might think. Explain that even if they are not placed next to each other, 600 plans are numbered 601 and 602. Point out that you cannot see the plans like this in NETx – this is just a visual to explain numbering
Organization of complementary work plans
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
700 plans are also numbered in ascending order. With the plans above, you can have: • • • • • •
A 701 plan associated with a 501 plan A 702 plan associated with a 502 plan No 700 plan associated with a 601 plan A 703 plan associated with a 201 plan A 704 plan associated with a 202 plan A 705 plan associated with a 602 plan
1.1.13
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
4. References Duration
5 minutes
General
Other basic elements are used on work plans to make them easier to read and interpret such as: • •
References to other plans or projects
References to other plans and/or projects; Miscellaneous references
As you have seen, a project can involve several work plans. Reference numbers are therefore used to show their arrangement. These are entered in circles to show the numbers of the previous and subsequent plans.
502 The following is a diagram of references to other plans
502 501
501
502 CENTRAL
503
502
503
It sometimes happens that a project’s execution depends on another project. To indicate a reference to an associated project, a note is placed on the plan wherever space is available. Example of a note: This project must be carried out after project 726259.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.14
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Instructor's notes
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
To make it easier to read a plan with several references, it is possible to indicate: from 501 to 503
Miscellaneous references
Reference numbers (file or project numbers) pertaining to requests received or made must be indicated on the plan: Reference numbers for external requests from: • Power companies • Cable companies • Municipalities • Government • Customers (individual or business). Reference numbers for internal requests from: • ANDC • Repair • Customer Service • FAC (Access Network Facilities).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.15
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 1 : Caption Stamps and References
Summary Duration
2 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered: • • • • •
Instructor's notes
Caption stamps; Rights of way; Plan numbering; References to other plans and projects; Miscellaneous references.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer the participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.1.16
Lesson 2 : Work location
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 2 : Work location
Lesson 2 Work location Duration
30 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: •
Explain and describe the location of Bell’s outside plant;
•
Identify the notes required on the plan during excavation work;
•
Read and interpret information on a work plan pertaining to municipal elements.
Materials - PowerPoint M1L2 (includes images, photos, diagrams and graphics of this lesson);
- Landbase Elements job aid; - Basic Work Plan Elements job aid
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.1
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 2 : Work location
Preamble Duration
5 minutes A road map contains the names of streets and their path as well as the representation of important buildings, parks, railways, waterways, etc. On a work plan, a number of landbase elements are also illustrated to allow those who use the plans to easily locate the network where the work is to be performed. In this lesson you will see the information required to find the work location. You will also see the various landbase elements that may be found on a plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.2
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 2 : Work location
1. Work location Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M1L2 PowerPoint to explain the diagrams and photos pertaining to this teaching point.
Street names
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
To allow people to identify the work location on a work plan, the name of the main and cross streets concerned must be indicated.
Review what a location diagram is (covered in Lesson 1 of this module). The network map in NetworkX is oriented due North (North towards the top). It is therefore not necessary to indicate the North direction.
1.2.3
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Permanent locations
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 2 : Work location
The use of permanent locations (e.g. : a pole number, a civic addresses, a manhole number) must be used on a work plan, when available. They make it possible to accurately determine work locations and moreover, help find buildings and elements surrounding the work. Following is a list of location requiring a permanent location identifier (address or Arb). ¾ Cables (miscellaneous): • All planned splices; • Ends of cable; • Future planned splices locations, where identified on work plan; • Points of connection with foreign-owned plant; • Electrolysis test points (ETP); • Insulating joints and noise suppressor devices (ex.: electrolytic capacitors); • Pressurization details: ¾ Remote Air Dryers; ¾ Contactors; ¾ Contactor terminals; ¾ Moisture separators; ¾ Transducers; ¾ Permanent Valves; ¾ Manifolds. • Major change in direction of aerial cable on poles. This includes aerial road crossings. ¾ Terminating Points: • Distributing frames; • Interfaces; • Control and access points; • Cross-connecting terminals; • Distribution terminals (except buried encapsulations and re-enterable PIC connection points in buildings). ¾ Carrier Apparatus Cases: • All apparatus and equipment cases.
1.2.4
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Permanent locations (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Work location
Civic addresses are considered permanent locations to which you may refer. They are indicated on work plans according to very specific conventions. On the next page, you will find the table of standardized abbreviations used to indicate permanent locations. When a civic address is indicated, the street name is used without an article and must be the same as the name in the STREET NAME database. This database was created by Customer Service.
Examples: R 23 LACOMBE ST ÆElement located at the rear of 23 LACOMBE F 187 PARC AV
Element located at front of 187 Parc AV.
W WALL 55512 ST-LUC RD Element located on the west wall of 55512 St-Luc RD.
Clarification notes are sometimes added. For example, next to “R 23 LACOMBE ST,” you may see the note “Royal Bank Building.”
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.5
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Permanent locations (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Work location
The following is a sample list of standardized abbreviations used to indicate permanent locations. SEE TIP# 2000-019
Abbreviations Permanent locations Abbreviations
Definitions
R F SD DM
Rear Front Side DeMark point INside (obsolete) WALL Rear WALL Front WALL Side East WALL North WALL West WALL South WALL OPPosite PEDestal Pole
IN WALL R WALL F WALL SD E WALL N WALL W WALL S WALL OPP PED P
In addition to permanent locations, an arbitrary (arb) must be added on the work plan, if there are two or more identical work operations at the same permanent location (e.g.: two splices in the same manhole, placement of two anchors on the same pole, etc…). When this case occurs, an arbitrary must be added with the permanent location.
1 Arbs are numbered incrementally from 1.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.6
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 2 : Work location
Permanent locations (cont'd)
Following are two sketches illustrating the use of arbitraries.
Instructor's notes
Specify to participants that the terminals, poles, guys and anchors illustrations are incomplete, but that those subjects will be covered in next modules. In example 1, indicate that the cable's perpendicular lines represent terminals.
Example 1
PR 30 ST-LUC ST
SPR 12 ST-LUC ST
Example 1
1
10,1-50
75F
BKTB 50-26/AER 50
25
Example 2
1
Pole to be placed Existing pole Guy and anchor to be placed
3
22
RAYMOND ST
Example 2
25
P35 2
SC
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.7
ST-LUC ST
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Subdivision plan
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 2 : Work location
A subdivision plan that shows the division of lots is often the starting point to determine the location of the telephone network. This plan shows, among other things, the property lines (also referred to as lot lines), i.e., the property lines of private or commercial land. An example of a subdivision plan appears on the following page.
1.2.8
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 2 : Work location
1.2.9
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Location of the telephone network
Lesson 2 : Work location
On a street (front lot) in an urban setting In an urban setting, the telephone network may be located along streets, boulevards or roads. This situation is often referred to as a front lot network. In such a case, the aerial network, for example, is installed in the right of way belonging to the municipality at the property line of private properties. Examples : P/L
P/L
Right of way
P/L
P/L
P/L
Gaudet Street
Right of way belonging to Government
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
P/L 117 Road
1.2.10
P/L
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Work location
An underground network can be found in highdensity areas and is installed along boulevards and main arteries. Explain the importance of accurately illustrating work locations and requesting the necessary rights of way.
Location of the telephone network (cont'd)
When the cable is the only element illustrated, it is drawn on the side of the road where it is physically installed. In the example below, the cable is installed on the north side of Gaudet Street.
BKTB 50-26/AER GAUDET STREET Instructor's notes
Mention that this situation is associated with the rough plan. Illustrating cables will be discussed in the next module. Do not dwell on this point.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.11
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Location of the telephone network (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Work location
Rear lot in an urban setting In an urban setting, the network may also be installed on a rear lot, i.e., at the rear of properties, on private land.
Example :
Guy Street
P/L
P/L
P/L P/L
St-John Street Instructor's notes
Aerial and buried networks may be found on rear lots. In this example, point out that the poles do not cross property lines.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.12
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 2 : Work location
Location of the telephone network (cont'd)
In a rural setting, the situation is different. Here, the network may be installed on the field side, road side, or other, requiring additional permissions, as the following illustrations show.
Instructor's notes
Aerial and buried networks may be found in these three locations.
Field side
Road Ditch
Ditch
Road side
Road Ditch
Ditch
Other
Road Ditch
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ditch
1.2.13
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Surface details
Lesson 2 : Work location
Some work, such as the installation of poles, ducts or buried cables, requires excavation. In these situations, location details must be accompanied with specific instructions concerning: •
The type of surface (sidewalk, pavement, grass, etc.)
•
Existing underground services (gas, water, sewer, etc.) To indicate to technicians that security measures must be taken during work, the symbol below must be placed near the symbols for water systems, sewers, etc.
CAUTION
•
The installation depth
•
Trench details (buried network)
•
Repair work to be done
These instructions are important and necessary to avoid complications. As well, they make it possible to better estimate the costs associated with the work. Your Basic Work Plan Elements job aid contains the important work location elements and surface details to check.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to look at their Basic Work Plan Elements job aid. Present the lower sections concerning work location and surface details.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.14
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 2 : Work location
2. Landbase Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M1L2 PowerPoint presentation to present the different landbase elements.
Introduction
The NetworkX map elements show landbase elements such as street lines, sidewalks, waterways, property lines, etc.
Street line Refer to your Landbase Elements job aid. A chart containing the various landbase elements is represented.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to look at their Landbase elements job aid. Using the job aid, make an overview of the different elements. It is important to accurately show the physical location of the network outside. It is your responsibility to illustrate all the details that make it possible to determine the exact work location.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.15
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Lesson 2 : Work location
Summary Duration
5 minutes In this lesson, the following points were covered: • • •
Instructor's notes
Indicating the location of the Bell facilities in the network; The notes required for excavation work (surface details); Illustrating landbase elements.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to the participants questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1.2.16
Module 2 Illustrating Cables
Preamble - Module 2
Module 2 Illustrating Cables Duration
5 minutes
General objective
At the end of this module you should be able to: •
Read and interpret work plan information pertaining to cables*;
•
Identify discrepancies pertaining to cables;
•
Identify information pertaining to cables to enter or correct on a plan based on a request.
* Means reading and interpreting the network map and drafts of plans.
To this end, the five lessons in this module will present:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Cable characteristics;
•
Alphanumeric cable sequence;
•
Cable numbering;
•
Pair and fibre numbering;
•
Cable origin and lengths.
Show the module title that has been pasted on the poster of the outside plant.
2.i
Lesson 1 Cable Characteristics
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
Lesson 1 Cable Characteristics Duration
32 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: •
Materials
Name the different types of cables and their main characteristics.
- M2L1 PowerPoint (includes images, photos, diagrams and graphics of this lesson); - Assorted pieces of cable 9 Coaxial cable 9 Copper cables of different gauges and sizes with different sheaths and types of insulation 9 Fibre optic cable (handled by the instructor only)
Job Aid « Network Category Change».
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.1.1
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
Preamble Duration
2 minutes The purpose of the outside plant is to transmit voice and data messages efficiently and reliably. Cables are the main transmission medium for communications of all types. High-frequency waves or signals are also used; however, this method will not be discussed in this course because it is never illustrated on work plans. In this lesson, you will have the opportunity to study the different types of cables found in Bell’s outside plant and the components and characteristics of the main types of cable used.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.1.2
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
1. Types of cables Duration
2 minutes
General
Cables are used to transport communication signals. Outside plant cables are designed according to specific requirements. They are therefore manufactured using a variety of materials depending on where the cables will be installed. As well, the type, size and capacity of the cables vary depending on where they will be used and the performance expected.
Types of cables
Currently, copper and fibre optic cables are the main transmission media used in Bell’s outside plant. They make it possible to transmit all types of communication to meet subscriber needs. Other types of cables were used in the past but gradually abandoned as technology advanced. However, they are still found in the outside plant and are therefore illustrated on plans. The following is a list of the other types of cables that you may find on a work plan.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Coaxial cables Cable used in cable TV (e.g., Rogers, Cogeco, Videotron).
•
Composite cable Two cables of different gauges and sizes enclosed in a single sheath.
•
CCDN cable (Coaxial Cable Distribution Network) Cable used for television networks.
•
LD4 Toll/trunk cable
•
LDN (Local Broadband Network) Cable used to transmit television programs, videoconferences, etc.
Briefly review above points (cables that are currently placed "copper & fibre" + old type cables that are not placed anymore). Specify that some copper cable stubs, a coaxial cable and a fibre optic stub are available, in the classroom, for viewing. 2.1.3
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
2. Network categories Duration
2 minutes
Illustrating cables according to their network category
In the Overview of the Outside Plant, you saw that there are five cable categories. On the cable lines illustrated on the work plans, you may see letters indicating the category of the network to which the cable belongs. Network Category
Lettres
Service codes
Submarine
SUB
0205
Building
BLD
0197
Aerial
AER
0195
Buried
BUR
0202
Underground
UG
0199
The following are a few examples: Submarine CDTC 2400-26/SUB
Building BKMB 50-24/BLD Aerial BKTF 100-26/AER
Buried AJTB 200-26/BUR Underground BKTF 600-26/UG
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask participants to refer to the "Network Category Change" job aid. Specify that the above table is shown on the job aid last page. The other pages will be covered later in the course.
2.1.4
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
3. Copper cables Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M2L1 PowerPoint presentation to explain the components of the copper cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.1.5
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Copper cable composition
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
Although there are different types, all copper cables consist of four major components:
Insulation
Size
Gauge
Cable sheath
•
Sheath The sheath is an outer jacket that protects the cable against outside agents. Consequently, the materials used to produce the sheath vary depending on the location of the cable (buried, underground, submarine or aerial).
•
Size The size is actually the number of pairs a cable contains. Reminder: A copper cable pair consists of 2 copper wires (tip/ring).
Wires
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Gauge The gauge is the size of the copper wires that make up the cable pairs.
•
Insulation Insulation is the protective covering of the copper wires.
2.1.5
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Instructor's notes
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
Ask participants to come around the assorted pieces of cable and give the participants a few minutes to take a look at them. Make sure they notice: 9 The different sizes; 9 The different gauges; 9 The different sheaths; 9 The different types of insulation (PIC, paper, jelly). Emphasize that size is in fact the number of pairs a cable contains. Mention that the copper cables are connected to each other at junction points referred to as SPLICES.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.1.5(a)
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
4. Fibre optic cables Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M2L1 PowerPoint presentation to explain the components of the Fibre optic cable.
Fibre optic cable composition
Depending on their use and the type of network in which they are found, Fibre optic cables will be designed according to very specific physical and optical parameters. Generally speaking, an Fibre optic cable consists of the following: • • • • •
Central strength member Fibre tubes Black polyethylene inner jacket Corrugated steel tape Black polyethylene outer jacket
Note: In the past, most of the Fibre optic cables installed contained one or two copper pairs to monitor network operation. These cables are still present in the network. However, Fibre optic cables today do not have a copper pair. They are referred to as dielectric Fibre optic cables. Technology in this field is advancing rapidly with the result that these types of fibre are becoming widely available. On the following page, you will see a diagram of a fibre cable with a copper pair and one with a dielectric fibre cable.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that the fibre cables are connected to each other at junction points referred to as FUSIONS.
2.1.6
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Fibre optic cable composition (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
The diagram below shows a fibre optic cable with a copper pair (used in the past).
The diagram below shows a dielectric fibre optic cable (without a copper pair).
Instructor's notes
Emphasize the components found in most fibre optic cables. Fibre Optic Cable Black polyethylene outer jacket
Central strength member
Fibre optic
Black polyethylene inner jacket Corrugated steel tape
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.1.7
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Fibre optic cable composition (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
Despite the different types of optical cables found in Bell’s outside plant, they all consist of: •
A central strength member
Each cable has a dielectric or steel central strength member to facilitate pulling the cable without damaging the fibres. •
Fibre tubes (and copper pair)
Around the central strength member are protective tubes containing the fibres, i.e., slots in which the fibres or tubes are placed. In the case of a cable with a copper pair (used in the past), one of the positions is replaced by a copper pair. The size of a fibre cable corresponds to the number of fibres it contains. •
Inner/outer polyethylene jacket and corrugated steel tape
The cable is clad in one to three polyethylene jackets between which corrugated metals sheaths are inserted to protect the fibres against outside elements. In addition to metal and polyethylene sheaths that serve as a protective barrier for the fibres, the cable centre may be pressurized (air), jelly filled or protected with an additional water detection tape to prevent water from seeping inside the cable.
Instructor's notes
For safety reasons, ask the participants to come to the front of the class to look at an actual sample of a fibre optic cable. Mention that it is very important not to touch the fibre cable because of the danger involved. Draw a parallel between the diagrams and the actual fibre optic cables.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.1.8
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
Lesson 1 exercise Duration
5 minutes
Instructor's notes
This exercise is done as a group. Ask the participants to answer the following question. Use the M2L1 PowerPoint presentation to present the question and correct the answers. Note: Participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the “Answers” tab. For each cable identified by a number, indicate:
Instructions EX P ER U O C R IS G E
• •
Its network category; The letters to enter on the cable line to indicate its network category.
The answer for number 5 has been provided as an example. d Swithching Centre
h e
c
f
c
f
d
g
e
h
g
Submarine
SUB
Exercise 1 - ANSWERS
c
Underground
UG
f
Buried
BUR
d
Aerial
AER
g
Submarine
SUB
e
Buried
BUR
h
Building
BLD
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.1.9
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 1 : Cable Characteristics
Summary Duration
1 minute In this lesson, the following key points were covered: • • • •
Instructor's notes
Cable types; Cable network categories (underground, aerial, building, buried and submarine); Copper cable characteristics; Fibre optic cable characteristics.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.1.10
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence BKTB 100-26/AER BHAF 50-22/BUR 1-26~/AER BDMC 2100-24/UG 100-22/BUR
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
Lesson 2 Alphanumeric Cable Sequence Duration
30 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • •
Read the alphanumeric sequence of cables on a work plan; Make the connection between the characters of the alphanumeric sequence and the cable components.
Materials - M2L2 PowerPoint (includes all the images, photos, diagrams and graphics presented in this lesson);
- Alphanumeric Sequence job aid.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.2.1
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
Preamble Duration
3 minutes Although cables contain the same components, they are made of different materials, gauges and sizes depending on the performance expected and where they will be placed in the Network. As such, in order to be able to conduct an inventory of the installed cables and to immediately know their characteristics, it is important to enter all pertinent details on the work plan.
Instructor's notes
Explain the importance of correctly identifying cables on work plans. Example: Incorrectly identifying the alphanumeric sequence could mean that the wrong type of cable is installed.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.2.2
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
1. Cable identification Duration
5 minutes
Cable identification
Cable identification involves a group of five elements illustrated on the work plan that makes it possible to identify the specific components and characteristics of the cable. They are: 1. The line that illustrates the cable and its path; 2. The alphanumeric sequence that indicates the cable characteristics; 3. The letters that refer to the network category: • SUB = Submarine • BLD = Building • AER = Aerial • BUR = Buried • UG = Underground; 4. The cable number; 5. The pair or fibre numbering.
Instructor's notes
The cable identification corresponds to the graphic information that appears when the network map is viewed in the NetworkX system. The database also consists of non-graphical information concerning the cable. For example, the cable installation year is information that is available and important in order to evaluate the value of the Bell network. The example below shows the cable identification as standardized by Bell. Cable number
Pair numbering 19, 1-200 BKTF 200-26 /BUR
Alphanumeric sequence
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.2.3
Network category
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Cable identification (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
It is important to pay attention to the specific location of each element: The alphanumeric sequence must be entered in the cable line, followed by the network category. The cable numbering and pair numbering (or fibres) are separated by a comma and are entered above the alphanumeric sequence. Cable numbering
Pair numbering 19, 1-200 BKTF 200-26 /BUR Network category
Alphanumeric sequence
There are two other ways to enter the cable identification when there is not enough space above the cable line. 1. Enter the cable number and the pair/fibre numbering under the alphanumeric sequence. Example: (lower cable) 23, 101-200 BKTB 100-26/BUR BKTB 100-26/BUR 19,1-100
2. Enter the alphanumeric sequence, network category and cable count as a reference. To enter this reference information, a letter in a box is placed on the cable line. This reference box is reproduced with the cable identification near the cable in a space available on the plan. Example:
A BKMF 100-24/UG 10,1-100 A
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.2.4
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
There is a third way, which involves writing the identification in an available space and connecting it to the cable line with an arrow. This method is not recommended. BKMF 100-24/UG 10,1-100
Cable identification (cont'd)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
In this lesson, you will learn the meaning of the alphanumeric sequence for copper and fibre optic cables. Lessons 3 and 4 will deal with the cable number and pair/fibre numbering respectively.
2.2.5
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
2. Alphanumeric sequence of copper cables Duration
5 minutes
Alphanumeric sequence
The alphanumeric sequence is divided into two parts: 1. An alpha sequence that indicates the type of cable; 2. A numeric sequence that indicates the size of the cable and the gauge of the pairs inside the cable.
BHAB 600-22/AER ALPHA sequence Meaning of the alpha sequence
NUMERIC sequence
The alpha sequence gives information on the type of cable, i.e., the GAUGE, INSULATION and SHEATH.
Insulation
Gauge
Sheath
B H A B 600-22 The numeric sequence provides information on the SIZE of the cable (number of pairs or fibres) and the GAUGE of the pairs. The first number of the sequence (600) means the size of the copper cable. The size is the total number of pairs in the cable. It can vary between 25 and 3600 pairs.
Mnemonics method
The second number (22) indicates the pair gauge. The following is a method used at Bell Canada to help you memorize the gauge sizes: B oys A lways M ake T rouble
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
= = = =
19 22 24 26
Boys always make trouble
2.2.6
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
Point out to the participants that the cable gauge is indicated both in the alpha sequence by the third letter and in the numeric sequence. It is therefore important that the letter used in the alpha sequence correspond to the gauge entered in the numeric sequence. Ask the participants to refer to their "Alphanumeric Sequence" job aid Review the first page table. Emphasize the mnemonic method for determining the gauge and mention that only four gauge sizes exist.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.2.6(a)
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Former identification
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
In the past, only the numeric cable sequence was indicated on plans. This numeric sequence gives the same information as the numeric part of the alphanumeric sequence currently used. You will therefore find existing cables identified as:
50-22/BUR 1-26~/AER
Instructor's notes
Explain that the symbol “~ “means PIC cable in the above numeric sequence. Mention that at the time, the standards established by the company to draft work plans were far less complex than today. The network was much smaller and technology less developed; consequently, the number and variety of equipment used in the outside plant was much more limited. Since there were not many different kinds of cable, it was possible to identify them simply by where they were installed. Today, the situation is far different!
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.2.7
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
3. Alphanumeric sequence of fibre optic cables Duration
5 minutes
Alphanumeric sequence of fibre optic cables
Like copper cables, fibre optic cables have an alphanumeric sequence that provides information about their characteristics. Example:
34N2LT-036/UG Fibre optic cables are identified according to the SOCC code (Standard Optical Cable Code): S1S2S3S4S5S6 NNN The following is an example of a fibre cable with a copper pair (gauge 22).
34MCLT-024+1-22/UG Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to use their "Alphanumeric Sequence" job aid Review the second page table.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.2.8
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
Lesson 2 exercises Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
This exercise is done as a group. Ask the participants to answer the following questions. Use the M2L2 PowerPoint presentation to present the questions and correct the answers. N.B.: For the participants, the answers are found at the end of their manual under the ANSWERS tab.
Instructions EX P ER U O C R IS G E
Complete the following exercises using the "Alphanumeric Sequence" job aid.
Exercise 1
In the alphanumeric sequences below, circle the part or parts that represent the cable gauge.
ADTC 2700-26 / UG 600-22 / AER BHBB 200-19 / AER Exercise 1 - ANSWERS
ADTC 2700-26 / UG 600-22 / AER BHBB 200-19 / AER
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that the gauge is indicated in two locations in the alphanumeric sequence. 2.2.9
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
In the following examples, enter the missing element in the alphanumeric sequences.
Exercise 2
Enter your answer on the lines on the right-hand side of the page.
Alphanumeric Sequences
A. B.
BKTF
26/UG
3000-26/UG
C.
ADMC 600/UG
D.
BHAF
22/BUR
E.
BKMB
/BLD
F.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Missing Elements
100-22/BUR 22/ENF
2.2.10
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
Exercise 2 - ANSWERS Alphanumeric Sequences
A.
BKTF
Missing Elements
26/UG Size
B.
3000-26/UG Alpha sequence
C.
ADMC 600/UG Gauge
D.
BHAF
22/BUR Size
E.
BKMB
/BLD Numeric sequence
F.
100-22/ENF
No error (see below).
Not very long ago, cable characteristics were entered using only a numeric sequence, i.e., the ALPHA sequence was not indicated on work plans. Today, cables with only numeric sequences are still illustrated on the network map. Since the information on the alpha sequence is not available, it cannot be added when drafting the plans. Today, new and existing cables that already have this information must be illustrated with their complete alphanumeric sequence.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Remind the participants that work plans must be analyzed very carefully and special attention paid to details. All the information on the plans must be scrutinized to ensure no errors are made at the work site.
2.2.10(a)
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 2 : Alphanumeric Cable Sequence
Summary Duration
2 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered:
Instructor's notes
•
The alphanumeric sequence of copper cables and its meaning;
•
The alphanumeric sequence of fibre optic cables and its meaning.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.2.11
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering 12,1-400 BKTF400-26/AER
F23,1-24 34N2LT-024/UG
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
Lesson 3 Cable Numbering Duration
35 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: •
Read cable numbering and understand its meaning.
Materials - M2L3 PowerPoint (includes images, photos, diagrams and graphics of this lesson);
- Pad board;
- Cable Numbering job aid.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.1
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
Preamble Duration
2 minutes Cables are numbered in order to facilitate management of the network. As covered in Lesson 2, cable numbers appear on work plans and are one of the components in the cable identification.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.2
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
1. Cable Numbering Duration
20 minutes
Use and illustration of cable numbering
The cable number tells you about the type of cable used (copper or fibre) as well as its function in the network. On a work plan, the copper cable number is indicated above the alphanumeric sequence of the cable and is always followed by a comma.
Cable number is 12.
12,1-400 BKTF400-26/AER The number of a fibre cable is always preceded by an F, for fibre. It is also indicated above the alphanumeric sequence, followed by a comma.
The cable number is F23.
F23, 1-24 34N2LT-024/UG
Instructor's notes
In operations, the expression “cable count” is used to designate the cable numbering and the numbering of the pairs associated with the cable installed in the network. Mention to the participants that Practice 9203000-110 covers cable numbering and that information pertaining to fibre partnerships can be found on the NP TIPS site under NP TIP 00-031. Also mention that an inventory of already assigned numbers is continuously kept up to date.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.3
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Feeder & distribution cables numbering
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
The network manager numbers feeder and distribution cables. Feeder cables are numbered from the central office. The manager assigns the cable numbers according to a preestablished method. The number is selected according to the cable’s use in the network. Distribution cables are numbered based on the Distribution Service Area (DSA).
Below, you will see how seven categories of feeder cables are numbered as well as a brief description of their role.
Instructor's notes
Explain the difference between a feeder and distribution cable in the examples.
1. Local cables (copper and fibre)
A local copper or fibre cable is used to serve customers within the boundaries of a central office territory. Local feeder copper cables are numbered: • 10 to 99. The cable number is 26.
26,1-200 BKTB 200-26/AER
Note: If there were more than 99 local copper cables, the following would be numbered as follows: • Cable 100 would become: 10A • Cable 101 would become: 11A • Cable 102 would become: 12A • Cable 110 would become: 20A • Cable 120 would become: 30A • Cable 200 would become: 10B • Etc.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain the above note. Ask the participants: “How would cable 123 be numbered?” Answer: 33A
2.3.4
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
1. Local cables (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
Local distribution copper cables are numbered according to the equipment from where they are connected (origin) and to the route number. The following example illustrates a distribution cable coming from an OPI. The cable number is 101-1.
101-1,1-200 BKMB 200-24/AER
Following are some examples of distribution cables: The cable number is CM01 Equipment: CM01,1-544 D545-550 D5551-5600 BKMF 600-24/UG
DMS-1U
The cable number is SM01 SM01,1 -544 D545 -550 D5551 -5600 BKMF 600-24/BUR
SCM-100U
The cable number is RM01
OPM
RM01,1-600 BKMF 600-24/BUR
The cable number is AN01
Access Node
AN01,1-400 CI 400-0/BUR
The cable number is LC45
LCRV
LC45,1-48 34NCLT048/UG
Local fibre feeder cables are numbered:
F01 to F99.
Note 1 : If the fibre cable contains a copper pair, this pair is numbered FC+ the same figures as the fibre cable. The fibre cable number is F21. The number of the fibre copper cable pair is FC21. F21,1-24 FC21,1 34NCLT-024+1-22/UG
Note 2 : If there were more than 99 fibre cables, they would be numbered according to the same principle as previously described for copper cables. Example: F10A (100th fibre)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.5
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
2. Trunk cables (copper and fibre)
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
A trunk cable connects two central offices. For example, the cables that connect the Oshawa central office to the Whitby central office are trunk cables. Trunk copper cables are numbered: • 100 to 599 Example: The cable number is 156. CENTRAL OFFICE A
CENTRAL OFFICE Z 156,1-900 DCAZ 900-22/UG
Fibre trunk cables are numbered: •
F100 to F199
Example: The cable number is F102. CENTRAL OFFICE A
CENTRAL OFFICE Z F102,1-192 34N2LT-192/UG
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.6
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
3.
Toll cables (copper and fibre)
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
A copper or fibre toll cable runs through several central offices. For example, a toll cable could run through the Windsor, London or Kitchener central offices up to a Toronto central offices. Toll copper cables are numbered: • 600 and 999. Example:
CENTRAL OFFICE A
CENTRAL OFFICE B
600,1-900 DCAZ 900-22/UG
CENTRAL OFFICE C 600,1-900 DCAZ 900-22 /UG
Toll fibre cables are numbered: • F200 to 699. Example:
CENTRAL OFFICE A
CENTRAL OFFICE B F290,1-192 34N2LT-192 /UG
CENTRAL OFFICE C F290,1-192 34N2LT-192 /UG
Note : The numbering of fibre cables F700 to F999 is reserved for future use.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
It may happen that the designations of existing local and toll fibre cables do not correspond to these designations. In general, the old designations corresponded to those of the trunk and toll copper cables and must not be changed. The new concept applies to new arteries during their installation. (See Practice 920-3000-310)
2.3.7
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
4.
Fibre ring cables
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
Fibre ring cables form loops that run through two central offices and feed one or more customers.
Fibres
Fibres
This type of cable is used to improve network robustness. Rather than being fed by a cable that follows a single path, a major customer can receive and send signals over two paths. In case of a cable break on one of the paths, the customer can use the other path and will not lose service. Fibre ring cables are numbered: • FR01 to FR99 For example, customers connected to a ring can be fed by the Belmont and London central offices.
Instructor's notes
Do not emphasize FR numbering. Explain that fibre rings will be covered in detail in another course. Mention that transmit and receive fibres are connected together but do not bear the same number because two fibres with the same number cannot leave the same SC. FR11, 1-192 CENTRAL OFFICE Belmont(644)
CENTRAL OFFICE London (268)
34N2LT-192
FR10, 1-192 34N2LT-192
FR10,1-192 34N2LT-192
FR10:644,1-2 FR10:268,1-2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.8
2 fibres fed by central ff 2 fibres fed by central ff
644(Belmont) 268(London)
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
5.
Local fibre ring cables
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
There are also local fibre ring cables that make it possible to create rings that run through a single central office. Local fibre ring cables are numbered: • LFR01 to LFR99 Example:
LFR42,1-192 34N2LT-192/UG CENTRAL OFFICE Numbering change point
LFR55,1-192 34N2LT-192/UG
Instructor's notes
Mention briefly that transmit and receive fibres are connected together but do not bear the same number because two fibres with the same number cannot leave the same SC.
6. Transcanada fibre cables
Transcanada fibre cables are very rare. They are in fact fibre rings laid across Canada to build and connect telecommunications networks. These fibres will be reinforced and renewed at regular intervals to counter the competition and provide as much service as possible. Transcanada fibre cables are numbered: • F99
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.9
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
7. Fibre partnership cables
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
When there is a lease agreement for some of the fibres of the cable, it is identified as a fibre partnership. In other words, within a given cable, Bell uses certain fibres for its own use and leases the others to a partner. A tag, identifying the fibre manager, is physically attached to the fibre cable. The following elements are required to illustrate a fibre partnership cable. If Bell is managing the cable: • •
•
The alphanumeric sequence of the cable is indicated with the mention “Manager: Bell” above. The numbering of the cable associated with the fibres used by Bell is identified by the letters FP, followed by the number associated with the type of network (a local cable FP100-FP199 and trunk cable FP100-FP199 etc.) The numbering of the cable associated with the fibres used by the partner corresponds to the abbreviation of its company name (see list of abbreviations).
Note: Partner fibres are grouped together and numbered consecutively beginning with the number 1. LIST OF PARTNER ABBREVIATIONS (Reference: NMS TIP 01-031) Alcan
AC
Hydro-Quebec
HQ
Axion-Digitel
AD
Lambton Telephone
LT
Cogeco
CG
Quebec Telephone
QT
Cablevision Warwick
CW
Sogetel Mobility
SM
Telebec
TB
Decibel
DB
Videotron Telecom
VT
Example : HQ,1-36 FP181,1-24 VT,1-12 MANAGER: BELL 34R2LT-072/BUR
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.10
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Fibre partnership cables (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
If Bell is not the cable manager: •
• •
The alphanumeric sequence of the cable is replaced by “UNK” followed by the total number of fibres available in this sheath. The name of the manager is indicated above. The numbering of the cable associated with Bell’s fibres is the same as when Bell is the manager. The numbering of the cable associated with the fibres used by all other companies is “OTH.”
Note: Partner fibres are grouped together and numbered consecutively beginning with the number 1. Example : OTH,1-36 FP181,1-24 OTH,1-12 MANAGER: COGECO UNK 72/BUR
Along with this numbering, specific notes are required on the plan. See the following Web site for more details in this regard: http:/nms.on.bell.ca
Instructor's notes
Explain that this lesson presents the main types of feeder cables and that distribution cable numbering will be covered in another course. Then ask the participants to take a look at their Cable Numbering job aid. Present it briefly.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.11
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
Exercise #1 Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to do the below exercise individually. Once the exercise is completed, ask the participants to help correct them. Note: The participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the “Answers” tab.
Instructions
For each cable below, circle the cable number and indicate the type of cable. You may use your Cable Numbering job aid.
Case 1
18,1-100 AJMB 100-24/BUR Type of cable : _________________________________
Case 1 answer
Answer : 18 is a local feeder copper cable number.
Case 2
F656,1-96 34N2LT-096/UG
Type of cable : _________________________________ Case 2 answer
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Answer : F656 is a toll fibre cable number.
2.3.12
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
Case 3
215,1-900 BKTF 900-26 /UG
Type of cable : _________________________________ Case 3 answer
Answer : 215 is a trunk copper cable number.
Case 4
FP12,1-48 CW, 1-48 Manager:BELL 34N2LT-096/UG Type of cable : _________________________________ Case 4 answer
Answer : FP12 is a fibre partnership cable number. Fibres CW12,1-48 are leased by Cablevision Warwick. Bell is the cable manager.
Case 5
301-4,1-200 AJTB 200-26/BUR Type of cable : _________________________________ Case 5 answer
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Answer : 301-4 is a local distribution cable number coming from an OPI.
2.3.13
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 3 : Cable Numbering
Summary Duration
3 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered:
Instructor's notes
•
Feeder cable numbering: 9 Local (copper and fibre) 9 Trunk (copper and fibre) 9 Toll (copper and fibre) 9 Fibre rings 9 Local fibre rings 9 Transcanada fibres 9 Fibre partnership
•
Distribution cable numbering.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.3.14
Lesson 4 Pair and Fibre Numbering
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
Lesson 4 Pair and Fibre Numbering Duration
20 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson you will be able to: •
Read and explain pair and fibre numbering.
•
Check whether the pair and fibre numbering corresponds to the cable size.
Materials - M2L4 PowerPoint (includes images, photos, diagrams, and graphics of this lesson);
- 25-pair cable;
- Alphanumeric Sequence job aid (presented in Lesson 2).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.4.1
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
Preamble Duration
1 minute As previously covered: •
Copper cables contain small wires grouped two by two, referred to as pairs;
•
Fibre optic cables contain fibres;
Copper cable pairs and fibre cable fibres are key elements in data transmission. It is therefore very important to be able to identify and track their path on network maps in the NETWORKX system. These pairs and fibres must be numbered, and this is what we will cover in this lesson.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.4.2
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
1. Difference between pairs, fibres and cables Duration
4 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M2L4 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following images.
Copper cable pairs
Each copper cable contains a certain number of pairs. As covered previously, the size of a copper cable corresponds to the total number of pairs of wires in the cable. Currently, cables varying between 25 and 3,600 pairs are installed, but in the past, cables of other sizes were also used. What is the size of the cable below? ________
Size = Number of pairs
Cable sheath
Pair (2 wires) Instructor's notes
Tell the participants that different sizes appear on network maps. Examples: 6-11-51 Answer to the question: 6 pairs. Specify that this is an old cable. Now circulate a 25-pair cable around the class and ask the participants to determine the number of pairs. Make sure that they understand that a pair contains two wires.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.4.3
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Fibre cable fibres
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
Fibre cables contain fibres placed in tubes that generally contain 12 fibres each. (In rare cases, the tubes contain only 4 fibres). The size of a fibre optic cable corresponds to the total number of fibres in the cable: Today that number ranges from 12 to 864. The size of fibre cables is subject to change given the rapid evolution of this technology. What is the size of the cable below? ________
Instructor's notes
Circulate a 6-fibre cable and make the connection between the diagram below and the cable. Answer to the question: 6 X 12 = 72 fibres
Size = number of fibres 12 fibres Tube
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.4.4
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
2. Pair and Fibre Numbering Duration
5 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M2L4 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following diagrams.
Copper cable pair numbering
Copper cables are used in most residential sectors. Your telephone at home is connected to a copper wire pair that originates at the central office. One of the wire pairs allows you to transmit signals while the other allows you to receive them. To track the path of your pair across the network, it must be adequately identified on the map and on work plans. Numbering copper cable pairs involves assigning a number to each pair, from 1 until all are identified. The following is an illustration of pair numbering on a work plan.
The pair numbering is 1-600.
10,1-600 BKTB 600-26/AER
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.4.5
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Illustration on a work plan
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
Pair numbering is part of the cable identification. The following is a standard illustration of pair numbering on a work plan. The cable count is 46,1-25 The cable number is 46.
The pair numbering is 1-25
46,1-25
BHAB 25-22/AER
As you know, the cable count is generally entered above the alphanumeric sequence and the network category. The first number (46) is the cable number, followed by a comma that separates it from the pair numbering. The pair numbers (1 to 25) are separated by a dash. Below is an example of a 25-pair copper cable and its numbering. Each circle represents a pair (2 wires) and the number assigned to it.
13
25 24
14
4
12
1
23 11 3
6 7
9 20
Instructor's notes
16
2
22 10 21
15
5
8
17 18
19
Remind the participants that if there is not enough space on the plan, the identification can be illustrated differently. Ask their comments in this regard. Answer: In note form or under the cable line.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.4.6
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Numbering fibre optic cable fibres
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
A fibre can transport a large number of signals at the same time. In general, the fibres are used to connect central offices, feed remote terminals or to provide services to major customers. Work plans must accurately illustrate fibre numbering.
The fibre numbering of a fibre optic cable involves assigning a number to each fibre, starting with 1, until all the fibres are numbered. This is how fibre numbering is illustrated on a work plan. The fibre numbering is1-60. F12,1-60 34R2LT-060/BUR
The cable count is entered above the alphanumeric sequence and the network category. The cable number (F12) is followed by a comma that separates it from the fibre numbers. The fibres numbers (1 to 60) are separated by a dash.
Instructor's notes
Remind the participants that if there is not enough space on the plan, the fibre cable identification can be indicated in two other ways. The illustration below represents the cable used above. A fibre optic cable with 5 12-fibre tubes, for a total of 60 fibres.
12 fibres tube
3748 2536
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.4.7
4960 1-12 1324
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Numbering fibre optic cable fibres (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
Even if they are no longer installed, some fibre cables with a copper pair exist in the network. Below is an example of a 48-fibre cable. This cable contains 4 tubes of 12 fibres, for a total of 48 fibres, plus a copper pair. The fibre numbering is 1-48 The copper pair is 1 because there is only 1 copper pair. F13, 1-48 FC13,1 34NCLT048+1-22/UG
Dielectric strand
2536
3748
Copper pair
Fibre tube (12) 1324
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1-12
Remind the participants the meaning of the cable number (FC13) for the copper pair.
2.4.8
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
3. Cable size Duration
4 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M2L4 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following diagrams.
Cable size
As covered earlier, the size of a cable corresponds to the total number of pairs or fibres it contains. To determine the size of a cable from its pair or fibre numbering, the following formula applies:
+
Number of the last pair / fibre Number of the first pair / fibre 1 Cable size
The size of the cable is indicated in the alphanumeric sequence. It is therefore important to ensure that the number of pairs you calculate with the formula is equal to the cable size indicated in the alphanumeric sequence. Examples:
F10,1-36 34N2LT-036/UG 37,1-1100 ADAC1100-22/UG Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that the formula for calculating the size of a cable from its pair or fibre numbering is included in the Alphanumeric Sequence job aid used in Lesson 2 of this module.
2.4.9
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
Exercise # 1 Duration
5 minutes
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to complete the exercises individually or in teams of two. Then present the following answers. N.B.: The participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the “Answers” tab.
Instructions For each cable below, circle the pair or fibre numbering and indicate whether it corresponds to the cable size. You may use the Alphanumeric Sequence job aid. Case 1
FA12,13-72 32N2LT -060/UG Fibre numbering… corresponds to the cable size. does not correspond to the cable size.
Case 1 - Answer
Answer : FA12,13-72 32N2LT-060/UG ; corresponds to the cable size.
Case 2
79,200-400 AJTB 200-26/BUR Pair numbering… corresponds to the cable size. does not correspond to the cable size.
Case 2 – Answer
Answer : 79,200-400 AJTB 200-26/BUR ; does not correspond to the cable size.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain that the pair numbering must be 201-400 rather than 200-400. 2.4.10
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
Case 3
38,250-1500 BKMF 1200-24/UG Pair numbering… corresponds to the cable size. does not correspond to the cable size.
Case 3 - Answer
Answer : 38,250-1500 BKMF 1200-24/UG ; does not correspond to the cable size.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain that the pair numbering could be 2511450 or 301-1500 to correspond to the cable size (1200). In case of doubt, you must always check the numbering with the designer.
2.4.11
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 4 : Pair and Fibre Numbering
Summary Duration
1 minute In this lesson, the following key points were covered: • • •
Instructor's notes
The difference between pairs/fibres and cables; Cable pair and fibre numbering; Cable size.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.4.12
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Lesson 5 Cable Origin and Length Duration
35 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • Look at a work plan or network map and identify where the cables originate; • Illustrate the cable origin on a work plan; • Differentiate and identify the types of cable measurements on a work plan or network map.
Instructor's notes
Remind the participants that work plan also refers to drafts used to produce plans.
Materials
- Outside plant poster;
- M2L5 PowerPoint (includes: images, photos, diagrams, and graphics of this lesson);
- Direction of Feed and Lengths job aid.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.1
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Preamble Duration
3 minutes The network contains various types of equipment that play specific roles to ensure the telephone system operates smoothly. In order for Bell customers to make and receive calls, they must be connected through cables to equipment that communicates with a central office.
Instructor's notes
Use the M2L5 PowerPoint presentation to present the image below as well as all the others in this lesson. Indicate that to designate a central office, some people refer to “Switching Centre” or “SC.” Explain that each subscriber loop has its own specific characteristics, i.e., the equipment and length of the loop varies according to the services requested by the customers and the location of the central office in relation to them. Bell CENTRAL OFFICE
Network equipment copper cable
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
fibre cable
2.5.2
fibre cable copper cable
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
1. Central office Duration
5 minutes
Central Office
The central office contains the various equipment required to process and route calls to requested destinations. Each central office is the point of origin of all the cables associated with its territory.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to point out the central office on the outside plant poster. Use the M2L5 PowerPoint presentation to present the following image. Mention that the equipment located at the central office will be covered in another course. Explain that it may happen that some areas be fed by a host central office (called theoretic central office). When it occurs, the subscribers' numbers will keep the main central office NNX. On the other hand, the other central office will provide the feed.
Role of the central office and its equipment
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Central office frame that filters and distributes calls The central office plays the major role of managing communication signals. All calls made by customers go through the central office because it is the point of origin of all the cables.
2.5.3
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Identification of central offices on work plans
The work plan represents a section of the network that is always associated with a central office. The Central Office Identification can be found in the Work Plan Label. No symbol is used. As well, for security reasons, the address of the central office is never entered on a plan.
Direction of the central office
On all work plans, an arrow indicates the direction in which cables are deployed (from the central office to the customers). It is placed on the line of the cable and bears the name “Directional Arrow.”
In fact, the feed directional arrow points toward the customer. The origin, i.e., the central office from which the cable originates is in the opposite direction of the arrow. Direction is also identified on the plan with “SC” at the Switching Centre end of the cable.
Central office
Customers
BKTB 600-26/AER
Instructor's notes
BKTB 600-26/AER
Ask the participants what AER means on the above diagram. (Answer: Network category = aerial). Mention that the directional arrow can point in other directions: it is the location of the central office in relation to the customer that determines the direction of this arrow.
Customers
Central Office
BKTB 600-26/AER
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
BKTB 600-26/AER
2.5.4
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to correctly trace the direction of feed arrow on the diagram below. Then correct their answers with the M2L5 PowerPoint. Trace the directional arrow on the diagram below.
Question
Customers
BKT B 60
Central office
0-26 /AER
BKTB
Instructor's notes
600-2
6/AE R
Answer: (The answer is not in the Participant’s Manual) Customers
BKTB
Central office 600-2
6/AE R BKTB
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.5
600-2 6/AE R
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
2. Direction of feed arrow Duration
5 minutes
Where should the direction of feed arrow be placed?
You have just seen that the direction of feed arrow is placed on the cable line and that it makes it possible to identify the location of the central office. This arrow does not appear just anywhere on the cable line; it must appear in the following locations: 1. Before splices/fusions; 2. At network category change points; 3. At cable ends.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Specify that there are exceptions associated with certain network categories and that they will be discussed in lessons specific to these categories.
2.5.6
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
1. Before splices/fusions
The direction of feed arrow must be placed immediately before a splice/fusion. When many cables must be installed to reach the customer, junctions must be made between them so that the signal can be transmitted from the central office to the customer without interruption. These junctions are splices (copper cables) or fusions (fibre cables). On the diagram below, three cables have been installed and three splices were required. The dark circles represent the splices between the cables. The direction of feed arrows #1, #2 and #3 are placed before each splice symbol and point toward the customer. The central office is therefore in the opposite direction of the arrow.
Instructor's notes
Mention that the copper cable splice symbol is the same as for fibre-optic cable fusions. However, the term “fusion” is used in the case of a junction between fibre-optic cables.
Central office 10,1-600 BKTF 600-26/UG
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Customers #1
10,1-600 BKTB 600-26/AER
2.5.7
#2
10,1-600 AJTB 600-26/BUR
#3
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
2. At network category change points
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
A direction of feed arrow must be placed on the cable at network category change points. In fact, you have seen that there are five network categories: submarine, building, aerial, buried and underground. For example, to indicate that an underground cable becomes aerial, as in the diagram below, a direction of feed arrow must be placed.
Aerial
Central Office
Underground
On a work plan, the direction of feed arrow points toward the customer (direction away from the central office) and is positioned at the network category change point.
BKTF 200-26/UG
Instructor's notes
BKTF 200-26/AER
Ask the participants to indicate how the network category is shown on the previous diagram. Answer: the letters UG and AER after the alphanumeric sequence. Ask whether the direction of feed arrow points to the right location. Answer: Yes, the switching centre is on the left and the customers are on the right.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.8
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
3. At cable ends
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
A direction of feed arrow must also appear at cable ends. N.B.: Typically, there is a special splice at the end of the cable, referred to as a termination cap.
Central Office
Customers 10,1-600 AJTB 600-26/BUR
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.9
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
3. Cable lengths and measurements Duration
10 minutes
Introduction
Before being installed in the network, cables from manufacturers are delivered on reels. Reels are cylinders around which cables are rolled.
In this photo, you can see there are different reel sizes. The amount of cable that can be rolled around a reel depends on the size of the cable as well as the diameter of the reel. In most cases, there are maximum cable reel lengths. However, certain customized cables may depart from this rule. For information on maximum cable reel lengths, consult Practice 626-2002-110 or the Bell intranet site, Access Network information: http://nms.on.bell.ca/Engrbook/default.htm
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.10
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Introduction (cont'd)
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
When installing cables, their lengths are indicated on the plans in order to: •
Order the necessary quantity of cables;
•
Calculate the costs for the material and installation.
After installation, cable lengths permanently remain on the maps making it possible to know the value of the Bell Network (capital), to calculate the subscriber loops in order to determine the type of services possible and the equipment necessary to extend the network.
Types of lengths and tiein measurements
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Two types of lengths are represented on work plans: final lengths (called a “Section Length” in NetX) and component lengths. You’ll also find tie-in measurements, which provide details on the location of the work.
2.5.11
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Final length
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
The final length is the measurement of a cable section between: a) Two successive splices/fusions; b) A splice/fusion and a network category change point; c) Two network category change points; d) A splice/fusion and the end of a cable; e) A network category change point and the end of a cable.
Instructor's notes
There are a few exceptions. Mention that the specifics regarding final lengths will be covered in the lessons on each network category. The final length of a cable is shown as a number (the cable measurement in metres) followed by the letter F (F for Final). As shown in the examples below, the final length is entered above the cable line and at the farthest end away from the central office, i.e., just before the splice/fusion or the network category change point, on the side of the central office. This is the frequently used method.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
On the following pages, you will find notes pertaining to the following cases (a to e). Please consult them when presenting these cases.
2.5.12
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Final length (cont'd)
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
a) Between two successive splices/fusions:
b) Between a splice/fusion and a network category change point
Ex.1 BKTF200-26/AER
47F
BKTF200-26/BLD
50F
Ex.2 54F 34N2LT-012/BUR
35F 34N2LT-012/UG
c) Between two network category change points; 76F 34N2LT-024 / UG
50F
24F
34N2LT-024 / AER
34N2LT-024 /BUR
d) Between a splice/fusion and the end of a cable;
BKTF 200-26/UG
178F
e) Between a network category change point and the end of a cable. 54F 34N2LT-048 / BUR ENF
Other used methods
60F 34N2LT-048 / AER
• Cable stub label UG
• Cable stub box label
UG
• Leader line label
UG
Instructor's guide / Manuel du participant P243 – Work plans
2.5.13
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Instructor's notes
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Case A Ask the participants to draw the central office (on the left) and a customer home (on the right) on the diagram. Point out that the final length is placed above the cable just before the splice, on the side of the central office. Case B (examples 1 and 2) Ask the participants how they can know where the network category changes. (Answer: direction of feed arrow and letters on the network category following the alphanumeric sequence). Point out that the direction of feed arrow can point in both directions. Ask the participants to indicate on which side the central office is located. Answers: E.g. 1=Left – E.g. 2= Right Case C Point out that fusions are involved. Cases D and E Specify that the “end of a cable” can also be the end of a cable in a piece of equipment such as a cross-connecting terminal. Explain the other final lengths representations. Point out that typically there is a special splice (clear and cap) or equipment placed at the end of the cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.13(a)
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
The component lengths are mandatory information on the cable path and/or on the distance separating equipment installed on the cable. The sum of the component lengths corresponds to the final length of the cable.
Component lengths
The component lengths are indicated below the cable line at the farthest point from the central office by a number that corresponds to a measurement in metres. Example 1
For example, if a length of aerial cable is installed and a street must be crossed, you must enter a component length between the splice and the location where the cable changes direction, another component length to cross the street and an additional component length at each change of direction. Pole Splice
Towards the customers
Final length (25 + 15 + 25 = 65 metres)
65F BKTB200-26/ AER 020 TB BK
15
25
ER /A 26
FROM CENTRAL OFFICE
BKTB200-26/ AER 25
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.14
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Component lengths (cont'd)
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Example 2
For example, if a section of aerial cable is installed with terminals, you must enter a component measurement between the start of cable section #1 and terminal #2, between terminals #2 and #3, between terminals #3 and #4, and finally, between terminal #4 and splice #5. N.B.: The perpendicular lines to the cables are terminals. Terminals
Towards customers
FROM CENTRAL OFFICE 10,1-100
120F
BKTB 100-26/AER #1
Instructor's notes
35
25 #3
#2
40 #4
20 #5
Point out that the component measurements are entered below the cable line, at the farthest point from the central office. Since cables are deployed in a network from the central office, the measurements are entered away from the central office.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.15
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Tie-in measurements
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Tie-in measurements make it possible to accurately locate the Bell network in relation to certain physical elements. They provide indications as to the physical situation outside. Tie-in measurements are accompanied by arrows that indicate the position and distance between the elements. For example: • The new pole will be installed 5 metres from the fence.
5
•
The manhole is 5 metres from the sewer and 4 metres from the sidewalk. S
5
4
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
The number of metres can also be entered just above the arrow line if the length of the arrow permits it, as is the case in the previous examples.
2.5.16
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Exercise # 1 Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to answer the questions below in small groups or individually. Once the exercises are completed, use the answer sheet to correct them. N.B.: The participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the “Answers” tab.
Instructions
Complete the following exercises. You may use your Direction of Feed and Lengths job aid.
Case 1
Indicate the location of the central office on the following three diagrams. Diagram A
72F 72
BJMB 200-24/BUR
Diagram B
50F BHAB 50-22/AER 50
Diagram C
F 108
/UG 0-26 0 2 F BKT
108
Case 1 - Answer
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Diagram A: The central office is on the right. Diagram B: The central office is on the left. Diagram C: The central office is on the upper right side.
2.5.17
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Place an “X” in the box that corresponds to the definition
Case 2
Types of Length Definitions
Component Length
1- Measurement of a cable section between two network category change points. 2- Indication about the physical situation outside that makes it possible to accurately locate the Bell network in relation to certain nearby elements. 3- Measurement of a cable section located between a network category change point and the end of a cable. 4- Measurement of a cable section located between two successive splices/fusions. 5- Measurement of a cable section located between a splice/fusion and the end of a cable. 6- Mandatory information on the cable path and/or distance between equipment installed on the cable. 7- Measurement of a cable section located between a splice/fusion and a network category change point.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.18
Final Length
Tie-in Measurement
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Case 2 - Answer Types of Length Definitions
Component Length
Final Length
1- Measurement of a cable section between two network category change points. 2- Indication about the physical situation outside that makes it possible to accurately locate the Bell network in relation to certain nearby elements.
X
3- Measurement of a cable section located between a network category change point and the end of a cable.
X
4- Measurement of a cable section located between two successive splices/fusions.
X
5- Measurement of a cable section located between a splice/fusion and the end of a cable. 6- Mandatory information on the cable path and/or distance between equipment installed on the cable.
X
7- Measurement of a cable section located between a splice/fusion and a network category change point.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.18a
Tie-in Measurement
X
X X
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
On the diagram below:
Case 3
1. Indicate in which direction the central office is located; 2. Circle the component lengths; 3. Place a square around the tie- measurement; 4. Calculate and enter the final lengths in the right locations.
10, 1-100
10, 1-100
BKTF 100-26 / AER
BKTF 100-26 / AER 79
45
A
BKTF 100-26 / BLD 10, 1-100
60
1
34 25
10, 1-100 A
BKTF 100-26 / AER 45
3
Case 3 - Answer: 80F
Final length
79
Component length
34
Tie in measurements
Central office 10, 1-100
80F 79
45
10, 1-100
A
BKTF 100-26 / AER
BKTF 100-26 / AER
BKTF 100-26 / BLD 10, 1-100
60
1
34 25
10, 1-100
A 45
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3F
130F
BKTF 100-26 / AER
3
When correcting the exercise, ask the participants to explain the meaning of each tie-in measurement, component length and final length.
2.5.19
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
Lesson 5 : Cable Origin and Length
Summary Duration
2 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered:
Instructor's notes
•
Identifying cable origin using the originating arrow;
•
Indicating cable lengths (final lengths and component lengths) and measurements that provide details on the work location (tie-in measurements).
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2.5.20
Module 3 Underground Network (plans 400 and 500)
Module 3 - Preamble
Module 3 Underground Network Duration
5 hours 15 minutes
General objective
At the end of this module, you should be able to: •
Read and interpret information regarding the underground network, as found on a work plan*;
•
Identify discrepancies regarding the illustration of manholes, ducts and underground cables;
•
Identify the information pertaining to these elements that must be entered or corrected on a work plan.
* Means being able to read and interpret the network map and drafts of plans. To this end, the lessons of this module cover:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Manholes (400 plans);
•
Conduits (400 plans);
•
Underground cables (500 plans).
Show the module title that has been pasted on the poster of the outside plant.
3.i
Lesson 1 Manholes (400 Plans)
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Lesson 1 Manholes (plans 400) Duration
1 hour
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: •
Read and explain information pertaining to manholes and their accessories as entered on 400 plans;
•
Explain how manhole work should be illustrated on a work plan.
Materials
- Outside plant poster;
- M3L1 PowerPoint;
- Manholes and Ducts job aid;
- Scale models of manholes;
Plan 400
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
- 400 plans (1 copy of 414 plan of job 513161 per 2 participants).
3.1.1
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Preamble Duration
3 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M3L1 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following images.
Definition
Manholes are concrete underground structures, generally shaped like a rectangular. Some manholes are prefabricated and others are poured in place.
Manholes locations are identified in the field by their manhole cover
Open manhole during splicing work
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.2
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Definition (cont'd)
Inside the manhole, you will find splices, fusions and assorted equipment. Since a lot of work is done inside manholes, it is essential to indicate them correctly on work plans.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to show where the manholes are located on the outside plant poster.
In this lesson, you will study manholes and how to illustrate them on a work plan. This lesson is only an introduction. A course on Duct Structures will deal with the topic in detail.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.3
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
1. General Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M3L1 PowerPoint presentation to show the following images.
Role of manholes
Manholes make it possible to install, maintain, splice and fuse underground cables. They also shelter cases and make it possible to check cable pressurization.
Inside manholes
Top view of a manhole Inside manholes you will find cables, splice and fusion closures, as well as other pieces of equipment. There are duct formations (groups of ducts through which cables run), which enter through the manhole walls.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Details on duct formations will be provided later on in the lesson (second teaching point).
3.1.4
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Splice closure or other equipment Cable
Ducts
Manhole walls
Three-dimensional manhole
Case on manhole wall (HDSL case)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Splice closures attached to the wall of a manhole
3.1.5
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Duct formation
Cable
Duct formation
Splicer inside a manhole Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.6
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Overview of manhole dimensions
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
The table below contains the dimensions of the five main types of manholes. Note that the manhole height varies between 2 and 3.5 metres.
Dimensions
Number of Ducts (per formation)
Single bay single rack (SBSR)
2.8 m X 1.6 m
4, 6 or 8
Double bay double rack (DBDR)
3.7 m X 1.9 m
12, 16,20, 24, 28 or 32
Triple bay triple rack (TBTR)
4.9 m X 2.3 m
18, 24, 30, 36, 42
Type of Manhole
Double bay double rack – central rack (DBDR-CR) Triple bay triple rack – central rack (TBTR-CR)
Instructor's notes
3.7 m X 3.8 m 4.9 m X 4.7 m
32, 40, 48, 56 or 64 (+ support column of 8) 36, 48, 60, 72 or 84 (+support column of 12)
Show the manhole scale model. (Place straws and ropes on the manholes to represent ducts and cables).
Scale model of manhole
Scale model of a manhole
Look at the scale model of the manhole being distributed and answer the instructor’s questions.
Instructor's notes
Ask the following questions: • What do you think the straws represent on this scale model? (ducts) • What do you think the ropes represent on this scale model? (cables) • How many duct formations are there? (2)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.7
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
2. Duct formations Duration
10 minutes
Definition
As you learned earlier, a duct formation is a group of ducts drilled through the wall, at each end of a manhole. A duct formation can contain a variable number of ducts, which can be arranged in several ways depending on their number and the space available. As a protective measure, the duct formation is poured in concrete.
36-duct formation
12-duct formation
Instructor's notes
The ducts are placed on plastic separators when the concrete is poured and held together with steel wires to ensure they stay in place. The space between the ducts must be 25 mm (horizontally and vertically) and 50 mm between the ducts and the MH wall and floor.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.8
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Definition (cont'd)
Duct formations in a manhole can have different numbers of ducts.
Instructor's notes
In the diagram below, show that the two duct formations are different. Also show that a cable is not necessarily placed in a straight line. For example, it can run through a duct at the bottom of a duct formation and up to the top of the other duct formation.
12-duct formation
Cable 8-duct formation
Duct arrangement
On a work plan, you must show how the ducts are arranged in each formation. To this end, a small sketch is placed on the work plans. Each square represents a duct. The small line (here shown below the diagrams) indicates the base of the duct formation.
For example, the diagram on the left shows an 8-duct formation for the manhole sketch shown above. The sketch on the right shows a 12-duct formation for the same manhole. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.9
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
You must enter a duct number inside each box in the duct formation diagram. This number or letter is provided by the network designer according to the function and destination (direction) of the duct.
Duct arrangement (cont'd)
A number is given to each duct so that it can be tracked. All the ducts in a formation do not necessarily follow the same path. When pulling cable, you must indicate which duct to run the cable through both entering and leaving the manhole. Examples: 01 02 A
B
3
4
2
1
01 02 04
F
A
B
5
6
1
2
3
4
A 6
3
Note: These drawings illustrate the duct formation as seen from inside the manhole. Below, the diagram on the left illustrates the arrangement for the duct formation shown in the photo on the right. The small line (here below the diagram) indicates the base of the duct formation.
01 02 03 1
A A
02
B
03
C
1
4
B C 4
2
5
3
6
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
01
=
2 3
3.1.10
5 6
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
3. Illustrating manholes (400 plans) Duration
20 minutes
400 plans
Manhole structures are illustrated on 400 plans, i.e., plans numbered 401 to 499. Save for exceptions, these plans are prepared by the Structure group using Autocad. You will therefore rarely have to draw a 400 today. However, since you use these plans, you must know how to read and interpret them.
Manhole symbols
On a 400 plan, a manhole is illustrated by the symbols shown below: Bell manhole:
Manhole belonging to another company:
The route and manhole numbers are entered above these symbols. A route corresponds to the main cable path in a sector. Example (manhole 24 of route 2C): 2CMH24
Each manhole has a number assigned by the network designer.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Briefly explain what a route number is: network managers divide the territory served by a central office into various sectors. (See following diagram.)
3.1.11
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
In each sector, cables follow main paths called routes.
Ro
Sector 1
ute
Route 2A
Instructor's notes (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Sector 2
Ro
ute
2B
1C
R ou
te 1 B
Ro
ute
2C
R ou
Route 1A
Route 3B
Ro
B
Route 4A
3D
te 4
te
te 3E Rou
Ro u
3C
u Ro
e ut
ute
4C
Sector 4
Note on ducts
Sector 3
Note that the symbols below represent ducts. In effect, ducts are connected to manholes. In the following lesson, you will see duct characteristics in detail. Ducts belonging to Bell:
Ducts belonging to another company:
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
D
Route 3A
Route 4D
Ro
te 2
3.1.12
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Manhole characteristics to enter on a 400 plan
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
In addition to the manhole symbol and its label, various other information about the manhole is entered on a 400 plan. This information is used to perform various types of work. The 400 plan is an official, legal document for installing Bell underground structures. The following is a list of manhole information that can be found on a 400 plan. •
Manhole service code The service code of a manhole is 0207. This code is required on the 400 plan for billing purposes. (Note: The service code makes it possible to determine the labour and material costs associated with the work).
•
Manhole components (Number of covers, width of frame) On a 400 plan, you must be able to find the type of manhole cover (B27 or B30), the number of covers (varies according to the size of the manhole), and the width of the cover frame(s) (B27 or B30).
Manhole cover
Cover frame
Cover Frame
Manhole Cover
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.13
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Manhole characteristics to enter on a 400 plan (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Location You must always indicate the location of the manhole.
•
Dimensions You must enter the length, width and height of the manhole (length X width X height).
•
Whether or not the manhole is designated Manholes are referred to as designated when they present a hazard because of air contamination or dangerous situations. Special measures must be taken to access these manholes. When a manhole is designated, you will see “Designated MH” on the plan. If the manhole is not designated, no inscription appears.
•
Duct formation As explained earlier in this lesson, the duct formation must be illustrated in a diagram. Example:
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
A
2
6
3
3.1.14
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Manhole work
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Work associated with installing, expanding and abandoning manholes is sometimes required in the network. Before doing the work, a right of way or permission must be requested from the appropriate group (ie: Ministry of Transportation, Municipality, etc.)
To illustrate a manhole installation, you must put the manhole symbol in bold. As well, the Structure Group indicates information about the manhole on the plan. Example: 2CMH30 3.4mX1.6mX1.4m
Note: The 400 plan shows the installation of a manhole. In addition to its number and dimensions, it contains the manhole service code, along with information on its components (frames and covers), location, duct formations, and if required, a note indicating that it is designated.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that other information must be added to the plan during installation but that this information will be covered in the course on Duct Structures.
3.1.15
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Manhole work (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
A manhole is abandoned, as an example, when it interferes with the construction of a highway or a subway station. In such a case, it is abandoned by Bell and destroyed by the contractor. This work must be done after an agreement is reached with the authorities concerned (municipalities, Transport Ministry). A manhole is also abandoned if its walls have crumbled.
Abandoned manholes are filled with earth and crushed stone in accordance with security standards. To illustrate an abandoned manhole, you must place X’s on its symbol and enter “AB” next to it (AB stands for “abandon”).
Example:
X
X X
X
X
X
AB 4AMH12 3.7X3.8X2.5 B27 B27
Note: The first “B27” means the type of collar and the second means the type of cover.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.16
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Manhole work (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
The removal of a manhole is very rare. A manhole that would normally be abandoned may have to be removed if the Municipality or Transport Ministry needs the underground space for its own installations.
To represent a removal, you must place X’s on the symbol and enter “RM” next to it.
Example:
X
X X
X
X
X
RM 4AMH12 3.7X3.8X2.5 B27 B27
N.B: The first “B27” means the type of collar and the second means the type of cover.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that other information must be added on the plan when abandoning or removing a manhole but that it will be covered in the course on Duct Structures.
3.1.17
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Manhole work (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
The expansion of a manhole may be required when more space is needed to install equipment, additional splice/fusion closures, etc. The lateral walls of the manhole may be expanded or its depth increased. An expansion therefore involves breaking a wall or floor of the manhole concerned. A manhole expansion is indicated on the plan as shown below.
Example of a manhole expansion: 2BMH6
X
X
Expansion by breaking a wall.
In order for the work to be done correctly, more specific information must be added on the plan by the Structure Group, including, among other things, the dimensions of the expansion or part to remove and how the cables must be rearranged.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that other information must be added on the plan when expanding a manhole or breaking a wall but that it will be covered in detail in the course on Duct Structures.
3.1.18
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Exercise # 1 Duration
20 minutes
Instructor's notes
Before starting the exercise, reassure the participants by explaining that the purpose of this course is to gain a general idea of what a 400 plan is and not to understand all the details. The course on Duct Structures will provide more explanations in this regard.
Plan 400
Ask the participants to work in teams of 2 to 4. DISTRIBUTE plan 414 (22X34 size) of job 513161.
N.B.: Participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the “Answers” tab. Instructions
EX UP ER C RO IS G E
Work in teams of 2 to 4 and open the 400 plan distributed by your instructor. Note: It is normal for you not to understand all the details on the plan. This lesson is only an introduction to the 400 plan. Now answer the instructor’s questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.19
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Question 1
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
What is the number of this plan? • Hint: Look at the lower right side of the plan. ______________________________________________ Answer: 414
Instructor's notes
Mention that other information appears in the lower right side of the plan (Bell originator, person who drafted the plan, project #, implementation date, last arb number, etc.).
Question 2
•
What network category is illustrated?
______________________________________________ Answer: This plan concerns the structure in the underground network, i.e., ducts and manholes. Question 3
Where are the elements and work illustrated on this plan? Which central office serves this sector? • Hint: Look at the diagram (map) at the top right corner of the plan and the caption stamp at the bottom right corner of the plan.
Answer: The work and elements illustrated on this plan are done on Bloor street, in the municipality of Toronto, between Bedford Rd and Avenue Rd. The Asquith central office serves this sector.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.20
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Question 4
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
How many Bell's manholes are illustrated on this plan? ______________________________________________ Answer: 2 (4CMH6-5 & 4CMH8)
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to point out the location of the manholes. Mention that manholes identified as HMH, with dotted conduit lines, are manholes that do not belong to Bell. They are illustrated so that people doing the work know their locations and do not damage them.
Question 5
What kind of manhole work is illustrated at arb 11? ______________________________________________ Answer: Break out existing manhole 4CMH6-5 and place a new one.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to look in the notes on line # 12.
Question 6
What additional information is there on this plan concerning the manhole at arb 11? • Hint: Look at notes #12 and # 17 in the NOTES on the right side of the plan as well as at the manhole work identification on the plan.
Answer: The existing manhole dimensions are 2.79 X 1.21 X 1.9m. The new manhole dimensions are 4.9 X 1.9 X 3.8m. It is a type "A" manhole with "B" frame & cover (F&C) type.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.21
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Question 7
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Below, draw the duct formations on the south side of the manhole at arb 12.
20 16
Answer:
Question 8
What does this symbol represent on the plan?
HMH ______________________________________________ Answer: Hydro manhole.
Question 9
What does this symbol represent on the plan?
HYDRO
____________________________________________ Answer: Hydro conduits.
Question 10
What is the characteristic of conduits belonging to other companies? ______________________________________________ Answer: Dashed lines represent them.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.22
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Question 11
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Which one of the two following duct formations represents the one on the east side of the new 4CMH6-5 manhole?
A
or
B
Answer: "A" is the manhole east side formation.
Instructor's notes
- Proceed to the exercise correction. - Ask the participants to briefly look at the notes in the upper right part of the plan. Look at the various notes on the plan with them. - Specify that, normally, an engineer’s seal must be shown on the plan. Explain that this seal must appear in order for the duct plan to be approved. - When the exercise is completed, ask the participants to fold and keep the plan because it will be used in the next lesson exercise.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.23
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 1: Manholes (400 Plans)
Summary Duration
2 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered: • • • •
Instructor's notes
Manhole characteristics; Duct formations; Illustrating manholes on 400 plans; Manhole work.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.1.24
Lesson 2 Conduits (400 Plans)
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Lesson 2 Conduits (400 Plans) Duration
1 hour 10 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • •
Read and explain information pertaining to conduits and their accessories on 400 plans; Indicate how conduit work should be illustrated on a work plan.
Materials - M3L2 PowerPoint;
- Manholes and Conduits job aid;
Plan 400
- Outside plant poster;
- 400 plans (1 copy of plan 402 of job 733796 per 2 participants);
- Straws for demonstration purposes of rolled conduits.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.1
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Preamble Duration
3 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M3L2 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following images.
Conduits (or Ducts) are pipes, usually made of PVC, used to protect copper and fibre cables in the Network. They are generally installed in a trench that is then covered with crushed stone and grass or asphalt. They may also be installed under certain structures such as bridges and overpasses or may be pushed into the ground under paved roads.
Conduits installed in a trench
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.2
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Conduit installation by directional boring
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Conduits suspended under a bridge
In this lesson, you will learn the characteristics of conduits and how they are illustrated on a work plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.3
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
1. General Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M3L2 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following images.
Conduits and numbering (general)
You must be able to identify conduits and their path on the work plans. The Network Designer assigns numbers to each Duct.
Instructor's notes
Tell the participants that the Manholes and Conduits job aid will help them remember how conduits are numbered.
Conduit categories
There are three types of conduits: • • •
Main conduits Main lateral conduits Incidental conduits
Legend Main Conduits Main Lateral Conduits Incidental Conduits
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.4
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Main conduits and numbering
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
By definition, a main conduit is a continuous structure that connects either: •
A central office and a manhole
Or two or more manholes
Main conduits are used to support and protect underground local, trunk and toll cables. These conduits are grouped together in formations of several conduits and are encased in concrete.
Main conduit formation
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Go back to page 3.2.4 (the diagram is in PowerPoint format) to explain the main conduits on the diagram.
3.2.5
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Main conduits and numbering (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Main duct numbering Main conduits are numbered as follows: •
Number (not preceded by a zero or a letter)
Examples: 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5… Note: In the duct formation diagram, the numbers of the main conduits are crossed out. In the formation below, the main conduits are 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
1
01
B
2
5
A
3
4
02
Circle the main conduits in the formation below. B
4
6
2
5
03
01
3
A
02
04
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1
Instructor's notes
Answer: 1-2-3-4-5-6.
3.2.6
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Main lateral conduits and numbering
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Main lateral conduits are connected to a main duct formation at one end. At the other end, they may be either terminated or unterminated. Terminated main lateral conduits
A terminated main lateral duct is connected to a manhole at one end and to a termination point at the other. In fact, it is considered “terminated” if it stops one metre or less from the termination point. A termination point may be: • A pole • A wall • A building • A pedestal • A crossconnecting terminal • A remote terminal.
Instructor's notes
Go back to the diagram on page 3.2.4 (the diagram is in PowerPoint format). Ask the participants to point out the termination points of the main lateral conduits in this diagram.
Unterminated main lateral duct
An unterminated main lateral duct is connected to a manhole at one end but not to a termination point at the other. More specifically, a main lateral duct is said to be “unterminated” when the other end of the duct is located more than one metre away from a termination point.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.7
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Main lateral conduits and numbering (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Numbering main lateral conduits
The network designer numbers the main lateral conduits according to the elements they connect: • -
Between a manhole and a building: Letter or number (e.g., A – B)
• -
Between a manhole and a pole: Letter (e.g., A – B – C- D)
• -
Between a manhole and a pedestal: Letter (e.g., A – B – C- D)
•
Between a manhole and a crossconnecting terminal: OPI or JWI: 0 + number (e.g., 01 – 02 – 03- 04)
• -
Between a manhole and a remote terminal: DMS: D + number (e.g., D1 – D2 – D3- D4) AccessNode: A + number (e.g., A1 – A2 – A3 –A4) WIC: 0 + number (e.g. 01 – 02 – 03- 04) CEV (controlled environment vault): 0 + number (e.g., 01 – 02 – 03- 04) Electrical conduits EL
Instructor's notes
Explain that an electrical duct makes it possible to run an electrical wire from a remote cabinet to connect them to electrical power usually found very close to the equipment (pole).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.8
A1 B
5
4
6
2
01 02 3
Note: In the duct formation diagram, the lateral duct numbers are not crossed out. In the formation below, the lateral conduits are 01, 02, A1 and B.
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Incidental conduits (terminated or unterminated) and numbering
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Incidental conduits are not included in the definition of main and lateral conduits. However, they may be terminated at an isolated manhole. . These conduits are used to protect different types of cables (buried, aerial, building) when additional protection is necessary.
Instructor's notes
Explain what an isolated manhole is and go back to page 3.2.4 to show incidental conduits on the diagram. This protection may be necessary to:
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Avoid cable degradation caused by a load. For example, buried cables under a road could be quickly damaged by the weight of the road and vehicles. They must therefore be protected by conduits.
•
Avoid overexposure of cables to the elements. For example, under an overpass or a bridge, cables are generally laid in conduits.
•
To comply with safety rules.
3.2.9
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Incidental conduits (terminated or unterminated) and numbering (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Numbering incidental conduits (terminated and unterminated)
Incidental conduits are numbered: •
Letter
Examples: A – B – C – D – E… Some incidental conduits are dead, meaning they are not continuous and do not terminate at any structure (these conduits are capped at one end). These types of incidental conduits have a specific numbering. Dead incidental conduits are numbered: • D + number Examples: D1 – D2 – D3 – D4 … Note: In the duct formation diagram, the numbers of the incidental conduits are not crossed out. In the formation below, the incidental conduits are A, B and D1. 02 D1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.10
B
2
5
A
3
4
1
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Couplers, adaptors, bends and Y fittings
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Conduits may span long distances. In order to achieve connectivity, they must be connected to each other using couplers, adaptors, bends or Y fittings. There are several types of couplers. Some are used to seal two conduits together, while others are used to change direction. Couplers and adaptors Some couplers and adaptors are used to join two conduits of the same or different size.
Coupler between two conduits of the same size
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.11
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Couplers, adaptors, bends and Y fittings (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Horizontal and vertical bends Below is a photo of a bend. Bends can have a smaller or larger angle.
Bend with 90° angle
Instructor's notes
Show a bend to the class. Bends allow cables to: • Turn right or left (horizontal bends)
Horizontal bend •
Rise to the surface (vertical bends)
Vertical bend Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.12
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Couplers, adaptors, bends and Y fittings (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Y fitting Below is a photo of a Y fitting.
Y fitting
Instructor's notes
Show the Y fitting to the class. The Y fitting allows cables to: • Turn right or left AND continue straight ahead.
•
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Rise to the surface AND continue straight ahead.
3.2.13
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Rolled conduits
When space is tight, it is a good idea to change the arrangement of the conduits in the formation in order to gain space either vertically or horizontally. This operation involves rolling the conduits.
Instructor's notes
Use straws or pieces of wood to explain the concept of rolled conduits.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.14
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
2. Illustrating conduit (400 plans) Duration
25 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M3L2 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following images.
Conduit symbols
On 400 plans, conduits, bends and Y fittings are illustrated by the following symbols. Notice that couplers and adaptors are not indicated on a plan. Conduits belonging to Bell: Conduits belonging to other companies: Horizontal bend:
Vertical bend: Y fitting or split Y fitting: (For split Y fittings, the mention “Split Y” must be added.)
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain the difference between a Y and split Y fitting: • The Y is placed before the cable installation inside the duct. • The split Y is used when there are already cables in the duct and you do not want to cut them. Mention that the Manholes and Conduits job aid will help them remember the conduit symbols.
3.2.15
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Conduit characteristics to enter on a 400 plan
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
In addition to conduit symbols, certain details must be added on a 400 plan. This additional information is essential to performing the work.
Conduit description
The length, number and type of conduit are indicated near the conduit symbols. Example:
19m 2D/PVCD-1
•
Length
In the example above, the conduit length is 19 metres. •
Number of conduits
The number of conduits must be indicated next to the length. In the example above, there are two conduits.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain that the conduit symbol can represent several conduits.
3.2.16
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Conduit characteristics to enter on a 400 plan (cont'd)
•
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Conduit types
Lastly, the type of conduit must be indicated after the length and number of conduits. In the example on the previous page, the conduit type was PVCD-1. In fact, there are currently 4 types of conduit installed. •
PVCD1 - Always concrete encased - Used where a substantial load may be exerted on the conduits (e.g., conduits under a road, between manholes) • PVCD2 - Thicker and more rigid than PVCD1 - Not concrete encased - Used for incidental conduits when no major load is exerted (Can be used under road crossing or placed with cable in trench for future path) • FRE - Fibre reinforced - Used when additional resistance is required (e.g., submarine conduits, conduits suspended under a bridge or an overpass) - May be suspended under bridges and overpasses • Galvanized steel - Used when conduits must be installed by pressure boring (e.g.: Railway crossings).
There are also several types of conduits that are no longer installed but that are still in the network. The main ones are: •
MTD (multiple) or STD (single) - Clay conduits used in the past as main conduits • Transit - Asbestos conduits used for small main duct formations • PCD - Concrete conduits installed with a view to running underground cables through them (proved inefficient)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.17
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Conduit characteristics to enter on a 400 plan (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
•
BFD - B-fibre conduits used to build main duct structures - Replaced by PVCD1 • CFD - C-fibre conduits used to build subsidiary conduit structures - Replaced by PVCD2 • CWD - Wood conduits used in the past for main and incidental duct formations. Conduit service code
The service code for a conduit is 0206. This code must appear on the plan to ensure correct billing. Illustrating duct formations
The duct formation of the group of conduits must also appear on the plan. Example:
D
C
13 14 19m 4D/PVCD-1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.18
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Characteristics of bends and Y fittings to enter on a 400 plan
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Bends and Y fittings labelling
Near the symbols for bends and Y fittings, you may see: • The final length of the bends or Y fittings; • The number of bends; • The type of bends or Y fittings. Example:
3m 2D/16090
•
Final length
The final length of the bends or Y fittings is entered at the beginning of the description. Above, the final length of each bend is 3 metres. •
Number of bends or Y fittings
The second figure in the description indicates the number of bends or Y fittings. In the example above, there are two bends. •
Type of bend or Y fitting
The type of bend or Y fitting is entered after the number of bends. There are several types of both kinds. In the above example, the two bends are type 16090. Note: The number of bends and type are separated by a “/” on the map.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.19
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Use the following NetWorkX work plan to show to the participants the way that conduits and bends are represented on maps. Have participants notice the different drawn conduit types.
Have participants notice the difference, in the bends description, between the Imap migrated elements and the new bends placed with NetWorkX. IMAP MIGRATED ELEMENTS
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
DRAWN WITH NETWORKX
3.2.19(a)
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Pedestals and padbases
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Conduits are sometimes terminated at pedestals, remote terminal padbases, interface boxes, shelters, cabinets and other specialized equipment. The pedestals and padbases must be illustrated on a 400 plan. •
Pedestals
Pedestals may contain equipment such as terminals and cables splices. Some main lateral and incidental conduits are terminated at pedestals. The pedestals (and not the equipment they contain) must be illustrated on a 400 plan.
Instructor's notes
Remind the participants about the role of the terminals by referring to the outside plant poster. Also review what a splice is. The symbol for a Bell pedestal is as follows.
The following symbol is used when a pedestal is jointly used or when it is leased.
Note: The 400 plan summary explains that these symbols mean pedestals.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Remind the participants what a 400 plan summary is. (The summary is located to the right of the plan). 3.2.21
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Pedestals and padbases (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Below is an illustration of an incidental conduit that terminates at a pedestal. A B
30m 2D/PVCD-1
3m BEND 2D/PVCD2/90
•
Remote terminal padbase
Remote terminals are sometimes placed on concrete padbases. The concrete base must be illustrated on a 400 plan with the same symbol as the pedestal.
Note: The plan summary explains that this symbol means a remote terminal padbase.
Example of a remote terminal on a concrete base
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Remind the participants about the remote terminals by looking at the outside plant poster.
3.2.22
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
3.2.23
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Pedestals and padbases (cont'd)
•
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Interface box padbase
Interface boxes are sometimes placed on concrete padbases. The concrete base must be illustrated on a 400 plan with the same symbol as for a pedestal and the remote terminal padbase.
Note: The plan summary explains that this symbol means the base of an interface box.
Instructor's notes
Remind the participants about the role of interface boxes by referring to the outside plant poster.
Example of an OPI box on a concrete base
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.24
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Conduit work
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Conduit installation, removal, abandon, repair and roping may be illustrated on a 400 plan. Before performing conduit work, a right-of-way or permission must be requested from the MTO (Ministry of Transport), or the municipality. Reminder: When work is illustrated on a work plan, arbitraries point to all the network elements involved.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.25
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Conduits installation
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Conduit installation is illustrated by the conduit, bend, and Y fitting symbol in bold. Example:
2m 2D/13690
1 2
11
12
14m 2D/PVCD-1 3
You can also find information on the conduits to be installed in the 400 plan summary and notes.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to describe the work illustrated on the previous diagram: • Number and type of bend: 2 / 13690 (arbs 1 and 2) • Number and type of conduits: 2 / PVCD-1 • Conduit formation • Lengths of conduits and bends.
Refer participants to the workplan on page 20 to see the way that conduit installation is represented today.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.26
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Conduit removal and abandon
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Conduit removal and abandon are both represented by X's on the conduit, bend and Y fitting symbols. The 400 plan summary (table located on the right of the plan) indicates whether the conduits must be removed (RM) or abandoned (AB). Information about the conduit (type, year of installation, length, etc.) also appears in the summary as well as under the conduit formations. Example of a conduit abandon:
1
X
2
X 2 5
AB 152m 2D/PVCD-1
Instructor's notes
X
Ask the participants: • How many metres of conduits are being abandoned? (152m) • What type of conduits are involved? (PVCD-1) • How many conduits are there in the formation? (2) Indicate that different abbreviations may appear on 400 plans prepared by outsourcers (i.e.: ABN, REM) but that when the final transcription is made in NetworkX, AB or RM are the abbreviations entered on the map. Refer participants to the workplan on page 20 to see the way that conduit abandon is represented today.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.27
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Conduit relocation
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Conduits are relocated when a conduit has to be moved without being extended. The following is an example of conduit relocation.
2 Relocate 2m to the south
1 Building 81 17 m 1D/PVCD-1
Breakconduit
Conduits are broken when a bend or Y fitting must be inserted. This work is indicated in a note near the bend or Y fitting to be installed. Sample note: AT 12.0m OF 2AMH3 BREAK 1.0m OF 1PVCD/76 AND 1PVCD-1/85 + PLACE 2 ”Y” ON CONDUIT. 1 AND 11
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain the above note.
3.2.28
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Conduit roping
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Conduit roping involves running a rope through a conduit. This rope makes it possible to then pull cables into the conduit. This work is indicated on a 400 plan when it is performed at the same time as the conduit installation. A note is placed on the plan to indicate conduit roping. Sample note: Rope conduit A5 (120m) between 2AMH1 and 2AMH2.
Pull Cord
Note: When existing conduits are involved, the roping is indicated on a 500 cable plan. (To be covered in detail in Lesson 3 of this module.)
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask the participants to identify conduit A5 (Bingo method) in the above photo. (Answer: Conduit with rope).
3.2.29
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Exercise # 1 Duration
25 minutes
Instructor's notes
This exercise is done as a group.
EX P ER U O C R IS G E
Ask the participants to get into the same teams as for the exercise in the last lesson. Ask them to take out their 400 plan. Suggest that they take out their Manholes and Conduits job aid.
Plan 400
Instructions
Note: The participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the “Answers” tab.
Form the same teams as for the exercise in the last lesson. Open your 400 plan and answer your instructor’s questions. You may use the Manholes and Conduits job aid. Reminder: You are not expected to understand all the details on the 400 plan. This lesson is only an introduction. The course on manholes and structures will provide additional details.
Question 1 :
Do all the conduits on this plan belong to Bell? ______________________________________________ Answer: No, some conduits (see dashed lines) belong to other companies (Hydro & Rogers).
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask them to show where some of the conduits belonging to the other companies are located.
3.2.30
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Question 2
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
What are the characteristics of the new conduits (number, type, metres in the formation) being placed between arbs 11 to 15: Explain your answer by writing each conduit section characteristics located between arbs 11 to 15. •
New conduits between arbs 11 and 15?
Answer: 31m – 40D PVCD1 (15 SPLIT) •
New conduits between arbs 11 and 19?
Answer: 4m – 8PVCD1 4m – 24PVCD1 4m – 8PVCD1 •
New conduits between arbs 19 and 20?
Answer: 21m – 40PVCD1 •
New conduits between arbs 20 and 15?
Answer: 6m – 40PVCD1
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask the participants where they found this information. Point out that the total between arbs 11 & 15 can be found in NOTE # 19 but the other information was on the plan.
3.2.31
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Question 3
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
What work will be done on the existing conduits located between arbs 11 and 15?
Answer: They will be broken out as indicated by the “X” on the conduit line and the note. Question 4
What are the characteristics (number, type, metres in the formation) of the new conduits located: •
Between arbs 2 and 3?
Answer: 4m – 26PVCD1 •
Between arbs 6 and 7?
Answer: 44m – 26PVCD1 •
Between arbs 9 and 18?
Answer: 7m – 26PVCD1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.32
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Question 4 (cont'd)
•
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Between arbs 11 and 16?
Answer: 7m – 4PVCD1
Question 5
What work is being done on the conduits located between arbs 1 and 18? How do you know?
Answer: Installation. The conduit symbol is in bold.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.33
Module 3: Underground Network (400 and 500 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Conduits (400 Plans)
Summary Duration
2 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered: • • •
Instructor's notes
Conduit characteristics; Illustrating conduits and their accessories on 400 plans; Conduit work.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.2.34
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 Series Plans)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Lesson 3 Underground cables (500 Series plans) Duration
3 hours
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • • •
Explain how to illustrate an underground cable on a 500 plan; Using 500and 700 plans, identify work to be performed on underground cables; Using a checklist, identify and correct discrepancies on 500 plans.
Materials
- Outside plant poster;
- M3L3 PowerPoint (includes images, photos, diagrams and graphics of this lesson);
-
Direction of Feed and Lengths job aid; Analysis Method job aid; Basic Work Plan Elements job aid; Checklist.
• Pad board.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.1
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Preamble Duration
5 minutes Until now, you’ve seen how manholes and conduits are illustrated on 400 work plans. You have probably noticed that no cable appears on these plans. In fact, underground cables are illustrated on 500 plans, which you will learn about in this lesson.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.2
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
1. Underground cable characteristics Duration
50 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M3L3 PowerPoint to explain the images in this lesson.
M3L3 Introduction
Underground cables run through conduits located between: •
A central office and a manhole;
•
2 or more manholes;
•
A manhole and a pole, a pedestal, a building or equipment such as a crossconnecting terminal.
Underground cable
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask the participants to show the location of the underground cables on the outside plant poster.
3.3.3
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Underground cables
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Two types of copper cables are generally used in the underground network: cables with plastic foam insulation and PIC cables with a sealed PAP sheath. Examples of underground copper cables:
14,1-200 BKTF200-26/UG
14,1-200 BKTF200-26/UG
12,1-1800 DCTZ1800-26/UG
12,1-1800 DCTZ1800-26/UG
You may also find different types of fibre optic cables in underground installations: Examples of underground fibre cables:
F12,1-36 FC12,1 34MCLT 036+1-22/UG
F12,1-36 FC12,1 34MCLT 036+1-22/UG
F13,1-60 34N2LT-060 /UG
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
F13,1-60 34N2LT-060 /UG
3.3.4
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Illustrating underground cables
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
As you know, the network map is the starting point when preparing a work plan. On this map, you will not directly see underground cables but only the conduits and manholes through which the underground cables run. To access information pertaining to underground cables, you must: •
For a section between 2 manholes: Access the detail window associated with the manhole number for each manhole in the section. This window shows all the underground cables and equipment located inside a selected manhole.
•
For a section between a manhole and a termination point (pole, building, pedestal, crossconnecting terminal): Access the detail window if it exists, for example, when the cable terminates in a building; If there is no detail window, the cable is illustrated at the termination point, outside the conduit.
-
The following map printouts are presented to illustrate these situations. 1) Map window, conduits between two manholes. 2) Detail window displaying a manhole inside view. 3) Map window showing an underground cable at the termination point, outside the conduit.
Instructor's notes
Using the examples, briefly explain the illustration of underground cables on the network map. See following page for details.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.5
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
First example (Map window, conduits between two manholes). Explain that the first example shows a map window illustrating conduits between two manholes. Draw their attention to the inscription: W-W = 38m IEMH43 IEMH44 This inscription indicates that the wall-to-wall distance between MH43 and MH44 is 38 metres. This information is required for work on underground cables. Also, have participants notice that cables in conduits don't display on the map.
Second example (detail window, illustrating a manhole inside view). Explain that, in NetWorkX, to see cables inside a manhole, we must open this specific manhole detail window. Within this detail window, we can see all elements installed in this manhole.
Third example (Map window, illustrating an underground cable at the termination point, outside the conduit.). Have participants notice the site where the cable comes out the conduit. Remind that cables in conduit are not drawn on maps. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.5(a)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Example 1 : Map window, conduits between two manholes
H44 1EM
38 H44 W= M – E 1 W H43 M E 1
H43 1EM
Note : No cable is illustrated .
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.6
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Example 2 : Detail window displaying a manhole inside view.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.7
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Example 3 : Map window showing an underground cable at the termination point, outside the conduit.
D
9D
UG
O
UG
D
D
ADI TR
D
O AS C
RA D
IO
S IT
ET
D2
UG
1E
W
–W =2 4 MH 5 T D2
6D D11
H45 1EM
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.8
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Bingo method
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
The duct numbers inside the manholes are not indicated. The Expertech technician who must do the work does not know where duct 5 or duct C is located. The “Bingo” method is used in order for the Expertech technician to know which duct is involved. Just like when you play Bingo, the columns are identified by letters placed in alphabetical order from left to right. The lines are identified by numbers in numerical order from bottom to top. For example, in the 12-duct formation below: • Duct number 5 is identified by C2; • Duct F is identified by D3; • Duct 3 is identified by C1.
Question
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3
01 02 04
F
2
A
B
5
6
1
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
Use the Bingo method to identify the following ducts in the above run. Duct 02:
____
Duct 3:
____
Duct A:
____
Answers: Duct 02 is identified by B3. Duct 3 is identified by C1. Duct A is identified by A2.
3.3.9
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
D
2
B
3
A
1
C
4
01 02
1
• • •
Duct 3: Duct 1: Duct A:
A1 C1 D2
A
In this formation, you can identify:
01
8
2
1 B
B
• • •
Duct 8: Duct 01: Duct A:
A1 B2 B1
And in this formation, you can identify:
6
1
F
2
04 02
3
3 A
C
D 1
4
2
5
B
01
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
A
Instructor's notes
In this formation, you can identify:
2
B
A
Sometimes the base of the duct formation is oriented differently. In such situations, the Bingo method applies, but you must take into account the base line.
A
Bingo method (continued)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
• • •
Duct 1: Duct 01: Duct F:
D1 C3 A2
Tell the participants that these examples are included in the Manholes and Conduits job aid. Ask them to use this job aid and to work individually to answer the following questions. Ask one question at a time and correct the answer before asking the next question.
3.3.10
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
1 4 3
A 5 2
B 02
Question 1
Answer the following questions. You may use the Manholes and Conduits job aid.
01
Questions
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Use the Bingo method to identify ducts 1 and 02 in the above formation. You may use the Manholes and Conduits job aid to help you. Duct 1: ____ Duct 02:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
____
Answer: Duct 1 is identified by C1. Duct 02 is identified by B3.
3.3.11
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Question 2
01
A
02
B
03
C
1
4
2
5
3
6
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Use the Bingo method to identify ducts 4 and 01 in the above formation.
Instructor's notes
____
Duct 01:
____
Answer: Duct 4 is identified by B3. Duct 01 is identified by A6.
1
6
2
4
01 02
3
5
A
7
04
03
Question 3
Duct 4:
Use the Bingo method to identify ducts 04 and 3 in the above formation.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Duct 04:
____
Duct 3:
____
Answer: Duct 04 is identified by D2. Duct 3 is identified by C1.
3.3.12
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Illustrating underground cables inside a manhole
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
As the following diagram shows, a variety of information specifies the location of underground cables. This information must be indicated on 500 plans and is listed on the following pages. The diagram below is a simple illustration of a detail window.
Instructor's notes
The analysis will be limited to 2 cables (1 copper and 1 fibre). Indicate that the final and component lengths must also appear on this diagram. Mention that the second teaching point will discuss this aspect.
1
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/UG
A2 4AMH1
2 A1
02-03-B
B
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/UG
C4 PED F10GUY
F14,1-36 FC14,1 34MCLT 036+1-22/UG
4
02-03-B
B3 4AMH3
4AMH1
4AMH2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.13
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Refer to the previous diagram to explain each element on the list. The following are the notes to the instructor for each point: 1. Cable identification Ask the participants to identify the elements of the cable identification. Answer: The cable line, alphanumeric sequence, network category, cable number and pair numbering. Point out that there may be splices or fusions (junctions between cables) inside the manholes. A black circle illustrates these. 2. Direction of feed Use the Direction of Feed and Lengths job aid to review the locations where a direction of feed arrows appear. Explain that on the previous diagram, the direction of feed arrow also appears at the exit of the manhole, at the farthest point away from the central office.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.13(a)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Instructor's notes (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
3. Source and destination locations
Ro
Sector 1
ute
Route 2A
Briefly review what a route number is: network managers divide the territory served by a central office into several sectors. In each sector, cables follow main paths, called routes. Sector 2
Ro
ute
2B
1C
R ou
te 1 B
Ro
ute
2C
Ro u
Route 1A
D
Route 3A Route 3B
Route 4D
Ro
3C
4B
Route 4A
3D
te 3E
Ro
e ut
Ro u
ute
e ut
ute
4C Ro
Ro
te 2
Sector 4
Sector 3
Ask the participants to find the source and destination locations of the two cables illustrated on the diagram on page 13. 4. Duct identification Ask the participants to locate the duct identification on the previous diagram. The upper copper cable (see diagram) enters the manhole through duct 1 of the first duct formation and exits from duct B of the second duct formation. The fibre cable (lower cable) enters through duct 2 and exits through duct 4.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.13(b)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Instructor's notes (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
5. Bingo method Ask, “What does the line under the duct formation mean?” Answer: The base of the duct formation. Ask: “How can duct 1 of the formation on the left be identified?” Answer: A2 Ask: “How can duct 6 of the formation on the right be identified?” Answer: C3. Ask the participants to locate the duct occupancy of the diagram on page 13. 6. 700 plan Manhole diagram Explain the manhole diagram. Mention that it is prepared by the coordinator (or outsourced) with the manhole characteristics determined during its installation. Show how this diagram helps the technician know through which duct each cable runs. Specify that the outside box represents the manhole walls. Duct formation with arrow Ask the participants what the forward slashes on the duct formations mean. (Answer: main ducts/through ducts.) 7. Fibre identification number Explain that this number is used so that the splicers can easily identify the fibre cables in the network. Ask the participants to locate them on the diagram.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.13(c)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Illustrating underground cables inside a manhole (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
1. Cable identification When there is a splice/fusion in the manhole, you must enter the cable identification on each side of the splice; otherwise you only have to enter it once. 2. Direction of feed Appears in the locations indicated in your Direction of Feed and Lengths job aid. It also appears at the exit of the manhole, at the farthest point away from the central office. 3. Source and destination locations The source and destination locations are indicated in rectangles below each cable, at the entrance and exit of the manhole. The source location indicates where the cable comes from (the location closest to the central office). The destination location indicates where the cable is heading (location furthest from the central office). A location may be: -
A manhole number (preceded by the route number) 4AMH9
-
A remote terminal number AN04
-
A pedestal number PED F11 PRINCIPAL ST
-
A building address DM 640 UNIVERSITY ST
-
An address or number of a crossconnecting terminal 207-1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
F13 LIBERTY ST
3.3.14
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Illustrating underground cables inside a manhole (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
4. Duct identification 4A) Method 1 (Mandatory) The duct identification (circle containing the duct number) is placed above each cable at its entrance and exit from the manhole. It indicates the number of the duct through which the cable runs. A
Example :
However, these numbers are not written in the manholes. You must therefore indicate to the Expertech technicians the location of the duct in question in the duct formation. 4B) Method 2 (BINGO) On a 500 plan, the duct occupancy is shown with the Bingo method. The duct numbers according to the Bingo method are entered outside the manhole at each end of the cable.
2
1
3
5
B
2
A
B
1
C
06
3
A
4
6
4
4
7
5
3
6
3
8
2
A
2
1
C
B
1 B
Duct 1 = A2 (bingo) Duct 2 = A1 (bingo)
A
4
Refer to the Manholes and Conduits job aid to recall how the Bingo method works.
Duct B = C4 (bingo) Duct 4 = B3 (bingo)
4C) Method 3 (Formation graphic) If a manhole diagram is not available, the duct formation is then drawn on a 700 plan. Arrows pointing to the ducts through which the cables run are added.
1
8
7
A
A
4
3
5
2
5
4
C
B
6
1
2
Examples:
3
6
06
B
34MCLT 036+1-22 = B3 BKTF 200-26 = C4
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.15
34MCLT 036+1-22 = A1 BKTF 200-26 = A2
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Illustrating underground cables inside a manhole (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
5. 700 plan Ideally, a 500 plan is accompanied by a 700 plan that consists of a manhole diagram. This diagram illustrates the inside of a manhole and contains information on: • • • • •
The cable path in the manhole; The position of the splice and fusion closures; The duct formations and their occupancy; The size of the manhole; The physical location of the manhole. A label is affixed on the lower right side of the plan. The name of the central office, the route number and record number (manhole number) are also entered. ROUTE 1B M.H. #1 Sherbrooke Municipaly
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.16
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
KING
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
MH
QUEEN BOUL
P P
MH
SC
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.17
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Illustrating underground cables inside a manhole (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
6. Fibre identification number To identify a fibre cable, you must enter an identification number above the cable, at its entrance and exit from the manhole. This number is indicated in the following form: yy-mm-x yy = year the work plan was prepared mm = month the work plan was prepared x = a distinct letter for each sheath coming out of a splice placed in the same month. The letter changes (in alphabetical order) when more than one cable is installed in the same month of the same year. Note : When attributing the third character on cables between manholes (from splice to splice), the given letter will remain the same at both splices because of the existing connectivity in NetX. For other cables at the splice, the third character designation is still arbitrary. The physical fibre sheath designation operation at splice location, is done by the technicians.
Example : 87-08-A to 87-08-D identify 2 cables placed in the same month.
The letters (3 third character) assigned to the sheaths exiting MH3 could be any letter besides B and D. M.H. 2
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
M.H. 3
Ask the participants to locate the fibre identification number on the diagram on page 13. 3.3.18
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
2. Lengths of underground cables and change in network category Duration
35 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M3L3 PowerPoint presentation to explain the images of this teaching point.
M3L3 Final and component lengths of underground cables Example 1
1
155F
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/UG
In the following examples, you will see the illustration of final and component lengths for underground cables in manholes. If an underground cable is spliced in a manhole, two final lengths are required. In this example: • 106F and 4F
106F = Final length between the outside wall of MH2 and splice
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/UG
3F 3
4F = Final length between the splice and the wall (away from the SC)
106F
102
4
1AMH2
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/UG
4
1AMH3
102 4 = = Wall-to-wall component Component length length between between the wall closest MH2 and MH3 to the SC) and the splice
90F
4F4F 87
1
3
1AMH4
4 = Component length between the splice and the wall (away from the SC)
The final length of 106F equals the sum of the following component lengths: • •
102: 4:
the wall-to-wall length between MH2 and MH3. the physical length of the cable in MH3 before the splice.
The final 4F length equals the following component length: •
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4:
the physical cable length in MH3 between the splice and the exit wall (farthest away from the central office).
3.3.19
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Remind the participants that the component lengths are entered under the cable line. Also remind the participants that the wall-to-wall length is entered permanently on the network map and corresponds to the component length entered at the entrance of the manhole.
Final and component lengths of underground cables (cont'd)
Example 2
1
172F = 162 (Wall-to-wall component length) + 10 (Component length of cable in MH11)
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/UG
48,101-300 155F BKTF200-26/UG
5F 5
This example shows the case of an underground cable that is not spliced in a manhole.
162
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/UG
1BMH10
162 = Wall-to-wall component length between MH10 and MH11
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
172F 10
1BMH11
125
1
130F 5
1BMH12
10 = Component length of cable in MH11
Ask the participants to explain the 130F final length entered in MH12. Answer: The sum of 125 (wall-to-wall component length) and 5 (length between the entrance wall of MH12 and the splice).
3.3.20
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Final and component lengths of underground cables (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Loop measurement The component measurements are sometimes accompanied by prefixes that specify the use of this cable length. This use of prefixes is possible for underground, aerial, building, buried and submarine cables. Consequently, the use of prefixes will be discussed in each cable lesson. “Loop” prefix When the “LOOP” prefix is entered before a component measurement, it means to leave slack, i.e., to leave a cable loop. Sometimes, when installing a fibre optic cable, a length of cable loop must be installed in the manhole. This length of cable is used to: • •
Move the fibre cable to the truck (or trailer), to do fusion splicing work; Subsequently fuse a new cable or new piece of equipment.
In addition to the prefix, you will see the following symbol associated with optical fibres on the plans:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Mention that an arb points to where slack should be left.
3.3.21
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
115F = Final length between outside MH2 wall and the splice
13F = Final length between splice and wall (away from central office)
170F 1
115F 102
3
1
5
13F A
LOOP 8
LOOP 8
1AMH2
1
A
1AMH3 102 = Wall-to-wall component length between MH2 and MH3
34N2LT-048/UG F12, 1-48
90F 87
5
34N2LT-024/UG F12, 1-24
5 = Component length between wall (closest to SC) and the loop
8 = Component loop length near the splice .
8 = Component loop length near the splice
5 = Component length from the loop to the wall (away from SC).
A
3
1AMH4
We need to add arbs at each of the slack locations.
1
192F = 162 (Wall-to-wall component length) +5 (Component length from MH in wall to the loop) + 20 (Component loop length in MH11) +5 (Component length from the loop to the MH out wall).
F12, 1-48 34N2LT-048/UG
155F F12, 1-48 34N2LT-048/UG
175F 5
162
F12, 1-48 34N2LT-048/UG
5
LOOP 20
1BMH10
162 = Wall-to-wall component length between MH10 and MH11
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5
1BMH11
5 + 20 + 5 = Component lengths in manhole
3.3.22
130F
192F 125
1
5
1BMH12
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Final and component lengths of underground cables (cont'd)
When installing copper cable, sometimes a cable loop length is left in the underground network. The component length is preceded by the prefix “LOOP” entered under the cable. The location is identified using an arb.
Section length
Section length is another type of length that exists in the NetworkX system. It corresponds to the cable length placed between two splices. This cable is not displayed graphically. It is a cable attribute that you must know. In example 2, the length of the section is 307 metres, i.e., the total of final lengths 5F, 172F and 130F.
1
307 = 5F (section length in 1BMH10) + 172F (section length in 1BMH11) + 130F (section length in 1BMH12)
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/UG
48,101-300 155F BKTF200-26/UG
5F 5
162
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/UG
130F
172F 10
125
1
5
1
2 1BMH10
Network category change points
1BMH11
1BMH12
Underground cable is not found only inside manholes. It may be laid in a main lateral duct heading towards a pole, building, pedestal, or equipment, in which case it is called lateral cable. Underground cables change network category, i.e., they become aerial, buried or building cables at specific locations. The following are the characteristics of each situation.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.23
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
•
At a pole
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
An underground cable becomes aerial at ground level when it goes up a pole. Example 1
Aerial cable
Aerial cable Network category change point:
Ground level Underground cable
The final length of the underground cable outside the manhole equals the duct length between the manhole and ground level.
D
D
D
D
The 310F final length corresponds to the conduit length between the manhole and ground level. The 8F length corresponds to the vertical length (up 8m) on the pole.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.24
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
•
At a building
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
An underground cable becomes aerial at ground level when it goes up a building wall and the length on the wall exceeds 3 metres.
Termination point: Building entrance
Network category change point: Ground level
Aerial cable (if > 3m) Building cable
Building
Underground cable
N.B. If the cable between ground level and its entrance into the building measures 3 metres or less, it remains an underground cable until it enters the building. The final length of the lateral underground cable outside the manhole equals: • the conduit length; • the cable length required to reach the building entrance (if 3 metres or less).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.25
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
•
At a building (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
An underground cable becomes a building cable once it crosses the building wall. Building
Network category change point: Building entrance
Building cable
Underground cable
The final length of the underground cable outside the manhole equals the length of the conduit up to the building wall.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.26
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
•
In a pedestal
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
An underground cable may become buried at a pedestal. If the cable length between the duct exit and splice: • < 3 metres: The network category changes at the splice •
> 3 metres:
The network category changes at the duct exit. Network category change point if < 3m: splice Pedestal
Loop part between duct exit and splice Network category change point if > 3m: Duct exit
Underground cable in duct
Buried cable toward customers
If the part of the loop between the duct exit and the splice is:
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
< 3 metres:
Its length is included in the final length of the underground cable
•
> 3 metres:
Its length is not included in the final length of the underground cable; the network category changes at the duct exit (the length of the loop between the duct exit and the splice will be under the “buried” category)
3.3.27
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
•
Exception (no network category change)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
The cable remains underground if it goes up a building wall, pole or pedestal and terminates in a terminal or equipment case. Terminal or equipment case
Building wall or Pole or pedestal
•
Change of network category under/on a bridge or overpass
Underground cable Underground cable
The cable remains underground under a bridge or overpass if it is underground (at both ends) of this bridge or overpass. Bridge
Underground cable Underground cable
Underground cable
The cable changes from underground to aerial at ground level when it is underground at one end of the bridge or overpass and aerial at the other. Bridge
Aerial cable
Network category change point: Ground level Underground Cable
Aerial cable
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.28
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Ask participants to find, on this sketch, all discrepancies pertaining to: Allow 15 minutes to do this exercise. Exercise # 1 Identify all discrepancies pertaining to:
• • •
• Direction of feed arrow; • Component and final lengths; • Network categories.
Direction of feed arrow; Component and final lengths; Network categories.
PL
PL
D
H UT O S
PL
PL
2 FL OO R
IT E BLD OMER S T CUS BLD
PL
D RM
PL
S S
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.29
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
• Verify the answers using the following sketch.
Instructor's notes
The participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the “Answers” tab. Final length missing
PL
PL
D
H UT SO
PL
2
PL FL O OR
E SIT BLD OMER T S CU BLD
Final length & network category missing Direction feed arrow missing
PL
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.29(a)
R
BLD
DM
Component lengths missing
PL S
Network categories missing
S
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
3. Underground cable work Duration
20 minutes
Introduction
As seen at the beginning of the course, various types of work can be performed on cables: • • • • • •
Roping existing ducts Installation Removal and abandon Replacement Rearrangement Repair
This work is illustrated on 500 plans. Details on the location of the manhole must be specified: • on the work location diagram of the 500 plan; • on the work location diagram of the 700 plan. The illustrations that follow are in diagram format. Certain basic elements such as the caption stamp have been omitted.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.30
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Before pulling cable in a duct, you must first rope the duct, i.e., place a rope in the duct so that it extends beyond each end. For example, a rope is placed in a duct located between two manholes. This rope will be used to pull the cable between the manholes during installation.
Roping existing ducts
This work may be illustrated by using: 1. A note on the plan that indicates: • The number of the duct through which the rope must be roped using the Bingo method; • The numbers of the manholes or other equipment between which the rope is placed; • The length of the rope; • The location of the duct through which the rope must be roped according to the Bingo method.
Example: Note to Expertech: Rope duct 6 over 155 metres between 4AMH5 (position B2) and 4AMH6 (position A3). 2. The graphic illustration of the duct formation, with the following details: • Arrows pointing to the ducts to rope; • The number of manholes involved; • The length of the rope. 4AMH6
4AMH5
1
8
7
A
1
8
7
A
2
5
4
C
2
5
4
C
3
6
06
B
3
6
06
B
Rope
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Rope
N.B.: Rope 155m of duct
Explain that duct roping is indicated on a 400 plan if it must be done at the same time as the duct installation. It is indicated on a 500 plan for existing ducts.
3.3.31
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
You have seen the details associated with installing a cable: • A solid bold line; • Cable identification; • Final and component lengths; • Location details specific to underground cables.
Installation
The following is additional required information.
3 B2
2
701 16, 1-100 BKMF100-24/UG
115
119F 4
16,1-100 BKMF100-24 /UG
1 3F 3
A2
4AMH6
4AMH4 1
3
2 A3
02-08-C
115
F12,1-48 34N2LT-048/UG
123F 4
Loop 4
4
3 02-08-D 7F 3
F12,1-48 34N2LT-048/UG Loop 4
4AMH6
4AMH4 Note to Expertech: Ducts 3 and 2 are roped between 4AMH4 and 4AMH5 (115m).
Pull direction CODES
Cable reels Section 4AMH4 to 4AMH5
BELL CANADA EXCHANGE
Length 140
Number 1
SC
ST-JOHN ROUTE REF
4A
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.32
PLAT
MH5
B3
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Installation (cont'd)
•
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Fibre cable reel When installing a new fibre optic cable, you may be required to indicate the reel number to which the cable belongs. This information is stated in a tabular summary for Expertech.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Refer to the previous diagram to show how the fibre cable reel number is presented on a plan. •
Pull direction Generally, the cables are pulled in the ducts from the central office towards the customers. However, an obstacle or a particular situation can make it necessary to pull the cable in the other direction. In such a case, it must be indicated with an arrow as the diagram below shows for the lower cable.
•
Roping information In order to be able to pull the cable in a duct, the duct must first be roped. A note indicates whether the ducts have been roped.
•
700 plan You must also associate an updated 700 plan (manhole diagram) that reflects the work illustrated on the 500 plan.
3.3.33
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Removal and abandon
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
You have seen the details associated with removing and abandoning a cable: • A solid bold line with “X’s”; • A final measurement; • The cable identification; • The abbreviations “AB” and “RM”; • Location details pertaining to underground cables.
701 3 B2
115
16, 1-100 RM/BKMF100-24/UG
1
2
801 119F
16,1-100 RM/ BKMF100-24/UG
3F 3
4
4AMH4
4AMH6
3
1
2 88-02-C A3
115
A2
F12,1-48 34N2LT-048/UG
123F 8
88-02-D (F12,1-48)48D AB/34N2LT-048/UG
7F
B3
7
4AMH4
4AMH6 CODES
Note to Expertech:
BELL CANADA EXCHANGE
Wall to wall there is 115 m between MH4 and MH5
SC
ST-JOHN ROUTE REF
4A
PLAT
MH5
Once the removal work is finished, the cable will disappear from the map. Sometimes an underground cable is abandoned in a duct if, for example, it is stuck. This is done by cutting the cable at both ends of the duct without removing it. This work is illustrated in the same way as a removal, except with the letters “AB” instead of “RM”. Once the abandon work is completed, the cable remains on the plan with “X’s” on it.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Mention that a 700 plan must be issued to update the manhole diagram. Mention that the details concerning the dead pair count will be covered in Module 4 (Splicing). 3.3.34
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Replacement involves removal work followed by installation work. Both are illustrated on the same plan.
Replacement
Below is an example of work to replace 119 metres of cable.
B2
115 4AMH4 3 115
4
16, 1-100 RM/BKMF100-24/UG
701
1
9F 11
B2
16, 1-100 BKMF100-24/UG
3
119F
801 1
16,1-100 BKMF100-24/UG
4AMH4 A3
F12,1-48 34N2LT-048/UG
2
02-08-C 115 4AMH4
123F 8
3F A2 3 4AMH6
3 7F 02-08-D
F12,1-48 34N2LT-048/UG
7 4AMH6
Note to Expertech: The rope is already in duct B2 of 4AMH4 to 4AMH5 (155m).
CODES
BELL CANADA EXCHANGE
SC
ST-JOHN ROUTE REF
4A
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
PLAT
MH5
The note on roping may be abbreviated. However, you have to make sure there is absolutely no ambiguity when the work is executed.
3.3.35
B3
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Rearrangement
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Rearrangement involves changing the location of cables or equipment in a manhole. This work is indicated in a note and an arb on a 500 plan. The 700 plan (manhole diagram) is modified or redone to show the new layout. In the diagram below, the work involves moving a copper cable splice closure up 1 metre. Note to Expertech: Move splice 1 metre up at arb 1.
Instructor's notes
Suggest to the participants that they group their notes at the bottom right side of the plan to facilitate reading. Manhole diagram (Not a NetX Plan) (700 plan) 1
BKMF100-24
180
BKMF100-24
501 A
4
3
5
B
2
1
6
34N2LT-048
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
180
3.3.36
34N2LT-048
8
1
7
A
2
5
3
E
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Repair
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
A cable repair involves replacing a piece of damaged cable by a new one. If the cable to be repaired is less than 100 metres and is being replaced with an identical cable, no plan is issued and the Repair group does the work. However, if the damaged cable measures more than 100 metres or must be replaced with a different cable, this involves replacement work and a plan must be issued.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.37
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
4. Zone of influence Duration
15 minutes
Definition and Illustration
A zone of influence is a defined perimeter around a Power Company’s central station. Within this electrical zone, electronic data transmission by Bell equipment may be affected. To avoid this situation, very strict electrical protection standards must be followed. No electronic protection equipment may be installed within a zone of influence and cables must be installed according to specific instructions issued by the Electrical Protection group On the work plans, a line identifies the zone of influence, and the standards to follow within this zone are stated in notes. The project manager indicates exactly what must be written after consulting the Electrical Protection group. As well, the following label must be affixed on any plan illustrating a zone of influence. This label indicates that the cable is dedicated, i.e., it is reserved for use by the central station, substation or power station.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.38
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
5. Analysis method Duration
20 minutes
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to take out their Analysis Method job aid and distribute plans 502, 503 & 703 of job 722450. ONLY ONCE THE ANALYSIS IS DONE, tell the participants that the analysis result is available under the "Answers" tab in their guide. It is an example of the analysis method to which they can refer.
Instructions
We will analyze the plans that you have received by following the three steps in the analysis method. This method shows the main steps and action to follow to read and interpret work plans, as well as to identify and correct any discrepancies.
Instructor's notes
Proceed to the demonstration of the analysis method by following each of the steps and actions. Do not read the answers with the participants; the analysis method actions will produce the identified answers. During the demonstration, ask the participants to help you analyze these plans, proceed in an interactive method with the group. o At the end of step 1, the three plans will be side by side (overview). o Then, proceed to steps 2 & 3 for each plan. If the instructor thinks that the analysis of only one plan 500 is enough, don't do the analysis of the 503 plan. o When doing step 3, draw participant attention to all elements associated to the teaching points, whether they are shown or not on the plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.39
FUTURE 22x34 PLAN
FUTURE 22x34 PLAN
FUTURE 22x34 PLAN
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
RESULTS : ANALYSIS METHOD DEMONSTRATION Step 1: Get a general idea of the project
This step is broken down into 2 actions: 1.1 Determine the work location a) Job 722450, switching center Sherbrooke (plans 502,503 and 703). b) Note : no 700 plan to identify work location for that job and no location sketch on plans. Also, there are no manhole location details. Add these elements or refer to the originator. Place plans aside to have an overview of the entire work. To do so: • Follow the references on plans(c); • Identify the switching centre direction (c); • Pay attention to the street(s) name(s) (d). Cathédrale street is shown on plan 703. Plans 501 and 504 are missing in the folder. However, cable placement is required on these plans. MH 1BMH1 diagram is shown on plan 703, the other diagram is missing in the folder. 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies) Only underground
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.39(a)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
RESULTS : ANALYSIS METHOD DEMONSTRATION (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated
This second step lets you have a global understanding of the work to be done. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. 722450-Plan 502 : In 1AMH3(A ), from arb 1 to the 503 reference plan (MH exit), installation of a BKMF 600-24/UG cable of 5F.
Instructor's notes
The manhole identification is followed by (A) because in IMAP, this manhole had many detail folders that are now merged in only one detail window. It is possible to reproduce each folder. If any question, mention the splicing work: 1) At reference boxes AA and H, brackets and underlines are shown (cable count). These elements stand for splicing work (Module 4). 2) The symbol on the cable, a plug, represents a splice type (Module 4).
722450-Plan 503 : In 1BMH1, from plan 502 reference to plan 504 reference, installation of a BKMF600-24/UG cable of 104F. 722450-Plan 703 : 1BMH1 manhole diagram associated to plan 503.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
At step 3, the missing elements are followed by the advice « to be added ». Explain that this indicates two possibilities: 1. add information on the plan because it is available (draft or other documents); 2. refer to originator because the information is not available and the originator will have to give it to you.
3.3.39(b)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
RESULTS : ANALYSIS METHOD DEMONSTRATION (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented the work is correctly according to the established rules. illustrated.
Instructor's notes
Ask participants what are the required elements for an underground cable installation and verify plan 502 with them. 722450-Plan 502 : For BKMF600-24 placement: Verifications: • Component & finale lengths (directional arrow). • Cable identification for the new installed cable and for all other existing cables connected to the splice from where the new cable is connected (arbitrary 1). • Verify the destination locations (FROM – TO): o For the new placed BKMF 600-24 cable: the TO location (going away from SC) is 1BMH1. o For other cables in the splice : Reference J : 1AMH2(A) FROM location ; Reference AA : TO location to be added; Reference A : 1AMH4 TO location. • Duct occupation to use (new cable): o Duct to use 18; o Bingo method: B7 OR drawn duct formation (to the right of plan); • MH diagram: reference to plan 702, however this plan is missing in the folder: to be added. • Permanent work location or arbitrary for each work: o For the cable installation: A1 and 1AMH3(A) can be used for the work location OR The use of an additional arbitrary is possible (between A1 and A ?, see last number). • Wall to wall measurement not required. • No roping note: To be added. • No pulling direction note: To be verified with the originator. If pulled from SC towards customer, no note is required on work plan.
Instructor's notes (if questions from participants)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
For splicing work (Module 4) : • A1 is associated to the new cable placement. • The « bolds » symbol on the cable is a plug, an additional arbitrary is required (A ?, see last number). 3.3.39(c)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
RESULTS: ANALYSIS METHOD DEMONSTRATION (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated, (cont'd)
Instructor's notes
3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements.
Actions 3.1 and 3.2 will be consecutively done for each work plan, so that we will do complete plan verification before beginning another one. . Mention to participants that the basic plan elements are listed in the « Basic Work Plan Elements» job aid. Use this job aid to make the verification as a group. NOTE : The basic plan elements are listed in the « Basic Work Plan Elements» job aid.
722450-Plan 502 Verifications : • Caption stamp elements: o Right-of-way number: missing – to be added. • Work location diagram and street names: o Job location Plan 700 missing, to be added OR, location sketch on plan missing, to be added; o Manhole location details missing, to be added; o Crossing and perpendicular street names are missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
References : o References to plans 501-503: plan 501 missing, to be added; o Reference to plan 702 : plan 702 missing, to be added; o Municipality name: missing, to be added.
•
No surface detail required because the work involves an EXISTING manhole.
3.3.39(d)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
RESULTS : ANALYSIS METHOD DEMONSTRATION (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated, (cont'd)
3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules.
722450-Plan 503 : For BKMF600-24 cable installation: Verifications: • Component & final lengths (directional arrow). • Cable identification for the new installed cable. • Preceding location (SC side) 1AMH3 (A). • Next location (going away from SC) 1BMH2 • Identification of the conduit to use: o SC side, of 502 plan : Used conduit number 18; Bingo method: B1 OR conduits formation should be shown (at the bottom near the caption stamp); o Customer side (field), towards to plan 504: Used conduit number 2; Bingo method: B1; OR conduits formation should be shown (at the left top); • MH diagram: reference to plan 703. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work: o A1 and 1BMH1 can be used as location for the BKMF600-24 cable installation; OR o The use of an additional arbitrary is also possible (between A1 and A ?, see last number). • Wall to wall distance missing: To be added • No roping note: To be added. • No pulling direction note: To be verified with the originator. If pulled from SC towards customer, no note is required on work plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.39(e)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
RESULTS : ANALYSIS METHOD DEMONSTRATION (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated, (cont'd)
3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements.
722450-Plan 503 Verifications : • Caption stamp elements: o Right of way number missing, to be added. • Work location o Job location Plan 700 missing, to be added, OR location sketch on plan missing, to be added; o Manhole location details, missing, to be added; o Crossing and perpendicular street names are missing, to be added. • References: o References to plans 502-504: plan 504 missing, to be added; o Reference to plan 703. o Municipality name: missing, to be added • No surface detail required because the work involves an EXISTING manhole.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.39(f)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
RESULTS : ANALYSIS METHOD DEMONSTRATION (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated, (cont'd)
3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 722450-Plan 703 : Verifications: •
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated, (cont'd)
Manhole diagram update: updated information missing, to be added (draw in bold the new cable path in the MH and indicate the conduits to use).
3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements.
722450-Plan 703 Verifications: • Work location o Manhole location details missing, to be added; o Cathédrale crossing streets names are missing, to be added. • References: o Reference to plan 503, o Municipality name: Sherbrooke. • No surface detail required because the work involves an EXISTING manhole.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.39(g)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Checklists
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
At the end of step 3 « Check whether the work is correctly illustrated », you have done the additions and the required corrections so that the work is represented according to the established rules. To make sure that you have identified and corrected all discrepancies on each plan, it is recommended to use the recommended Bell checklist. A plan checklist has been designed to ensure work plan quality at Bell. You must use it to check whether all the required elements are correctly illustrated. You will find these checklists and explanations of each item in your “Checklist” binder. Under each tab, the first page is the “Checklist” that is used to check plans, followed by reference documents. The various checklists and explanations of the items are also available on the Web site at the following address: http://associatehandbook.int.bell.ca/
Instructor's notes
IMPORTANT: Emphasize that this list does not cancel existing practices, contracts and other agreements signed with various parties (Power companies, CNCP, etc.). Moreover, it does not include all the exceptions. In case of doubt, consult the existing practices or agreements. Point out that this note is written on each checklist. Ask the participants to consult the Checklist binder and become familiar with this document. Explain that this document does not deal with 400 plans because their preparation is generally outsourced to specialized firms.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.40
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Instructor's notes (cont'd) Checklist (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Tell the participants that at the end of each lesson they will be asked to consult the checklist associated with each type of plan. The checklist provides a final verification of specific items of each network category. This list enables you to verify each work order item and to indicate the plan elements that are clearly illustrated, those that must be corrected or added and those that are not applicable. Therefore, you will write, for example: • • •
Instructor's notes
A check “√” or an “X” to indicate elements illustrated according to standards; The letter “M” to indicate missing elements to be added or corrected; The abbreviation “N/A” when elements not applicable to this plan are involved.
Tell the participants that this method of coding is suggested to facilitate working as a group. However, when they go back to their jobs, they may adapt the way they complete these checklists, bearing in mind that is important to produce a plan with as few errors as possible.
Result: The following checklists were used for plans 502, 503, and 702: • 500 plan - Underground; • 700 plans – Details & Locations. These checklists are reproduced on the following pages.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.41
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Instructor's notes Tell to participants that, after each lesson, we will make an "overview" of the checklist pointing to items covered in the teaching points (those ones are written in bold black or highlighted in pale grey depending of the lessons). The other items will be seen further in this course or in a future course. They will not have to complete the checklists as the analysis method, used in the course, lets us identify all discrepancies. Ask the participants to consult the completed lists associated to job 722450 plans 502-503-703. Point out that we are highlighting the same discrepancies that have already been identified by the analysis. At work, they will proceed according to their local procedures. There are many ways to analyse a plan. The checklist can be used prior to drawing the plan (as a job aid) and after to verify the plans. It must be completed and attached to the job folder. Items to highlighted in the 500 Plan– Underground list: # 16: Indicate that the term “nomenclature” has synonyms such as “cable identification” and that the expression “Cable Description” is used in NetworkX. # 21 : Remind them that the Wall-to-Wall distance corresponds to the distance between 2 MH’s. This distance corresponds to a cable component length (Pl. 503 : 99m) and must be shown in a note to Expertech.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.41(a)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
CHECKLIST
NETWORK #
PLAN 500 – UNDERGROUND
502
M/H location (physical location) Plan 700
1
M
M
Wall-to-wall distance (installation of a new cable between manholes)
21
M/H diagram (plan 700) IMAP
2
M
9
N.N. (Network Number)
22
Duct occupancy – BINGO method (infoplan – text)
3
9
9
CLLI code (work notes)
23
Pull direction (911-1000-105)
4
N/A
N/A
Municipalities (work notes)
24
M
M
Roping information
5
M
M
Associated network (work notes) plus project sequence
25
N/A
N/A
Source and destination location
6
M
9
Address of crossconnect terminal (work notes)
26
Pressurization (air system, plug, etc (620-0400-018)
7
Name of manager, telephone #, pager # (work notes)
27
9
9
Reference from one plan to another (920-3100-102)
8
Name of coordinator, telephone #, pager # (work notes)
28
9
9
9
9
920-3130-100
# PLAN
9
503
9
920-3130-100
# ITEM
# ITEM
PLAN 500 – UNDERGROUND
722450
Direction of central office (fibre ring)
9
Name of associate, telephone # (work notes)
29
Pair transfer
10
30
Arb (OP TIP 98-019)
11
HDSL & ADTRAN (IMAP)
12
New pairs terminated in a crossconnect terminal (existing or new) New pairs terminated at central office. Addition or replacement of pairs greater than 4575 m (completed work) BC3888A to be completed or IMAP loop report) General – how to issue a work plan
CT/LT
13
Work location
14
Splicing sequence (700 plan if required) (920-3130-100F)
15
Cable identification inserted (each side of splice) Terminals affected (DIP note) Form P3381/P4235 Optical fibre identification number (OP TIP 93-035)
16
Safety information for DESIGNATED M/H (914-2022-100) Safety information for M/H at the customer
9
9
M
M
9
9
18
N/A
N/A
19
N/A
N/A
20
N/A
N/A
17
Note 1: Items in pale grey will be covered later in this course or in another course. Note 2: For more explanations and examples, consult the complete checklist. Note 3: 9 means the item is clearly illustrated. M means the item is missing. N/A means not applicable. .
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.42
31 32
# PLAN 502 N/A
503 M
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
PLAN #
ITEM #
700 PLANS - DETAILS
NETWORK #
702
Vertical layout (700 plan)
1
N/A
Manhole diagram (700 plan)
2
9
HDSL plan details (700 plan)
3
N/A
Typical floor plan (700 plan)
4
N/A
Steel pole example (700 plan)
5
N/A
Splicing sequence (700 plan)
6
N/A
920-3110-100
722450
700 PLANS - LOCATIONS 920-3110-100 Work location (700 plan)
7
M
Other example of work location (700 plan)
8
M
N/A
Note 1: Items in pale grey will be covered later in this course or in another course. Note 2: For more explanations and examples, consult the complete checklist. Note 3: 9 means the item is clearly represented. M means the item is missing. N/A means not applicable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
PLAN #
ITEM #
CHECKLIST - PLANS 700
3.3.43
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Exercise # 2 Duration
30 minutes
Instructor's notes
In small groups or individually, ask the participants to analyze the plans that you will distribute by referring to the steps of the analysis method (Job 722450 plans 504 & 505). Once the exercise is completed, present the answers to the participants by using the following answers. N.B.: Participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the Answers tab.
Instructions EX P ER U O C R IS G E
Individually or in small groups, analyze the given work plans and correct the discrepancies using the following tools: • • •
Analysis Method job aid; Basic work plan elements job aid; Answer grid.
Enter the results you obtain at each step in the following pages.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Remind to participants that the can used the lesson material and the checklist (for each plan).
3.3.44
FUTURE 22x34 PLAN
FUTURE 22x34 PLAN
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number, plan(s) number(s), switching center. _______________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Work location description. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies) Network category (ies) : __________________________________________________
Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Work description
3.3.45
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note : In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Verification : Write down the verified items.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.46
Missing items : Specify the required action to take if known.
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
EXERCISE # 2 - ANSWERS Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number = 722450. Switching center: Sherbrooke. Plan(s) number(s) = 504 & 505
Work location description: Streets and municipality names: not identified No 700 location plan on the job, no location sketch on plans, no MH diagram and finally no manholes location details.
Plan 504 : 1BMH2, References to plans 503, 505 and 804. Plan 804 missing: to verify.
Instructor's notes : Plan 804 numbering is probably wrong, as we don't use 800 series plans. Plan 804 refers to a MH diagram associated to plan 504: to verify. Plan 505: 1BMH3, References to plans 201, 504 and 601. Plans 201 and 601 are missing in the file: to verify.
1.2 Identify shown network category (ies). Network category: Underground
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.46(a)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
EXERCISE # 2 – ANSWERS, (cont'd) Step 2: Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
504
Work description In 1BMH2, between plan references 503 and 505, installation of a BKMF 600-24/UG cable of 104F.
In 1BMH3, installation of three cable sections: 505
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
o Between arbitraries 2 & 3, BKMF 600-24/UG of 109F; o Between arbitraries 3 & 5, BKMF 400-24/UG of 5F; o Between arbitraries 6 & 7, BKMF 400-24/UG of 26F.
3.3.46(b)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
EXERCISE # 2 – ANSWERS, (cont'd)
Step 3: Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 722450-Plan 504 : For the BKMF600-24 installation 3.1 Verifications (work): • Component & final lengths (directional arrow): The FINALE length should be placed at the MH exit wall. Also, the 149 component length should read 144 (W to W distance) and another component length of 5m (distance in MH) should be added near the MH exit wall. • Cable identification for the new installed cable. • Preceding location (SC side) 1BMH1. • Next location (going away from SC) 1BMH3 • Identification of the conduit to use: o SC side, plan 503: Used conduit number 2; Bingo method missing: To be added: B2 ; OR conduits formation should be shown (at the bottom near the caption stamp); o Customer side (field), towards to plan 505: Used conduit number 3; Bingo method: To be added: B2; OR conduits formation should be shown (at the left top); • MH diagram: reference to plan 800. Plan missing: To be added. Also, check the plan numbering should be 700 series plan. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work: missing, to be added. • Wall to wall distance (note). • Roping note: rope placed. • Pulling direction: The pulling direction note is not required as the cable is placed from the SC towards customers. 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • Caption stamp elements: o Right of way number missing, to be added. • Work location o Location 700 plan 700 for the job missing, to be added, OR location sketch on plan missing, to be added; o Manhole location details missing, to be added; o Streets names are missing, to be added. • References: o References to plans 503-505; o Reference to plan 804: plan 804 missing, to be added (verify the numbering if used for MH diagram should be 700 series plan); o Municipally name: missing, to be added. • No surface detail required because the work involves an EXISTING manhole. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.46(c)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
EXERCISE # 2 – ANSWERS, (cont'd)
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 722450-Plan 505 : For the BKMF600-24 cable installation 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Component & final lengths (directional arrow): The BKMF 400-24 cable FINALE length, coming from plan 601, should be placed near the MH exit wall (reference plan 201). Also, the 26 component length should be split to indicate a cable measurement in conduit and another measure in the MH. (21 in conduit from the OPI to MH and 5 in MH). TO VERIFY. • Installed cable identifications. • Destination locations (FROM-TO): o A 2, BKMF 600-24, previous location: 1BMH2; o A 5, BKMF 400-24 : next location : 111-1 ; o A 6, BKMF 400-24 : previous location : 111-1 ; o A 7, BKMF 400-24 : next location : P 224 MARQUETTE. • Identification of the conduit to use: o A 2, BKMF 600-24 : conduit 3, Bingo method missing : B4 ; o A 5, BKMF 400-24 : conduit 03, Bingo method missing : A3 ; o A 6, BKMF 400-24 : conduit 03, Bingo method missing : A3 ; o A 7, BKMF 400-24 : conduit 3, Bingo method missing : A1. OR conduit formations are illustrated. • MH diagram: no reference, plan 700 missing: To be added. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work: arbitraries are indicated • Wall to wall distance missing: to be added • Roping note: rope placed. • Pulling direction: No note written to verify with the originator. The pulling direction for both cables in duct 03 will be from central (MH) to the OPI (111-1). So, add a note for the BKMF400-24 pulling direction (distribution). 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • Caption stamp elements: o Right of way number missing, to be added. • Work location o Location 700 plan for the job is missing, to be added, OR location sketch on plan missing, to be added; o Manhole location details missing, to be added; o Streets names are missing, to be added. • References: o References to plans 504, 601,201 (plans 201-601 missing); o Municipally name: missing, to be added. • No surface detail required because the work involves an EXISTING manhole. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.46(d)
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
CHECKLIST
NETWORK # 722450
PLAN 500 – UNDERGROUND
504
M/H location (physical location) Plan 700
1
M
M
Wall-to-wall distance (installation of a new cable between manholes)
21
M/H diagram (plan 700) IMAP
2
M
M
N.N. (Network Number)
22
Duct occupancy – BINGO method (infoplan – text)
3
M
M
CLLI code (work notes)
23
Pull direction (911-1000-105)
4
N/A
M
Municipalities (work notes)
24
M
M
Roping information
5
9
9
Associated network (work notes) plus project sequence
25
N/A
N/A
Source and destination location
6
9
9
Address of crossconnect terminal (work notes)
26
Pressurization (air system, plug, etc (620-0400-018)
7
Name of manager, telephone #, pager # (work notes)
27
9
9
Reference from one plan to another (920-3100-102)
8
Name of coordinator, telephone #, pager # (work notes)
28
9
9
9
9
920-3130-100
# PLAN
9
505
9
920-3130-100
# ITEM
# ITEM
PLAN 500 – UNDERGROUND
Direction of central office (fibre ring)
9
Name of associate, telephone # (work notes)
29
Pair transfer
10
30
Arb (OP TIP 98-019)
11
HDSL & ADTRAN (IMAP)
12
New pairs terminated in a crossconnect terminal (existing or new) New pairs terminated at central office. Addition or replacement of pairs greater than 4575 m (completed work) BC3888A to be completed or IMAP loop report) General – how to issue a work plan
CT/LT
13
Work location
14
Splicing sequence (700 plan if required) (920-3130-100F)
15
Cable identification inserted (each side of splice) Terminals affected (DIP note) Form P3381/P4235 Optical fibre identification number (OP TIP 93-035)
16
Safety information for DESIGNATED M/H (914-2022-100) Safety information for M/H at the customer
M
9
M
M
9
9
18
N/A
N/A
19
N/A
N/A
20
N/A
N/A
17
Note 1: Items in pale grey will be covered later in this course or in another course. Note 2: For more explanations and examples, consult the complete checklist. Note 3: 9 means the item is clearly illustrated. M means the item is missing. N/A means not applicable. . Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.46(e)
31 32
# PLAN 504
505
9
M
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 Plan)
Lesson 3 : Underground cables (500 plans)
.Summary
Duration
10 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered: • • • • •
Instructor's notes
Specifications regarding the illustration of underground cables; Work on underground cables illustrated on 500 plans; The concept of zone of influence; Work plan analysis method; 500 plans checklist.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3.3.47
Module 4 : Splicing
Preamble of Module 4
Module 4 Splicing Duration
8 hours 45 minutes
General objective
At the end of this module, you should be able to: •
Read and interpret information on a work plan pertaining to copper and fibre cable splicing;*
•
Identify discrepancies pertaining to copper and fibre cable splicing;
•
Identify splicing information that must be entered or corrected on a work plan.
* Means the ability to read and interpret the network map and drafts of plans.
To this end, the lessons of this module will cover:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
General splicing concepts;
•
Straight and branch splices;
•
Facility splices without transfer;
•
Facility splices with transfer;
•
Miscellaneous splices.
Show the title of the module pasted on the outside plant poster.
4.i
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Lesson 1 Splicing Overview Duration
1 hour 15 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: •
Explain the basic splicing principles.
Materials - “Splicing” job aid
- M4L1 PowerPoint (includes: images, photos, diagrams and graphics of this lesson);
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.1
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Preamble Duration
3 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L1 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following images. To serve customers, cables of different gauges, sizes and lengths are used. In order for a signal to be transmitted, the cables must be continuous from the central office to customers. It is the same principle as pipes that run from the water filtration plant to your home. The pipes must be connected to the plant and to each other so that the water can reach your tap.
Just like water pipes, cables must be connected to each other so that the signal can be transmitted from the central office to your home.
Central Office
Customer
Splices/fusions are the termination, junction or connection points between the cable pairs/fibres.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.2
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
q
p
Central Office
o
n Preamble (cont'd)
Junction points, referred to as splices/fusions, are found in all the network categories: underground (n), buried (o), aerial (p, building and submarine. Splices/fusions can also be found in central offices (q). A splice/fusion may be required: •
When the cable reel length is insufficient to reach the customers;
•
When cables of different sizes or gauges are spliced.
•
To connect equipment to a cable (terminals, load coils, etc).
•
To connect a new cable to an existing cable in the network.
In this lesson, you will learn the main characteristics of splices/fusions as well as the basic splicing principles.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.3
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
1. Splices/fusions Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L1 PowerPoint presentation.
Splices/fusions
Copper and fibre cables are not terminated in the same way. •
The junction of copper cable pairs is referred to as a SPLICE. The junction of fibre cable is referred to as a FUSION.
Copper and fibre cables cannot be directly connected together. However, certain equipment can be used to connect them.
Instructor's notes
Give the following equipment examples: Access Node, DMS1U. Splices/fusions make it possible to connect the pairs/fibres of two or more identical or different cables. Splice/fusion connecting 2 cables Central Office
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Customers
4.1.4
Module 4 : Splicing
Splices/fusions (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Splices/fusions connecting 3 cables Central Office
Customer
Customer
Splices/fusions connecting 4 cables
Customers
Central Office Customers
Customers
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.5
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Copper cable splices
Copper cables are spliced manually, i.e., the pairs of the first cable are connected to the pairs of another cable using special pliers. The pairs can also be disconnected by cutting them.
1) A splicer splices the pairs of a copper cable
2) A splicer splices the second wire of a copper pair.
3) The junction between two pairs of a copper pair.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out that the second photo shows the splicing of 2 copper pair wires.
4.1.6
Module 4 : Splicing
Copper cable splices (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Various splice closures are used depending on their location in the network. The following photos show several examples of copper splice closures.
Underground splice closures (in a manhole)
Aerial splice closure
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.7
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Copper cable splices (cont'd)
Splice closure in a building
Buried splice closure (pedestal)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.8
Module 4 : Splicing
Fibre cable fusion
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
The method used to permanently connect the optical fibres of two cables is called fusion. This type of splicing is performed with a fusion-splicing device. This device is used to: • Align the two fibres to be fused; • Produce an electrical arc between two electrodes to melt the glass and fuse the fibres; • Install a protective sleeve to provide mechanical protection for the fibres. Today, splicers use the automated X77 fusion splicer. This portable device is used to splice all types of fibres used by Bell.
The fusions are done by Expertech splicers in trailers or trucks equipped with a fusion splicer.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.9
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Instructor's notes
Mention that trailers are used to ensure a clean, dust-free environment.
Fibre cable fusion (cont'd)
Fusions may be found in the underground, aerial, building, and buried networks. The following photos show examples of the closures used to protect the fusions.
Open underground fibre fusion closure
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
The white tape is a water detection tape for checking whether the closure is watertight (covered in detail in the pressurization module). The newer closures do not have a tape, unlike the existing models.
4.1.10
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Aerial fibre fusion closure with cable loop
Instructor's notes
Point out to the participants that the slack (in the form of a loop) next to the fusion closure is necessary so that the splicers can bring the fibre cable to be fused to their truck or trailer. Generally, the slack is approximately 30 metres long (15 metres on each side of the fusion). Show the length of the splice next to the fusion on this photo. Point out that there is another slack loop at the pole. Specify that, previously, a fibre cable loop, not more than 1 meter length, was done at each pole to allow cable expansion when strand was overloaded due to ice, wind or thermal expansion. Since 1990, new optical fibre cables fabrication gives a better strength so, expansion slack loops are not required anymore EXCEPT at some strategic sites, to keep a flexibility in the network to get slack when road, heavy equipment or house moves are required, and also for some restoration work.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.11
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Fibre cable fusion (cont'd)
Storage box for buried fibre optic cables with fibre fusion closure inside
Instructor's notes
Ducts at the base of the fibre fusion closure
Point out that the yellow rope in the photo on the right is used to install cables in the ducts (roping) at a later date. Indicate that the buried fibre cables may be directly in the ground (these cables have a special sheath) or in ducts.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.12
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
2. Pair/fibre continuity Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L1 PowerPoint presentation.
Reminder: To offer telephone service, the copper pair connects the central office to the customer. Therefore, each time there is a cut between the cables, the two wires of the pair must be spliced to allow the signal to be continuous. If the pair is not spliced to one of the splices, the signal will be interrupted.
Instructor's notes
As needed, make the analogy with the water pipes covered in the preamble. Customer
Central Office
Fed by pair 1 of cable 10
= Splice
Pair 1 of cable 10
Pair 1 of cable 10
Principle of continuity
Pair 1 of cable 10
Pair 1 of cable 10
Copper pairs are numbered on the work plan in order to identify the pair assigned to a customer and track its path in the network. Each pair keeps the same number throughout its path, even if it goes through different cables. For example, the customer in the above image, located at 1506 Theresa, uses pair 1 of cable 10. This wire pair keeps the same pair and cable number throughout its path, even if it goes through different cables.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.13
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
2. Principle of continuity (cont'd)
On the following diagram, you can see that a pair gets its number from the central office.
Splice/fusion symbol:
At the central office, number 1 is assigned to this pair
The unspliced pair becomes 1 after splice 1
The unspliced pair becomes 1 after splice 2
1
2
The same numbering continues in each cable added to extend the network. In the example below, you will notice that two cables are spliced at arb 1. Throughout its path, each pair bears the same number. For example, pair 1 of cable 18 is terminated at the central office and then connected to cable BKMF 100-24/UG. It is then connected to pair 1 of cable 18 in cable BKMB 10024/AER and then terminates at the customer. Pairs 1 to 100 of cable 18 feed the following cable pairs (towards customers)
Pairs 1 to 100 of cable 18 feed customers
Customer A: Pair 1 of cable 18 Customer B: Pair 2 of cable 18
Central office
1
18,1-100
18,1-100
BKMF 100-24/AER
BKMF 100-24/UG
... Customer Z: Pair 100 of cable 18
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
The central office is the starting point of pairs 1 to 100 of cable 18.
4.1.14
Module 4 : Splicing
Principle of continuity (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
The cable count must always be represented in the count of the central office cable to which it is spliced.
This principle is very important and is indicated in your “Splicing” job aid.
Instructor's notes
Emphasize the bolded sentence above. For the moment, the participants must simply understand that cable pairs/fibres (close to customers) must be present in the count of the preceding cable (near the SC). Ask them to take out their “Splicing” job aid and find this principle. Make sure that the participants understand that numbering begins at the central office. Pairs 1 to 100 of cable 18 feed the following cable pairs (towards customers)
Is included in the count of the central office cable to which it is spliced
Customer A: Pair 1 of cable 18 Customer B: Pair 2 of cable 18
18,1-100
18,1-200
BKMB 100-24/AER
BKMF 200-24/UG
... Customer Z: Pair 100 of cable 18
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Central office
4.1.15
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Principle of continuity (cont'd)
Just like the pairs of copper cables, the fibres of fibre cables keep the same numbers throughout their path. The principle of continuity must also be respected. In fact, the cable count must always be indicated in the count of the central office cable to which it is fused. Example:
Pair FC12,1 and fibres F12, 1-24 feed the pairs and fibres of the following cable (towards customers) Is included in the count of the count of the central office cable to which it is fused
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
F12,1-48 FC12,1
F12,1-24 FC12,1
34NCLT-048+1-22/UG
34NCLT-024+1-22/AER
4.1.16
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
When a splice/fusion is illustrated on a work plan, you must ensure that the:
Two basic checks
1. cable count = the cable size 2. principle of continuity is respected for the live pairs. In order to complete these basic checks, it is first important to locate the central office or its direction. Remember that the direction of feed arrow points toward the customer and that the central office is in the opposite direction. The following examples illustrate the principle of continuity and show how to apply the basic checks.
18,1-100
18,1-200
BKMF 100-24/AER
BKMF 200-24/UG
Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office?
BKMF 100-24 (size OK)
18,1-100 (100 pairs)
Yes: included in BKMF 200-24
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice? YES BKMF 200-24 (size OK)
18,1-200 (200 pairs)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.17
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
F12,1-48 FC12,1
F12,1-24 FC12,1
34NCLT-048+1-22/UG
34NCLT-024+1-22/AER
Cable count (size)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office?
34NCLT-024 +1-22 (size OK)
F12,1-24 (24 fibres)
Yes: included in 34NCLT-048+1-22
FC 12,1 (1 pair)
Yes: included in 34NCLT-048+1-22
Is the principle of continuity respected to this splice? YES 34NCLT-048+1-22 (size OK)
FC 12,1-48 (48 fibres) FC12,1 (1 pair)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.18
Module 4 : Splicing
Exercise # 1
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
For each of the following diagrams: 1) Indicate the central office side and the customer side; 2) Check whether the cable count corresponds to the cable size; 3) Check whether the principle of continuity is respected.
Instructor's notes
With the participants, look at the part of the “Splicing” job aid that deals with the principle of continuity. Tell them that they can refer to it to do the following exercise. Ask participants to complete the exercise. Allow 15 minutes to do the exercise. Correct the exercise using the slide show M4L1. The participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the "Answers" tab.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.19
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Diagram 1
12,101-200
12,101-200
BKTF100-26/BUR
AJMB 100-24/UG
Answer :
_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Answer
Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
BKTF 100-26 (Size OK)
12,101-200 (100 pairs)
Yes : included in AJMB 100-24
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? YES AJMB 100-24 (Size OK)
12,101-200 (100 pairs)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.20
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Diagram 2 1
2
F56,1-96 34N2LT-096/UG F56,1-96 34N2LT-096/UG 4
3
F56,1-96 34R2LT-096/BUR
Answer :
_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Answer
Cable count (customer side)
1) The central office is to the left and the customers are to the right. 2) Correct. 3) Correct. See table below. Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
34R2LT-096/BUR (Size OK)
F56,1-96 (96 fibres)
Yes : included in 34N2LT-096/UG (arb.2 &3)
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion ? YES 34N2LT-096/UG (Size OK)
F56,1-96 (96 fibres )
Yes : included in 34N2LT-096/UG (arb. 1 & 2)
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion ? YES 34N2LT-096/UG (Size OK)
F56,1-96 (96 fibres )
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.21
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Diagram 3 1
2
15,1-1000 DCAZ 900-22/UG 15,1-900
BKMF 900-24/UG
4
15,901-1000 BKMB 900-24/AER
3
Answer :
_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ 1) The central office is to the left and the customers are to the right. 2) Error: The pair numbering for the cable located between arbs 1 and 2 and arbs 3 and 4 do not correspond to their size. 3) Error. The principle of continuity is not respected to the arb 3 splice. See table below.
Answer
Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
BKMB 900-24 (Error)
15, 901-1000 (100 pairs)
No : Not included in BKMF 900-24
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? NO BKMF 900-24 (Size OK)
15, 1-900 (900 pairs)
Yes : included in DCAZ 900-22
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? YES DCAZ 900-22 (Error)
15, 1-1000(1000 pairs)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.22
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Diagram 4 48,1-100
48,101-200
BKTF 100-26/UG
BKTB 100-26/AER
Answer :
_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ 1) The central office is to the left and the customers are to the right. 2) Correct. 3) Error. The principle of continuity is not respected. See table below.
Answer
Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
BKTB 100-26(Size OK)
48,101-200 (100 pairs)
No : Not included in BKTF 100-26
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? NO BKTF 100-26 (Size OK)
48, 1-100 (100 pairs)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.23
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
3. Live and dead pairs/fibres Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L1 PowerPoint presentation.
Live pairs/fibres (energized)
Pairs/fibres connected to the distribution frame of the central office make it possible to route signals from the central office to customers or a given point in the network. They are referred to as live pairs or fibres (energized).
Instructor's notes
Briefly remind the participants that the distribution frame is used to receive and transmit signals at the central office. These live pairs and fibres (energized) are like water pipes connected to a filtration plant with a water pipe connection between them. These pipes allow water to reach customers or a given point in a network, ready to be used.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Briefly recall that the distribution frame is used for receiving and transmitting signals at the central office.
4.1.24
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Live pairs/fibres (energized) (cont'd)
Central office Customers
Live pairs/fibres Central office
Future customers (near future)
Live pairs/fibres
Instructor's notes
Explain that the pairs may be live up to a point in a network if, for example, Bell plans to use them to feed new customers in the near future. You may recognize live pairs and fibres by their numbering, which includes a cable number and one or more fibre/pair numbers. For example, below, pairs 1 to 900 of cable 16 are live. They are identified by “16, 1-900” all along the path.
16,1-900
16,1-900
16,1-900
CDAZ 900-22/UG
BKMF 900-24 /UG
BKTB 900-26 /UG
Future
Below, fibres 1 to 24 are also live. They are identified by the count “F12, 1-24.” F12,1-24
F12,1-24
F12,1-24
F12,1-24
34N2LT-024/UG
34N2LT-024/UG
34N2LT-024/UG
34N2LT-024/UG
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.25
Module 4 : Splicing
Dead pairs/fibres
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Sometimes the pairs/fibres of a cable are not connected to the distribution frame of the central office. These pairs/fibres are therefore not energized and can neither transmit nor receive signals. They are then referred to as dead pairs/fibres. There are two types of dead pairs and fibres:
Bulk dead pairs/fibres
•
Bulk dead pairs/fibres
•
Connected dead pairs/fibres
Bulk dead pairs/fibres are not energized by the central office and are not connected to splices or fusions. Central office Customers
Live pairs/fibres
Bulk dead pairs/fibres
Bulk dead pairs/fibres are like water pipes that are not connected to the water filtration plant and are not joined to each other. Water cannot reach the customers. They are placed for future use.
Note: The number of bulk dead pairs/fibres must correspond to the cable size entered in the alphanumeric sequence.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out that to carry water, you have to connect the pipes at three locations.
4.1.26
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Bulk dead pairs/fibres (cont'd)
To represent bulk dead pairs/fibres, you must enter the number of dead pairs, followed by the letter “D.” This designation is referred to as a dead count. Bulk dead pairs/fibres do not follow the principle of continuity because they are cut at each splice. 2
1
Future Customers
3
26,1-900
900D
900D
900D
CDAZ 900-22/UG
BKMF 900-24 /UG
BKTB 900-26 /UG
BKTB 900-26 /UG
Instructor's notes
Explain that pairs 26, 1-900 are live up to the first splice. At the central office, a number is given to each pair/fibre connected to the distribution frame. Then, the pairs are not connected to the splices. 2
1
Future customers
F22,1-24
F22,1-24
24D
34N2LT-024/UG
34N2LT-024/UG
34N2LT-024/UG
As well, if there were 24 fibres that were not connected to the central office or to fusions, 24D would be entered in the count. 1D would be entered in the count to indicate a dead copper pair (old cable).
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask the participants: “On the above diagram, as of which fusion are there bulk dead fibres?” Answer: Second fusion from the central office.
4.1.27
Module 4 : Splicing
Connected dead fibres/pairs
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Connected dead pair/fibres are not energized by the central office but are spliced or fused together at no less than one splice/fusion. Central office Customer
Live pairs/fibres
Connected dead pairs/fibres
These dead pairs/fibres are therefore “continuous” because they are connected (spliced or fused) together. It may be advantageous to splice or fuse dead pairs/fibres if we plan to energize them in the future. Then, we would not have to go back to each splice or fusion to connect them. Connected dead pairs/fibres are therefore like water pipes that are not connected at the filtration plant but are connected to each other. They are waiting to be energized.
It will be possible to provide customers with water by simply connecting the pipes at the plant or to a pipe already connected to the plant.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out that only one connection is necessary to bring water. Remind them that in the previous situation, three connections were required. 4.1.28
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
To illustrate connected dead pairs, you must enter the letter “D” followed by the number of the first dead pair, a dash and the number of the last dead pair. This designation is referred to as fictitious dead count.
Connected dead fibres/pairs (cont'd)
1
2
3
4
36,1-900
36,1-900
D3601-4500
D3601-4500
CDAZ 900-22/UG
BKMF 900-24 /UG
BKTB 900-26 /UG
BKTB 900-26 /UG
4
Future customers
3
2
Future customers
1
D101-124 D3601
D101-124 D3601
D101-124 D3601
F12,1-24 FC12,1
34NCLT-024+1-22/UG
34NCLT-024+1-22/UG
34NCLT-024+1-22/UG
34NCLT-024+1-22/UG
The numbers of the first and last dead pairs are determined by the network designers. To avoid confusion, for copper cables the numbers are higher than 3600, while for fibre cables, they are between 1 and 999. Connected dead pairs and fibres are not required to respect the principle of continuity. However, by definition, they must be continuous for at least one splice to have a fictitious dead count. Note: The number of connected dead pairs or fibres must correspond to the cable size entered in the alphanumeric sequence.
Instructor's notes
The number of pairs in a fictitious dead count is calculated in the same manner as for a live count, i.e., you must take the # of the last pair/fibre minus the # of the first pair/fibre, plus 1. Point out that the principle of continuity applies in both previous diagrams. In the upper diagram: pair continuity between arbs 2 and 4. In the lower diagram: fibre continuity between arbs 1 and 4.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.29
Module 4 : Splicing
Exercise Who am I?
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
For each of the following examples, indicate whether the pairs/fibres are live, bulk dead or connected dead. Also perform the following basic checks: • •
Instructor's notes
Case #1
Cable count = cable size; Respects the principle of continuity.
Remind the participants that the check begins by identifying the central office side. Ask them to do the following exercises. Once completed, correct the exercise, with the participants, using the PowerPoint presentation M4L1. D1-24 3562LT-024/BLD
D1-24 3562LT-024/BLD
Answer : ____________________________________
Instructor's notes
Case #2
Answer: Connected dead fibres. Count corresponds to cable size. • Point out that these fibres are connected up to this fusion. F13,1-12 FC13,1
F13,1-12 FC13,1
34NCLT-012+1-22/AER
34NCLT-012+1-22/UG
Answer : ____________________________________
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Answer: Live copper pairs and fibres (energized). Count corresponds to cable size. • Point out that the principle of continuity is respected at this fusion.
4.1.30
Module 4 : Splicing
Case #3
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview 10,1-400 D4001-4400 400D BKMF 1200-24/UG
10,1-400 D4001-4400 400D BKMF 1200-24/UG
Answer : ____________________________________
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Answer : 10,1-400 = Live copper pairs (energized). D4001-4400 = Connected dead pairs. 400D = Bulk dead pairs. Count corresponds to cable size. • Point out that the principle of continuity is respected at this splice.
4.1.31
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
4. Types of splices/fusions Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L1 PowerPoint presentation. Point out to the participants that the details of each of these splice categories will be covered in subsequent lessons.
Introduction
There are four types of splices/fusions: • Straight splices/fusions • Branch splices/fusions • Facility splices/fusions • Miscellaneous splices/fusions
Straight splices/fusions (overview)
Once completed, the straight splice/fusion joins the end of a new cable to the end of another new cable. This occurs only during cable installation. Example:
Central Office Customers
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
19,1-200
19,1-200
BKTF 200-26/UG
BKTF 200-26/UG
Mention that the new cables are indicated in bold.
4.1.32
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Branch splice/fusion (overview)
Once completed, the branch splice/fusion joins the end of three or more new cables. This type of splice is therefore done when cables are installed. Example:
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.33
BKTB100-26/AER
Customers
19,1-200
BKTB 100-26/AER
… may be illustrated as …
19,1-100
Central Office
19,101-200
Customers
BKTF 200-26/UG
Module 4 : Splicing
Facility splice/fusion (overview)
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
A facility splice/fusion corresponds to any splice or fusion that involves an existing cable. It can join two or more cables but at least one must already exist. Example:
Central Office
Existing
Customers
Customers
New cables to splice or fuse to existing cable
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
BKTF 600-26/UG
19,1-600
… may be illustrated as follows …
19,1-200
19,201-400
BKMB 200-24/AER
BKTB 400-26/AER
Ask the participants to identify the existing cable and the new cables on this diagram.
4.1.34
Module 4 : Splicing
Miscellaneous splices/fusions (overview)
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Miscellaneous splices/fusions correspond to all the junctions performed on a cable other that straight, branch or facility splices, e.g., clear & cap that terminate cables and store slack splices. Example (clear & cap): 25,1-200 BKTB 200-26/AER
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.35
18F
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 1 : Splicing Overview
Summary Duration
2 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered: • • • • •
Instructor's notes
Copper cable splices and fibre cable fusions; The principle of pair/fibre continuity; Basic checks; Live (energized), bulk dead and connected dead pairs/fibres; An overview of the four types of splices/fusions.
Ask participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.1.36
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Lesson 2 Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions Duration
2 hours 15 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • •
Define two types of splices/fusions: straight and branch; Show how to illustrate straight and branch/fusions on a work plan.
Materials - M4L2 PowerPoint;
- Copper cables with different characteristics;
- Splicing job aid
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Mention that in order not to clutter the diagrams in this lesson, cable lengths and network categories were not entered; however, as a rule, they should be.
4.2.1
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Preamble Duration
2 minutes In this lesson, you will learn about straight and branch splices/fusions. Remember that these types of splices/fusions are only possible during cable installation.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.2
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
1. Straight splices/fusions Duration
30 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L2 PowerPoint presentation.
Definition
A straight splice/fusion is the junction of two new copper or fibre optic cables. These cables may be the same or different. In fact, it is possible to splice or fuse two cables with a different sheath, gauge, size and/or insulation. Examples (identical cables)
178,1-600
178,1-600
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 600-26
F12, 1-48 34N2LT-048
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
F12,1-48 34N2LT-048
Point out the bold cable lines (proposed cable) and the fact that two cables are involved, explaining why the splice/fusion is referred to as straight.
4.2.3
Module 4 : Splicing
Definition (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Examples (different cables)
1)
Instructor's notes
108, 1-600
108, 1-400
BKTF 600-26
BKTB 400-26
Point out that the cables are different sizes (600 and 400 pairs) and that the cable sheath (fourth letter in the alpha sequence) is different. (F= sealed PAP and B = sealed Alpeth).
2)
15,101-200
23,1-200 10,301-400 15,101-200
AJTB 400-26
BJMB 400-24
23,1-200 10,301-400
Instructor's notes Point out that the cables are the same size but of a different gauge (associated with the third letter in the alpha sequence and the end of the numeric sequence: M=24 and T=26). Draw attention to the fact that three cable numbers are indicated (23, 10 and 15).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.4
Module 4 : Splicing
Definition (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Examples (different cables) 3) F13,1-60
F13,1-24
34NCLT-060
34NCLT-024
Instructor's notes
Point out that the fibre cables are different sizes.
Illustrating straight splices/fusions
When installing cable, the designer plans splices/fusions according to three fundamental splicing concepts: • Provisionable splice; • Nonprovisionable splice; • Future access and stored slack.
Instructor's notes
It is better not to go into details about these concepts. Simply mention them so the participants understand that splicing is a planned activity that does not simply occur at the end of a cable reel or when the cable type changes. These design standards make it possible, among other things, to reduce the number of splices, minimize opening splices and avoid exposing working pairs. The designer must have an overview of the Network in order to determine: • the size of the cable (for current and future use); • the pair numbering to use. The following pairs can be found in a cable: • Live (energized); • Connected dead (fictitious dead count); • Bulk dead (dead count).
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Make sure that the participants understand pair numbering: live, connected and bulk dead (Lesson 1 General).
4.2.5
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Illustrating straight splices/fusions (cont'd)
The following is a concrete situation that illustrates the designer’s choice. A residential development currently under construction along Forest Boulevard will need 300 pairs. This is phase 1 of the project. When these units are sold, phase 2 will begin. The developer and municipality expect the second phase to be built within two years.
Phase 2
Forest Boulevard
Phase 1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.6
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Illustrating straight splices/fusions (cont'd)
The designer decides to immediately install a 600-pair copper cable along the boulevard. He energizes 300 pairs to feed phase 1 customers and numbers the other 300 bulk dead pairs. Example 1 Cable count with bulk dead pairs Phase 2
Phase 1 18,1-300 18,1-600 300D BKTF BHAF 600-26 600-22
18,1-300 18,1-300 300D 300D BKMB 600-24 BKTB 600-26
18,1-300 = 300 live pairs
18,1-300 = 300 live pairs
300D = 300 bulk pairs dead dead pairs pairs
300D = 300 bulk pairs deaddead pairs pairs
Instructor's notes
18,1-300 100D BKMB 400-26 BKTB 300-24 18,1-300 = 300 live pairs 100D = 100 bulk pairs dead dead pairspairs
Using the previous example, point out that for a straight splice/fusion, the live pairs are entered before the dead pairs in the cable count. This is due to the dead copper pairs principle which asks to always use the outside pair bundles, for dead pairs, to ensure protection if ever a breaking of cable would happen.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.7
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Illustrating straight splices/fusions (cont'd)
The designer must also number the 300 pairs planned for phase 2 using connected dead pair numbering.
Example 2: Cable count with connected dead pairs Phase 2
Phase 1
18,1-300 18,1-300 300D D3601 -3900 BKMB 600-24 BKTB 600-26
18,1-300 18,1-600 D3601 -3900 BKTF BHAF 600-26 600-22
18,1-300 = 300300 livelive pairs pairs
18,1-300 = 300300 livelive pairs pairs D3601 -3900 = 300 pairs connected connected deaddead pairspairs
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
D3601 -3900 = 300 pairs connected connected deaddead pairspairs
18,1-300 100D BKMB 400-26 BKTB 300-24 18,1-300 = 300300 livelive pairs pairs 100D = 100 bulk pairs dead pairs
As a designer, ask the participants what numbering they would choose for phase 2 (connected or bulk dead pairs) and ask them to justify their choice. Answer: Use connected dead pairs because that would avoid having to open the splice between BKTF 600-26 and BKTB 600-26 when phase 2 work begins.
4.2.8
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Two basic checks
When a splice/fusion is illustrated on a work plan, you must ensure that: 1. the cable count corresponds to the cable size; 2. the principle of continuity is respected for the live and connected dead pairs. You can perform these checks by going back to the examples on Forest Boulevard. The following tables show these checks.
Example with bulk dead pairs. 18,1-300 incl. in 18,1-300 18,1-300 300D BKTF 600-26
Cable count (customer side)
18,1-300 incl in 18,1-300 18,1-300 300D BKTB 600-26
18,1-300 100D BKTB 400-26
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office?
BKTB 400-26 (size OK) 18,1-300 (300 pairs)
Yes: included in BKTB 600-26
100D (100 pairs)
Not required: bulk dead pairs
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice? YES BKTB 600-26 (size OK) 18,1-300 (300 pairs)
Yes: included in BKTF 600-26
300D (300 pairs)
Not required: bulk dead pairs
Is the principle of continuity to this splice? YES BKTF 600-26 (size OK) 18,1-300 (300 pairs) 300D(300 pairs)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.9
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Example with connected dead pairs (dead count) 18,118,1-300 included in 18,1-300
18,118,1-300 included in 18,1-300
18,1-300 D3601-3900 -3900
18,1-300 D3601-3900 -3900
18,1-300 100 D
BKTF 600-26
BKTB 600-26
BKTB 400-26
Connected dead pairs are represented in the preceding count. Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office?
BKTB 400-26 (Size OK)
18,1-300 (300 pairs)
Yes: included in the BKTB 600-26
100 D (100 pairs)
Not required: bulk dead pairs
Is the principle of continuity to this splice? YES BKTB 600-26 (Size OK)
18,1-300 (300 pairs)
Yes: included in BKTF 600-26
D3601-3900 (300 pairs)
Yes: included in BKTF 600-26 (connected dead pairs to this splice)
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice? YES BKTF 600-26 (Size OK)
18,1-300 (300 pairs) D3601-3900 (300 pairs)
Note to the instructor
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out that the principle of continuity is not obligatory for connected dead pairs. However, the use of this numbering implies that the pairs are connected to at least one splice.
4.2.10
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to individually do the following exercise. Correct the exercise as a group and ask the participants to explain the discrepancies they have identified. Mention the specific notes at the bottom of the tables. Allow 15 minutes for the exercise. Note : The answers are in your guide and in the Participant’s guide under the “Answers” tab During the exercise, visit the participants to verify their comprehension.
Exercise # 1
For the following straight splices/fusions, perform the following checks. Make sure that: 1. the cable count = the cable size 2. the principle of continuity is respected for live pairs and connected dead pairs Use the following tables, as needed, to help you with the check and make sure you have identified the discrepancies.
Case #1 118, 1-600
300D 118,201-500
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 600-26
Does the cable count correspond to the cable size?
Left cable:
_____yes_______
Right cable: _____yes_______ Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office?
300D (right cable)
No (bulk dead pairs)
118,201-500 (right cable)
Yes: Included in 118,1-600
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice? YES Note: This straight splice is incorrect; the right cable count should read 118,201-500, followed by 300D.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.11
Module 4 : Splicing
Case #2
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions F37,1-18 D125-130
F37, 13-24 D125-136
34R2LT-024
34N2LT-024
Does the cable count correspond to the cable size?
Left cable:
_____yes_______
Right cable: _____yes_______ Cable count (customer side) F37,1-18 (left cable)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office? NO: F37,1-12 is not included in F37,13-24 Yes: F37, 13-18 is included F37,13-24
D125-130 (left cable)
Yes: Included in D125-136
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion? NO Note.: Pairs D125-130 are connected to this fusion.
Case #3 D4001-4100 23, 1-100
D3601-3700 23, 1-100
AJTB 200-26
AJTB 200-26
Does the cable count correspond to the cable size?
Left cable:
_____yes_______
Right cable: _____yes_______ Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office?
D3601-3700 (right cable)
No: Not included in D4001-4100
23, 1-100 (right cable)
Yes: Included in 23,1-100
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion? YES Note: Pairs D3601-3700 are not connected to this splice. The principle of continuity is not obligatory for connected dead pairs/fibres. The dead pairs should be placed under the live pairs.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.12
Module 4 : Splicing
Case #4
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions F55,1-24 D125-148
F55,1-6 D107-124
34N2LT-048
34N2LT-024
Does the cable count correspond to the cable size?
Left cable:
_____yes______
Right cable: _____yes______ Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office?
F55, 1-6 (right cable)
Yes: Included in F55,1-24
D107-124 (right cable)
No: Not included in D125-148
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion? YES
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.13
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
2. Branch splices/fusions Duration
1 hour
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L2 PowerPoint presentation.
Definition
A branch splice/fusion is the junction of three or more new cables. These cable may be the same or different.
15,1-50
BKTB 100-26
BKTB 50-26
4.2.14
BKTB 400-26
15,1-50 13,51-100
31,1001-1200 15,1-50 13,51-100 100D
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
BKTB 200--26
31,1001-1200
Example of branch splice
Module 4 : Splicing
34N2LT-060
Example of branch fusion
F15,1-36 F16,1-12 D13-24
Definition (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
F16,1-12 F15,13-24
F15,1-12 D13-24
34N2LT-024
34N2LT-024
When placing new cables, branch splices/fusions allow assigning pairs groups to specific sections. In fact, the pairs utilization is immediate as the entire sector is in simultaneous development.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out the difference with the Forest Boulevard example (phases 1 and 2 are farther in time).
4.2.15
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Leafy sector
Forest Boulevard
Conifer sector
19,401-600
Leafy sector
19,1-200 19, 201-400 19,401-600
19, 1600 =
Conifer sector Illustrating branch splices/fusions
Splicing principles also apply to branch splices/fusions. When analysing branch splices/fusions, you will see: • • •
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
19, 1-400
19,201-400
Forest Boulevard
different cable sizes; different cable types (sheath, gauge and insulation) ; pairs numbering : live, connected dead, bulk dead.
4.2.16
Module 4 : Splicing
Illustrating branch splices/fusions (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Following is the representation of the branch splice associated to the Forest Boulevard situation.
19,1-400
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 400-26 19,401-600 19,201-400
19,1-600
Conifer sector
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.17
BKTB 200-26
Forest Boulevard
BKTB 200-26
19,401-600 -
Leafy sector
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
When a splice/fusion is illustrated on a work plan, you must ensure that:
Two basic checks
1. the cable count corresponds to the cable size; 2. the principle of continuity is respected for the live and connected dead pairs. Check the example on the following page. Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
BKTB 200-26 Conifer (Size OK)
19, 201-400 (200 pairs)
Yes : Included in BKTF 400-26
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? YES BKTF 400-26 (Size OK)
19, 1-400 (400 pairs)
Yes : Included in BKTF 600-26
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? YES BKTB 200-26 Leafy (Size OK)
19, 401-600 (200 pairs)
Yes : Included in BKTF 600-26
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? YES BKTF 600-26 (Size OK) 19, 1-600 (600 pairs)
Instructor's notes
Point out that, at the branch splice, it is important to identify the cable coming from the central office and to make the verification for all cables contained in the splice. As a group, proceed to the required verifications on the following cases. Use M4L2 PowerPoint presentation. For the participants, the answers are located under the "Answers" tab in their guide.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.18
Module 4 : Splicing
Exercise # 2 EX UP ER C RO IS G E
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
For the following branch splices/fusions, perform the following checks. Make sure that: 1. the cable count = the cable size 2. the principle of continuity is respected for live pairs and connected dead pairs.
34N2LT-012
F19,37-48
Case #1
F19,1-48 M149-160 D149 -160
34N2LT-024
F19,25-36 D149-154 M149-154 6D 6M
34N2LT-060
Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
34N2LT-024 (Size ?)
(Size OK)
F19,25-36 (12 fibres)
Yes : Included in 34N2LT-060
D149-154 (6 fibres)
Yes : Included in 34N2LT-060
6D (6 fibres)
No (bulk dead pairs)
34N2LT-012 (Size ?)
(Size OK)
F19,37-48 (12 fibres)
Yes : Included in 34N2LT-060
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion ? YES 34N2LT-060 (Size ?) (Size OK) F19,1-48 (48 fibres) D149-160 (12 fibres)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.19
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
36,1-1000 100D D4101-4200 BKTF 1200-26
Case # 2
36,251-450 D4501-4700 BKTF 400-26
50 1 -2 0 ,10 1-415 26 6 3 10 0D4 TF 20 K B
36,1-100 36,451-1000 250D BKTF 900-26
Cable count (customer side) BKTF 900-26 36,1-100 (100 pairs)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ? (Size OK) Yes : Included in BKTF 1200-26
36,451-1000 (550 pairs)
Yes : Included in BKTF 1200-26
250D (250 pairs)
No
BKTF 400-26 36,251-450 (200 pairs)
(Size OK) Yes : Included in BKTF 1200-26
D4501-4700 (200 pairs)
No (optional for dead connected pairs)
BKTF 200-26 36,101-250 (150 pairs)
(Size OK) Yes : Included in BKTF 1200-26
D4101-4150 (50 pairs)
Yes : Included in BKTF 1200-26
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? YES
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.20
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Verification Case # 2 (cont'd)
Cable count (customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
BKTF 1200-26
(Size OK)
36, 1-1000 (1000 pairs) 100D (100 pairs) D4101-4200 (100 pairs)
Instructor's notes
Ask participants to individually proceed to the next case verification. During the exercise, visit the participants to make sure they are able to do the verification. Once completed, ask one participant to present its answer. Answers are shown in M4L2 PowerPoint presentation. For participants, answers are located under the "Answers" tab in their guide.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.21
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Individually, proceed to the two verifications to make sure you have well understood.
Case #3
6
10, 1 -9 00 BK TF 900 -26
BKTF 900 -26
10,1-500 M4001 D4001 -4400
2
10,501-600 BKTF 100 -26
1
TF BK
5
26 010
3 BKTF 200 -26
-
10,601-700 100M 100D
10
51 ,7
0 85
4
Cable count (customer side) BKTF 900-26 Arb. 1 and 2
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
10,1-500 (500 pairs)
Yes : Included in BKTF 900-26 (10,1-900)
D4001-4400 (400 pairs)
No (Optional for dead connected pairs)
BKTF 100-26 Arb. 1 and 3 10,501-600 (100 pairs)
(Size OK)
(Size OK) Yes : Included in BKTF 900-26 (10,1-900)
BKTF 200-26 Arb. 1 to 4
(Size OK)
10,601-700 (100 pairs)
Yes : Included in BKTF 900-26 (10,1-900)
100D (100 pairs)
No (Bulk dead pairs)
BKTF 100-26 Arb. 1 to 5
(Size OK)
10,751-850 (100 pairs)
Yes : Included in BKTF 900-26 (10,1-900)
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? YES BKTF 900-26 Arb. 1 to 6
(Size OK)
10,1-900 (900 pairs)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.22
Module 4 : Splicing
Multiple network
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
It is possible to find the same pairs in two different cables going towards customers. This situation is particular to copper cables only.
BKTF 50-26
39,1-50
pairs 39,1-50 available here
39,1-50
BKTF 50-26
39,1-50
BKTF 50-26
pairs 39,1-50 available here
This concept makes live pairs available in many sites. Remember that, each pair can be used only once and at only one place. In the following illustration, pairs 39,1-50 of the cable from the Central Office are going in two directions. Each of the 50 pairs (2 wires) of the cable is spliced, as shown on the following picture.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out that a pair can be shown in different cable counts BUT can be assigned to ONLY ONE CUSTOMER. 4.2.23
Module 4 : Splicing
Multiple network (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Here is another multiple network example.
BKTF 1200-26
Note: The cable contains 45,1-100
45,1-1000 100D D4101-4200
Example #1
Note: The cable contains: 45,1-100 45,101-300 D4101-4200
45,1-800 D4101-4200 BKTF 900-26
BKTF 400-26
45,1-300 D4101-4200
0 10 , 145 D 6 0 0-2 10 20 F T BK
Note:The cable contains : 45,1-100 45,101-300 D4101-4200
In this example, the pair groups used in multiple network are: • • •
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
45, 1-100 45,101-300 D4101-4200
Have participants notice that : • pairs 45,1-100 go towards customers located in three directions (right, bottom and left) • pairs 45, 101-300 go towards customers located in two directions (right and bottom). • dead connected pairs D4101-4200 coming from the Central Office go towards two directions (right and bottom). 4.2.24
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
3. Splices / fusions with many cable numbers in their pair counts. Duration
25 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L2 PowerPoint presentation. You will also need some copper cable of different sizes.
Pairs/fibres numbering with many cable numbers.
It may appear that two or more cable numbers are shown in a cable pairs/fibres count. FA10,1-36 FA11,1-24 FA12,1-12 FA13,1-24 34N2LT-096
This appears when pairs or fibres of two or more cables, coming from the Central Office, are grouped in another cable. Examples are following. Note #1 : As in any splice or fusion, cable counts correspond to the cable size and the principle of continuity is respected. Note #2 : The order of the lines in a pairs / fibres count represents the sequence in which the pairs/fibres must be spliced during the splicing operation.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.25
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Example #1 F11,1-48
F11,1-48 F12,1-48
34N2LT-048
34N2LT-096 F12,1-48 34N2LT-048
Verification #1 : Counts correspond to the cable size. Verification #2 : The principle of continuity is respected (see below table). Cable count
Is it included in the count
(customer side)
of the cable from the central office ?
F11,1-48
Yes : Included in F11,1-48 (upper cable)
F12,1-48
Yes : Included in F12,1-48 (lower cable)
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion ? YES
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Using 3 cables, demonstrate that the pairs of 2 cables can be connected to the pairs of another bigger cable, as shown in ’example #1.
4.2.26
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Example #2 32,1-300 D3601-3700 33,1-100 34,1-100 32,1-100 D3601-3700 500D
BKTF 400-26 33,1-100 BKTF 100-26
BKTF 900-26 34,1-100 32,1-300 34,1-100
BKTF 100-26
BKTF 400-26
Verification #1 : Counts correspond to the cable size. Verification #2 : The principle of continuity is respected (see below table). Cable count (customer side) Right cable
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
33,1-100
Yes : Included in 33,1-100 (middle left cable)
34,1-100
Yes : Included in 34,1-100 (lower left cable)
32,1-100
Yes : Included in 32,1-300 (upper left cable)
D3601-3700
Yes : Included in D3601-3700 (upper left cable) (connected dead pairs at this splice)
500D
No (bulk dead pairs)
Right cable
32,1-300
Yes : Included in 32,1-300 (upper left cable)
34,1-100
Yes : Included in 34,1-100 (lower left cable)
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? YES
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.27
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
34N2LT-036
F46,1-6 F35,1-6 12M 12D
F35,1-12 F46,1-12 M13-24 D13-24
Example #3
34N2CLT-024
F35,7-12 F46,7-12 M13-24 D13-24 34N2LT-024
Verification #1 : Counts correspond to the cable size. Verification #2 : The principle of continuity is respected (see below table). Cable count (customer side) Right cable
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
F35,7-12
Yes : Included in F35,1-12 (upper cable)
F46,7-12
Yes : Included in F46,1-12 (upper cable)
D13-24
Yes : Included in D13-24(upper cable) (dead connected pairs at this splice)
Left cable
F46,1-6
Yes : Included in F46,1-12 (upper cable)
F35,1-6
Yes : Included in F35,1-12 (upper cable)
12D
No (bulk dead pairs)
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion ? YES
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.28
Module 4 : Splicing
Exercise # 3
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
When you see a straight or branch splice/fusion, between cables that have many cable numbers, you must also make sure that: • •
Each cable sheath pair count must correspond to the cable size, as identified in the cable alphanumerical sequence. The principle of continuity is respected for each cable.
Verify is theses elements are respected in the following diagrams.
Instructor's notes
In small groups, ask the participants to do the following exercise. Once completed, ask the teams to present, one after the other, their exercise answers. Note : Answers are written in your guide and under the "Answers" tab for the participants.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.29
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
F8, F10 1-12 D1- ,7-48 6
Case #1
34N 2LT -06 0
F10,1-6 D7-12
34N2LT-036
F8,1-12 F10,25-48
34R2LT-012
Verification #1 : Are counts corresponding to the cable sizes according to the alphanumerical sequence ?
Nearest Central Office cable ? Right cable ? Lower cable ? Case #1 (cont'd) Cable count (customer side) Right cable
______ ______ ______
Yes Yes Yes
Verification #2 : Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
F10,1-6
No
D7-12
No
Lower cable F8,1-12
Yes : Included in F8,1-12
F10,25-48
Yes : Included in F10,7-48
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion ? No Note : The principle of continuity is not respected between the cable (central office side) and the cable to the right. Note : Connected dead pairs D7-12 are not continuous at this fusion Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.30
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
34N2LT-060
F15,1-36 F16,1-12 D13-24
Case #2
F16,1-12 F15,1-12
F16,1-12 D13-24
34N2LT-024
34N2LT-024
Verification #1 : Are counts corresponding to the cable sizes according to the alphanumerical sequence ?
Nearest Central Office cable ?
______
Yes
Right cable ?
______
Yes
Left cable ? Case #2 (cont'd)
______
Yes
Verification #2 :
Cable count (customer side) Right cable
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
F16,1-12
Yes : Included in F16,1-12
D13-24
Yes : Included in D13-24
Left cable F16,1-12
Yes : Included in F16,1-12
F15,1-12
Yes : Included in F15,1-36
Is the principle of continuity respected at this fusion ? Yes In this example, there is a discrepancy. In deed, it is impossible to do multiple network with fibre cables. Fibres F16,1-12 in the central office side cable cannot be fused, at the same time, with the cable to the right and the one to the left. Note : Fibres D13-24 are continuous at this fusion. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.31
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
BKTF 1200-26
13,201-400 12,1-900 100D D4101-4300
Case #3
12,1-600 13,201-300 D4101-4200 BKTF 900-26
BKTF 400-26
12,601-700 12,,1-50 D4101-4250 100D
0 90 1-4 0 0 3 D4 , 1-30 -26 00 12 9 TF BK
Verification #1 : Are counts corresponding to the cable sizes according to the alphanumerical sequence ?
Nearest Central Office cable ?
______
No
Right cable ?
______
No
Lower cable ?
______
Yes
Left cable ?
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.32
______
Yes
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Case #3 (cont'd)
Verification #2 :
Cable count (customer side) Right cable
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office ?
12,1-600
Yes : Included in 12,1-900
13,201-300
Yes : Included in 13,201-400
D4101-4200
Yes : Included in D4101-4300
Lower cable 12,601-700
Yes : Included in 12,1-900
12,1-50
Yes : Included in 12,1-900
D4101-4250
Yes : Included in D4101-4300
100D
No
Left cable D4301-4900
No
12,1-300
Yes : Included in 12,1-900
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice ? Yes Note :To correctly represent this splice, cable counts should be corrected according to their size. Note : Dead connected pairs D4101-4250 are continuous at this splice.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.33
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 2 : Straight and Branch Splices/Fusions
Summary Duration
3 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered:
Instructor's notes
•
Straight splices / fusions and the way to illustrate them on a work plan;
•
Branch splices/fusions and the way to illustrate them on a work plan.
Ask participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.2.34
Lesson 3 :
Facility Splices/Fusions
46,1-200
BKTF 600-26
AJTB 400-26
AJTB 200-26
(46,401-600)200D AB 68F/AJTB 200-26 (46,401-600)200D AB 49F/AJTB 200-26
AJTB 400-26
1
AJTB 400-26
(not underlined)
46,1-200 (46,201-400) 200D
46,1-200 (D3601-3800) 46,201-400
Energized (cont’d)
Cut dead (underlined)
46, 1-600
46,1-200 (D3601-3800)46,201-400
Energized (underlined)
BKTB 200 -26
46, 401-600
(without transfer)
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Lesson 3 Facility splices / fusions (without transfer) Duration
1 hour 15 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • • -
Define the concepts of facility splices/fusions; Show how to illustrate facility splices/fusions: When installing cable When removing cable When replacing cable When energizing pairs or fibres When cutting pairs or fibres dead
Materials
- Splicing job aid.
- M4L3 PowerPoint;
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that in order not to clutter the diagrams, the network categories and cable lengths were not entered; however, as a rule, they should be.
4.3.1
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Preamble Duration
3 minutes As you saw in the last lesson, straight splices/fusions are the connection between two new cables, while branch splices/fusions involve connecting three or more new cables. In the existing network, we also have to do splicing work. Sometimes, you will have to open the sheath of an existing cable or to create a new splice/fusion by opening the sheath of an existing cable. The facility splices / fusions characteristic is that they always involve an existing cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.2
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
1. Facility splices and fusions Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L3 PowerPoint presentation.
M4L3 General information on facility splices/fusions
A facility splice or fusion means: Opening an existing splice/fusion to perform work or opening a cable sheath to create a new splice/fusion where work may be performed. These splices always involve at least one existing cable. Different types of work may be performed at facility splices/fusions. For example: • Cable placement; • Cable removal; • Pairs rearrangement like: • Energizing pairs or fibres; • Cutting pairs or fibres dead; • Pairs or fibres transfers.
Just like straight and branch splices and fusions, the cables that are joined at a facility splice / fusion may be the same or different. In fact, it is possible to splice or fuse cables with a different sheath, gauge, size, insulation and/or length. Here are some examples of facility splices or fusions. Example 1 Central office
Customers
New cable
Existing cable
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.3
New cable to splice or fuse to existing cable
Module 4 : Splicing
General information on facility splices/fusions (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Example 2
Customers
Existing cables Central office Customers
New cable
New cable
Customers
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.4
New cables to splice or fuse to existing cable from the central office
Module 4 : Splicing
General information on facility splices/fusions (cont'd))
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Example 3 Customers
Existing cables
Cut pairs to break continuity to customer end section. Central office
Customers
Existing cables
Customers
Instructor's notes
Explain, without going into great detail, that at the splice above, a splicer must cut pairs to stop feeding customers. This work is required when, among other things, a building has been destroyed by fire and the owners don’t plan on rebuilding at this location. It is also possible to cut pairs if it has been decided to feed customers with another cable from another direction or another distribution sector. Point out that as illustrated in the previous examples, facility splices and fusions always involve at least one existing cable. Ask the participants to individually answer the question on the next page. First, ask them how they can identify the cable coming from the central office on the diagrams (Answer: By using direction of feed arrows.)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.5
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Among the following splices and fusions, which are facility splices/fusions? Circle them.
Question
#1
#2
56,1-200
56,1-200
BKTF 200-26
BKTF 200-26
25,1-100
25,1-100
26,101-200
26,101-200
AJTB 200-26
AJTB 200-26
#3 8 -4 0 0 ,1 -16 0 06 F1 148 LTD N2 F10,1-12 34 (F10,37-48)12D D148-160
F10,13-36 34N2LT-024
34N2LT-036
BKTF 900-26
10, 1-9 00 BK TF 900 -26
10,1-500 D4001-4400
#4
10,501-600 BKTF 100-26
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
00 -7 01 26 ,6 010 0D 20 10 TF BK
50 -8 26 1 5 07 , 0 1 10 F T BK
Answer: Splices and fusions #2, #3 and #4. Focus on the fact that splice #1 is not a facility splice, because a facility splice or fusion must include at least one existing cable (thin line). In fact, it involves opening an existing splice or sheath of an existing cable.
4.3.6
Module 4 : Splicing
Cable work
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
At facility splices and fusions, it is possible to perform the following works: •
Install, remove and replace a cable;
•
Energize pairs/fibres;
•
Cut pairs/fibres dead;
•
Transfer pairs/fibres;
•
Add/remove slack;
•
Rearrange cables (N/C – no cable)
Each type of work will be presented in the following pages.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.7
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
2. Installing, removing and replacing cables Duration
30 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L3 PowerPoint presentation.
Installing copper or fibre cables
It sometimes becomes necessary to open an existing splice or the sheath of an existing cable to splice or fuse one or more new cables so as to feed new customers or to meet the additional needs of existing customers. The location where the cable is opened to connect a new cable is referred to as a facility fusion or splice. Just like for any other splice or fusion, the pair or fibre count of the cables must correspond to the size of these cables. As well, the principle of continuity must be respected. In the field, the work is carried out in this order: 1. Linemen install the new cable on previously installed poles. New cable installation
2. Splicers connect the pairs (or fibres) of the new cable to the existing cable.
New cable spliced to existing cable
In the following pages, you will learn how to illustrate the installation of a new cable at a facility splice or fusion. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.8
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Instructor's notes
Explain the following three examples. Ask a participant to indicate the purpose of the direction of feed arrow. Ask them to check whether the counts correspond to the cable sizes and whether the principle of continuity is respected.
Examples of facility splices/fusions with cable installation
Example 1
Existing cables 1
BKTF 600-26
BKTB 400-26 BKTB 200-26
46, 1-400
46,401-600
46, 1-600
New cable
2
New development
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.9
Module 4 : Splicing
Removing or abandoning cables
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Sometimes an existing splice/fusion or the sheath of an existing cable must be opened to remove or abandon one or more cables, for example, when a building is destroyed by fire, when a cable is damaged and must be changed (repair) or when customers change the location of their equipment room in a building. To remove or abandon a cable, you must cut its pairs or fibres. In the field, the work is performed in the following order: 1. Splicers cut the pairs (or fibres) of the cable to be removed or abandoned at the splice or fusion. Cut cable
2. Linemen remove the cable (in case of removal only).
Removed cable
In the following pages, you will see how to illustrate facility splices and fusions involving a cable removal or abandon.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.10
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Instructor's notes
Explain the following examples. For each case, specify the order in which the work must be performed in the network. Check with them that the counts correspond to the cable sizes and that the principle of continuity is respected to these splices. Remember that to indicate a cable removal, you must enter “RM” and the final cable length to be removed in front of the cable’s alphanumeric sequence.
Examples of facility splices/fusion involving cable removal or abandon
Example 1
Existing cables 1
BKTF 600-26
BKTB 400-26
RM 12F/BKTB 200-26
46, 1-400
46,401-600
46, 1-600
Existing cable to remove
2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.11
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Examples of facility splices/fusions involving cable removal or abandon (cont'd)
Example 2
1
2 F31,1-12
F31,1-48
RM 99F/34N2LT-012 34N2LT-024
F31, 25-48
34N2LT-048
12D F31,13-24 34N2LT-024
Example 3
2
AJTB 900-26
100D (10,1-200)200D (D3601-3700)100D (20,1101-1200)100D (10,1001-1100)100D
10,1-200 20,1001-1100 10,1001-1100 D5001-5400 100D
For a cable abandon, you must enter each cable count line in parentheses followed by an underlined bulk dead count corresponding to the number of cut fibres or pairs. The letters AB indicate that a cable abandon is involved.
1
10,1-500 20,1001-1200 10,1001-1200 AJTB 900-26
AB 50F/AJTB 600-26
10,201-400 10,1101-1200 20,1101-1200
AJTB 400-26
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.12
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Sometimes you have to create or open facility splices or fusions to replace an existing cable with a new cable.
Examples of facility splices/fusions with cable replacement
The following example shows a facility splice with cable replacement.
Instructor's notes
Point out that the counts correspond to the cable sizes and the principle of continuity is respected to the following splices. Example 1: Replacing a copper cable.
51F
10,801-1000
1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
10,751-800 BKTF 50-26
10,601-1000 23F RM 23F/BKTF 400-26
BKTM 200-24
10,401-1000 43F BKTF 600-26
F 23
10,401-1000 BKTF600-26
4.3.13
2
64F
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
3. Energizing and cutting pairs/fibres dead Duration
20 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L3 PowerPoint presentation.
M4L3 Energizing pairs and fibres
To use available dead pairs and fibres (connected and bulk) to serve new customers or provide additional service to existing customers, you must energize these pairs or fibres. Energizing involves splicing dead pairs or fusing dead fibres to live pairs or fibres to a cable from the central office. To energize dead pairs/fibres, a splicer simply splices or fuses them to the live pairs/fibres of a cable from the central office. Central office
Live pairs/fibres
Dead pairs/fibres
Customers
To serve customers, these pair/fibres must be spliced or fused
Central office
Live pairs/fibres
Pairs/fibres now live
Customers
The splice or fusion made it possible to energize dead pairs/fibres
When dead pairs/fibres are energized, they take on the numbers of the live pairs/fibres to which they are spliced. In the following pages, you will learn how to illustrate the energizing of dead pairs/fibres.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.14
Module 4 : Splicing
Energizing bulk dead pairs and fibres
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
On a work plan, you may see this situation: bulk dead pairs 100D must be energized, and therefore spliced to pairs 10,1-100. 10, 1-100
100D
BKTF 100-26
BKTB 100-26
Dead pairs 100D
Live pairs 10,1-100
MUST BECOME 10, 1-100
10,1-100
BKTF 100-26
BKTB 100-26 Dead pairs 100D Become live 10,1-100
Live pairs 10,1-100
To illustrate the pair energizing work, you must indicate the old count (bulk or fictitious dead) in brackets followed by the new underlined count. Underlining the new count tells the splicer and the Facilities group that the work must be performed at the previous splice (between the cable whose count is underlined and the previous cable from the central office). 1 10, 1-100
(100D)10,1-100
BKTF 100-26
BKTB 100-26
The diagram above illustrates the work to energize 100 bulk dead pairs by splicing them to live pairs 10,1-100. Once the work is completed, pairs 100D become 10,1100.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.15
Module 4 : Splicing
Breakdown of pair count
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
It is very important that you be able to adequately analyze and enter cable and pair numbering regardless of the method used by the originator to enter the original information. Example:
(D6001 -6400)18,1-400 (M6001 900 18,401-900 ADTC 900-26/UG 26/SOUT In the above example, it appears at first, that 400 pairs are energized by 900 pairs. This indicates that a more detailed analysis is required. Breakdown method
STEP 1: Break down the cable numbering in brackets into groups of 100, 50 or 25 pairs etc… In the above case, all the pairs are divisible by 100. Therefore, break down the pair numbering into hundreds. (D6001 -6400)18,1 -400 (M6001 900 18,401 -900 ADTC 900-26/UG BEFORE D6001-6100 D6101-6200 D6201-6300 D6301-6400
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Use the PowerPoint M4L3 presentation to explain the pair numbering breakdown method.
4.3.16
Module 4 : Splicing
Breakdown of pair count (cont'd) Breakdown method (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
STEP 2: Proceed in the same manner as step 1 for the pair numbering not in brackets.
During step 1, you broke pairs down into hundreds. Follow the same procedure in step 2. Then, opposite each pair group in step 1, energized, cut dead and/or transferred pairs in the same order.
(D6001 -6400)18,1 -400 900 18,401 -900 ADTC 900 -26/UG BEFORE
AFTER
D6001-6100 D6101-6200 D6201-6300 D6301-6400 18,401-500 18,501-600 18,601-700 18,701-800 18,801-900
18,1-100 18,101-200 18,201-300 18,301-400 18,401-500 18,501-600 18,601-700 18,701-800 18,801-900
STEP 3:
Determine the elements that changed by comparing the pair groups line by line.
BEFORE D6001-6100 D6101-6200 D6201-6300 D6301-6400 18,401-500 18,501-600 18,601-700 18,701-800 18,801-900
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.17
AFTER changes to changes to changes to changes to does not change does not change does not change does not change does not change
18,1-100 18,101-200 18,201-300 18,301-400 18,401-500 18,501-600 18,601-700 18,701-800 18,801-900
Module 4 : Splicing
Breakdown of pair count (cont'd) Breakdown method (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
STEP 4:
As you have just learned, only the part that changes is indicated in brackets. Therefore, cross out in the breakdown all pairs that do not change.
Consecutive
BEFORE D6001-6100 D6101-6200 D6201-6300 D6301-6400 18,401-500 18,501-600 18,601-700 18,701-800 18,801-900
AFTER changes to changes to changes to changes to does not change does not change does not change does not change does not change
18,1-100 18,101-200 18,201-300 18,301-400 18,401-500 18,501-600 18,601-700 18,701-800 18,801-900
Consecutive
Consecutive
Then check whether the unchanged pair groups and the changed pair groups are consecutive and have the same cable number.
STEP 5:
Correct the cable and pair numbering above the cable characteristics on the draft.
(D6001-6400)18,1-400 18,401-900 ADTC 900-26/UG Make sure all the requirements are met:
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Only the part that changes is indicated in brackets.
•
The pair numbering corresponds to the cable size before and after the transfer.
4.3.18
Module 4 : Splicing
Breakdown of pair count (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
This is another more complex example. D27
(D27-31) 63,201-202 D43-81 D30-31 D120-141 D144-149 57,1-75 D76-100 57,101-125 57,326-327 (D126-130) 59,615 D401-473 D129-130 N/A 275-19/UG
Breakdown method (cont'd)
In this type of case, you will have to break down the pairs by smaller groups, sometimes using a single pairs. After, you will have to identify the pairs that change and the ones that don't change.
D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D43-81 D120-141 D144-149 57,1-75 D76-100 57,101-125 D126 D127 D128 D129 D130 D401-473
does not change changes to changes to does not change does not change does not change does not change does not change does not change does not change does not change changes to changes to changes to does not change does not change does not change
D27 63,201 63,202 D30 D31 D43-81 D120-141 D144-149 57,1-75 D76-100 57,101-125 57,326 57,327 59,615 D129 D130 D401-473
N/A 275-19/UG Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out that the dead pairs numbering DOESN'T RESPECT the established rule, i.e.: higher than 3600. Specify that this pair numbering comes from a real map and that they can expect to see similar cases in the map. 4.3.19
Module 4 : Splicing
Breakdown of pair count (cont'd) Breakdown method (cont'd)
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
The last thing to do is to correct the cable and pair numbering above the cable characteristics on the draft, by keeping, in brackets, only what's changing and by merging consecutive pairs.
D27 (D28-29)63,201-202 D30-31 D43-81 D120-141 D144-149 57,1-75 D76-100 57,101-125 (D126-127)57,326-327 (D128)59,615 D129-130 D401-473
N/A 275-19/UG Make sure all the requirements are met:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Only the part that changes is indicated in brackets.
•
The pair numbering corresponds to the cable size before and after the transfer.
Ask participants if they have any question on pair counts breakdown.
4.3.20
Module 4 : Splicing
Instructor's notes
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Ask participants to do the following exercise. Then, correct the exercise using the PowerPoint presentation. The answers are in your guide and under the "Answers" tab for participants.
For each of the following cases, represent, in the reserved space, the FINAL numbering as it should be displayed on a work plan. Note : Remember to break down the numbering when required. Case #1 FINAL NUMBERING 98,1-300 98,1-100 25,326-400 D8301-8600 D8576-8600 BKMB 400-24/AER Exercise # 1
BKMB 400-24/AER
Instructor's notes
Answer : 98,1-100 (D8301-8500)98,101-300 (D8501-8575)25,326-400 D8576-8600 BKMB 400-24/AER
Case #2
FINAL NUMBERING
F11,13-16 F11,13-20 F18,41 D605-610 F18,45-46 D311-312 D312 FC11,1 34MCL12+1-22/UG
Instructor's notes
34MCL12+1-22/UG
Answer : F11,13-16 (D605-608)F11,17-20 (D609)F18,41 (D610)F18,45 (D311)F18,46 D312 FC11,1 34MCL12+1-22/UG
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.21
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Energizing bulk dead pairs and fibres (cont'd)
Bulk dead pairs and fibres are not spliced or fused to any splice or fusion. If you want signals to reach customers, the bulk dead pairs or fibres must be spliced or fused to each splice or fusion.
On a work plan, you must therefore indicate to the splicer and the Facilities group the energizing work required at each splice or fusion. Underlining the new count tells them where the physical work must be performed on the pairs or fibres. In the example below, it is clearly indicated that dead fibres 12D must be fused to each splice. Underlining a new count means that physical work must be performed at the previous fusion (with the cable from the central office)
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
F46,1-24
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
Fibres 12D must be fused to F46,13-24
Fibres 12D must be fused to F46,13-24
FIbres 12D must be fused to F46,13-24
F46, 1-24
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2
4.3.22
3
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Energizing connected dead pairs and fibres
Connected dead pairs may also be energized.
Example 1
Below, you see that connected dead pairs D3601-3800 must be spliced to live pairs 34,201-400 to be energized.
Instructor's notes
Explain that illustrating the energizing of connected dead pairs is the same as for bulk dead pairs.
1 34, 1-400
34, 1-200 (D3601-3800)34,201-400
BKTF 400-26
BKTB 400-26
34, 1-200 (D3601-3800)34,201-400
34, 1-400
Pairs D3601-3800 must be spliced to 34,201-400
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.23
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Energizing connected dead pairs and fibres (cont'd)
To energize connected dead pairs, the splicer need only go to the first splice/fusion (closest to the central office). He does not have to go to the other splices.
When connected dead pairs or fibres are energized, their pair numbering changes. The new count is only underlined at the first splice/fusion where the connected dead pairs or fibres must be spliced or fused. The pair numbering change will be automatically reflected at all other representation.
Instructor's notes
Using the diagram below, clearly explain why you don’t need an arb at each splice and also why you don’t need to underline the cable count at each splice. Indicate that it is mandatory only where the splicer must go. Underlining required Underlining not required 46,1-200 (D3601-3800)46,201-400
46,1-400
46,1-200 (D3601-3800)46,201-400
Pairs D3601-3800 must be spliced to 46,201-400
46, 1-200 (D3601-3800)46,201-400
46, 1-400
BKTF 400-26
BKTF 400-26
46, 1-200 (D3601-3800)46,201-400 BKTF 400-26
1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Splicing not required (Connected dead pairs are already spliced)
4.3.24
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Energizing and installing cables
When installing a cable from the central office, the new cable could energize dead pairs or fibres inside existing cables.
Instructor's notes
Explain the two following energizing examples. Specify that the new counts are underlined only on the cables located immediately after the splices where the energizing work is performed. Example 1
Fibres D25-36 of the existing right cable are energized by fibres F45,1-12 of the new cable. .
34N2LT-024
F11, 1-24 F10, 1-24
F45,1-24
1
34N2LT-048
F11, 1-18 F10,1-6 (D25-36)F45,1-12
F11, 1-18 F10,1-6 (D25-36)F45,1-12
34N2LT-036
34N2LT-036
2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Not underlined
Underlined
4.3.25
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Energizing and installing cables (cont'd)
Example 2
Pairs 500D of the cable located between arbs 2 and 3 are energized by pairs 57,1-500 of the new cable. In addition, pairs D4601-5200 of the cable located to the left of arb 2 are energized by pairs 57,601-1200 of the new cable.
Underlined
DCTZ 1200-26
Not underlined
57,1-1200
1
Underlined
Underlined
46,1-600 (D4601-5200) 57,601-1200
46,1-600 (D4601-5200) 57,601-1200
46, 1-100 (500D)57,1-500
46, 1-100 (500D)57,1-500
ADTC 1200-26
ADTC 1200-26
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 600-26
2
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
ADTC 1200-26
46, 1-1200
3
Explain that it is the cable count located after the splice (customer side) that is underlined.
4.3.26
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Energizing bulk dead pairs with connected dead pairs
Sometimes, bulk dead pairs/fibres are spliced/fused together to obtain connected dead pairs/fibres. In this case, we say that we are energizing bulk dead pairs into connected dead pairs/fibres.
Instructor's notes
Explain the following example. Pay attention to the splices where physical work is performed (Underlining and arbs). Example 1
In this example, you will notice that: •
50 dead pairs (50D) are energized by 10,101-150. A splicer must go to all the splices to splice the pairs because bulk dead pairs are involved.
•
50 dead pairs (50D) are spliced together to become connected dead pairs (D3601-3650).
10,1-200
10,1-100 (50D)10,101-150 (50D)D3601-3650
10,1-100 (50D)10,101-150 (50D)D3601-3650
10,1-100 (50D)10,101-150 (50D)D3601-3650
BKTF 200-26
BKTF 200-26
BKTF 200-26
BKTF 200-26
1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2
4.3.27
3
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to do the following exercise. Then correct it using the PowerPoint presentation. The answers are in your guide and under the “Answers” tab in the Student's guide.
Exercise # 2
Illustrate the situations described on the diagrams.
Case #1
On the diagram below, illustrate the energizing of 100 connected dead pairs by pairs 27, 101-200 of the cable from the central office. N.B. Remember to indicate the arbs and underline the new counts if necessary. 26, 1-300 D4001-4100 BKTF400-26 26,1-300 27,1-300
27,1-100 BKTF 100-26
BKTF 600-26
Instructor's notes
Answer : See following diagram.
26, 1-300 (D4001-4100)27,101-200 BKTF400-26 26,1-300 27,1-300
27,1-100 BKTF 100-26
BKTF 600-26 1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.28
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
On the diagram below, illustrate:
Case #2
• •
the energizing of 100 connected dead pairs D60016100 by pairs 15, 301-400 of the cable from the central office; the energizing of 200 bulk dead pairs by connected dead pairs D3601-3800 of the cable from the central office.
N.B. Remember to indicate the arbs and underline the new counts if necessary.
15,1-400 D3601-3800 BKTF 600-26
Instructor's notes
15,1-400 D3601-3800 BKTF 600-26
15, 1-100 D6001-6100
15, 1-100 D6001-6100
BKTF200-26
BKTF200-26
15,101-300 200D BKTF 400-26
15,101-300 200D BKTF 400-26
Answer : See the following diagram.
15, 1-100 (D6001-6100)15,301-400
15, 1-100 (D6001-6100)15,301-400
BKTF200-26
BKTF200-26
1 15,101-300 (200D)D3601-3800 BKTF 400-26
15,101-300 (200D)D3601-3800 BKTF 400-26
2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.29
Module 4 : Splicing
Cutting pairs/fibres dead
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
To stop providing services to customers or to use pairs/fibres at other locations, you sometimes have to cut pairs/fibres dead To do so, a splicer goes to the splice and simply cuts the pairs or fibres (not energized).
To show a cutting pairs/fibres dead on a work plan, you must indicate the live pair/fibre count to be cut dead in brackets followed by a fictitious dead count. Example 2 : Cutting pairs into connected dead pairs 46,1-300 (46,301-400)D3601-3700
46,1-400
46, 1-400
46, 1-300 (46,301-400)D3601-3700
BKTF 400-26
BKTF 400-26 1
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to answer the question in their manual. Answer: Because a dead count (bulk dead count) would require the splicer to cut the pairs at each splice, which would be unnecessarily expensive. Explain that exceptionally, a dead count is used, for example, when the pairs terminate at the next splice. Question Why do you think a fictitious dead count (connected dead pairs) is used rather than a dead count (bulk dead pairs)? ______________________________________________
______________________________________________ ______________________________________________ Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.30
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Cutting pairs/fibres dead (cont'd)
When pairs or fibres are cut dead at a splice or fusion, it means they are dead all along the path following the splice or fusion in question. Just as for pair/fibre energizing, the new count is underlined only at the splices/fusions where physical work is performed by the splicer. Cutting connected dead pairs/fibres dead
On the diagram below, the splicer must cut the pairs only at the first splice if he wants to obtain 100 connected dead pairs. You see that the count D3601-3700 is underlined only where the pairs are to be cut. You will also notice that only one arb is required. 46,1-300 (46,301-400)D3601-3700
46,1-400
46,1-300 (46,301-400)D3601-3700
Work not necessary at this splice ( The pairs are already spliced)
46, 1-400
46, 1-300 (46,301-400)D3601-3700
46, 1-300 (46,301-400)D3601-3700
BKTF 400-26
BKTF 400-26
BKTF 400-26
1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.31
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Cutting pairs/fibres dead examples, (cont'd)
Example 1
Below, you see pairs/fibres cut dead by cable removal. • Pairs 57, 1-500 are cut dead at the splice at arb 2 and become D4101-4600. • Pairs 57,501-1000 of the lower cable are cut dead at the splice at arb 2 and become 500D. A bulk dead count is used because the 57, 501-1000 count is not included in the following cable count (towards the customers). • Pairs 57,1001-1200 of the lower cable are also cut dead at the splice at arb 2 and become D3801-4000.
RM 67F/DCTZ 1200-26
57,1-1200
1
Cut dead (Underlined)
Cut dead (continued) (Not underlined)
46, 1-100 (57,1-500)D4101-4600
46, 1-100 (57,1-500)D4101-4600
ADTC 1200-26
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 600-26
Cut dead (continued) (Not underlined)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
ADTC 1200-26
2
ADTC 900-26
Cut dead (Underlined)
46,101-600 46,101-600 (57,1001-1200)D3801-4000 (57,501-1000)500D 100D (57,1001-1200)D3801-4000
46, 1-1200
4.3.32
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Cutting pairs/fibres dead examples, (cont'd)
Example 2 (abandon) Below is an example of energizing and cutting pairs dead, and a cable abandon.
Cut dead (Underlined)
46, 1-600
46,1-200 (46,201-400) 200D
46,1-200
BKTF 600-26
AJTB 400-26
AJTB 200-26
(46,401-600)200D AB 68F/AJTB 200-26
AJTB 400-26 AJTB 400-26
Instructor's notes
(46,401-600)200D AB 49F/AJTB 200-26
46,1-200 (D3601-3800)46,201-400
Energizing (continued) (Not underlined)
46,1-200 (D3601-3800)46,201-400
1
Energizing (Underlined)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
BKTB 200 -26
46, 401-600
Note: For cutting pairs dead, the bulk dead count 200D is used because pairs 46,201-400 do not continue in the next cable (towards the customers). This is one of the few occasions when cutting pairs dead can be indicated with a bulk dead count.
Explain that when abandoning a cable, the pairs are cut dead and become bulk dead. In this case, live pairs and connected dead pairs are cut into bulk dead pairs to secure the on site network. 4.3.33
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Cutting pairs/fibres dead examples, (cont'd)
It is also possible to cut connected dead pairs into bulk dead pairs. Example: (D6001-6050)50D
Instructor's notes
Example 2 shows that during an abandon, you must cut the pairs (or fibres) into bulk dead pairs. However, as example 3 shows, this is not necessary for a removal.
Example 3 (removal)
In this example, the right BKTB 200-26 cable must be removed. It is not necessary to illustrate cutting the pairs dead when removing cable.
For a removal, the pairs (or fibres) are cut dead. The count is not changed as the cable will disappear at final post in NetX.
10,1-200
10,1-100 D6001-6100
10,1-100 D6001-6100
BKTB 200-26
BKTB 200-26
RM 68F/BKTB 200-26 1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.34
2
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Exercise # 3 Duration
20 minutes
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to answer the questions below, working in small groups or individually. Once the exercises are completed, use the following answers to correct them.
G
EX P ER U O C R
IS E
Note: Participants can find the answers at the end of their manual under the “Answers” tab.
Instructions
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
For each of the following cases, identify the work required. Make sure the pair counts correspond to the cable size and that the principle of continuity is respected.
4.3.35
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Answer the following question:
Case #1
•
According to the diagram, what work is to be performed?
34N2LT-048
34N2LT-048
34N2LT-036
34N2LT-048
34N2LT-036
F11,13-24 (F11,1-12)D1-12 D48-72
F10,1-24 (D101-124)F11,1-24
F11,13-24 (F11,1-12)D1-12 D48-72
F10,1-24 (D101-124)F11,1-24
F11,1-24 F10,1-24
1
_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Instructor's notes
Answer: • 24 fibres must be energized and 12 fibres must be cut dead at the splice at arb 1. Note: The pairs/fibre counts correspond to the cable size and the principle of continuity is respected except for the two lower cables. In effect, the size of these cables should be 48 fibres and not 36. Also, fibres F11,13-24 are duplicated.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.36
Module 4 : Splicing
Case #2
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Answer the following question: •
According to the diagram, what work is to be performed? 1
13,1-600 (13,601-1200) D4001-4600
13,1-600 (13,601-1200)D4001-4600
ADTC 1200-26
ADTC 1200-26
AB 28F/ADTC 1200-26
(13,1-1200)1200D
4
0 0 60 400 6 ,1- 013 1 ,34 0-2 20 1 59 TZ DC
13,1-400 (200D)59,3401-3600
3
BKTF 600-26
2
13,1-400 (200D)59,3401-3600
BKTF 600-26
_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Instructor's Answer: notes • Install cable DCTZ 1200-26 located between arbs 1 and 2. • Abandon cable ADTC 1200-26 located between arbs 2 and 4. • Cut pairs 13,601-1200 dead at the splice at arb 2. • Energize 200D into 59, 3401-4000 at the splice at arbs 2 and 3. Note: The pair/fibre counts correspond to the cable size and the principle of continuity is respected. The cable pair count 59,3401-4000 is impossible as the biggest cable is a 3600 pairs.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.37
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Answer the following question:
Case #3
•
According to the diagram, what work is to be performed?
RM 34F/BKTB 200 -26
27, 201-400
3
27, 1-600
27,1-200 (100D)D3801-3900 (100D)27,201-300
27,1-200 (100D)D3801-3900 (100D)27,200-300
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 400-26
BKTF 400-26
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
27,301-600 D3701-3800
AJTB 400-26
27,301-600 D3701-3800
AJTB 400-26
1
2
Answer: • Remove cable BKTB 200-26 located between arbs 1 and 3. • Energize bulk dead pairs 100D into 27,201-300 at arbs 1 and 2. • Energize bulk dead pairs 100D into connected dead pairs D3801-3900 at arbs 1 and 2. Note: The pair/fibre counts correspond to the cable size and the principle of continuity is respected. except for the 27,200300 pair count (to the right). 4.3.38
Module 4 : Splicing
Case #4
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Answer the following question: •
According to the diagram, what work is to be performed? 23,1-400 (200D)D4001-4200
23, 1-600
BKTF600-26/UG
BKTF600-26/UG
1
23,1-400 (200D)D4001-4200
27,1-200 (200D)D4001-4200
BKTF400-26/UG
BKTF400-26/UG
2
3
_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________
Instructor's notes
Answer : • Energize 200 bulk dead pairs into connected dead pairs D4001-4200 at arbs 1, 2 and 3. • Cable 27 should read 23. NOTE: The pair/fibre counts correspond to the cable size and the principle of continuity is respected.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.39
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 3 : Facility splices / fusions (without transfer)
Summary Duration
2 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered:
Instructor's notes
•
The concepts of facility splices and fusions;
•
Installing, removing and replacing cable at facility splices and fusions;
•
Energizing pairs/fibres at facility splices;
•
Cutting pairs/fibres dead at facility splices.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.3.40
Lesson 4 Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer 100 pairs 46,1-100 transfered from a new cable 78,1-100
BKMB 50-24
(46,1-50)46,51-100
50 pairs 46,1-50 transfered from an existing cable 46,51-100 44 Working pairs Among the 150 transfered pairs 50 10
44
0
0
12
0
2
(46,1-100)78,1-100
BKTB 100-26
BKTB 100-26
78 ,120 BK 0 M B 20 026
46, 1-100
1
12 working pairs assigned to special services
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Lesson 4 Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer Duration
4 hours 15 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you will be able to: • • •
Materials
Define the concepts of pair and fibre transfers at a facility splice or fusion; Show how to illustrate facility splices/fusions with transfer on a work plan; Identify discrepancies pertaining to splices and fusions with transfer.
- M4L4 PowerPoint; - “Splicing” job aid.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that in order not to clutter the diagrams, the network categories and cable lengths were not entered; however, as a rule, they should be.
4.4.1
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Preamble Duration
5 minutes In the previous lesson, you learned that a facility splice could be opened or created to perform various work: • To install, remove and replace a cable; • To energize pairs/fibres; • To cut pairs/fibres dead. In this lesson, you will see that at a facility splice, it is also possible to: • Transfer pairs/fibres; • Add/remove slack; • Rearrange cables (N/C – no cable).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.2
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
1. Pair and fibre transfers Duration
45 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L4 PowerPoint presentation.
Definition
Pairs/fibres are transferred when live pairs/fibres are cut and then energized by other live pairs/fibres. During a transfer, pairs or fibres change numbers, taking on the numbers of the new live pairs and fibres to which they are spliced. For example, the fibre initially energized by F10,1 must be transferred to be energized by F11,1. Fibre F10,1 must be transferred to become F11,1-12.
Central office
Live fibres F10,1-12
Live fibres F10,1-12 Customers
Live fibres F11,1-12
•
You must cut fibre F10,1 at splice 1. This fibre is then no longer energized. Fibre F10,1 is temporarily cut dead.
Central office
Live fibres F10,1-12
• Old fibre F10,1 is cut dead. • F10,2-12 are live Customers
Live fibres F11,1-12
•
You must cut fibre F10,1 at splice 1. This fibre is then no longer energized.
Central office
Live fibres F10,1-12
• Live fibre F11,1 • Live fibres F10,2-12 Customers
Live fibres F11,1-12
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.3
Old fibre F10,1 is fused to live fibre F11,1.
Module 4 : Splicing
Fibre transfer
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
In general, we try to avoid transferring working fibres because they have to be cut, causing temporary loss of service for the customers that use them. However, some situations require that we transfer working fibres, in which case special procedures must be followed. More specifically, Expertech must issue a “Threat” form when it opens a cable and ask the customers using the fibres to be transferred for a “release” since they will be deprived of service for a certain time.
Instructor's notes
Explain that when transferring fibres, the transferred fibres cannot transmit signals for a certain period of time and that the customers must be consulted (through a “release” request) before their service is temporarily cut.
Pairs transfer
However, with copper pairs, the transfer is made in one step. The splicer cuts and splices the pair at the same time (or within a very short time). Unless there are special services on these pairs, it is not necessary to ask for a release because the customer will not even realize that his pair has been transferred.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.4
Module 4 : Splicing
Illustrating transfers
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
The manner in which pair or fibre transfers are illustrated on a work plan is similar to energizing and cutting dead. In the cable count where the pairs/fibres have been transferred, you must indicate the initial numbers of the pairs/fibres in parentheses followed by their new numbers underlined. The number of pairs in brackets and the new numbering must be equal. Count before transfer
Count after transfer
10,1-50
(10, 1-50) 58,101-150
BKTB 50-26
BKTB 50-26
58,101-150
New cable
BKTB 50-26
In the transfer illustrated above, the pairs/fibres numbered 10, 1-50 will become 58,101-150. When transferring pairs, the pair/fibre counts before and after the transfer must correspond to the cable size. In the above example, you see that the count before the transfer (10, 1-50) corresponds to the size of BKTB 50-26 (50 pairs). You will also notice that count 58, 101150 also corresponds to a 50-pair size. The principle of continuity must also be respected. The count before and after the transfer must therefore be included in the count of the cable from the central office. Cable Count (Customer side)
Is it included in the count of the cables from the central office? Yes: included in 10,1-50 (upper left cable)
Before transfer: 10,1-50
Yes: included in 58,101-150 (lower left cable)
After transfer: 58,101-150
Is the principle of continuity respected to this splice/fusion? YES
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.5
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Illustrating transfers (cont'd)
In order for Facilities and the splicers to understand the transfer work to be performed, two symbols must be added.
Instructor's notes
Explain that Facilities prepares the transfer sheets and updates the IPAIRS database. On the transfer sheets used by the splicers and in IPAIRS, Facilities indicates, among other things, the number of each pair to be transferred with its new number along with other information (such as the service provided). With these sheets, the splicer knows how to perform the splice or fusion and whether a release is necessary. Transfer indicator (transfer boat) The first symbol, referred to as a “transfer indicator” or “transfer boat” makes it possible to provide the following information: D N E
D : Arbitrary Designation number N : Number of pairs/fibres transferred from a New cable E : Number of pairs/fibres transferred from an Existing cable
• Arbitrary Designation number The arb number is entered in the point of the symbol. This part of the symbol replaces the arb. • Pairs transferred from a new cable In the middle box, you must enter the number of pairs/fibres to be transferred from a new cable (which must be spliced/fused to a new cable from the central office). • Pairs transferred from an existing cable In the last box, you must enter the number of pairs/fibres to transfer from an existing cable (which are spliced/fused to an existing cable from the central office).
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain the following examples. Emphasize the steps to follow and the meaning of the numbers in the transfer indicator.
4.4.6
Module 4 : Splicing
Illustrating transfers (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
The following pages show examples of facility splices/fusions with transfer. Note: These illustrations are incomplete. You will learn a little later that a second symbol must be added to a facility splice or fusion with pair or fibre transfers.
Instructor's notes
The participants have not yet seen how to illustrate terminals. In this lesson, tell them that the terminals affected by transfers to splices must be listed in a note for Facilities. However, the way to prepare this list and how to determine the terminals affected by this work will be covered in the module on terminals.
Example 1: Transferring pairs from a new cable 50 2
50 pairs 10,1-50 transferred to pairs 18,101-50 of a new cable from the central office
10,1-50
(10, 1-50) 58,101-150
BKTB 50-26
BKTB 50-26
58,101-150
New cable
BKTB 50-26 1
This example shows a pair transfer from a NEW cable. Pairs 10,1-50 of the right cable are transferred to pairs 58,101-150 of the new cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.7
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Example 1: Transferring pairs from a new cable (cont'd) 12 2
12 fibres F10,1-12 transferred to fibres F31,1-12 of a new cable from the central office (F10,1-12)F31,1-12
34N2LT-012
34N2LT-012
F3 34 1,112 N 2L T01 2
F10,1-12
1
This example shows a fibre transfer from a new cable. Fibres F10, 1-12 of the right cable are transferred to fibres F31,1-12 of the new cable from the central office.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out that just like at any splice, the pair/fibre count of each cable corresponds to the cable size and the principle of continuity is respected.
4.4.8
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Example 2 : Transferring fibres from an existing cable
50
50 pairs 10,1-50 transfered to pairs 58,101-150 of an Existing cable in the central office
1
10,1-50
(10,1-50) 58,101-150
BKTB 50-26
BKTB 50-26
58,101-150
Existing cable
BKTB 50-26
This example shows a pair transfer from an existing cable. Pairs 10, 1-50 of the right cable are transferred to pairs 58,101-150 of an existing cable from the central office.
6
6 fibres F10,1-6 transferred to fibres F31,1-6 on an existing cable from the central office
F10,1-12
(F10,1-6)F31,1-6 F10,7-12
34N2LT-012
34N2LT-012
F3 34 1,112 N 2L T01 2
1
This example shows a fibre transfer from an existing cable. Fibres F10, 1-6 of the right cable are transferred to fibres F31, 1-6 of an existing cable from the central office.
Instructor's notes
Point out that just like at any splice, the pair/fibre count of each cable corresponds to the cable size and the principle of continuity is respected. Explain that the cut fibres and those that have not been fused must be insulated by the splicer.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.9
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Example 3 : Transferring 25 pairs 10,1-25 transferred from existing pairs from an existing cable 11,1-25 from the cable and a new cable
25 25
central office
2
25 pairs 10,26-50 transferred to new cable 58,125-150 from the central office
10,1-50 11,1-50
(10,1-25)11,1-25 (10,26-50)58,126-150
BKTB 100-26
BKTB 50-26
58,101-150 BKTB 50-26 1
Two transfers are illustrated on this diagram. The 25 pairs 10, 1-25 of the right cable must be transferred to pairs 11, 1-25 of the existing left cable from the central office. In addition, the 25 pairs 10,26-50 of the right cable must be transferred to pairs 58,126-150 of the new left cable, which also originates at the central office
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to individually answer the question below. Then ask a participant to give and explain his answer.
Question
On the following sketch, fill in the required numbers inside the transfer indicator.
Instructor's notes
Answer: At arb 2, 75 pairs must be transferred from a New cable and 25 pairs must be transferred from an Existing cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.10
2 75 25
Module 4 : Splicing
Illustrating transfers
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
To provide the Facilities group and splicers with additional information on the pairs to be transferred, a second symbol referred to as WCPT or Stop sign symbol is used. This symbol is found on a work plan next to the transfer indicator during a pair and fibre transfer. However, when transferring fibres, you must enter a zero in each box. Number of working pairs among the transferred pairs WCT
LST
Number of working pairs assigned to line transfers •
High Speed services * HS
SS
Number of transferred working pairs assigned to special services
The number of High speed services implicated in a transfer must be identified on the work plan as a note; we write the existing HS auxiliary equipment type with the new equipment type and the required address. I.E.: Note to Facilities and Expertech DSLAM transferred to RSLAM Opp.555 Arthur
Note: To find this information, you must consult the IPAIRS database updated by the Facilities group. • Number of working pairs among the transferred pairs The number of working pairs transferred is entered in this box. A working pair is, by definition, a pair in operation at a customer. Note: When transferring fibres, the fibres are not working or a release must be requested. A zero must therefore appear in this box.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Make a distinction between live pairs and working pairs.
4.4.11
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Pairs 10, 1-100 are live and pairs D6001-6100 are dead (connected). Among the live pairs, not all the pairs are
Customers
necessarily working. Central office
Working pairs
10,1-100 D6001-6100
10,1-100
Unused pairs
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.12
Future Customers
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
For example, below, the transfer indicator shows a transfer of 25 pairs from an existing cable. The WCPT symbol specifies that of the 25 pairs transferred, 15 are working.
Illustrating transfers (cont'd)
25 -
15
0
1
0
0
The splicer pays more attention to the 15 working pairs because they risk putting customers out of service at the time of transfer. •
Number of working pairs transferred assigned to line transfers This box is completed when a terminal must be replaced. Otherwise, enter “0.” You will learn more about how to complete this box in the module on terminals.
•
Number of working pairs assigned to special services In the lower right-hand box, you must enter the number of working pairs assigned to special services (option referred to as “879” due to form 879 associated with them). Some Bell customers pay to have special services, i.e., communication links that require a special network design or links other than basic residential and business telephone service. Examples of special services: Megalink, Microlink, ADSL (Internet High Speed), etc. These pairs assigned to special services cannot be cut and transferred without the customer’s consent. You must therefore ask for a release before transferring these pairs. Note: When transferring fibres, the fibres are not working or a release must be requested. Therefore, they cannot be assigned to special services and a zero must be entered in this box.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.13
Module 4 : Splicing
Illustrating transfers (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
The transfer indicator below shows a 25-pair transfer. The WCPT symbol specifies that of the 25 pairs transferred, 15 are working of which 4 are assigned to special circuits. 25 -
15
0
1
0
4
The splicer will pay close attention to the 15 working pairs to make sure that a release has been obtained for the 4 pairs assigned to special services.
Instructor's notes
Go over the following examples with the participants. Focus on the transfer steps and how to complete the boxes with the two symbols. Explain that just like at any splice, the pair/fibre count must correspond to the cable size and the principle of continuity must be respected.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.14
Module 4 : Splicing
Detailed examples of pair/fibre transfers with two symbols required
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Example 1 In this example, a transfer of 150 pairs is shown. You can see that 50 pairs were transferred from an existing cable and 100 pairs from a new cable. Of the 150 pairs transferred, 105 are working. Eight (8) of the working pairs are assigned to special services.
105 working pairs among the 150 transferred pairs
50 pairs 20,1-50 transferred from existing cable 19,1-50 100 pairs 19,51-150 transferred from new cable 33,1-100
50
105
0
0
8
8 working pairs assigned to special services
100 1
20,1-50 19,1-150
50D (20,1-50)19,1-50 (19,51-150)33,1-100
BKTB 200-26
BKTB 200-26
33,1-200 BKTB 200-26 1
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Make sure the participants understand the transfer steps well.
4.4.15
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Detailed examples of pair/fibre transfers with two symbols required (cont'd)
Example 2 This example shows a 150-pair transfer, i.e., 50 pairs from an existing cable and 100 pairs from a new cable. Of the 150 pairs transferred, 44 are working. Twelve (12) of the working pairs are assigned to special services.
50 pairs 46,1-50 transferred from existing cable 46,51-100 BKMB 50-24
(46,1-50) 46,51-100
100 pairs 46,1-100 transferred from new cable 78,1-100
44 working pairs among the 150 transferred pairs 50
44
0
0
12
10 0 2
(46,1-100) 78,1-100
BKTB 100-26
BKTB 100-26
78 ,120 BK 0 M B 20 0-2 4
46, 1-100
1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.16
12 working pairs assigned to special services
Module 4 : Splicing
Detailed examples of pair/fibre transfers with two symbols required (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Example 3 This example illustrates a transfer of 12 fibres and energizing of 6 fibres. Notice that the zeros are entered in the three boxes of the WCPT symbol.
12 fibres F11,13-24 transferred to existing cable F10,13-24 12
0
0
0
0
When transferring fibres, you have to enter 0 in the three boxes.
0
F11, 1-12 (F11,13-24)F10,13-24 (F10,13-24)D125-136
1
F11, 1-24 F10, 1-24
34N2LT-036
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
34N2LT-012
F10,1-6 (D101 -106)F10,7-12
34N2LT-048
Energize 6 fibres
Transfer 12 fibres
4.4.17
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
On the following sketches, fill in the required numbers inside both symbols.
Exercise # 1
N.B. Check whether the pair counts correspond to the cable size and whether the principle of continuity is respected.
Instructor's notes
Ask the students to complete the exercise. Then provide the answers. Note: The answers are in your guide and under the “Answers” tab in the students' guide. Ask them to make sure that in each case, the pair/fibre counts correspond to the cable size and the principle of continuity is respected.
BKMB 50-24
(15,1-50)15,51-100
Case #1
BKTB 100-26
BKTB 100-26 BKMB 50-24
15,1-100
15,1-50
15, 1-100
2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.18
NOTE: 36 working pairs 8 special services
Module 4 : Splicing
BKMB 50-24
Answer :
(15,1-50)15,51-100
Instructor's notes
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
50
36
0
0
8
1
BKTB 100-26
BKTB 100-26 BKMB 50-24
15,1-100
15,1-50
15, 1-100
2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.17(a)
NOTE: 36 working pairs 8 special services
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Case #2
19,1-100 (10,101-200)19,101-200 (10,201-400)21,1-200
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 400-26
21,1-400
BKTF 400-26
19,1-200 10,1-400
NOTE: 199 working pairs 56 special services
1
Instructor's notes
Answer : 100
199
0
0
56
200 2
19,1-200 10,1-400 BKTF 600-26
BKTF 400-26
21,1-400
BKTF 400-26
1 Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
19,1-100 (10,101-200)19,101-200 (10,201-400)21,1-200
4.4.18
NOTE: 199 working pairs 56 special services
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
BKTB 400 -26
10,1-200 20,1001 -1100 D4001 -4300 200D 10, 1001 -1100
10,1-200 20,1001 -1100 D4001 -4100
Case #3
1
(10,1-100)10,1001 -1100 D4001 -4300
BKTF 900 -26
10,1001 -1100 D3601 -3700
RM 55F/BKTB 200-26
BKTB 400 -26
NOTE: 68 working pairs 23 special services
2
BKTB 400 -26
10,1-200 20,1001 -1100 D4001 -4300 200D 10, 1001 -1100
Answer :
10,1-200 20,1001 -1100 D4001 -4100
Instructor's notes
1
68
0
0
23
(10,1-100)10,1001 -1100 D4001 -4300
BKTF 900 -26
RM 55F/BKTB 200-26
10,1001 -1100 D3601 -3700
BKTB 400 -26
2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
10 0
4.4.19
NOTE: 68 working pairs 23 special services
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Numbering continuity for transferred pairs
Like energized pairs and fibres, when pairs or fibres are transferred at a splice or fusion, they change numbers all along their path following the splice or fusion. Just as for energizing and cutting dead, the new count must be underlined at the splices or fusions where the splicer does the work. Example 1 : Below, you will see that the count changes all along the path towards the customers, although it is only underlined at the splice where the splicer must physically perform the work.
Instructor's notes
Explain this example, focusing on the underlining, arbs and symbols used. Also explain that in this case, although the transfer is made at a single splice, it affects the numbering after the other splices.
F10,1-24
F10,1-12 (F10,13-24)F31,1-12
F10,1-12 (F10, 13-24)F31,1-12
F10,1-12 (F10, 13-24)F31,1-12
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
2
F31,1-12
12
0
0
0
0
34R2LT-012 1
The underlining means that physical work must be performed at the previous fusion (towards the central office)
F10,1-24
The count is not underlined because no physical work is required at these fusions.
F10, 1-12 (F10, 13-24)F31,1-12
F10, 1-12 (F10, 13-24)F31,1-12
Fibres F10,13-24 must be transferred to fibres F31,1-12 of the new cable
Fibres F10,13-24 automatically become F31,1-12.
F10, 1-12 (F10, 13-24)F31,1-12
F31,1-12 New cable
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.20
Fibres F10,13-24 automatically become F31,1-12.
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Numbering continuity for transferred pairs (cont'd)
Pair and fibre transfers are illustrated on the following diagrams. You will notice how a transfer at a splice affects the numbering of the fibres and pairs that follow (towards customer end section).
Instructor's notes
Show the work illustrated in the examples that follow. Focus on the underlining, arbs and symbols used. Specify again that although the transfer work in this case is performed at a single splice, it affects the cable counts that follow (towards customer end section).
BKTF 100-26
Transfer (Underlined)
Energizing (underlined) BKTF 200-26
Transfer (continued) (Not underlined)
(18,101-200)D4001-4100 19,101-200
Cut dead (underlined)
18,1-50 (50D) 18,51-100
Example 2
19,101-150 (19,151-200)18,101-150
19,101-150 (19,151-200)18,101-150
18,101-200 19,101-200
18,1-200 19,101-500
BKTF 100-26
BKTF 100-26
BKTF 200-26
BKTF 600-26
2
12
0
0
0
1
50
On this diagram, you will notice that 50 bulk dead pairs are energized by pairs 18,51-100 at arb 1. Also notice that the 100 pairs 18,101-200 are cut dead at arb 2 and become D4001-4100. You can also see that the 50 pairs 19,151-200 transferred from an existing cable at arb 2 change numbers and become 18,101-150 as of arb 2.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.21
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Transfers at different splices
Sometimes, on a same job, you must make several transfers at different splices. Example 3 Below, two transfers are illustrated on the same diagram.
Instructor's notes
•
A first transfer is made at arb 1. Pairs 10,101-200 are transferred to pairs 20,201-300. The numbering is changed automatically at the splice at arb 3. Of these 100 transferred pairs, 87 are working and 16 are assigned to special services.
•
You can also see a second transfer at arb 3. Pairs 10, 51-100 are transferred to pairs 15,1-50 of the new cable. This transfer only affects pairs 10,101-200 of the cables towards the customers and not those from the central office. Of these 50 transferred pairs, 28 are working and 4 are assigned to special services.
Explain the examples below. Specify that you must look at the transfers one at a time to clearly understand the work required.
BKTF 600-26 1 87
0
0
16
BKTF 100-26
15,1-100
10,1-200 20,201-400 200D
BKTF 100-26
10,101-200
2
2nd transfer (continued) (Not underlined)
10,1-100 (10,101-200)20,201-300
10,1-50 (10,51-100)15,1-50 (10,101-200)20,201-300
10,1-50 (10,51-100)15,1-50 (10,101-200)20,201-300
BKTF 200-26
BKTF 200-26
BKTF 200-26
1st transfer (Underlined)
3 28
0
0
4
50 100
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2nd transfer (Underlined)
4.4.22
1st transfer (continued) (Not underlined)
1st transfer (continued) (Not underlined)
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
2. Double transfer 1 hour 05 minutes
Duration
Sometimes pairs transferred at a first splice are transferred again at another splice located farther away. To indicate a double transfer, brackets are added to the count before the transfer and to the count of the first transfer. In addition, the new cable count is underlined. The diagrams below illustrate double transfers.
Instructor's notes
Explain the two examples that follow.
Example 1 of a double transfer
Before the transfers
10,1-50 11,1-50
10,1-50
10,1-50
BKTF 100-26
BKTF 50-26
BKTF 50-26
First transfer only 10,1-50 11,1-50 BKTF 100-26
(10,1-50)11,1-50
(10,1-50)11,1-50
BKTF 50-26
BKTF 50-26
1
22 0 0 4
50
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to explain why one of the counts is underlined and the other is not. First transfer and double transfer
Premier transfert et double transfert
10,1-50 11,1-50
22
0
0
4
(10,1-50)11,1-50 BKTF 50-26
BKTF 100-26 22
0
0
4
1
23,1-50 BKTF 50-26
50 2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.23
50 3
((10,1-50))(11,1-50)23,1-50 BKTF 50-26
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Example 2 of a double transfer
Here is an example of a more complicated double transfer.
Instructor's notes
Explain this example step by step. Explain that this double transfer is required to cut bridge tap.
1
25,1 -100
28 0
21,1 -100 22,1 -100
(21,1-100)25,1-100 22,1-100
BKTF 200 -26
BKTF 200 -26
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
(21,1 -100)25,1 -100
0 100
BKTF 100 -26
73
0
0
36
14
3
BKTF 100 -26
((21,1 -100))(25,1 - 100)22,1-100 BKTF 100 -26
2 100
4.4.24
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Double brackets are only used during a double transfer. Sometimes: • pairs energized at a first splice by certain pairs are then energized by other pairs at another splice located farther in the network.
Double brackets and energizing or cutting dead
Note: At the second splice, this operation is considered energizing and not a transfer. Example:
Instructor's notes
In the following example explain why at the splice at arb 3, the pairs are not transferred but energized. (Talk of the physical work that the splicer must perform.) Energize 50 pairs
Energize 50 pairs 10,1-50 11,1-50
1
BKTF 100-26
10,1-50 (D3601-3650)11,1-50 BKTF 100-26
3
10,1-50 ((D3601-3650))(11,1-50)77,1-50 BKTF 100-26
77,1-100 BKTF 100-26 2
The operation at the splice at arb 3 involves energizing and not a transfer. In order to know whether the work involves a double transfer or energizing, you must look at the first and last count of the line. If the first is a dead count and the last a live count, energizing work is involved. If both counts are live, a transfer is involved. Moreover, when a transfer is illustrated, the transfer indicator and the WCPT symbol appear. Question
Does this involve a double transfer or energizing? Case #1: ((D4001-4100))(12,101-200)57,1-100 Case #2: ((34,1-50))(65,101-150)45,51-100
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Answers: #1 Energizing - #2 Double transfer
4.4.25
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
•
Double brackets and energizing or cutting dead (cont'd)
Pairs transferred at a first splice are then cut dead at another splice located farther in the network.
Note: At the second splice, this operation is considered cutting dead and not a transfer. Example:
Instructor's notes 44
0
0
6
10,1-50 11,1-50 BKTF 100-26
Explain the following example. 50
Cut 50 pairs dead
Transfer 50 pairs 2 1
(11,1-50)10,1-50
((11,1-50))(10,1-50)D3601-3650
BKTF 50-26
BKTF 50-26
The operation at the splice at arb 2 involves cutting pairs dead and not a transfer. In fact, to know whether the operation involves cutting pairs dead, you must look at the first and last count on the line. If the first is a live count and the second is a dead count, the operation involves cutting dead. Question
Does the work involve a double transfer, energizing or cutting dead? Case #1: ((35,1-100))(56,251-350)59,101-200 Case #2: ((21,1-50))(48,201-250)D3401-3450 Case #3: ((D3601-3800))(46 1-200)57,1-200
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Answers: Case #1: Transfer Case #2: Cutting dead Case #3: Energizing
4.4.26
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
For each of the following cases, graphically represent the required work on the sketch.
Exercise # 2
Make sure to add the following elements, when required: • Filled in transfer symbol; • Filled in WCPT symbol; • Single & double brackets; • Underline. If required, replace the arbitrary symbol by the transfer one.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to complete the exercise. Once completed, correct it. Note : The answers are shown in your guide and under the "Answers" tab of the students' guide. Ask the participants to make sure that the pair/fibre count of each cable corresponds to the cable size and that the principle of continuity is respected. Splicing sequence: Execute the work according to the following arb numbers sequence: arb 6, arb 5 and arb 7.
Case # 1
1) At arb 6, splice pairs 16,601-700 in the new cable. 2) At arb 5, energize D3601-3650 with 15,101-150. Transfer 14,51-100 with 15,151-200 (40 working pairs, 6 special services). 3) At arb 7, the cable final count should read as follows: 16,601-700 (35 working pairs, 10 special services).
14,1-100 15,101-200 BKTF 200-26
5
100D D3601-3650 14,51-100 BKTF 200-26
6
7
16,601-700 BKTF 100-26
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
D3601-3650 14,51-100 BKTF 100-26
4.4.27
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Case # 2
Splicing sequence: Execute the work according to the following arb numbers sequence: arb 2, arb 1 and arb 3.
1) At arb 2, splice pairs 60,1-200 in the new cable. 2) At arb 1, transfer 42,101-200 with 41,101-200 (80 working pairs, 60 special services). Energize D38013900 with 42,101-200. 3) At arb 3, the cable final count should read as follows: 60,1-50 D4001-4050 60,51-150 (39 working pairs, 18 special services).
41,101-200 42,101-200 BKTF 200-26
1
42,101-200 D3801-3900 BKTF 200-26
2
3
60,1-200 BKTF 200-26
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
42,101-200 D3801-3900 BKTF 200-26
4.4.28
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Instructor's notes 40
0
0
6
Answer CASE # 1: Transfer 50 pairs Energize 50 pairs
Double Transfer 50 pairs Energize 50 pairs
50
14,1-100 15,101-200
5
BKTF 200-26 6
100D (D3601-3650)15,101-150 (14,51-100)15,151-200
((D3601-3650))(15,101-150)16,601-650 ((14,51-100))(15,151-200)16,651-700
BKTF 200-26
BKTF 100-26
16,601-700
7
35
0
BKTF 100-26
50
0
10
If required, give more explanation on the executed steps. Answer CASE # 2:
Energize 50 pairs Cut 50 pairs dead Double Transfer 50 pairs
Energize 100 pairs 80
Transfer 100 pairs
0 100
0
41,101-200 42,101-200
60
1
BKTF 200-26 2
((42,101-150))(41,101-150)60,1-50 ((42,151-200))(41,151-200)D4001-4050 ((D3801-3900))(42,101-200)60,51-150 BKTF 200-26
(42,101-200)41,101-200 (D3801-3900)42,101-200 BKTF 200-26
60,1-200 BKTF 200-26
3
39
0
50
0
18
If required, give more explanation on the executed steps.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.28(a)
Module 4 : Splicing
Transferring different cables to an identical pair count
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
When a transfer is made to the same pairs, within different cable sheaths (towards customers), you must check whether the underlined counts after the transfer include identical pairs. In the example below, the underlined counts after the transfer include identical pairs in both locations.
Consequently, the identical pairs group 20,1-50 should be calculated only once.
10,1-100 20,1-100
BKTF 100-26
10,1-50 (10,51-100) 20,1-50
Example 1
BKTF 200-26
(20,51-100)20,1-50 BKTF 50-26
1 29
0
0
4 50
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out that a multiple network is involved. Remind the participants that a multiple network is possible only with copper cables.
4.4.29
Module 4 : Splicing
Transferring different cables to an identical pair count (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
This situation occurs only in a multiple network. Reminder: This type of network is possible for copper but not fibre cables. In the example on the previous page, pairs 20, 1-50 from the central office are found after the transfer in both the upper cable and the right cable. Remember that pairs 20, 1-50 of the cable from the central office are spliced to the pairs of the two other cables as shown in the diagram below. However, only one customer can be connected on a pair.
Pair 1 (2 wires) of the left cable
Pair 1 (2 wires) of the upper cable
Pair 1 (2 wires) of the right cable
Given that in order to splice the three pairs (left, upper and right cables) the splicer must perform a single operation with his pliers, you must count only one transfer.
Instructor's notes
Explain that in order to splice these three pairs, the splicer performs a single operation (pressure) with his pliers. For this reason, instead of doing 100 pressures with his pliers to splice the 50 upper cable pairs and 100 other pressures to splice the 50 lower cable pairs, the splicer only execute 100 pressures with his pliers to splice, at the same time, the 50 upper cable pairs and the 50 lower cable pairs to the 50 left cable pairs coming from the central office. Explain what a multiple network is. Therefore: When the numbers of the pairs after the transfer (underlined) are the same on cables, you must enter the number of pairs transferred in the transfer indicator as if it were a single transfer.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.30
Module 4 : Splicing
Transferring different cables to an identical pair count (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Example 2
This example also shows a transfer involving a multiple network. The counts before the transfer are the same for both cables: 23,1-25 but will be transferred to different counts.
23,1-200 35,1-200
BKTF 100-26
(23,1-25)24,76-100 23,26-100
As the splicer will have to physically execute two transfers (with his pliers), we have to calculate 50 pairs transferred from a new cable in the transfer indicator.
BKTF 400-26
BKTF 100-26
0
24,51-150
0
2
0
BKTF 100-26
50
35
(23,1-25)24,51-75 35,1-75
1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.31
Module 4 : Splicing
Transferring different cables to an identical pair count (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Example 3
This example also represents a transfer involving multiple network. Pair counts before and after the transfer are identical for both cables: (20,501-550)20,701-750
10,301-450 20,501-750 D3601-3800
BKTF 200-26
10,301-450 (20,501-550) 20,701-750
As the splicer does the equivalent of only one physical transfer (with his pliers), we have to write 50, and not 100, transferred pairs from a new cable in the transfer indicator.
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 100-26 1
18
0
0
6 50
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.32
(20,501-550)20,701-750 D3601-3650
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
It sometimes happens that simultaneous transfers are partially identical, i.e., one of the counts to be transferred is included in the part of another count to be transferred.
Transferring different cables to an identical pair count (cont'd)
Example 4 3
(13,1-300)18,1-300 (13,301-600)59,3001-3300 D4001-4600 ADTC 1200-26
AB 76F/ADTC 1200-26
(13,1-1200)1200D
1
0 00 -6 0 1 - 3 6 1 , -26 18 ,300 00 2 9 1 5 TZ DC
(13,1-600)18,1-600 BKTF 600-26 2
609
0
0
101
900
In the above diagram, the three transfers indicated are: • Count 1: (13,1-600)18,1-600 • Count 2: (13,1-300)18,1-300 • Count 3: (13,301-600)59,3001-3300 The first count may be broken down as follows: (13,1-600)18,1-600 = (13,1-300)18,1-300 (=count 2) (13,301-400)18,301-400 As you can see, count 2 is included in count 1. You must therefore consider that in transferring (13, 1-600)18,1-600, the splicer will also at the same time transfer (13,1-300)18,1-300. For the calculation, you therefore consider only count1 (13,1-600)18,1-600) (a transfer of 600 pairs from a new cable) and count 3 (13,301-600)59,3001-3300 (a transfer of 300 pairs from a new cable). The transfer indicator must therefore show 900 pairs transferred to a new cable. • Count 1 (13,1-600)18,1-600 : 600 pairs • Count 2 (13,1-300)18,1-300 : 0 pair (included in count 1) • Count 3 (13,301-600)59,3401-3700 : 300 pairs Total: 600+0+300 = 900 pairs to transfer from a new cable
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.33
Module 4 : Splicing
Instructor's notes
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Ask the participants to complete the following two cases individually. Then provide the answers. Note: The answers are in your guide and under the “Answers” tab of the students' guide.
Exercise # 3
Case #1
10,1-200 20,201-400 200D
BKTF 100-26
(10,101-200)20,201-300
In the following diagram, complete the associated transfer symbols knowing that 87 of the transferred pairs are working and that 16 of these pairs are assigned to special services.
BKTF 600-26
Instructor's notes
10,1-100 (10,101-200)20,201-300 BKTF 200-26
Answer : 1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
87
0
0
16
4.4.34
100
Module 4 : Splicing
Exercise # 3 (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Case #2
BKTF 600-26
Instructor's notes
BKTF 100-26
10,1-200 20,201-400 200D
(10,101-200)20,201-300
Complete the associated transfer symbols knowing that 96 of the transferred pairs are working and that 12 of these pairs are assigned to special services.
(10,1-100)20,201-300 BKTF 100-26
Answer : 1
96
0
0
12
100
Point out that we must calculate only once the transferred pairs, as the pairs numbering after the transfer 20,201-300 are identical.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.35
Module 4 : Splicing
Exercise # 3 (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Case #3
Complete the associated transfer symbols knowing that 24 of the transferred pairs are working and that 8 of these pairs are assigned to special services.
1
2
61,101-150 BKTB 50-26 (21,101-125)61,101-125 (21,126-150)D4001-4025 BKTB 50-26
(21,101-125)61,126-150 D3601-3625 BKTB 50-26 21,101-150 RM 99F/BKTB 50-26
3
Instructor's notes
Answer :
24
0
50
0
8
2
Point out that the two transfers are not identical, as the count after the transfer is different. We must add the number of transferred pairs at each of the two transfers: 25 + 25 = 50 pairs transferred from a New cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.36
Module 4 : Splicing
Exercise # 3 (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Case #4 Complete the associated transfer symbols knowing that 609 of the transferred pairs are working and that 101 of these pairs are assigned to special services.
ADTC 1200-26
25,1-600 26,1-300 79,1-300
1
(54,1-200)26,1-200 (54,201-600)25,1-400 BKTF 600-26
(54,1-100)26,1-100 (54,201-300)25,1-100 (54,301-400)26,201-300 (54,401-600)79,1-200 100D BKTF 600-26 54,1-600 RM 103F/BKTF 600-26
2
3
Instructor's notes
Answer :
2 609
0
0
101
900
In the above diagram, the six transfers indicated are: Left cable • Count 1: (54,1-200)26,1-200 • Count 2: (54,201-600)25,1-400 Right cable • Count 3: (54,1-100)26,1-100 • Count 4: (54,201-300)25,1-100 • Count 5: (54,301-400)26,201-300 • Count 6: (54,401-600)79,1-200 You will notice that: • Count 1 includes count 3. In fact: (54,1-200)26,1-200 = (54,1-100)26,1-100 (54,101-200)26,101-200 • Count 2 includes count 4. In fact: (54,201-600)25,1-400 = (54,201-300)25,1-100 (54,301-600)25,101-400 Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.37
Module 4 : Splicing
Instructor's notes
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Case #4 (cont'd)
Calculation of pairs transferred to a new cable: • Count 1: (54,1-200)26,1-200 : 200 pairs • Count 2: (54,201-600)25,1-400 : 400 pairs • Count 3: (54,1-100)26,1-100 : 0 (included in count 1) • Count 4: (54,201-300)25,1-100 : 0 (included in count 2) • Count 5: (54,301-400)26,201-300 : 100 pairs • Count 6: (54,401-600)79,1-200 : 200 pairs Total :
200 + 400 + 0 + 0 + 100 + 200 = 900 pairs from a new cable
The transfer indicator must therefore show 900 pairs transferred to a New cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.37(a)
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
3. Slack and No cable (N/C) Duration
45 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L4 PowerPoint presentation.
M4L4 Adding/cutting out slack (copper cable only)
It is sometimes necessary to add or remove a certain length of copper cable. This length of cable is referred to as “SLACK.” Note: Slack is never added to or removed from fibre cables because this would adversely affect signal transmission quality. Adding slack
For example, you must add slack when a pole is moved and the cable is too short to be attached to it.
Draw the following sketch on the pad board to explain how a pole move is shown on a work plan.
M 2m
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.38
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
When adding slack, the splicers:
Add/cut out slack (cont'd)
• • •
splice the two ends of the new cable to the pair of an existing cable; cut the pair between the two splices; and so on for each cable pairs.
Two splices are therefore created. Note: Almost no cable is cut. It is considered that no cable is removed during this operation.
Instructor's notes
Explain why no cable is removed between the two splices. The following symbol is used to illustrate the addition of slack on a work plan.
1
2
ADD SLACK Given that two splices are created, you must indicate the final length of the slack (cable added). In the below case, 10 metres were added. No cable length is removed
Instructor's notes
Explain the example below. Indicate that you must enter a final length. In this example, it is 10 metres. We also have to write this text ADD SLACK. Example of adding slack
1
2
ADD SLACK Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.39
Module 4 : Splicing
Add/cut out slack (cont'd)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Cut out slack
It may be necessary to remove slack when, for example, the cable span between two poles becomes too low or when a pole must be moved. Below, a cable that runs over a road has become too low. Removing the slack will make it possible to prevent a truck from tearing down the cable when it travels underneath it.
When removing slack, the splicers: • Cut and simultaneously splice each pair from the slack to the pairs of the existing cable; • Remove the cable segment (slack).
A single splice is created. In this operation, the length of cable removed is equal to the length of the slack.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.40
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
The symbol below is used on a work plan to illustrate slack removal.
Add/cut out slack (cont'd)
You must indicate the final length of the slack (segment of cable removed).
Instructor's notes
Explain the examples below. Example of a cut out slack
1
RM
Example of adding and cutting out slack.
10,1-350 50D BKTB400-26/AER
10,1-350 50D BKTB400-26/AER
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
3
10,1-350 50D BKTB400-26/AER
ADD SLACK
1
3
2
RM 3F BKTB 400-26/AER 10, 1-350 50D
1
4.4.41
10F BKTB 400-26/AER 10, 1-350 50D
35F 35
Module 4 : Splicing
Cable rearrangement (N/C- no cable)
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
A cable is rearranged when a splice/fusion is moved to another splice/fusion without the addition of cable. Cable rearrangements may be performed in various network categories (except submarine and buried). Before
100-pair cable
100-pair cable
N/C
100-pair cable
100-pair cable
Splice/Fusion closure
After 100-pair cable
N/C
100-pair cable
Splice/Fusion closure
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.42
100-pair cable
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Instructor's notes
Explain the examples below
No cable (cont'd)
Example #1
20,201-250
20,201-250
BKTF 50-26
RM 53F/BKTF 50-26
N/C
2
10, 1-600
(50D)20,201-250 10,1-350
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 400-26 1
Example #2 20,201-250 RM 112F/BKTF 50-26
20,201-250 BKTF 50-26
N/C
2
10,1-50 (10,1-50)20,201-250 BKTF 100-26
10, 1-100 BKTF 100-26
34
0
0
6
1
50
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.43
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
4. Reverse feed Duration
15 minutes
Definition
The reverse feed method allows cable pairs to travel in the opposite direction of the Cable’s originating Switching Centre.
Instructor's notes
Explain how the reverse feed method works. Use the below example to explain how the pairs are spliced in the cable sheaths.
Illustration on work plans
Example: Reverse feed is illustrated, in a cable count, with the "R" prefix placed in square brackets "[R]".
UG
D D D
UG
UG
BLD
D5001D5001-5100 D
D5001--5100 D5001 D3101--3500 D3101
UG
D D D
UG
UG D5301D5301-5600 D4401D4401-4500
D
D
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.44
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Exercise # 4 Duration
1 hour
Instructor's notes
In small groups or individually, ask the participants to analyze the plans that you will distribute by referring to the steps of the analysis method (730787,503 and 555444,501).
EX P ER U O C R IS G E
Once the exercise is completed, correct it, with the participants, by asking them their analysis result. Use the following answers as a reference tool, to make sure that all points are covered. DO NOT READ THE ANSWERS TO THE PARTICIPANTS. Note : After the correction as a group, tell the participants, that the analysis result is provided under the "Answers" tab in their guide. Specify that there is no detailed correction of discrepancies related with module 3 teaching points. We will focus on the Splicing work. Instructions EX UP ER C RO IS G E
Individually or in small groups, analyze the given work plans and correct the discrepancies using the following tools: • •
Analysis Method job aid; Answer grid
Enter the results you obtain at each step in the following pages.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.45
FUTURE 11x34 PLAN
FUTURE 11x34 PLAN
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location.
Job number, plan(s) number(s), switching center. _______________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Work location description. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies)
Network category (ies) : __________________________________________________
Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Work description
4.4.46
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note : In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Verification : Write down the verified items.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.47
Missing items: Specify the required action to take if known.
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
EXERCISE # 4 - ANSWERS Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location.
Job number = 730787 Plan 503 and 555444 Plan 501 Swiching centre: Sherbrooke.
Work location description
Municipality name : not indicated. No 700 location plan on the job, no location sketch on plans, no MH diagram and finally no manholes location details.
730787 Plan 503
5AMH15 (A), King street and Wilson; references to plans 502 and 504. 555444 Plan 501
5EMH9, No street names shown.
1.2 Identify shown network category (ies).
Network category(ies) : UNDERGROUND
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.47(a)
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
EXERCISE # 4 - ANSWERS (cont'd)
Step 2 : : Identify the work illustrated. Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
730787 Plan 503
555444 Plan 501
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Work description 5AMH15 (A) : Splicing : A1 : o Cut pairs dead 29,201-250 becomes D1201-1250, o Energize pairs D5101-5150 becomes 29,201-250
A2 : o Transfer from existing 100 pairs: 52,301-400 becomes 52,201300. o Cut pairs dead 52,201-300 becomes D6001-6100.
5EMH9 : A1 : Energize 100D becomes 39,501-600 A2 : Energize 100D becomes 39,501-600 (bulk dead) A3 : Energize D3401-3500 becomes 39,501-600 A4 : o Reference 1 : Transfer from existing 100 pairs : 37,2001-2100 becomes 39,501-600 o Reference 6 : Cut 55,2151-2200 becomes D6001-6050 o Reference E : Energize 100D becomes 37, 2001-2100 A5 : No work (done at the previous splice)
4.4.47(b)
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
EXERCISE # 4 - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 730787 Plan 503 5AMH15 (A) : 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Preceding locations (SC side) and following locations for cables being part of the splicing works, missing for cables exiting to the North and to the South of the MH, to be added. • Conduit identifications for cables being part of the splicing works. o Conduit number, missing at some places. o Bingo method OR conduit formations missing: to be added • MH Diagram missing: to be added. • Permanent location or arbitrary for each work. Splicing : Verifications at each splice; • Identification of all cables in the splice. • Principle of continuity. • Cable count corresponds to the cable size. • Permanent location or arbitrary for each work. Results : A1 : • Identification of all cables in the splice.: missing for one line going south, to be added. • Cut pairs dead 29,201-250 becomes D1201-1250 and energize pairs D5101-5150 becomes 29,201-250. Work representation (underline and brackets) according to rules. • When verifying the principle of continuity, we realize that some pairs are energized by 1B stub (reverse-feed). • For the N/A 1200-24/UG cable (in duct 9) customer side : pairs 37,2101-2000 should be in brackets followed by D52015300 with no underline further to works on 502 plan TO MODIFY. A2 : No discrepancy (WCPT symbol is there), work illustrated according to rules. 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • Caption stamp elements: o Right of way number not required, but some municipallyties want to be inform when a manhole needs to be opened. • Work location o Location 700 plan for the « job » missing, to be added, OR work location sketch on plan missing, to be added ; o Manhole location details missing, to be added; • References : o References to plans 502-504 ; • Municipality name : missing, to be added. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.47(c)
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
EXERCISE # 4 - ANSWERS (cont'd)
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 555444 Plan 501 5EMH9 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Preceding locations (SC side) and following locations for cables being part of the splicing works, • Conduit identifications for cables being part of the splicing works. o Conduit number o Bingo method OR conduit formations missing: to be added • MH Diagram missing: to be added. • Permanent location or arbitrary for each work (A5 to be removed). Splicing : Verifications at each splice; • Identification of all cables in the splice. • Principle of continuity. • Cable count corresponds to the cable size. • Permanent location or arbitrary for each work. Results : A1 : No discrepancy, Splicing illustrated as per the rules. A2 : No discrepancy, Splicing illustrated as per the rules. A3 : No discrepancy, Splicing illustrated as per the rules. A4 : WCPT symbol missing to be added. A5 : Reference F : no underlining, transfer is done at A4, to modify. 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • Caption stamp elements: o Right of way number not required, but some municipallyties want to be inform when a manhole needs to be opened. • Work location o Location 700 plan for the « job » missing, to be added, OR work location sketch on plan missing, to be added ; o Manhole location details missing, to be added; • References : o Municipality name : missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.47(d)
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
5. Checklist « 500 PLANS -UNDERGROUND » Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Present to participants the « 500 PLANS UNDERGROUND » checklist items covered in this lesson and highlighted in grey. To do so, you can consult the explanations, associated to the list items, in the Checklists binder. Focus on the Splicing work. Most of these items have already been covered in module 3, don't cover them systematically discriminate items that need additional explanation according to participants needs. All other items can be overviewed.
Checklist « 500 PLANS UNDERGROUND »
At work, to make sure that your work plans are complete and that all work is illustrated according to rules, you have the Bell normalized checklist tool. Let see the « 500 PLANS -UNDERGROUND» checklist again.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.48
PLAN #
500 PLAN– UNDERGROUND 920-3130-100
#
920-3130-100
ITEM
500 PLAN– UNDERGROUND
#
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
ITEM
Module 4 : Splicing
M/H location (physical location) Plan 800
1
Wall-to-wall distance (installation of a new cable between manholes)
21
M/H diagram (plan 700) IMAP
2
N.N. (Network Number)
22
Duct occupancy – BINGO method (infoplan – text)
3
CLLI code (work notes)
23
Pull direction (911-1000-105)
4
Municipalities (work notes)
24
Roping information
5
Associated network (work notes) plus project sequence
25
Source and destination location
6
Address of crossconnect terminal (work notes)
26
Pressurization (air system, plug, etc (620-0400-018F)
7
Name of manager, telephone #, pager # (work notes)
27
Reference from one plan to another (920-3100-102F)
8
Name of coordinator, telephone #, pager # (work notes)
28
Direction of central office (fibre ring)
9
Name of associate, telephone # (work notes)
29
Pair transfer
10
30
Arb (OP TIP 98-019)
11
HDSL & ADTRAN (IMAP)
12
New pairs terminated in a crossconnect terminal (existing or new) New pairs terminated at central office. Addition or replacement of pairs greater than 4575 m (completed work) BC3888A to be completed or IMAP loop report) General – how to issue a work plan
CT/LT
13
Work location
14
Splicing sequence (700 plan if required) (920-3130-100F)
15
Cable identification inserted (each side of splice) Terminals affected (DIP note) Form P3381/P4235 Optical fibre identification number (OP TIP 93-035)
16
Safety information for DESIGNATED M/H (914-2022-100F)
19
Safety information for M/H at the customer
20
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
17 18
4.4.49
31 32
PLAN #
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 4 : Facility Splices/Fusions with Transfer
Summary Duration
5 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered: • • • • • • • • • •
Instructor's notes
Facility splices and fusion concepts; Cable installation, removal and replacement; Energizing pairs/fibres; Cutting pairs/fibres dead; Transferring pairs/fibres; Pair/fibre transfer symbols; Adding and cutting out slack; Cable rearrangement (N/C- no cable); Work plan analysis method; Discrepancies associated with facility splices and fusions.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.4.50
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
Lesson 5 Miscellaneous Splices Duration
15 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: •
Define two types of miscellaneous splices (slack splice and clear and cap (C&C)
•
Indicate how to illustrate these miscellaneous splices on the work plan.
Materials
- M4L5 PowerPoint;
- Splicing job aid
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.5.1
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
Preamble Duration
3 minutes In addition to straight, branch and facility splices, there are other types of splices involving copper cables. In this lesson, you will learn about slack splices and C&C. Note: Other types of miscellaneous splices exist that involve terminals and crossconnecting terminals. These splices will be covered later in the modules on terminals and crossconnecting terminals.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.5.2
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
1. Slack splices Duration
4 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L5 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following diagrams (examples 1 and 2).
M4L5 Definition
A slack splice is an unsheathed looped cable length inside a splice closure. Unlike the splices covered previously, a slack splice does not involve cutting or connecting pairs. This type of splice is used to leave a length of cable for a future splice. The cable is unsheathed to facilitate access to the pairs. In general, slack splices are made on large underground cables and are mostly found in manholes.
Symbol
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
This symbol is used to illustrate a slack splice.
4.5.3
Module 4 : Splicing
Examples of slack splices
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
Below are two examples of slack splices.
N.B. You must not enter a final length at a slack splice.
Instructor's notes
Explain the two examples that follow. Point out that the component lengths (and not the final lengths) are entered next to the slack splices.
Example 1 10,1-3600
10,1-3600
CDTC 3600-26/UG
CDTC 3600-26/UG
116
216F 100
Example 2 10,1-1800 CDMC 1800-24/UG
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
10,1-1800 112
4.5.4
CDMC 1800-24/UG
220F 108
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
2. Clear and cap (C&C) Duration
4 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M4L5 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following diagrams.
M4L5 Definition
A C&C is a protection placed at the end of the cable. It is used simply to protect the end of the cable. This type of protection is found in aerial, buried and underground networks.
Symbol
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
This symbol is used to illustrate a clear and cap.
4.5.5
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
C&C examples
Below are two examples of C&C installation work.
Instructor's notes
Explain the following two examples.
Example 1 25,1-200 BKTB 200-26/AER
18F 18
Example 2 21,1-200 AJTB 200-26/BUR
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
23F 23
Ask the participants to take out their Splicing job aid where they will find the symbols for the two miscellaneous splices covered in this lesson.
4.5.6
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
Exercise # 1 Duration
5 minutes
Instructor's notes
Divide the class into teams of 2 or 3. Ask the participants to answer true or false to the following questions. Once they have finished, correct the exercise with them. EX P ER U O C R IS G E
Note: The participants can find the answers under the "Answers" tab in the guide Instructions
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Study the plan on the following page. Then answer true or false to the questions that follow.
4.5.7
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
UG 1AMH4
D3001-3300
UG 1AMH4(A)
UG 1BMH1
UG 1AMH4(A)
UG UG
UG
D3201-3300 D6001-6050
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.5.8
1AMH4(A)
Module 4 : Splicing
Questions “True or false”
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
State whether the following statements are true or false. If they are false, correct them by indicating the modification in the right column.
Statement
True or False & Correction
1. Arbs 1 & 2, on plan, represent C&C. Correction : ____________ _______________________ 2. A 1200 pairs slack splice is shown at arb 3. Correction : ____________ _______________________ 3. At arb 2 on plan, the C&C size is 400 pairs. Correction : ____________ _______________________ 4. At arb 4 on plan, the C&C size is 1800 pairs. Correction : ____________ _______________________
Instructor's notes
Explain the results using the following answers.
ANSWERS
True or False & Correction
Statement
False
1. Arbs 1 & 2, on plan, represent C&C.
Correction : Only arb 2 represents a C&C. 2. A 1200 pairs slack splice is shown at arb 3.
False Correction : It is a facility splice.
3. At arb 2 on plan, the C&C size is 400 pairs.
True
4. At arb 4 on plan, the C&C size is 1800 pairs.
False Correction : It is an 1800 pairs slack splice.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.5.9
Module 4 : Splicing
Lesson 5 : Miscellaneous Splices
Summary Duration
2 minutes In this lesson, the following key points were covered: • •
Instructor's notes
Slack splices; C&C.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer to participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4.5.10
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Module 5: Preamble
Module 5 Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 plans) Duration
7 hours, 5 minutes
General objective
At the end of this module, you should be able to: •
Read and interpret information about aerial and building networks on a work plan;*
•
Identify and correct discrepancies on illustrations of aerial and building network elements (poles, cables, etc.);
•
Identify information about aerial and building networks that should be entered on a work plan.*
* Means reading and interpreting the network map and drafts of plans.
To this end, the lessons in this module will cover:
Note to the instructor
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Poles (1-199 plans);
•
Aerial cables (200 plans);
•
Building cables (200 plans) ;
Show the module title pasted on the outside plant poster.
5.i
Lesson 1 Poles and Accessories
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Lesson 1 Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan) Duration
2 hours 20 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you will be able to: •
Read and explain pole characteristics indicated on a work plan;
•
Show how to illustrate pole accessories on a work plan and explain their use;
•
Show how to illustrate work on a pole plan (1-199) and associated plans (700);
•
Use the checklist to identify discrepancies on 1-199 Series plans.
Materials
- M5L1 PowerPoint
- Basic Work Plan Elements job aid
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.1
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Preamble Duration
5 minutes An aerial network is the structure that supports aerial cables and related equipment. You will also hear the term “pole lines,” which means all the elements of the support structure, including poles, strands, guys and anchors.
The construction of a pole line must: • Be secure; • Meet the installation requirements of the telecommunications and power network; • Be erected according to the permits obtained; • Take into account environmental factors. In this lesson, you will learn about pole characteristics and their accessories, which are indicated on a 1-199 series work plan. You will also learn about the purpose of each type of pole and its accessories. Lastly, you will learn how to illustrate pole line work on a work plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.2
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
1. Poles and Accessories Duration
25 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M5L1 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following images.
Definitions
Poles are vertical support structures.
Poles are named according to their location in the line.
Instructor's notes
Briefly explain the different pole names used at Bell. Use the PowerPoint presentation to explain the following diagram and show the photos of the different types of poles. Make a connection between the diagram on the next page and each pole photo. This part should be covered briefly.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.3
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Definitions (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
To ensure a pole line is solid and secure, a variety of accessories are used to allow the structure to support the aerial cables and various equipment. These accessories include: 9 9 9
Guys; Anchors; Guys between poles (overhead guys).
The following diagram illustrates the most commonly used poles.
Pole Line pole
Guy and anchor
1
Overhead guy
Anchor pole 3
Deadend pole
5
2
6
4
7
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
King Road
Push Brace
Service pole
In the legend, you will note the accessories associated with the poles (guys, anchors and overhead guys). We will cover these in the second teaching point of this lesson.
5.1.4
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Definitions (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Accessories review
Accessory
Photo
Guy A guy is a metal wire used to balance the force exerted on a pole. The guy has a specific name depending on its location and use.
Anchor A device placed in the ground to maintain pole stability. A part of the anchor structure (the rod) extends above ground and is connected to the guy while the other part is buried in the ground. Overhead guy This guy is a strand (metal wire) placed between a pole and an anchor pole. This particular type of guy is used when a pole needs guying and the location (physical space) does not allow a guy and anchor to be installed.
Guy between 2 poles
Overhead guy Guy
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Anchor pole
Pole where a guy is not possible
5.1.5
Parking lot entrance
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Instructor's notes
Present the photos of the different types of guys and make a connection with the diagram on the previous page. At the same time, briefly explain the different forces exerted on poles and their source (deadend and corner).
Definitions (cont'd)
• Deadend guy A deadend guy is used to support a pole on which strands are terminated.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.6
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Definitions (cont'd)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
•
Corner guy (or lateral) A guy is referred to as “corner” when it counterbalances an angle force > 120° and < 180° applied on the pole.
•
Sidewalk guy A sidewalk guy is equipped with an extension to clear the sidewalk.
5.1.7
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Definitions (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Anchor
An anchor consists of a mechanism placed in the ground to maintain pole stability and a rod that extends above ground to be connected to one or more guys.
No less than 150mm (6 inches); Maximum 300 mm (12 inches)
Rod
Mechanism
Instructor's notes
Point out that: • In the photo above, the rod anchor on the left holds one guy while the rod on the right holds two. • The guy and anchor are always used together and form an anchoring system.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.8
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Definitions (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Line pole belonging to Bell Canada:
A pole supporting cables and other telecommunications equipment.
Instructor's notes
Point out that this situation only occurs occasionally. Generally, Bell and Power Company use the same structure. •
Joint-use line pole
A pole covered by contract between Bell and Power Company. This pole meets the needs of both parties when installing conductors, cables and wires.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.9
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Definitions (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
The joint-use line pole is sometimes designated RCP, which means regular common pole. •
Deadend pole
A guyed pole on which cables are terminated. Deadend pole
•
Anchor pole:
An anchored pole is used only to support overhead guys.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.10
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Instructor's notes
Point out the overhead guy, explaining that it is simply a continuation of the strand.
Definitions (cont'd)
•
Dip pole:
A pole on which cables go up or down to the ground.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.11
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Definitions (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Service Pole
This pole is installed on private land between a pole line and the customer. It is also referred to as a “runoff pole”
•
Push Brace:
This pole is also referred to as a support pole. It is used as a diagonal support on a corner pole. It replaces an anchor and guy. The support pole is generally of the same class and height as the pole it supports.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Mention that the push brace is placed opposite the guy it replaces.
5.1.12
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
2. Illustrating poles on 1-199 Series Plans Duration
20 minutes 1-199 Series plans provide all the necessary details to perform work on poles and their accessories. Cables are not illustrated on these work plans. Exception: Guy placement will be shown on a 200 plan if strand is also installed. The poles and their accessories are illustrated by symbols and associated descriptions, as shown in the draft on the following page.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out the location of the symbols and descriptions (side by side) on the plan.
5.1.13
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
5.1.14
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
FUTURE USE
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.15
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
FUTURE USE
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.16
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
The following elements make up a pole description:
Description
1. Pole address 2. Pole characteristics: • height • class 3. Barcode number (if applicable – NOT USED IN ONTARIO)
Each element in the description provides pole-related information.
PF 1234 LAROSE RD Length Class
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Pole address
40-4 CD : YAFIB2
5.1.17
Barcode number (Quebec region ONLY)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Description (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Address As learned earlier, permanent addresses must be entered in urban areas. However, another way is used to designate poles in regions where there are no civic numbers. (Reference: 920-3002-107 par. 1.01, 1.03, 1.04, 1.05, 2.01, 3.01, 3.02, 3.04, 3.05, 3.07 and 3.08.) Example: P1 UR 1100 (Pole #1 of Urban Route 1100)
Pole height The standard pole height generally varies between 25 and 55 foot (7.6 metres and 16.8 metres). Standards defined by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) indicate the clearance required for the electrical and telecommunications networks. The pole’s height depends on the design standards and factors specific to each situation (physical location of pole, difference in ground level, pole attachments). Pole types The type of pole indicates the raw material used to manufacture it. There are 5 types of poles: Steel Concrete Cedar Penta (PCP, Pentachlorophenol) Green (CCA, CCA-PEG and CCA-PA) Unknown (used when a pole is not identified)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.18
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
NP TIPS 01-048 2002-10-02
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
To protect the wood, poles are treated with preservatives. Since 2002, a polymer base has been added to green poles (CCA-PA). These poles are the only ones used by Bell as of January 2003. The preservatives used in the past were pentachlorophenol (Penta) and treated wood (CCA-PEG).
CCA-PEG (green)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
PENTA (brown)
5.1.19
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Instructor's notes
Explain the choice of treatment:
NP Tip 00-011 Wood pole: Availability of CCA-PA poles.
Pole for Bell Canada’s exclusive use CCA-PA treated poles must be used (green).
2002-02-08 Sensitive areas Certain environmental factors must be taken into account since they preclude installing CCA-PA poles in sensitive areas: waterways, wells (surface or artesian) and ditches. In these situations, untreated, cedar or used treated (grey or beige) poles must be used. For instructions concerning wetlands, see NP TIP 01-039 Wood poles: availability of untreated cedar poles for wetlands.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.19(a)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Description (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Class Poles are classified according to their ability to resist a load. There are seven class categories, numbered 1 to 7. The higher the number, the smaller the pole circumference. Therefore, a class 1 pole is the largest and a class 7 is the smallest.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Year The year is indicated with four characters and represents the year the pole was installed. The pole year is used to determine its installed value and replacement value. This information is required for transactions with Power Companies (Joint Use Agreement) and accounting follow-ups at Bell.
Instructor's notes
The following point "Barcode" DOESN'T presently apply to Ontario region. DON'T talk about that subject. Barcode (Quebec region ONLY) Barcode numbers are required when replacing or removing a pole. However, they are not available in all sectors. Note: Barcodes do not include the letter “i” and “o” to avoid confusion between the numbers 1 and 0.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.20
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Illustrating push braces on 1-199 Series Plans
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Push brace Push braces are not illustrated in the same way as other types of poles. The symbol and descriptions are different. Installing a push brace A line symbol and description in bold. 1
PR 167 FRED ST 40-4 L: 7
The abbreviation L: 7 added to the description means that the lead measurement is 7 metres.
The lead measurement is the distance between the pole and the base of the pole brace and is indicated in metres. Pole
Push brace
Lead
Removing a push brace
A line symbol and description in brackets in bold.
PF 74 FRED ST RM 40-4/1985
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.21
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Illustrating push braces on 1-199 Series Plans (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Replacing a push brace Bold line symbol Description of the existing push brace to be removed in bold in brackets. Description of the new push brace in bold.
1
PF 45 NELSON ST (40-5/1960) 40-5 L:7
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
L: 6 corresponds to the lead measurement, i.e., the distance between the base of both poles.
5.1.22
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
3. Work on poles Duration
20 minutes
Introduction
You have learned about pole characteristics and the symbols and descriptions that illustrate them and that must be indicated on 100 work plans. We will now look at the elements required to illustrate the different work to be performed on poles on a 1-199 Series Plan: installation, removal, replacement, move, relocation and straighten.
Basic work plan elements (Module 1)
Just like on other plans, various basic elements must appear on a 1-199 Series Plan. What are they? Use your Basic Work Plan Elements job aid from Module 1.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask the participants to look at their module 1 job aid (Basic Work Plan Elements) in order to review the following elements: • Caption stamp, municipality, reference between plans of a same project (also 700 series plans); • Reference to other projects; • Reference to internal requests (3151, customer request, joint-use request submitted by Bell to Power company); • Reference to external requests (request from Power company or cable TV operator); • Work location (street names, permanent locations and arbs); • Surface details when relevant. 5.1.23
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Preparing for installation: line staking and clearance
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Staking Staking involves placing wood pickets to indicate where future poles and anchors will be installed. This work must be performed before the installation. On the work plan, a note indicates the date on which the staking was or will be completed. Example of notes: • The poles and anchors are staked. • The staking will be completed on April 23, 2002.
Line clearance When a pole line is first installed, it may be necessary to cut down trees to clear a corridor. This cutting work must be performed before the start of work and must be indicated in a note. Certain pole lines run close to trees. Sometimes it is enough to simply trim the branches that hamper the cable installation. This trimming work is entered in a note and it is normally performed before installing the poles. The following information must be indicated when cutting or trimming is required:
• • • •
Size of land clearing required (e.g., 1.5 metres on each side of the proposed line) What to do with the cut wood (leave it in place or remove it) Specific agreements with the land owner (e.g., cut only ribboned trees) Work location
Example of notes: • Cut between arb 1 and arb 12 (see 701 plan) • From arb 1 to arb 4, trim 1.5 metres from each side • Trimming will be completed by the developer on 3/4/03
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.24
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Tie-in measurements
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
On a 1-199 Series plan, the distance between poles is a tie-in measurement that must always be indicated on new installations. . As well, you may also see tie-in measurements that give more details on the exact location of the poles, for example, from the pole to the street intersection, the sidewalk curb, a street line, a fence or other fixed point.
Pole profile and space allocation
As mentioned at the beginning of this lesson, poles installed in the network may be for the exclusive use of Bell Canada or for joint-use. In the latter case, the space on the pole is shared between its owner, in this case Bell, and different users. It is therefore important to indicate the space allocation and the attachment height for each party. The pole profile caption stamp illustrates this space allocation and determines the location of the attachments on the pole. Each time a new Bell pole is installed (installation or replacement), a pole profile caption stamp is added to the plan. The pole profile caption stamp indicates: the voltage, space allocation, installation depth, the length and class of poles and their locations (as indicated on the plan: address or arb number).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.25
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Pole profile and space allocation (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
The pole profile caption stamp used in urban and rural settings is shown below. Pole profile
Instructor's notes
Explain that the measurements for space allocation are always taken from the top of the pole. Detailed information associated with space allocation and contract management between Bell and Power company will be covered in another course (Bell-Power company Contract).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.26
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Pole profile and space allocation (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
The following diagram illustrates space allocation as seen on a real pole in the Network.
HYDRO space
Neutral space
Urbain Area Telecommunicator position Rural Area Company attachements position
Urbain Area Company attachements position
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.27
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Installing a pole
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
The following is an example of how to illustrate a pole installation. PF12 MICHAEL ST 40-5
Details:
Symbol:
Joint-use pole belonging to Bell.
Status:
Pole installation (line symbol and description in bold)
Pole address: PF12 MICHAEL ST Pole characteristics: Height: Type: Class:
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.28
40 foot Green 5
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Removing a pole
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
The following is an example of how to illustrate a pole removal
PR 96 KING ST RM 35-5/1986 #CD : TKR543 Symbol:
Pole belonging to Bell.
Status:
Remove (line symbol and description in bold, in brackets)
Pole address: PR 96 KING ST Pole characteristics: Height: Type: Class: Installation year:
35 foot Penta 5 1986
Pole barcode number: CD #: TKR543
Instructor's notes
Point out where the pole installation year is indicated. Mention that the barcode is not always available.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.29
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Replacing a pole
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
When replacing a pole, the work is done in stages:
• • •
Add a new pole. Transfer the attachments (all pole users: Power, cable TV company and Bell) from the old pole to the new pole. Remove the old pole.
It is possible to replace an existing pole with a new pole installed: 1. In the same location 2. In an adjacent location 3. In another location The following examples show how to illustrate these three situations.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.30
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Replacing a pole (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
1. Replacing a pole in the same location When a new pole is installed in the same location (in the same hole) as the existing pole, the “replace” status is used. A note is entered to indicate that a joint team is required. Example: PF 555 LIONEL ST (35-5/1985) 45-4 #CD : TJR5T3
Note to Expertech: Co-ordinate required Work with Hydro.
Symbol:
Joint-use pole belonging to Bell.
Status:
Replace (line symbol plus description of pole to be removed in bold and in brackets + description of pole to install in bold)
Pole address: PF 555 LIONEL ST Characteristics of pole to remove: Height: Type: Class: Installation year:
35 foot Penta 5 1985
Characteristics of pole to install: Height: Type: Classed
45 foot Green 4
Pole barcode number: CD#: TJR5T3
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.31
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Replacing a pole (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
2. Replacing a pole in an adjacent location The new pole is placed in an adjacent location (i.e., 1 metre or less from the existing pole). Two symbols are therefore required, as the following example shows: one with the “remove” status and another with the “install” status. The description is as follows: Example: 1
PF 1 LAFLEUR ST RM 30-6/1978
Instructor's notes
0.5
PF 1 LAFLEUR ST 35-4 #CD : GHJ774
For a replacement, the adjacent location is the recommended choice. 3. Replacing a pole in another location (located more than 1 metre away from the existing pole) If the new pole must be installed more than one metre away from the existing pole, the symbols for both poles (an existing and one to install) are required. As well, you must indicate the distance between the existing pole and the new pole.
1
PF 34 BEAUBIEN ST 35-4 #CD : GHY465
PF 34 BEAUBIEN ST RM 35-5/1985)
10
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.32
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Other work
Comment [M1]: Spare space to make the folder page numbering the same as in french.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.33
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Other work (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Straighten pole When a pole is leaning, it must be straightened. A note is entered next to the symbol (existing pole). Example:
PR 5 LOUISE ST Straighten
Instructor's notes
If a joint team is required to reset the pole, a note must indicate as much. Moving poles This operation is rather rare. To illustrate this work, trace an arrow indicating the direction of the move and enter “MOVE” followed by the distance to be moved. The location of the existing pole is illustrated by a dashed line. In the following example, the pole must be moved 3 metres.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.34
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Example :
P/L
24 1
26 2 PR 26 MARY ST
PR 24 MARY ST MV 3m
P/L
Other work (cont'd)
P/L
Relocating a pole line In very rare circumstances, a pole line may be relocated. The illustration of this operation is similar to a move. Example:
1
2
30 PF12 JOYCE ST
3
30
30
PF 22 JOYCE ST
PF 32 JOYCE ST
MV 2m
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
4
5.1.35
PF 42 JOYCE ST
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes EX UP ER C RO IS G E
Exercise # 1
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
In small groups, ask the participants to do the following exercise. Ask the participants to graphically illustrate the required work for the exercises below. Use the M5L1 PowerPoint presentation for the correction. Answers are written in your guide and under the "Answers" tab for the participants. 15 minutes Case #1 Illustrate the pole installation described below.
• • • • •
Instructor's notes
Belongs to Bell and used by Bell and Power Company Located in front of 123 University street Height 35 foot CCA-PA Class 4
Answer :
PF 123 UNIVERSITY ST 35-4
Case #1 Case #2
Describe the situation illustrated below. PF 33 ST-LUC ST 35-2
Instructor's notes
Answer : Case #2 • Belongs to Power Company and used both by Bell and Power Company • Located in front of 33 St-Luc street • Height 35 foot • Cedar • Class 2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.36
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Exercise # 1 (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Case #3 Illustrate the pole removal described below.
• • • • • •
Instructor's notes
Belongs to Bell and used by Bell and Power Company Located in front of 1800 Maple street Height 40 foot Green pole (CCAPEG) Class 4 Installed in 1974
Answer : Case #3
PF 1800 MAPLE ST RM 40-4/1974
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.37
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Exercise # 1 (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Case #4 Illustrate the work to perform, at the different sites, as described. Include correct addressing in answers.
1
R 15 ADAM
Arbitrary 1, replace Bell joint use pole 35 foot class 5 PENTA placed in 1989, by an adjacent 35 foot class 5 GREEN pole (1m away).
49
R 19 ADAM
2
Arbitrary 2, replace Bell joint use pole 35 foot class 5 PENTA placed in 1989, by a 35 foot class 5 GREEN pole that will be placed 6m south of the existing pole.
44
R 25 ADAM
3
Note to Expertech : Co-ordinate required work with Hydro.
Arbitrary 3, replace Bell joint use pole 35 foot class 5 PENTA placed in 1989, by a 35 foot class 4 GREEN pole that will be placed at the same location. 30
R 29 ADAM
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.38
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Answer: Case #4
1 1
PR 15 ADAM ST RM 35-5/1989 PR 15 ADAM ST 35-5
49
PR 19 ADAM ST RM 35-5/1989 2
6
PR 19 ADAM ST 35-5
44
PR 25 ADAM ST (35-5/1989) 35-4
3
30
PR 29 ADAM ST
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.38(a)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
4. Illustrating accessories on 1-199 Series Plans Duration
10 minutes Just as for poles, the symbols for guys, anchors and overhead guys depend on to whom they belong and the parties using them. These accessories are illustrated by symbols and descriptions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.39
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
FUTURE USE
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.40
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
FUTURE USE
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.41
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Statuses are used to illustrate the work to be performed. The size of the lines associated with the symbols and a description indicate the status.
Symbols (cont'd)
The EXISTING status is illustrated by a thin line symbol and a description in thin characters.
GUY & ANCHOR
OVERHEAD GUY
L:5 H:6 P : 50 6M 16M ANC
6M
12
The INSTALLATION status is illustrated by a bold line symbol and a description in bold. L:5 H:6 P : 50 6M 16M ANC
6M
12 The REMOVE status is illustrated by a thin line symbol and a bold description in brackets.
RM (6m) RM (6M) RM (16M ANC)
(12) The REPLACE status is illustrated by a bold line. It is accompanied by bold text in brackets for the element to remove and a bold description for the elements to install. L:5 H:6 P : 50 (6M)32M (16M ANC)32M ANC
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
(6M) 10M
(25) 25
5.1.42
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
As a reminder, point out the illustration of the address and arb on the following diagram.
Mention that the following explanations about the description will be presented in connection with the anchor and guy installation diagram below.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.42(a)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Description
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
The characteristics of guys, anchors and overhead guys are indicated on the work plan in a description. Also, just as for poles, the address or an arb can specify the location of the work.
10M guy to install PF 88 LAURENTIAN ST 40-3 Symbol of anchor to install L:8 H:6 P : 50 10M 32M ANC
•
Lead (pole/rod) Height of attachment Pull Size of guy Anchor capacity and type
Size of guy
There are 4 sizes of guys expressed in 1000 psi (M = 1000 lbs/ in2). Note that the higher the number, the greater the holding capacity of the guy.
• • • •
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6M 10M 16M 25M
5.1.43
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Anchor description
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Anchor capacity
The capacity of the anchoring system is expressed in 1000 PSI (M) of pull strength.
The following table shows the different rod sizes and associated capacities, as well as the maximum numbers of guys per rod. The following are the different anchor models used at Bell: A variety of anchors is available to meet the needs associated with the type of soil and load capacity to support. Note: Rod Size is not placed on the plan or in NetX.
Rod Size
Strength (M)
3/4 1 5/8 * 1* 1 1/4 * 1 1/4 * Rock anchor 1 1/4 *
16 32 32 32 32 32 16 50
Maximum Number of Guys 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 4
* Note: These anchors are no longer used but may still be found in the field.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.44
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Anchor description (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Type of anchor
Certain types of anchor must be indicated on the plan. This information is illustrated next to the anchor capacity. Plate anchor: no identification required Screw anchor: e.g., 16M SCREW Rock anchor: e.g., ROCK Swamp anchor: e.g., 16M SWAMP A variety of anchors are available to meet needs associated with the type of soil encountered and the load capacity to support. The following are the different types of anchors used at Bell.
Plate anchor with a 4-lug rod A new anchor is often used in an urban setting. It has a 4lug rod (2 for Power Company, 1 for Bell and one for the cable company) and a steel plate threaded with an anchor rod and nut.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.45
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Anchor description (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Plate anchor with 3-lug rod This anchor consists of a steel plate threaded with an anchoring rod and nut.
Plate anchor
Screw anchor A screw anchor with a single or double helix is installed in most types of soil with a hydraulic excavator.
Screw anchor
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.46
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Anchor description (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Rock anchor (type P) The rock anchor consists of a galvanized steel rod with an integral eye on one end and a slot on the other, which slips over a galvanized steel corner of the anchor.
Rock anchor
Log anchor A log anchor consists of an anchoring rod (for soft soil) held by logs and a nut (holding force = 6M to 15M).
(6
in
)
Table E
Depth (Table G)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Vertical installation depth (table G)
5.1.47
At least twice the diameter of the log
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Anchor description (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Lead The lead in metres is the distance between the pole and anchor rod. Pull is used as a value to relate the unbalanced tensions in a suspension strand at a corner or dead end pole to the suspension strand tension. BCP 914-1000-106 Pole Strand
Guy Anchor
Lead
To indicate this information, enter “L” followed by the measurement in metres. Description of overhead guys
The overhead guy is illustrated by a specific symbol and description.
Instructor's notes
As a reminder, point out the illustration of the address and arb on the following diagram.
Mention that the following explanations about the description will be presented in connection with the following diagram of an overhead guy installation.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.48
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Description of overhead guys (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Overhead guy size The overhead guy is an extension of the strand. It comes in 4 sizes.
• • • •
6M 10M 16M 25M
This information is entered above the symbol. Length of overhead guys The length of the overhead guy is indicated below the symbol and expressed in metres. Example O/H : 6M
PF 24 JOYCE ST
PF 12 JOYCE ST 20m
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.49
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
5. Work on accessories Duration
10 minutes
Introduction
In the previous teaching point on accessories, you learned how to illustrate their installation on a work plan. You will now see a range of work that can be done on guys, anchors and overhead guys, as well as how to illustrate them on plans. The most common situations will be shown as examples. Various work is performed on accessories, as follows: Work on guys: 9 Install 9 Remove 9 Replace 9 Transfer 9 Retension Work on anchors: 9 Install 9 Remove 9 Replace Work on overhead guys: 9 Install 9 Remove 9 Replace 9 Transfer 9 Retension
Instructor's notes
Explain what “retension” means • In fact, “retensioning” means that a guy or overhead guy is “slack,” i.e., without tension, meaning that it has absolutely no holding strength. The retensioning operation involves applying and adjusting tension on the existing guy. • Retensioning is illustrated on the following plans. • Explain these examples.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.50
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of work on guys and anchors
•
Instructor's notes
Installing an anchor and a guy associated with a pole installation.
L:6 H:6 P : 50 10M 16M SCR ANC
PR 154 BERGEN RD 35-5
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Lead Height of attachment Pull Size of guy Anchor capacity and type
Mention that this involves installing a screw anchor and also mention that the installation of a plate anchor would only affect the capacity of the anchor (e.g., 32M with R: 1 ¼). Also mention that installing an anchor and a guy on an existing pole means that a thin symbol line would be used. As well, only the address and the barcode (if available) would be indicated. As for the arb, it would remain on the plan. •
Installing a sidewalk guy with a new anchor
The guy symbol is used to illustrate this installation and the description states “Sidewalk guy.” PF 54 CHOPIN RD 35-5 L:3 H:6 P : 50 10M SIDEWALK 32M ANC
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.51
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of work on guys and anchors (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Installing an anchor
L: 6 P : 50 32M ANC
PF 676 GUSTAVE
•
Installing a guy on an existing anchor
PF 959 MOUNTAINS RD 35-4 L:3 P: 50 16M
•
Removing a guy
x
PF 2244 MARY ST
RM (10M)
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to explain the illustration below: • Removal of a joint-use Bell pole • Removal of a joint-use anchor and guy owned by Bell PF 636 JONES ST RM 40-2/1985 RM (16M) RM (16M ANC)
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
x x
x
x x
Remind the participants that to illustrate removal, a thin line symbol is used and the description is in bold letters in brackets.
5.1.52
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of work on guys and anchors (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Replacing an anchor and a guy
PF 636 JONES ST
•
L:6 P : 50 (10M) 10M (16M ANC) 32M ANC
Replacing a guy on an existing anchor
PF 246 ORLEAN RD P:50 (10M) 10M
•
Retensioning a guy
To illustrate this work, add a note on the plan. Note to Expertech: Retension the guy between arb 1 and arb 2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.53
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of work on overhead guys
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Installing an overhead guy
The following is an installation of a Bell overhead guy at arbs 1 and 2: O/H 6M
PF 12 JOYCE ST
•
PF 24 JOYCE ST
12
Removing an overhead guy
The following diagram shows removal of a Bell overhead guy
RM O/H (6M) x PF 12 JOYCE ST
•
x (12)
PF 24 JOYCE ST
Replacing an overhead guy RM O/H O/H PF 12 JOYCE
•
(12)
12
PF 24 JOYCE
Retensioning an overhead guy
To illustrate this work, add a note on the plan. Note to Expertech: Retension the overhead guy between arb 1 and arb 2.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.54
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of other work
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Work on attachments A variety of work operations may be required on attachments to poles such as strands, terminals and cases.
•
Rearranging attachments
This work involves raising or lowering all the attachments on an existing pole. These rearrangements are sometimes necessary to obtain sufficient clearance above a road or to free up space on the pole to install other attachments. They are illustrated as follows:
PF 15 FRANK ST Raise 0.5m 2 Strands 1 OPI
PF 12 LOUISE RD Lower 0.3m 1 Strand 1 Terminal
Instructor's notes
State that lowering the strand includes all the cables lashed to it. The designer or coordinator notes will indicate the attachments to lower and raise as well as the measurement. The elements mentioned correspond to activities in the Bell-Expertech contract.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.55
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of other work (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Transferring attachments
This operation follows pole replacement. When a pole is replaced in the same location or in an adjacent location, a transfer operation is required. It is illustrated as follows: x
x
x x
PR 689 DUFFERIN AV (35-5/1988) 40-4 Transfer : 2 Strands 1 OPI 1 Terminal
Note to cable company Transfer your attachments
Instructor's notes
• Specify that in the contract between Bell and Expertech, the criterion for deciding to use the transfer operation is that the distance between both poles must be 1 metre or less (from pole centre to pole centre). • Explain that the technician performs this work in one operation. • Draw the participants’ attention to the note that is added when the pole has attachments belonging to a third party (any other user besides Bell and Power Company: cable company or carrier). This note: - is added for all work on their attachments: raise, lower, attach, detach or transfer. - makes it possible to plan cable company activity in SAP and send plans to the cable company concerned.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.56
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of other work (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Attach or detach
These operations follow pole replacement, addition or removal in an existing line. When the pole is replaced in another location, two operations are required: detach and attach. These are illustrated as follows. x
x
x x
4
PF 45 FLOWER ST (35-5/1992) Detach : 1 Strand 2 Service Wires 1 Closure
Instructor's notes
PF 47 FLOWER ST 40-4 Attach : 1 Strand 2 Service Wires 1 Closure
Remind the participants about the decision criteria (more than 1 metre = detach/attach). Point out that the situation illustrated earlier involves two trips by the technician: once to attach and a second to detach. Draw their attention to the fact that illustrating the addition or removal of a pole corresponds to the previous diagram. Make sure that the participants view these operations.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.57
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of other work (cont'd)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Occasionally, certain accessories are used: balconies and steps, extension arms and U guard (cable protectors) for dip poles.
There is no symbol to illustrate those elements. The installation, removal or rearrangement of these accessories is indicated in a note to Expertech.
•
Balconies and steps
This equipment allows easy access to the various cases and crossconnecting terminals on poles.
Steps Balcony
The following are examples of notes to Expertech: Note to Expertech: • At arb 1: Place type B balcony. • At arb 2: Add pole steps as stipulated in the practice.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.58
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of other work (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Extension arms
This accessory is used to support cables that cannot be attached directly to a pole.
Extension arm
When work is required on extension arms, it is indicated in a note, as follows: Note to Expertech: • At arb 3: Remove the pole’s extension arm
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.59
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Examples of other work (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
U Guard (Cable protector)
A U Guard is placed to protect cables going up or down a pole. This protector prevents the cable from being damaged at ground level by a snow bank, for example.
U Guard
•
Installation and removal of a U Guard
This work is indicated in notes. Examples: Place a U Guard on pole at arb 8. Remove the U Guard on pole at arb 9.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.60
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Exercise # 2 Duration
20 minutes
Instructor's notes
Mention to participants that, in the operations, 1-199 Series Plans are often manually drawn from an outside visit rough plan. On the following pages, they will find: • A coordinator rough plan, written on a power company plan, associated to a joint-use request. We will analyse it together. • A partially started plan that they will have to complete according to the established rules as seen in the lesson.
Analyse the « rough plan » with the group using the « Analysis Method » job aid. Do steps 1 and 2. On the next page of your Instructor's guide, you will find the results. Therefore, use this document as a reference tool, do not read it with the participants. Make sure that the participants well understand the work to be done on the outside network. Once steps 1-2 of the analysis are completed: • Participants can consult the results in they guide under the "Answers" tab; • They will have to draw the illustrated work according to the rules and indicate any missing element on the work plan. Instructions
In the operations, poles and their accessories plans are often manually drawn from an outside visit rough plan. This exercise will allow you to work with a "rough plan" and to complete a work plan. On the following pages, you will find: • A coordinator rough plan, written on a power company plan; • A partially started plan that you will have to complete.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.61
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Exercise # 2 (cont'd)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
COORDINNATOR ROUGH PLAN
5.1.62
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Exercise # 2 (cont'd) PARTIALY STARTED PLAN
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.63
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Exercise # 2 RESULTS: SKETCH ANALYSIS
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location.
Job number = missing Switching centre: Bracebridge. Plan(s) number(s) = missing
Work location description :
Street names: URBJ24 Municipality: missing Info to produce a 700 location plan or a location sketch on plan is written in a note. 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies). Network category(ies) : Aerial (structure : pole). Step 2 : : Identify the work illustrated. • Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. ON THE SKETCH Note and symbol
P22 URBJ24 Pole on the right side:
Work description
Hydro existing joint use pole.
P22L1URBJ24 Pole to the left
New Bell pole (30-4) rock mount Note : Attach 1 Drop
Between the two poles
Extend BSW to new pole and move protector from tree. Tree trimming (T/T) on both sides of road to clear out drop wire.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.63(a)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note : In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan. Verification : Write down the verified items.
Missing items: Specify the required action to take if known.
Missing: Pole profile label for attachments height. Missing: Staking information for new pole
Ask designer
Missing: Distance between the two poles
Ask designer
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.63(b)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
COMPLETED WORK PLAN
15m
4. NEW POLE LOCATION STAKED.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.63(c)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
6. “PLANS 1-199 – POLES” Checklist Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Present the items in the “PLANS 1-199 – POLES” checklist discussed in this lesson and highlighted in grey. To this end, you can consult the explanations pertaining to these items on the list in the Checklist binder. Since most of these items have already been discussed in previous sections of the course, you can decide what needs more explanation and what can be covered quickly. Lastly, mention to the participants that there is no summary exercise for poles given that the exercises are integrated throughout this lesson.
“PLANS 101-199 – POLES” checklist
In your work, to ensure that your plans are complete and the work is illustrated according to standards, use the Bell standardized checklist. Let’s look at the “1-199 PLANS - POLES” checklist together.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.64
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
920-3110-100 Length and class of pole (914-1000-106F) & POLE TYPE Name of main and cross streets Transfer of attachments and caption stamp for attachment heights Joint-use: network elements number (requested by Bell) Joint-Use: DCT # Staking and trimming (914-100-105) Right of way, easement, MTQ, CN for railway crossing Other information required on the work plan Information on types of anchoring Reference to associated plans Caption stamp for access to work or notes for installation details, type of soil, repaving if necessary, joint team (Construction Notes) Distance between poles and tie-in measurements Address or Arb Presence of services under the surface (“Attention” caption stamp obligatory) Different notes pertaining to pole installation, and pole-related elements 700 plan for details (e.g., steel pole) 700 plan for work location
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
PLAN #
PLANS 1-199 – POLES 920-3110-100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5.1.65
ITEM #
PLANS 1-199 – POLES
NETWORK # __________________________
ITEM #
CHECKLIST - PLANS 1-199
PLAN #
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 1 : Poles and Accessories (1-199 Series Plan)
Summary Duration
5 minutes The following key points were covered in this lesson:
• • • •
Instructor's notes
The use of poles and accessories in the network; Symbols and descriptions associated with poles and their accessories; Illustrating work on 1-199 Series plans; The checklist for 1-199 Series plans.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer the participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.1.66
Lesson 2 Aerial Cables (200 Plans)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Lesson 2 Aerial cables (200 plans) Duration
2 hours
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • • •
Indicate how to illustrate an aerial cable on a 200 plan; Using 200 and 700 plans, identify the work to be performed on aerial cables; Using the checklist, identify discrepancies and corrections to be made on 200 plans.
Materials - M5L2 PowerPoint;
- Network Category Change job aid.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.1
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Preamble Duration
5 minutes As you learned in the previous lesson, poles and their accessories are illustrated on 100 plans. In this lesson, you will see that aerial cables are illustrated on 200 plans. These plans are used by Expertech, our contractor, who installs and performs work on cables.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.2
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
1. Aerial cable characteristics Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M5L2 PowerPoint presentation to explain the images of this lesson.
M5L2 Introduction
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Aerial cables may be found: •
On poles;
•
On exterior building walls;
•
On (or under) bridges or overpasses.
5.2.3
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Types of aerial cables
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Various types of aerial copper cables may be used in the outside plant. The following are the most common: 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9
BHBB (19-gauge) BHBF (19-gauge) BHAB (22-gauge) BHAF (22-gauge)
BKMB (24-gauge) BKMF (24-gauge) BKTB (26-gauge) BKTF (26-gauge)
Fibre cables may also be found in the aerial network. Here are a few examples: 9 34NCLT-012 9 34N2LT-036 9 34REHT-024
Just as for all cables, when an aerial cable is illustrated on a work plan, you will see the following information: • •
Cable identification Direction of feed arrow
Examples
25,1-25 26, 151-175 BHAB 50-22/AER
25F 25
F10,1-6 F11,13-18 F20,25-36 34N2LT-024/AER
25F 25
NOTE: You should locate most up to date NP tips for correct cable type as cable designations change periodically.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.4
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Illustrating aerial cables
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
The aerial network consists of the support structure that you saw in detail in the last lesson (poles, anchors and guys) and the aerial cable. 200 plans illustrate work performed on aerial cables and the accessories required for their installation, such as strands and guys. In addition to work on aerial cables, sometimes isolated work on poles and their accessories is illustrated. In some situations, this avoids having to produce two plans. Still, most of the work on a 200 plan must be performed on aerial cables. Existing poles do not necessarily appear on 200 plans. They are only illustrated when guying work is involved at the same time as aerial cable work. As you know, many details are required on 500 plans in order to identify the location of cables in duct structures and manholes. On 200 plans, the situation is quite different because the aerial network is visible. Very often, the names of main and cross streets as well as civic addresses are enough to accurately find the work location.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.5
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
2. Aerial cable lengths and change in network category Duration
15 minutes
Final lengths and component lengths
Just like for the other types of cable, final lengths and component lengths are associated with the aerial cable. They are indicated on 200 plans. You will find final aerial cable lengths between: • • • • •
Two successive splices/fusions; A splice/fusion and a network category change point; Two network category change points; A splice/fusion and the end of a cable; A network category change point and the end of a cable.
In the following examples, you will see the illustration of final and component lengths associated with the aerial cable. The final length is entered above the cable, at the end farthest away from the central office. Three final lengths are indicated between arbs: • • •
1 and 2: 70F is the final length; 2 and 3: 68F is the final length; 3 and 4: 240F is the final length; Final lengths
1
2 10,1-100 BKTF100-26/UG IN CONDUIT
70
8
4
3 10,1-100
70F
10,1-100
68F
BKTF100-26/AER
BKTB100-26/AER
240
60 60
55
Component lengths
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
240F
5.2.6
60
60
65
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants why there is a final length at arbs: • 2: network category change • 3: a splice (different type of cable) • 4: the end of a cable Remind the participants that: • The final length is always followed by an F; • The NetworkX system offers the possibility of illustrating the final length in the cable line before the alphanumeric sequence; • The lack of space on a plan may mean that a note is used to indicate the final length. These elements were mentioned in module 2 – lesson 5.
Final and component lengths (cont'd)
Component lengths are entered below the cable, at the end farthest away from the central office. . On the diagram below, they are found between: • • •
1 and 2: 70 is a component length; 2 and 3: 8 and 60 are component lengths; 3 and 4: 240 is a component length.
Final lengths
1
2 10,1-100 BKTF100-26/UG IN CONDUIT
70
8
4
3 10,1-100
70F
10,1-100
68F
BKTF100-26/AER
240F
BKTB100-26/AER
240
60 60
55
60
60
65
Component lengths
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask the participants whether there is another type of measurement on the previous diagram. If so, which one? Review the definition and use of tie-in measurements (Module 2 – Lesson 5).
5.2.7
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Final and component lengths (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Up or down prefix The “UP” or “DOWN prefix precedes the component length and indicates whether the cable length goes up or down a pole, an exterior building wall, on or under a bridge, in a crossconnecting terminal or in an equipment case. The prefix depends on the direction of the central office. In the example below, arb 1 is on the central office side. The cable is deployed from the central office (in the underground network) and goes up the pole towards the customer. The component length of 7 metres will therefore be preceded by the prefix: “UP.”
Existing 1 10,1-100 70F BKTF 100-26/UG 70 UP 7
10,1-100 BKTF 100-26/AER
67F 60
60
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out to the participants that in the diagram on page 5.2.6, the component length of 8 m near arb 2 should read: UP8.
5.2.8
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Final and component lengths (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Loop prefix
The prefix “LOOP” can be entered before a component length and/or a symbol can be drawn. In both cases, it means to leave cable slack. The Stored Slack Symbol must be identified on a cable if required. Stored Slack means to leave cable slack. When installing fibre optic cable, you must install a length of cable loop on the strand, in manholes or on pedestals. This cable length allows technicians to move the fibre cable to the truck (or trailer) when fusions are required. The following symbol associated with fibre optic cables is what you will see on the plans:
Instructor's notes
Explain that an arb points to the location where slack is to be left. Store slack” symbol
F10,1-6 F11,13-18 F20, 25-36 34N2LT-024/UG
70F 70
8
F10,1-6 F11,13-18 F20, 25-36 68F 34N2LT-024/AER 60 60
F10,1-6 F11,13-18 F20, 25-36 34N2LT-024/AER
255F 115
55
LOOP 15 60
60
125 65
1
Component measurement indicating the length of cable loop to leave (written under the symbol)
When installing copper cable, sometimes a length of cable loop is left in the aerial and underground network. The component length is preceded by the prefix “LOOP” and entered under the cable. The location is identified with the help of an arb.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Mention that the buried network has specific characteristics for loop lengths and that they will be covered in the first lesson of module 6.
5.2.9
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Just as for underground cables, there are network category change points for aerial cables. These are specific locations where aerial cables become building, buried or underground cables.
Network category change points
In the following pages, you will see the specifics associated with each situation. •
An aerial cable becomes a building cable when it enters a building, i.e., the point where it penetrates the building wall.
Building
Network category change point : Building entrance
Aerial cable
Building cable
Building
If the aerial cable is attached to a building wall, it is considered an aerial cable until the point at which it penetrates the wall and enters the building. When the cable enters the building through a hole in the building wall, it becomes a building cable.
Aerial cable
Cable attached to an exterior wall = Aerial cable Building
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.10
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
•
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
An aerial cable becomes buried or underground when it goes down a pole (> 5 metres). In fact, it changes network category at ground level.
Pole
Network category change point Ground level
6
DOWN 7
Aerial cable
1
Buried or underground cable
DOWN 7
F 50 LOUIS
F 10 LOUIS
This situation involves an up or down component length. Usually, this length is of 7 metres, split in 6m on the pole and 1m in the ground to reach the bottom of the trench.
1 BKTF 100-26 /AER
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
40
60
5.2.11
106F 6
2
1
BKTF 100-26/BUR
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Explain that, a vertical measurement indicates a cable direction change. In the preceding example, the aerial cable changes direction (down) to go through into the ground. The vertical measurement is of 7 metres from the top of the pole to the bottom of the trench. As the Network category change point is at the ground level, this measurement must be divided in two, 6m aerial and 1m buried or underground. These measurements must be added to the specific network category final length. Specify that no quality error will be generated if the total measurement is applied to only one category.
Remind the participants about the difference between a buried and an underground cable: An underground cable is in a main conduit or a terminated lateral conduit, for example, between a manhole and a pole. A buried cable is placed directly in the ground or in an unterminated conduit section. Make a connection between the previous diagram and the up/down measurement covered in this lesson.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.11(a)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Under/on a bridge or an overpass
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
When a cable is located on (or under) a bridge or an overpass, the cable is aerial if it continues in the aerial network at both ends of the bridge or overpass.
Bridge Aerial cable
Aerial cable
Aerial cable
If a cable is aerial at one end and buried or underground at the other, it changes from being an aerial cable to a buried or underground cable at ground level, as the following diagram shows. Bridge
Aerial cable
Network category change point: Ground level
Buried or underground cable Aerial cable
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
In the Network Category Change job aid, ask the participants to identify the cases associated with the aerial cables covered in this lesson.
5.2.12
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Take a few minutes to analyse the diagram below. Explain the network category change illustrated in the diagram and indicate the component and final lengths, by cable section, at the appropriate location on the diagram:
Exercise # 1
40
3
DOWN 7
60
1
2
40D 4D/PVCD1
BKTF 100-26/AER
+ 4AMH1
_______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________
Instructor's notes
Give the participants a few minutes to decipher the last diagram. Correct it as a group. The answer is in the M5L2 PowerPoint presentation and on the following page of your guide. For participants, the answer is under the "ANSWERS" tab of their guide. As needed, review the following concepts: • Component and final lengths; • Network category change; • Direction of feed arrow.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.13
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Answer: • Between arbs 1 and 2, an aerial cable BKTF 100-26 from the central office at arb 1; • At arb 2, the aerial cable goes down 7 metres on the pole and in ground to reach the bottom of the trench, and continues, towards customer, in a terminated lateral conduit up to 4AMH1 manhole (40m 4D/PVCD1). • In the manhole, the cable measures 3 metres. • The aerial portion components are: 60 metres and DOWN 6 metres (portion on the pole) for a total of 66F; • The underground portion components are: At arb 2, 1 metre (portion of the vertical measure in the ground), between arb. 2 and the manhole 40 metres in conduit and 3 metres in the manhole for a total of 44F. 40
3
DOWN 7
60
1
2
66F 66
40D 4D/PVCD1 DOWN 7
BKTF 100-26/AER
Inside of 4AMH1
BKTF 100-26/UG 41
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.13(a)
44F 3
+ 4AMH1
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
3. Work on aerial cables and their accessories Duration
30 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M5L2 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following images.
Introduction
Various work may be performed on aerial cables and the strands to which they are attached: • • • • • •
Installation Removal and abandon Replacement Rearrangement: detach, attach, transfer, and relocate Retension (strand only) Add or remove slack
As mentioned in module 4, splicing work may be performed on all categories of cables.
Instructor's notes
Mention to the participants that for any type of work, in addition to reading the 200 plan pertaining to aerial cables, they must check whether 700 plans exist, which may help them better identify and understand the work. Remind them also that they have to ensure a right of way has been granted to perform the installation work.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.14
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Using a strand to support aerial cables
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
As mentioned at the beginning of the lesson, strands are twisted steel wires placed between poles and to which cables are attached.
In effect, when installing a cable, it must be lashed to the strand. This means that you must attach the cable to the strand with a metal wire, as shown in the photo below
Note: Unlash is the opposite of lash. A cable has to be unlashed to be removed.
Instructor's notes
You must unlash a cable to remove it when it is stipulated on a plan, which rarely happens. Generally, cables do not have to be unlashed because all the cables and the strands are removed at the same time. Note the strand to be removed is not illustrated on the plan. Point out that in the first photo, there is only one cable lashed to the strand, whereas there are several in the second photo.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.15
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Using strands to support aerial cables (cont'd)
Below, an Expertech technician lashes a cable to the strand.
Instructor's notes
Indicate that the ball on the cable is really the lashing machine. Each time a 200 plan illustrates the installation of an aerial cable, a note is added with information pertaining to the strand: • • • •
Location details; Size; Length (in metres); Whether it is new or existing.
A strand can support more than one cable. For example, this means that the first aerial cable installed on Andrew Street will be installed on a new strand. The same 200 plan will allow installation of the cable and the strand. If growth requires that a second aerial cable be installed on Andrew Street, it will be installed on the existing strand.
Instructor's notes
Mention that several strands can be attached to the same pole.
Retensioning a strand
Over the years, a number of situations can cause the strand to slacken. If this situation jeopardizes the network or if a new cable is to be installed on the existing strand, the strand will have to be retensioned. A note similar to this will state: “Retension 6M strand over a distance of 200 metres between arbs 1 and 2.”
Instructor's notes
Underscore the elements associated with strand information.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.16
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Installing an aerial cable
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
An aerial cable installation is indicated by a bold line, accompanied by a cable identification and lengths. A note near the cable or a note to Expertech contains the information associated with the strand. •
If the cable must be installed on a new strand:
The note will say: New 10M strand (155) between arbs 1 and 5. As well, the height of the attachments must be specified in a pole profile or in a note.
1 F10,1-6 F11,13-18 F20,25-36
F10,1-6 F11,13-18 F20,25-36
170F
34N2LT-024/BUR
170
6
2
3
4
F10,1-6 F11,13-18 F20,25-36
66F
F 1033 RUSSELL 40-4
F 1021 RUSSELL 40-4
F 1011 RUSSELL 40-4
F 1001 RUSSELL 40-4
The following diagram illustrates the installation of an aerial cable on a new strand.
5
255F
34N2LT-024/AER
34N2LT-024/AER 60
55
60
LOOP 15
60
65
NEW 10M STRAND 240 Arb. 1 to 5
14.4kV
2800mm
1.0m
4100mm
Arb. 1 to 5 40'4
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.17
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Ask the participant to explain the previous diagram. If necessary, provide help and explain that: • A strand installation is indicated by the note: NEW 10M STRAND (155) Arbs 1 to 5. • When installing a fibre optic cable, the symbol to add slack is a half circle placed on the cable line and the component length may be preceded by the prefix “LOOP.” • A pole profile has been added to indicate the height of the attachments on the poles.
Installing an aerial cable (cont'd)
•
If the cable must be installed on an existing strand:
The note will state: Lash to existing 6M strand (135) between arbs 1 and 3. If there are several strands, you have to specify which one to use. However, the height of the attachments is not required.
1
2
25,1-25 26,151-175
135F
BHAB 50-22/AER 65
70
NOTE TO EXPERTECH LASH CABLE TO MIDDLE 6M STRAND BETWEEN ARBS 1 AND 2.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
135
5.2.18
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Installing an aerial cable (cont'd)
•
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
If the cable must be attached to an exterior building wall:
You will see a note near the cable: “Attach cable to building wall.” 701 2
1 10, 1-100
86 F
BKTF 100-26/UG
10, 1-100
8F
BKTF 100-26/AER
3
10, 1-100
4
BKTF 100-26/BLD 8
86
2F
2
NOTE TO EXPERTECH 1. BETWEEN 1 AND 2, THE CABLE IS IN DUCT A UP TO THE EXTERIOR BUILDING WALL. 2. BETWEEN 2 AND 3, ATTACH THE CABLE TO THE EXTERIOR WALL UP TO THE OPENING UNDER THE WINDOW (SEE 701 PLAN)
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain the diagram. Mention that a 701 plan adds information about the cable path on the wall. Point out that the cable that continues into the building becomes a building cable.
5.2.19
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Specific work associated with installing aerial cables
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Specific work must be performed to protect the line and avoid network breakdowns in the event of electrical faults or in exceptional situations such as lightning strikes. This work is as follows: grounding, sheath to strand bond and strand to strand bond. Grounding
To ensure that an electrical surge is directed towards the ground and does not damage cables, the strand is connected by a ground point and a copper pair to a grounding rod. The grounding is installed every 300 metres or whenever Power Company equipment requires this installation. Grounding wire
Ground point
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Show the ground point, grounding wire and rod on the photos. Indicate that the grounding rod is installed by the Hydro Company when installing the pole line. 5.2.20
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Specific work associated with installing aerial cables (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Sheath to strand bond
As well, in order for the grounding to be effective, a bond between the cable sheath and the strand is required every: • 300 metres for copper cables; • 600 metres for fibre optic cables. A sheath to strand bond involves placing a wire tie between the cable sheaths and the strand supporting them according to predetermined rules.
Instructor's notes
Specify that the sheath to strand bond is created automatically, when installing a terminal on a strand and when opening a sheath (splice/fusion); it does not require notes to this effect on the plan. Strand to strand bond
A strand to strand bond is required when there is more than one strand on the same pole. It involves placing a wire tie between the strands. This operation is performed every 300 metres and is not required when there are strand separators.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.21
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Specific work associated with installing aerial cables (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
On the following diagram, you will see how to illustrate this work on plans. Grounding: arbs 2 and 3
When installing cable, the grounding symbol (a line perpendicular or diagonal to the cable, with 3 dashes above it is illustrated in bold on the cable line. This symbol is accompanied by the address of the grounding and an arb. Sheath to strand bond: arb 2
When installing a cable, the sheath to strand symbol (a line perpendicular or diagonal line to the cable, with a triangle) is illustrated in bold on the cable line and accompanied by the address of the bond and an arb. Strand to strand bond: note required
The strand to strand bond is indicated in a note.
PF 166 ELM ST
PF 56 ELM ST
PF 124 ELM ST
Note: • The grounding and sheath to strand bonds symbols are not entered on the map. • Only grounding, sheath to strand bond and strand to strand bond installations are illustrated on plans. In fact, the material required for these installations is removed at the same time as the cable, without mention on the work plan.
300
2
3
1 10, 1-100 BKTF 100- 26/AER
102
NOTE TO EXPERTECH
402 Arb. 1 to 3
CREATE A STRAND TO STRAND BOND AT ARB. 2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
NEW 6 M STRAND
5.2.22
402F 300
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
As covered in module 2 – lesson 6, point out that only one arb is required at PF 124 ELM ST because the work operations are different. Emphasize that it is possible to draw one grounding and one sheath to strand bond. These symbols can be drawn in different directions depending on the space available. Moreover, point out that the grounding is not illustrated in the same direction at arb 2 and at arb 3.
Installing a slack span of aerial cable
Slack span
Sometimes a slack span of cable is installed. A slack span is a strand without tension (to which copper cables are lashed) between two poles. Slack spans are used when a guy cannot be placed on a pole. In such a case you must place a guy on the previous pole and place no tension on the strand of the next span, as the photo shows below. Note: In the below picture, the arrow indicates a slack span on a hydro cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.23
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Installing a slack span of aerial cable (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
To illustrate a slack span installation, you must enter “slack span” under the cable line and add a note to Expertech on the workplan.
Note: The arrow is the distance between the lowest point of the strand and the straight line it should follow if it were taut. In the network, the arrow may be measured at the centre of the span.
Example Illustration of the arrow.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.24
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Ask a participant to explain the diagram below. Help him if necessary.
1
56,51-100
56,51-100
32F
56, 1-100 BKMB 100-24/AER
L: 6 H: 6 P: 50 6M 16M ANC
PF 12 PROVOST ST 40-4
PF 10 PROVOST ST 40-4
Installing a slack span of aerial cable (cont'd)
BKMB 50-24/AER
BKMB 50-24/AER 12
SLACK SPAN
NEW 6M STRAND 32 ARB.1 et 2
56, 1-50 D3601-3650
14.4kV
2800mm
NOTE TO EXPERTECH 1.0m
4100mm
Arb. 1 to 3 40'4
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.25
BKMB 100-24/AER
20
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Removing and abandoning aerial cables
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Aerial cables may be removed or abandoned (cut at either end without being removed) Example 1 Removing an aerial cable
Instructor's notes
Indicate that the rectangles with numbers correspond to buildings and their civic numbers. Ask a participant to explain the diagram below (removal of an aerial cable and its strand, because no note indicates to unlash the cable). 69
67
2
1
X
X
12, 76-125 RM 50F/BKTB 50-26/AER
X
X
50
Example 2 Abandon aerial cable
Instructor's notes
Ask a participant to explain the diagram below. Point out that for an abandon, the pairs or fibres must be cut into bulk dead pairs. Point out that the abbreviation will be placed before the alphanumeric sequence or the final length, depending on the illustration of the cable at the time of installation.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.26
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
35
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
39
45
1 17, 76-125 BKTB 50-26/AER
Replacing aerial cables
2
45F
X
(17, 76-125) 50D AB BKTB 50-26/AER
50F
X
50
An aerial cable may be replaced. This involves installing a new cable and removing an existing cable. In the field, work to replace copper cables is performed in the following order:
1. Linemen place the new cable and splicers splice its pairs to those of the existing cables at each facility splice (open existing splices if applicable or create new splices). Note: At this point, the cable to remove and the new cable are both energized.
Cable to replace
1. Splice new cable (in the splice closure)
New cable
Splice new cable (in the splice closure)
2. The splicers remove (cut) the pairs of the cable to remove at both facility splices
2. Cut cable (in splice closure)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.27
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
3. The linemen remove the cable to be removed.
3. Removed cable
Example 1 Replace a 600 pair aerial cable measuring 111 metres with a new 600-pair cable.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
10,751-800 BKTF 50-26
89F 89
2
78
BKMF 200-24
111F 111
78F
1
BKTF600-26/AER 10,601-1000 200D
10,801-1000
10,601-1000 122F BKTF 400-26/AER 122
1F 11 1 11
10,601-1000 200D RM BKTF600-26/AER
10,701-750 50D 59F BKTF 100-26 59
Replacing aerial cables (cont'd)
Point out that the counts correspond to the cable sizes and the principle of continuity is respected.
5.2.28
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Replacing aerial cables (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Example 2
When a cable must be replaced on an existing section of cable that is not located between two splices, the final and component lengths of the existing cable must be adjusted.
PF 100 LUC ST
Initially, a cable section of 175 metres consists of two components: • 40 metres between the splice at arb 1 and the terminal • 135 metres between the terminal and the end of the cable.
Terminal
50,1-50 BKTB 50-26/AER 40
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
175F 135
5.2.29
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
A 25-metre section must be removed in the second section.
Replacing aerial cables (cont'd)
On the plan, it is important to break down the component length of 135 metres to specify the location of the 25 metres to replace in relation to the equipment and other lengths already illustrated on the cable. The work was illustrated as follows: • 20 metres between the existing terminal and the new splice created at arb 1 (splice created for the cable replacement); • 25 metres between arbs 1 and 2, which corresponds to the amount of cable to replace; • 90 metres between arb 2 and the end of the cable.
PF 100 LUC ST
The final length of 175F must be replaced with the new final lengths: • 60F BKTB50-26 (section of existing cable before the work); • 25F BKTB100-26 (new cable); • 90F BKTB50-26 (section of existing cable before the work). Notice that the length in the three sections still totals 175 metres.
Terminal
1 BKTB 50-26/AER 40
2
60F
2 25F
1
20
25 1 BKTB100-26/AER 2 RM 25F BKTB50-26/AER 3
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
BKTB50-26/AER
5.2.30
90F 3 90
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Replacing aerial cables (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
In the field, the work to replace fibre cables is performed in the following order:
1. The linemen place new cable. Cable to replace
Installation of the new cable
2. The splicers cut the fibres of the cable to remove and then fuse the fibres of the new cable to those of the existing cable.
Note: For a moment, the customers at the end of the cable to be replaced lose service. A release must therefore be requested from these customers.
3. Linemen remove the cable in question
Cable removed
Instructor's notes
Remind the participants that a fibre cannot be fused to two fibres. This is why customers lose service during cable replacement work. Briefly explain a release. Indicate that releases are generally done at night.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.31
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Example Replace a 12-fibre aerial cable measuring 151 metres with a new 24-fibre cable.
F10,1-36 194F 34N2LT-036/AER 194
F10,1-12 RM 151F/ 34N2LT-012/AER F10,1-24 34N2LT-024/AER
1F 15 1 15
F10,25-36 182F 34N2LT-012/AER 182
Replacing aerial cables (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
151F
151 2
1 Rearrangement
Rearrangement operations involve attaching, detaching and transferring attachments (strands, cables lashed to them and other network elements) and are generally illustrated on 100 plans, as we saw in lesson 1 of this module. However, sometimes these operations are indicated on 200 plans, in which case they are illustrated in the same way as on 100 plans.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Review the difference between “attach” and “detach” versus “transfer.”
5.2.32
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Rearrangement (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Examples
Detach and attach
Transfer
4
x
PF 45 PETUNIA ST RM 35-5/1992 Detach : 1 Strand 2 Service Wires 1 Closure
x
x
x
x
x
x
PF 47 PETUNIA ST 40-4 Attach : 1 Strand 2 Service Wires 1 Closure
x 0.5
PR 689 STE-HELEN ST RM 35-5/1988 PR 689 STE-HELEN ST 40- 4 Transfer : 2 Strands 1 OPI
NOTE: When several poles are replaced on a plan and the attachment transfer is the same for all the poles, you may illustrate the work on the poles using symbols and descriptions and add a note to Expertech for the transfers. Example: Arbs 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 transfer 2 strands
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.33
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Rearrangement (cont'd)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Relocating strands
Aerial network relocation involves moving a strand and the associated cable(s) to a new pole line. This is referred to as relocation when the work involves 3 or more consecutive poles and • a change of direction (the strand and cables no longer run in the same location).
Instructor's notes
Relocation may involve a rearrangement of other elements associated with the cables (terminals, cases). To illustrate cable relocation, you must enter: •
the abbreviation “RELOC”;
•
the current location of the cable in a dotted line;
•
The proposed location for the cable in a thin line (existing);
•
Arrows showing the direction of the move;
•
The distance between the old and new cable position;
•
A note specifying the cable length to relocate and the location of the relocation work. On the following diagram, an aerial cable is relocated to new poles, 2 metres from the existing pole line.
Instructor's notes
• The relocation of the network to the new pole line requires that a “pole profile” be added to the plan in order to indicate the height of the attachments. You must also indicate the removal of the old poles. • Point out what “Add slack” means and why this may be necessary. • Explain the following diagram. • Specify that this relocation involves adding 3 metres of slack.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.34
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
NOTES TO EXPERTECH :
Existing line
A
20
20
41,1-50 BKTB 50-26/AER
2
20
20
A 3F
1
RELOC STRAND
2m
RELOC 1 strand on the new pole line from arb 1 to 2
41,1-50 BKTB 50-26/AER New line
35 PR55 PINES ST 40-3
Rearrangement (cont'd)
35 PR59 PINES ST 40-3
PR65 PINES ST 40-3
If the cable to be relocated is on a wall, you must indicate the relocation on a 200 plan and associate a 700 plan in order to add the necessary clarifications. In the following example, a cable attached to a wall must be raised 2 metres. Details are available in a 701 plan (not illustrated).
NOTE TO EXPERTECH RELOC 1 STRAND OVER 13 m. BETWEEN ARB 1 AND 2 701 20,1-50 21,1-50 BKTB 100-26/AER RELOC 2m 13
1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2
5.2.35
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Zone of influence
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Just like for all other plans, specific standards to be followed in a zone of influence are indicated in notes on a 200 plan. The project manager indicates the measures to take after consulting with the Electrical Protection group. When work is performed in a zone of influence, the following label must be affixed to the plan. It indicates that the cable is dedicated, i.e., it is reserved for use by the central station, substation or power station.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.36
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Exercise # 2 Duration
45 minutes
Instructor's notes
In small groups or individually, ask the participants to analyze the following plans by following the steps in the analysis method Explain that, on the exercise' work plans, the strands and overhead guys are drawn with NetWorkX. This is a migrated job from IMAP. In the field, people write this information in note form as if they draw those elements, the system generates validation error messages. Once the exercise is completed, «verbally» proceed to correction by asking participants' analysis results. Use the following answers, as a reference tool, to make sure that all points have been covered. DO NOT READ THE ANSWERS to the participants. Note : After the correction, tell the participants that the analysis results are under the "ANSWERS" tab in their guide.
Instructions
Individually or in small teams, analyze the following work plans and correct any discrepancies. Use the following tools: • •
Analysis Method job aid; Answer grid.
Enter the results obtained at each step in the following pages.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.37
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location.
Job number, plan(s) number(s), switching center. _______________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Work location description. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies)
Network category (ies) : __________________________________________________
Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Work description
5.2.39
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note : In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Verification : Write down the verified items.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.40
Missing items: Specify the required action to take if known.
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
EXERCISE # 2 - ANSWERS Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location.
Job number = 724707. Switching center: Sherbrooke. Plan(s) number(s) = 201 &202 No 700 location plan on the job, no location sketch on plans. References between plans 201-202 Work location description: PLAN 201: 12vl Ave and Terrill Street.
PLAN 202: 12vl Ave N.
Following permanent locations: F 635 and 655 12vl Ave N, IN 605 13Th Ave N.
Following permanent locations: F 659 12vl Ave N., In 680 and In 670 12vl Ave N., IN 685 and In 675 13th Ave N., R 675 13th Ave N. (near A 12)
1.2 Identify shown network category (is). Network category(ies):
Aerial network: accessories associated to poles, attach rearrangements, aerial cable. Buried network: buried cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.40(a)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
EXERCISE # 2 – ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2: Identify the work illustrated. 2.1
Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved.
Instructor's notes: to facilitate the group analysis, it is possible to analyse by network element type. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Work description Work on poles and accessories: A1: Place 1 guy and attach transfer (Hydro pole replaced) the Hydro request reference is indicated within the note.
PLAN 201 :
PLAN 201
PLAN 201
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
A2: Raise attachs. A4 and A5: Place guys. Between A4 and A5: Place an overhead guy. Work on cables: Between A1 and A6: place BKMB 50-24 AER, 65F, on New 6M Strand , see note for slack span between A4 and A6. Between A1 and A6: remove BKTB 50-26 AER, 63F. Splicing: A1: Facility splice. A6: Facility splice.
5.2.40(b)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
EXERCISE # 2 – ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2: Identify the work illustrated (cont'd). 2.1
Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Work on poles and accessories: A19: Remove 1 guy and attach transfers (Hydro pole replaced) the Hydro request reference is indicated in a note (plan 201).
PLAN 202 :
A13: Remove 1 guy. Between A17 and A14: Place an overhead guy. A17: place 1 guy. Near A13: removal of a pole by Hydro (pole with dash symbol in NetworkX). Work on cables: Between A3 and A7: place BKMB 100-24 AER, 105F, Existing strand between A1 and A3 New strand between A1 and A4 New strand between A4 and A6, slack span.
PLAN 202
Between A19 and A18: place 5: BKTB 50-26 AER 3F, existing strand. Between A7 and A8: place BB: BKMB 50-24 AER 12F, indication for slack span. Between A7 and A14: place BKMB 100-24 AER, 38F, and new strand. Between A14 and A16: place 1D: BKMB 50-24 AER 10F, new strand. Between A14 and A15: place Y: BKMB 50-24 AER 10F, new strand. Between A14 and A9: place EE: BJMB 50-24 AER 8F. Between A9 and A12 place DD: BJMB 50-24 BUR 20F. Cable removal at many locations.
PLAN 202
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Splicing: Facility splice: A19-A18 Facility splice to cup the abandoned cable A3 and A13 Branch splice: A7-A14. Facility splice at each location to connect existing cables to new cables and remove the old cable energizing: A15, 16, 12, 8
When correcting step 3, on the following page: Mention to participants, that it is preferable to write a note on each plan instead of a general job note.
5.2.40(c)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
EXERCISE # 2 – ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3: Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 724707 plan 201: 3.1 Verifications (work): Work on poles and accessories: • • • • •
Work on poles and accessories should not be shown in NetworkX system. System revisions are required. This work should be hand drawn to represent Bell-Hydro agreement symbols (refer to M5L1 exercise); Sizes (anchors and rods) are missing, to be added. To indicate a transfer of attachments, the TR or T abbreviations are used. Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. New Hydro pole profile missing, to be added.
Work on cables: • Placed and removed cable identifications (origin arrow). • Components & final lengths. • Strand information, written in a note. This is a migrated IMAP plan, this is why the strand is drawn. • A6: verify with originator the new strand wall bracket. • A4: verify with originator if grounding is required (check Hydro request if their is a transformer). • Sheath to strand bound (splicing closure – automatically done). • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. Splicing: Verifications at each splice; • Identification of all participating cables. • Principle of continuity. • Cable count corresponds to its size. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • Caption stamp elements = complete. • Work location: • Street names, permanent addresses and arbitraries: complete. • Location 700 plan for the«job» missing, to be added, OR work location sketch on plan missing, to be added; • References: • Municipality name: missing, to be added; • On 202 plan and to the Hydro request.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.40(d)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
EXERCISE # 2 – ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3: Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 724707 plan 202: 3.1 Verifications (work): Work on poles and accessories: • See plan 201 note. • Sizes (anchors and rods) are missing, to be added. • To indicate a transfer of attachments, the TR or T abbreviations are used. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. • New Hydro pole profile missing, to be added. Work on cables: • Placed and removed cable identifications (origin arrow). • Components & final lengths o Between A14-A19, reference EE: The component length should be preceded by the DOWN prefix, to be added. o A12 network category change. Verify with the originator if a "UP" cable length should be added (question the splice location: on wall, in ground, in pedestal). • Strand information (See 201plan note). o A7 and A8: Strand info missing, to be added. • A8, 16,15: verify with originator new strand wall bracket. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. Splicing: Verifications at each splice; • Identification of all participating cables. • Principle of continuity. • Cable count corresponds to its size. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. • A19- Reference 4: cut 161-2,1301-1350 that becomes D6001-6050: underlining missing and A20 for the splice location. • Between A3 and A13: the abandoned 100-26, show the count 100D
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • • • • • • •
Caption stamp elements = complete. Work location: Street names, permanent addresses and arbitraries: complete. Location 700 plan for the«job» missing, to be added, OR location sketch on plan missing, to be added; References: Municipality name: missing, to be added; On 202 plan and add the Hydro request reference.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.40(e)
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
4. « 200 PLAN – AERIAL » CHECKLIST Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Present the items in the “200 PLANS– Aerial Cable” checklist discussed in this lesson and highlighted in grey. To this end, you can consult the explanations pertaining to these items on the list in the Checklist binder. Since most of these items have already been discussed in previous sections of the course, you can decide what needs more explanation and what can be covered quickly. However, you should draw attention to the following items: • #36: D.C.T. This is specific to Quebec region. In Ontario specific forms are required when joint use involved. • # 5: Network exposed to voltage is identified on the pole profile (14.4KV).
Checklist
“200 PLAN – AERIAL”
In your work, to ensure that your plans are complete and the work is illustrated according to standards, use the Bell standardized checklist. Let’s look at the “200 PLAN – AERIAL” checklist together.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.41
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
920-3130-103
Pressurization
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Reference from one plan to another
9
Direction of central office (fibre ring)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
New Strand on New Pole Existing strand Slack span and arrow (931-2002-100) Sheath to strand bond Network exposed to voltage Transfer of attachments Grounding (electrical connection) (638-0200-910F)
Pair transfer Arb HDSL repeater CT/LT symbol(900-2000-100A15.doc) Work location Splicing sequence Cable and pair identification Terminals affected by transfer Terminals affected by pair transfer Terminals affect by pairs cut dead Total terminal count Assigned pair count of terminal Wiring limit (911-1000-103) Terminal address (according to IPAIRS) (NP TIPS 98-019) Taper code CLLI code Municipality Associated network
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
PLAN #
200 PLAN - AERIAL 920-3130-103 Address of crossconnect terminal Easement, R/W, MTO Name and telephone and pager number of manager Name of coordinator, telephone number, pager number Name of associate, telephone number Contact to access site or other locations Cutting and trimming Information pertaining to associated DCT (JOINT USE)# New pairs terminated at crossconnect terminal (form 3381) Pair extension (>4.5Km) may require loading (form 3888) UP/DOWN a pole General: Standards for issuing work plans
5.2.42
ITEM #
200 PLAN - AERIAL
NETWORK # _____________________ ITEM #
CHECKLIST
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
PLAN #
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 2 : Aerial cables (200 plans)
Summary Duration
10 minutes The following key points were covered in this lesson: • • •
Instructor's notes
Specifications pertaining to illustrating aerial cables and their accessories; Work on aerial cables and their accessories illustrated on 200 plans; The checklist for 200 plans.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer the participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.2.43
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan) Network category change point: Building entrance Aerial cable
Building cable
Building
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Lesson 3 Building Cables (200 Plan) Duration
1 hour 30 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you will be able to: •
Read and explain the characteristics of building cables illustrated on a 200 plan;
•
Show how to illustrate building cables on a 200 plan;
•
Using 200 and 700 plans, identify the work to be performed on building cables;
•
Use the checklist to identify and correct discrepancies on a 200 plan.
Materials - Network Category Change job aid
- M5L3 PowerPoint;
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.1
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Preamble Duration
5 minutes Until now you have seen how to illustrate underground cables (500 plans) and aerial (200 plans) cables. In this lesson, you will learn how to illustrate building cables. Just like aerial cables, building cables are generally illustrated on 200 plans.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.2
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
1. Building cable characteristics Duration
20 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M5L3 PowerPoint presentation to explain the images of this lesson.
Introduction
A building cable is one that enters a building through the exterior wall and continues inside.
Since August 1999, a CRTC decision allows Bell, under certain conditions, to install building cables up to the demarcation point, usually located in a building’s terminal room. From this point, customers are responsible for the inside cables to the different floors or sections of the building.
However, before August 1999, Bell installed cables inside buildings to serve customers on different floors or in different sections. These cables are illustrated on the network map and Bell is responsible for their maintenance. On the following page, you will see an extract from NP TIP 2004-070 concerning the CRTC decision about the demarcation point and multi dwelling units.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.3
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Types of building cables
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Cables installed inside buildings have a sheath that must respect FT-4 fire security standards. Example of building cables: • Copper cables: 9 ATMM (24-gauge) 9 ATTM (26-gauge) – no longer installed • Fibre cables: 9 3161G4-04 9 3161G8-08 9 3161GT-012 9 3161GR-024 9 RX61GT-012 9 3171G4-004 9 3171GT-012 9 3171GR-024 9 3562LT-012 (024-048-072-144) Note: Other types of cables installed in the past may be illustrated in the existing network.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.4
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Types of building cables (cont'd)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
The types of cables used in other network categories (aerial, buried, underground) do not comply with FT-4 fire security standards of buildings. As such, the “3-metre rule” specifies the location where the type of cable must be changed. 3-metre rule (Reference: NP TIP 01-053): When installing an entrance cable to serve a building, the cable from the outside can run up to a maximum of 3 metres into the building. At 3 metres or less from the building entrance, the cable from the outside must be spliced to a fireproof building cable (FT-4), specifically when: •
The Network cable does not directly enter the technical room (fireproof terminal room);
•
The Network cable is not located in a fireproof duct or encased in another fire retardant material up to its access to the technical room. Note: Some cables installed before this building code regulation was implemented do not comply with this design criteria.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.5
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Instructor's notes
Explain how to use the previous diagram.
Illustrating building cables
Various operations are required on the map to view the building network. The procedures depend on the location, time of installation and type of equipment. Copper cable is illustrated up to the inside terminal located in the building. The inside terminal corresponds to the demarcation point and is illustrated by: • The civic address of the building, preceded by the appropriate prefix as identified in TIP 2004 070; • The “protector connector” symbol (rectangle with an X inside).
DM 2500 ALBERT
Note: This symbol illustrates a type of protector connector used at Bell, including the QTPET inside terminal.
Demarcation point
25,1-100 BKMF 100-24/UG
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
25,1-100 97F
BKMF 100-24/BLD
5.3.6
3F
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Go over the elements required to illustrate cables: • Cable identification (including the BLD network category); • Direction of feed arrow; • Lengths. Point out that an inside terminal makes it possible to connect customers to the Bell network from the central office. Indicate that inside terminals are illustrated briefly here but will be covered in detail in Module 7. Mention that the abbreviation “IN” or "IT" was used in the past.
Illustrating building cables (cont'd)
Fibre cable is also illustrated up to the demarcation point, which in this case, is the FPPA (fibre patch panel assembly) or the FMP (fibre management panel). The demarcation point is identified by: • •
F13,1-12 34R2LT-012/BUR
The civic address of the building, preceded by the appropriate prefix as identified in TIP 2004 070; The “closure” symbol (rectangle).
F13,1-12
234F
34R2LT-012/BLD
234
3F 3
FPPA
Fibre IN 225 SMITH ST
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.7
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Instructor's notes
Mention that the FPPA makes it possible to terminate a maximum of 48 fibres and that FMPs can terminate much larger cables.
Illustrating building cables (cont'd)
In the NetworkX operating system, when the protector symbol involves the installation of miscellaneous equipment, you see the information by accessing a details window.
Instructor's notes
Remind the participants how to use detail windows to access underground cables. Building cables may be deployed in a building up to the demarcation point. It is therefore illustrated up to the building’s exterior wall. Other elements must also appear: • • •
The outline of the building or wall; The civic address; The associated details window so you can see the cable inside the building and the equipment.
Before 1999, building cables belonging to Bell terminated at equipment and were deployed throughout the building to ensure service. You can view this type of facility by accessing a details window.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.8
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
2. Building cable lengths and network category changes Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M5L3 PowerPoint presentation to explain the images of this lesson.
Final and component lengths
As for the other types of cables, final lengths and component lengths are associated with building cables. They are indicated on 200 plans. In a building, the most frequent final lengths are cable lengths between: • • • •
The building wall and the first splice-fusion; Two splices or fusions; A splice and an inside terminal (copper cable); A fibre optic cable fusion and a piece of equipment or a patch cord.
The most frequently indicated component lengths in a building are: • •
The horizontal cable length; The up and down cables lengths
Note: The prefixes “UP,” “DOWN” and “LOOP” may be used when installing building cables. When there is conduit in a building, the lengths of cables in duct are included.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.9
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
The building cable must follow the path approved by the owner or construction prime. A 700 plan is often associated with the installation of a building cable in order to specify the path and provide tie-in measurements. A 700 plan can be used to indicate such references as: • Floor plans; • The arrangement of elements in the terminal room; • The conduit plan. Network category change points
The building exterior wall is the main network category change point. In effect, the cable becomes a building cable as soon as it enters the building, i.e., where it enters the exterior wall of the building. You will find these network category change points in your Network Category Change job aid.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to look at their Network Category Change job aid and find where the cable becomes a building cable. Present the following diagrams from the job aid. Page 1 sketches # 1, 2 & 3. Page 4 sketches # 8 & 9.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.10
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
3. Work on building cables Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M5L3 PowerPoint presentation to explain the images of this lesson.
Introduction
Just as for other network categories, different work may be performed on building cables: • Installation; • Removal or abandon; • Replacement; • Relocation.
Characteristics
The building cable must follow the path approved by the customer, i.e., the owner or construction prime. On the plan, the path must be specified and tie-in measurements associated with fixed elements must be added. Notes or sketches (on the 200 or 700 plans) are used for this purpose. For example, they indicate: • The floor plan; • The arrangement of elements in the terminal room; • The presence of windows, doors, etc.; • The location of existing equipment; • The conduit plan. In complex situations, a 700 plan is recommended for detail information.
Work on building cables means that Bell representatives will have access to private premises. To facilitate this access, the following information should be included on plans: • Name and telephone number of the contact person; • Opening hours and access conditions; • Date and agreements entered into concerning the work; • Name of the person in charge.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.11
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
When installing building cables, the demarcation point must be identified using a label. A note to the technician states: “Please affix demarcation point sticker.”
Installation
101-1,1-100 BKMB 100-24/AER 34
99F 15
101-1,1-100 BKMB100-24/BLD
2
3F 3
101-1,1-100
PROT/CONN 100
Demarcation point
DM 89102 COLIN
Example 1: Installing a copper cable
12F
ATMM 100-24/BLD
12 3 4
1
Insulating joint inside the splice
Instructor's notes
Point out the grounding symbol already illustrated in the aerial network. Grounding Bell is responsible for installing a secure network and protecting it by complying with construction standards. This is all the more important in the network because a defect could cause severe damage to customers. The grounding symbol is illustrated and a note provides the following details: • Type of copper wire to use; • Its length; • Termination point. The Manager or Co-ordinator who visits the site should indicate in the notes any pertinent information required.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.12
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Explain the work illustration on the previous diagram. Review the concepts learned in the previous modules: • A bold cable line and arbs to illustrate the installation; • Final length and component lengths accompanied by prefixes when required; • Illustrating cables by their identification and direction of feed arrow. Review Basic Work Plan Elements using the job aid from Module 1 L1. Point out that these elements should be indicated on the plan (caption stamp, municipality, etc).
Installation (cont'd)
Example 2: Installing a fibre cable
F56,13-24 34R2LT-012/BUR 346
350F 4
F56,13-24 34R2LT-012/BLD
3F 3
FPPA
1 Note : Attach 4 metres to exterior wall
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
2
Point out the note concerning the cable attached to the building wall (before entering).
5.3.13
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
A building cable is generally removed but exceptionally may be abandoned.
Removal and abandon
Removals and abandons are illustrated by: • • •
A bold “X” on the cable line; The abbreviations “RM” or “AB”, indicated before the alphanumeric sequence (in the cable line); The final cable length.
Reminder: Remember that for an abandon, you must cut the fibres or pairs into bulk dead pairs.
Instructor's notes
Explain the diagrams to the participants.
24,1-75 25,1-25 BKMF 100-24/UG
91F 91
24,1-75 25,1-25 3F BKMF 100-24/BLD 3
24,1-75 25,1-25 RM 31F ATMM 100-24/BLD
DM 13 ST-LUC
REMOVE
Example 3: Removing a copper cable
1
REMOVE
Example 4 : Abandon a fibre cable
(F56,13-24)12D AB 350F 34R2LT-012/BUR 1
(F56,13-24)12D AB 3F 34R2LT-012/BLD 2
(F56,13-24)12D AB 1F 34R2LT-012/BLD
FPPA
3 4
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.14
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Replacement involves both installing and removing a building cable.
Replacement
12,51-100 ATMM 50-24/BLD
2
12,51-100 RM 13F ATMM 50-24/BLD
15
12,51-100 3F AJTB 50-26/BLD 3
F 15
1 12,51-100 88F AJTB 50-26/BUR 88
DM 897 CENTRAL
Example 5 : Cable replacement
12,51-100 3F ATMM 50-24/BLD 3
Sometimes a customer will ask you to move a cable inside a building. To illustrate a cable relocation, you must enter: • The abbreviation “RELOC;” • The location of the actual cable in a dotted line; • The proposed location of the cable in a line (existing); • Arrows that show the direction of the move; • The distance between the old and new cable position.
Relocation (move)
A note specifies how much cable to move and where the relocation work is to be performed.
16,1-200 ATMM 200-24/BLD
ATMM 200-24/BLD
Reloc. 2m
4F 4
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.15
15
16,1-200
F 15
1
2
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Exercise # 1 Duration
30 minutes
Instructor's notes
In small groups or individually, ask the participants to analyze the following plans by following the steps in the analysis method
Once the exercise is completed, «verbally» proceed to correction by asking participants' analysis results. Use the following answers, as a reference tool, to make sure that all points have been covered. DO NOT READ THE ANSWERS to the participants. Note : After the correction, tell the participants that the analysis results are under the "ANSWERS" tab in their guide. Instructions Individually or in small teams, analyze the following work plans and correct any discrepancies. Use the following tools: • •
Analysis Method job aid; Answer grid.
Enter the results obtained at each step in the following pages.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.16
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number, plan(s) number(s), switching center. _______________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Work location description. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies) Network category (ies) : __________________________________________________
Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Work description
5.3.18
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note : In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Verification : Write down the verified items.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.19
Missing items: Specify the required action to take if known.
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
EXERCISE # 1 - ANSWERS
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number = 741586. Switching center: Sherbrooke. Plan(s) number(s) = 201 No 700 location plan on the job, no location sketch on plans.
Work location description: PLAN 201: Pépin street, crossing street missing, to be added Permanent locations: F 855-7 Pépin and IN 635 Pépin, American Biltrite.
1.2 Identify shown network category (ies). Network category(ies): Aerial network: accessories associated to poles, aerial & building cables installation, and an inside terminal (Module 7).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.19(a)
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
EXERCISE # 1 – ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1
Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
741586 PLAN 201
741586 PLAN 201
741586 PLAN 201
Work description Work on poles and accessories: A2: Place 1 Guy, See note: Hydro request reference. Work on cables: Between A1 and A4: place BKMB 50-24 AER, 62F, see note for slack span. A1-A2: Existing strand A2-A4: New strand A4-A5: place BKMB50-24 BUR, 9F. IN 635 Pépin: 3F. Inside terminal. Grounding. Splicing: A1: Facility splice. A6: Pairs termination
Step 3: Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 741586 plan 201: 3.1 Verifications (work): Work on poles and accessories: • • • •
Work on poles and accessories should not be shown in NetworkX system. System revisions are required. This work should be hand drawn to represent Bell-Hydro agreement symbols (See M5L1); Sizes (anchor and rods is missing, to be added. Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. New Hydro pole profiles missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.19(b)
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
EXERCISE # 1 – ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3: Check whether the work is correctly illustrated (cont'd). 741586 plan 201: Work on cables: • Placed and removed cable identifications (origin arrow). o A4- reference 4: Cable identification might be wrong (should be AER), as the cable goes down on the outside building wall, to verify with the originator, and adjust the finale length if aerial. o Also add A5 at the building entrance. o In the building, 3F, the cable identification is missing, to be added. • Components & final lengths: • Between A4 and the building entrance: Cable component lengths are: Down 9 and 9. The final length 9F. To verify with the originator. • Strand information, written in a note. Notice: no strand required for the cable section attached to the building wall. • Between A2 and A3, between A3 and A4 Slack spans: labels missing, to be added. • A4: note indicating the wall attachment for the new strand. • Grounding directives missing, to be added. • Sheath to strand bound at the splice closure. • Demark point identification directives missing, to be added. • Information and contact for the building access missing, to be added. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work, add A5 at the building entrance and A6 to the terminal. Splicing: Verification at each splice; • Identification of all participating cables. • Principle of continuity. • Cable count corresponds to its size. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. The inside terminal analysis will be covered in Module 7L2. 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • Caption stamp elements = complete. • Work location: o Crossing street names missing, to be added o Permanent address or arbitrary: correction required and identified. o Location 700 Plan for the «job» missing, to be added, OR work location sketch on plan missing, to be added; • References: o Municipality name: missing, to be added; o Hydro request reference.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.19(c)
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
4. “200 PLAN – BUILDING” checklist Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Present the items in the “200 PLAN – BUILDING” checklist covered in this lesson and highlighted in grey. You may consult the explanations pertaining to these items in the Checklist binder.
“200 PLAN – BUILDING” checklist
Since most of these items have already been discussed in previous sections of the course, you can decide what needs more explanation and what can be covered quickly. In your work, to ensure that your plans are complete and the work is illustrated according to standards, use the Bell standardized checklist. Let’s look at the “200 PLAN – BUILDING” list together.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out that the analysis discrepancies correspond to the same result.
5.3.20
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
920-3130-104 Building name and civic address (TIP 2004-070) Diagram of the vertical (duct) system, if required Typical floor plan (if required) 920-3130-104 Reference from one plan to another Grounding Demarcation Point DP – procedures (TIP 2004-070) Arb (OP TIP 98-019) Pair transfer CT/LT symbol (900-2000-100A15.doc) – form 2861 Full terminal count Assigned pair count of terminal Wiring limit of terminal Terminal address (according to IPAIRS) (OP TIP 98-019) Taper Code Splicing sequence Number of connectors and labels required Municipality Associated network Crossconnect terminal address (Construction Notes) Obligatory Easement, verbal agreement, etc.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
PLAN #
200 PLAN - BUILDING 920-3130-104
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Work location (700 plan) Contact for building access CLLI code (Construction Notes) Component and final measurements Vertical measurements (up/down) Street name(s) Other information required on the work plan General: standards for issuing work plans Transmission standards
5.3.21
ITEM #
200 PLAN - BUILDING
NETWORK #_____________________
ITEM #
CHECKLIST
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
PLAN #
Module 5: Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 Plans)
Lesson 3: Building Cables (200 Plan)
Summary Duration
5 minutes The following key points were covered in this lesson: • •
•
Specifications pertaining to illustrating buildings and building cables; Work on building cables indicated on 200 plans.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer the participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5.3.22
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Module 6: Preamble
Module 6 Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans) Duration
2 hours
General objective
At the end of this module, you should be able to: •
Read and interpret information about buried and submarine networks on a work plan;*
•
Identify discrepancies on illustrations of buried and submarine network elements;
•
Identify information about buried and submarine networks that should be entered or corrected on a work plan.
* Means reading and interpreting the network map and drafts of plans.
To this end, the lessons of this module will cover:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Buried cables (600 plans);
•
Submarine cables (600 plans).
Show the module title pasted on the outside plant poster.
6.i
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (600 Plans) Aerial cable
Aerial cable
Network category change point: Ground level
Network category change point: Ground level
Buried cable (in incidental duct or directly in ground)
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Lesson 1 Buried cables (600 plans) Duration
1 hour 45 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • • • •
Read and explain buried cable characteristics illustrated on 600 plans; Show how to illustrate buried cables on a 600 plan; Using 600 and 700 plans, identify the work to be performed on buried cables; Use the checklist to identify discrepancies and corrections to make on 600 plans.
Materials
- Outside plant poster;
- Network Category Change job aid.
- M6L1 PowerPoint;
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.1
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Preamble Duration
5 minutes Until now, you have learned how to illustrate underground, aerial and building cables on different work plans. This lesson will deal with buried cables generally illustrated on 600 plans. These cables are installed directly in the ground or in incidental ducts.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.2
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
1. Buried cable characteristics Duration
15 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M6L1 PowerPoint presentation to explain the images of this lesson.
Introduction
Buried cables are found either: •
Directly in the ground
Câble enfoui Buried cable
•
Or in incidental terminated or unterminated conduits.
Buried cable
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask the participants to find the buried cables on the outside plant poster.
6.1.3
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Introduction (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Incidental conduits are generally installed to protect buried cables against heavy loads (for example under a road) or from the elements (for example under a bridge). These conduits may be terminated or unterminated at an isolated manhole, pole, wall, building, pedestal, crossconnecting terminal or remote terminal. However, incidental conduits are never terminated at a main duct formation. Reminder: By definition, a main conduit formation consists of ducts that connect either: • a central office and a manhole; or • two or more manholes.
Buried splice protectors (copper)
Various protectors can be used to protect buried splices. Splice closures (pedestals) CP815and CP816 are generally used for buried copper cables. In the past, other types of closures were installed (CP125, CP180, CP6, CP8, QCH3A and QCH4A).
Instructor's notes
Mention that an "L" may follow the pedestal type, this means that it is longer than the standard one. This type is used in particular situations: deep ditch, flood risk, etc…. CP816L Pedestal (for copper)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.4
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Buried fusion protectors (fibre)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
The CP12L fusion protector is used for fibre optic cables. CP12L fusion protector (for fibre)
PREFORMED splice closure
F/O splice closure with base
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.5
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Illustrating pedestals
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
The symbol below is used to illustrate a pedestal on a work plan. Next to this symbol, you will see the inscription “PED” followed by the pedestal address and type of closure.
PED F 134 SAGUENAY CP815L Pedestal (PED)
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Pedestal address
Type of closure
Mention that, a pedestal equipped with a terminal is not shown this way.
6.1.6
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Illustrating buried cables
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Two types of buried copper cables may be used in the outside plant: • Air-filled cables such as: 9 BKTF (26-gauge) 9 BKMF (24-gauge) 9 BHAF (22-gauge) 9 BHBF (19-gauge). • Jelly-filled cables with a sealed sheath such as: 9 AJTB (26-gauge) 9 BJMB (24-gauge) 9 BJAB (22-gauge) 9 BJBB (19-gauge).
Fibre cables can also be found in the buried network. They are generally placed in incidental conduits, but they can also be found directly in the ground. Just like for all cables, when a buried cable is illustrated on a work plan, the following information is indicated: • •
Cable identification Direction of feed arrow
Examples: 10,1-100 D6001-6100 BKTF 200-26/BUR
46,51-100 AJTB 50-26/BUR
F31,1-12 34R2LT-012/BUR
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.7
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
2. Cable length and network category change There are specific network category change points where cables are considered buried. The main cases are as follows: •
Ground level
When a buried cable runs into the aerial network or viceversa, the cable changes network category at ground level.
Aerial cable
Network category change point: Ground level Buried cable (in incidental conduit or directly in ground)
Aerial cable
Aerial cable
Network category change point: Ground level
Network category change point: Ground level
Buried cable (in incidental conduit or directly in ground)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.8
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
•
Ground level (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
When a buried cable goes up or down a pole of more than 5 metres, it becomes aerial at ground level and buried on the other side at ground level.
Pole of more than 5 metres Aerial cable
Aerial cable Network category change point: Ground level
Network category change point: Ground level
Buried cable (in incidental conduit or directly in ground)
Buried cable (in incidental conduit or directly in ground)
N.B. There is one exception for poles. If the pole measures less than 5 metres, the cable remains buried when it goes up and down the pole. The pole and the pole terminal (if applicable) are also considered buried. Note: These small poles, referred to as “terminal poles” or "Marker Posts", are placed when it is impossible to install pedestals.
Pole less than 5 metres
Buried cable (in incidental conduit or directly in ground)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Buried cable (in incidental conduit or directly in ground)
6.1.9
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Instructor's notes
Explain that terminals in the buried network are generally placed in pedestals (like splices). However, when there is too great a risk that the pedestal will break (for example, along roads where there is no ditch), poles less than 5 metres are used to support the terminals.
•
The buried cable remains a buried cable if it terminates at a terminal, equipment closure or a splice (e.g., clear & cap) located on a building wall, pole or in a pedestal.
Ground level (cont'd)
Terminal, equipment or splice closure Building wall or Pole or Pedestal
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Buried cable
Buried cable (in incidental conduit or directly in ground)
6.1.10
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
•
Ground level and building entrance
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
N.B. When a cable goes up or down a building wall and continues into the building, the cable changes network category twice. It changes from buried to aerial at ground level and then from aerial to building as soon as it enters the building. Exception: If the cable length between the ground level and building entrance is less than 3 metres, the cable remains buried until it enters the building. Network category change point: Building entrance Network category change point Ground level
Aerial cable (if > 3m)
Buried cable (in incidental conduit or directly in ground)
Building cable
Building
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.11
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
•
Pedestal
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
An underground cable becomes buried at a pedestal. If the cable length between the duct exit and the splice: • < 3 metres -> the network category change occurs at the splice •
> 3 metres ->
the network category change occurs at the duct exit
Network category change Point if < 3m : splice Pedestal Part of loop between duct exit and splice Network category change point if > 3m : Duct exit
Underground cable In a conduit
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.12
Buried cable towards customers
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
•
None or ground level (with bridges or overpasses)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
When buried cable runs over or under a bridge or an overpass, the cable remains in the “buried” category if it continues in the buried network on the other side of the bridge or overpass. Bridge
Buried cable
Buried cable Buried cable
However, if the buried cable becomes aerial (or viceversa) on the other side of the bridge, it changes network category at ground level, as the following diagram shows. Bridge Aerial cable
Network category change point Ground level
Buried cable Aerial cable
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Point out to the participants that network category changes are illustrated in their Network Category Change job aid.
6.1.13
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Main trench and off trench
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Buried cables are installed directly in a main trench or in incidental conduits.
TRENCH AND CONDUITS
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.14
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
However, sometimes, to reach certain equipment or structures, the cable has to be placed off trench, i.e., it has to run out of the main trench and branch out to reach equipment or structures located several metres from the trench. It is important to show the cable path and to indicate all measurements associated to the direction changes.
Main trench and off trench (cont'd)
When the path has off trench sections, it is mandatory to indicate the distance between the main trench and equipment. This information can be represented as a note or within a sketch. On the diagram below, you will see a main trench and offtrench cable path. Pedestal (placed in preparation of a terminal placement or a future splice creation)
Main Trench
Pedestal (with cable splice)
Main Trench
Main Trench
3m
3m
Off trench
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Off trench
On the diagram, also have participants notice that a cable length is required to go UP and DOWN in the pedestals. The vertical measurement expression is used to name those measurements, which are component lengths.
6.1.15
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Illustrating buried cables: Lengths
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Final lengths As for the other types of cable categories covered earlier, you will find final lengths at each splice and fusion, at the end of the cables where equipment (except terminals) is connected to cables and at network category change points. Component lengths Different component lengths are requested on buried cables. The following are some of the most frequently encountered component lengths on buried cables: • • • • •
Cable measurements in the main trench; Off trench cable measurements; Obstacle bypass measurements; Distances between poles and between terminals; Vertical measurements.
Vertical measurement: Three types of vertical measurement are used with buried cables: loop, up and down. Vertical measurements are cable component lengths. A length of cable placed in a pedestal where no splice or terminal exists is called a loop. When placing a buried cable, we indicate, on the work plan, the measurement (in meters) of the loop and this one is preceded by the "LOOP" prefix. When equipment and /or a splice exist in the pedestal, two vertical measurements are required: one that goes up to the equipment or splice and another one that goes down. The first length is preceded by the "UP" prefix and the second one by the "DOWN" prefix.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.16
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
On a work plan, when placing an off trench buried cable many component lengths must be indicated in detail.
Illustrating an off trench buried cable
Pedestal (placed in preparation of a terminal placement or a future splice creation)
Main Trench
Pedestal (with cable splice)
Main Trench
Main Trench
Off trench 3m
3m
Off trench
Following is the component lengths illustration for the above buried cable section.
Instructor's notes
100
78
PED F 28 LATULIPE ST CP816L
3 3
25,1-200 AJTB 200-26/BUR
192F
UP 2 3
25,1-200 AJTB 200-26/BUR
DOWN 2
LOOP 3 PED F 12 LATULIPE ST CP816L
3
P4 LATULIPE ST
NOTE: 3m between pedestals and the main trench
25,1-200 AJTB 200-26/BUR
Remind the off trench installation rules. Explain the above sketch in relation with the previously described measurements.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.17
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Instructor's notes
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
From the Switching Centre, the cable goes down a pole and runs 100 m in the trench. Consequently, from the pole to PED F 12 LATULIPE ST : 100m in main trench and 3m off trench. At PED F 12 LATULIPE ST : a loop cable length of 3m. From PED F 12 LATULIPE ST to PED F 28 LATULIPE ST : 3m off trench, 78m in main trench and another 3m off trench. At PED F 28 LATULIPE ST to the splice: a 2m UP cable length. Remind the importance to well understand the cable path: the direction changes and the verticals lengths so that all necessary lengths will be shown on the work plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.17(a)
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Illustrating a buried cable in the main trench.
In the diagram below, the buried cable is in a main trench only. The pedestals are located above the main trench.
Splice in the pedestal
Trench
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Pedestal (with cleared & capped cable.)
Pedestal (with cable loop)
Trench
Trench
Following is the component lengths illustration for the above buried cable section.
133
98
25,1-200 AJTB 200-26 /BUR
UP 2
PED F 205 PAUL ST CP816L
217F
DOWN 2 25,1-200 AJTB 200-26 / BUR
PED F 125 PAUL ST CP816L LOOP 3
25,1-200 AJTB 200-26 / BUR
137F UP 2
PED F 75 PAUL ST CP816L
112
Length between preceding splice and this pedestal (133m)
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain each component measurement in the diagram above. Point out direction changes in the cable line and explain their meanings: • When a cable is in the main trench, it represents the vertical component lengths in the pedestal. • When a cable has off trench sections, it represents the off trench cable lengths and the verticals lengths in the pedestal.
6.1.18
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
3. Work on buried cables and pedestals Duration
30 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M6L1 PowerPoint presentation to explain the images of this lesson.
Work on buried cables and pedestals
A variety of work may be performed on buried cables: installation, abandon, relocation and replacement. It is also possible to install, remove, relocate and replace pedestals.
Installation work
As previously seen, a bold line indicates a buried cable installation. The installation of a pedestal is indicated by a pedestal symbol in bold. It is very important to properly represent the cable path in order to indicate all component lengths: the ones associated to the direction changes and the ones for the vertical lengths.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.19
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Installation work (continued) • Symbols and notes to add for installing buried cables
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
When installing a cable in a trench, notes and symbols are added to the work plan to indicate, among other things, the depth of setting and information on the cables in the trench. These notes then remain on the plan and will be visible when other work is required. •
Depth of setting in the main trench (or off trench) This depth measurement is indicated in a note or is illustrated as follows. It may be indicated in metres or millimetres. The measurement is required to: 9 Comply with CSA (Canadian Standards Association) rules; 9 Comply with the agreement between the company and the owner of the land, if applicable; 9 Be able to easily identify the cable or the conduit in the future. Note: Tie in measurements are required for fixed points such as the shoulder or centre of a street, a ditch, a trench, etc…
Instructor's notes
Explain the following diagrams and mention that the measurements are now shown in mm : 660 mm or 600mm.
C/S
NETWORK INSTALLATION DEPTH FROM CENTER OF THE STREET – 0.68
Minimum cover – 0.6 Minimum cover
On site On work plan
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.20
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Installation work (cont'd) • Symbols and notes to add when installing buried cables (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Indicating an underground or buried network (of Bell, Power company, cable companies and gas companies) located 3 metres or less from the installation work On a work plan, you must identify the Bell underground or buried network or network belonging to another company located 3 metres or less from the proposed work. One of the four first following symbols must be used. Notes: Bell telephone cables must be installed at least 300mm (0.3 metres) from Power company electrical cables. As well, if there is an electrical cable (Power company) or gas line, the arrow below is added to indicate danger to the Expertech technician. If an electrical cable is involved, its voltage in KV is also entered in a note
CAUTION
Note : Voltage 14,4 KV
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.21
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Installation work (cont'd) • Symbols and notes to add when installing buried cables (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Symbol #1: “Separation” The symbol below is used when there are only Bell cables in the trench. This symbol shows the position of the different telephone cables. Using arrows, you can identify the position (circle) of the new cable to be installed.
Symbol #2: “Joint use trench profile” The symbol below is used when electrical and telephone cables are in the same trench but are separated (horizontally or vertically) by at least 300 mm (12 inches). The depth of the cables in the trench must be added on this symbol.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Show where the depth is entered.
6.1.22
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Installation work (cont'd) • Symbols and notes to add when installing buried cables (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Symbol #3: “Planned separation” The symbol below is used when TV cables (cable company) and telephone cables are separated from the electrical cables in the trench.
Symbol #4: “Random separation” (rarely used) The symbol below is used when TV cables (cable company), telephone and electrical cables are mixed in the same trench. This symbol shows the position of each cable.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.23
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Installation work (cont'd) • Symbols and notes to add when installing buried cables (cont'd)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Symbol #5: “Joint use grounding information” The symbol below is used when electrical cables are installed in trenches with Bell cables. It concerns the grounding required on the cables. This symbol is completed with information that the project manager must provide.
6.1.24
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Installation work (cont'd) • Symbols and notes to add when installing buried cables (cont'd)
•
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Indicating the depth of existing utility installations when known. When known, the depth of existing utilities is indicated in a note or details diagram. This diagram is outlined either on the 600 plan or on an associated 700 plan. Ground level 0,50m
Bell CA 0,50m
0,30m
GAS Water system
1m Sewers
•
Special conditions Special conditions must be added in notes on the plan.
Ground conditions • Concrete, asphalt, bitumen, macadam or other similar surfaces • Under a boulevard, dirt or gravel road, etc. • Unistone. Other conditions found on plans • • • •
Do not cut pavement Trees, shrubs to avoid Pedestal installed in rock Indications about exceptional grass/ground conditions • Specific backfill instructions • Information on rights of way • Identification of all specific conditions (Example: notify customers 3 days before work).
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Specify that previous information should be provided by the designer.
6.1.25
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Example of a note and diagram that indicate specific conditions to respect.
Installation work (cont'd) • Symbols and notes to add when installing buried cables (cont'd)
Note to Expertech - Contact municipality 48 hours in advance. Tel: (123)456-7890 - Ground type: clay - Buried cable 0.5 m from the shoulder
Asphalt 20m DOWN 2
MARY street
Shoulder 2m
1
Ditch 5
PED F 10 MARY ST CP816L
PED F 60 MARY ST CP816L
P/L
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
DOWN 2
4m UP 2
2
6m 6
LOOP 3
5
P/L
Municipal property
2m
5m
422F
5m
6.1.26
P/L
65F UP 2
0.5m
50
5
100
PED F 120 MARY ST CP816L
5
300
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
When buried cables must run through incidental conduits (terminated or unterminated), the following elements are added on the 600 plan.
Installation work (cont'd) •
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Incidental conduits
• Isolated duct formation • Identification of the ducts through which each cable runs • Information about the ducts A A
B
BJMB 50-24
BJMB 50-24
45,1-50
12
Bridge
45,1-50
Shoulder
BJMB 50-24/BUR
100
A
Red River
4
Saint-Joseph Street
Asphalt
1-PVCD2 12m
BJMB 50-24/BUR 50
2 steel pipes 20m
20 4
Shoulder
B
BJMB 50-24
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask a participant to explain the situation illustrated above. Correct and complete the explanations if required.
6.1.27
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Installation work (cont'd) •
Isolated manholes
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Sometimes buried cables run through isolated manholes. An isolated manhole is not terminated at a main duct formation. In general, it is located between two poles, two pedestals or between a pole and a pedestal. When buried cables run through an isolated manhole, you must prepare a 500 manhole plan and a manhole diagram to illustrate the underground cables inside the manhole. (Reference: module 3, lesson 3.) On the 500 plan illustrating buried cables in an isolated manhole, you will find the information below: • Duct numbers • Identification of ducts through which each cable runs • Following and preceding plan references • Identification of cables entering and exiting the manhole • Final lengths and component measurements • Route number • Duct occupancy and location of manhole (manhole diagram on 700 plan) • Isolated manhole number (see the following explanation).
Isolated manhole number: The number of an isolated manhole is written as follows: [Route number] MH [address of closest termination point] – [number]. Note: The number is 1 if there is no other manhole bearing the same route number and same address. Otherwise, you must enter 2 or more, because the number of the new manhole must not have been assigned to another manhole in the past. The next page shows two examples.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.28
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Installation work (cont'd)
Example 1:
•
The isolated manhole below is located between poles 52 and 53. It bears the number 1AMH52-1.
Isolated manholes (cont'd)
This number means that the manhole (MH) is on route 1A near pole 52. The number -1 is added because it is the first manhole to bear this number. Aerial cable
Aerial cable Pole #53
Pole #52
Isolated manhole 1AMH52-1
Buried cable
Buried cable
Isolated manhole
Question: What does the number 112-1MH48-2 mean?
Isolated manhole 112-1MH48-2
PED #48
Buried cable
PED #49
Buried cable
Isolated manhole
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Ask a participant to answer the question. Answer: This number means that on route 112-1, there is a manhole (MH) close to pedestal #48 and the number -2 is added because it is the second manhole to bear this number. 6.1.29
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Installation work (cont'd) •
Isolated manholes (cont'd)
Instructor's notes
Below is a schematic example of a 500 plan illustrating the installation of a buried fibre optic cable in an isolated manhole. The accompanying 701 plan appears on the next page.
Ask a participant to identify the following elements on the following two plans: • • • •
Duct numbers Identification of duct through which each cable runs Following and preceding plan references Identification of cables entering and exiting the manhole • Final lengths and component measurements • Duct occupancy and location of manhole (manhole diagram on 700 plan) • Number of isolated manhole • Route and central office number
Plan 501 B 2
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/BUR
A2
101F 4
PED F 13 PINE ST
1 A1
02-03-B
P 12 COLE ST
48,101-300 BKTF200-26/BUR
4F
PED F 15 PINE ST
F14,1-36 34R2LT-36/BUR
02-03-B
4 108F 8
Note to Expertech See plan 701 for MH diagram
PED F 79 PINE ST
CODE
BELL CANADA SC
EXCHANGE
STE-ROSE ROUTE REF
1A
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.30
C4
PLAT
MH13-1
B3
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
W
BUR
BUR
BUR
FUSE
BUR
ESTABLISHMENT(S) OR REVISION(S)
MH LOCATION
SIDEWALK
SIDEWALK
BELL POLE
BELL POLE HEDGE
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.31
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Buried cable abandon work and pedestal removal
•
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Buried cable abandon and pedestal removal Buried cables may be abandoned, i.e., cut at both ends without being removed. Buried cables are abandoned because it would be very costly to remove them. This work is illustrated with a bold line on which “Xs” are placed. “AB” is also written in front of the cable alphanumerical sequence. Note: that once the abandon work is completed, the cable line remains on the plan crossed out with Xs. When a pedestal must be removed, “RM” is written beside its address. The diagram below illustrates a buried cable abandon and removal of three pedestals.
RM PED F 210 EDOUARD ST CP180L 2
RM PED F 316 EDOUARD ST CP180L 3
RM PED F 432 EDOUARD ST CP180L 4
101F 8
102F
8
(12,51-100)100D 8
(12,51-100)100D AB/AJTB 50-26/BUR
42
1
Instructor's notes
(12,51-100)100D AB/AJTB 50-26/BUR
AB/AJTB 50-26/BUR
AB/AJTB 50-26/BUR 43
8
(12,51-100)100D
8
8
44 5
Remind the participants that for an abandon, the pairs or fibres must all be cut into bulk dead pairs. Arbitraries are optional; the permanent addresses would be enough. Note that, on the sketch, the component lengths are not preceded by the prefix. In NetworkX, they are part of the component lengths.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.32
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Replacing buried cables and pedestals
•
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Replacement A buried cable can be replaced with another cable, i.e., the existing cable is abandoned and a new cable is installed to replace it. A pedestal replacement is illustrated in the same way as an installation of a new pedestal and the removal of the old one. On the diagram below, a buried cable of 101 metres and a pedestal are replaced with a new cable and a new pedestal.
121
Instructor's notes
(12,51-100)100D AB 101F AJTB 50-26/BUR 12,51-100
12,51-100 10 0F 96
AJTB 50-26/BUR
DOWN 2
12,51-100
2
125F 2
PED R 12 PINE ST CP816L
PED R 86 PINE ST CP180L UP 2
RM PED R 12 PINE ST CP180L
AJTB 50-26 /BUR
200
AJTB 50-26/BUR
It is possible that the existing network would not be represented according to the rules seen in this course. Users don't have to correct that situation. Also, don't invent component lengths; removal and abandon are done using the existing measurements. Doing this corrupts the company record of assets.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.33
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Zone of influence
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Just like on all plans, the standards to follow in a zone of influence are indicated in notes on a 600 plan. The project manager indicates exactly what must be written after consulting with the Electrical Protection group. When work is performed in a zone of influence, the following symbol must be affixed to the plan. It indicates that the cable is dedicated, i.e., it is reserved for use by the central station, substation or power station.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.34
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Exercise # 1 Duration
25 minutes
Instructor's notes
In small groups or individually, ask the participants to analyze the following plans by following the steps in the analysis method
Once the exercise is completed, «verbally» proceed to correction by asking participants' analysis results. Use the following answers, as a reference tool, to make sure that all points have been covered. DO NOT READ THE ANSWERS to the participants. Note : After the correction, tell the participants that the analysis results are under the "ANSWERS" tab in their guide. Instructions Individually or in small teams, analyze the following work plans and correct any discrepancies. Use the following tools: • •
Analysis Method job aid; Answer grid.
Enter the results obtained at each step in the following pages.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.35
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number, plan(s) number(s), switching center. _______________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Work location description. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies) Network category (ies) : __________________________________________________
Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Work description
6.1.37
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Step 3: Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note: In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Verification: Write down the verified items.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.38
Missing items: Specify the required action to take if known.
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
EXERCISE # 1 - ANSWERS Step 1: Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number = 703455. Switching center: Sherbrooke. Plan(s) number(s) = 201 et 601 No 700 location plan on the job, no location sketch on plans.
Reference between plans 201 and 601
Work location description: PLAN 201: Corner of Galt street and François-Baillarge Place.
PLAN 601 : Alfred Desrochers street and François-Baillarge Place. Permanent locations: PED 3332, 3315, 3303, 3315 PED 2 and 1 Alfred Desrochers.
1.2 Identify shown network category (ies). Aerial & buried networks.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.38(a)
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
EXERCISE # 1 – ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2: Identify the work illustrated. 2.1
Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
PLAN 201:
Work description Splicing A1: Facility splice, energize pairs. Work on cables: Between A3 and A 5: place BJMB50-24 BUR 96F with off trench sections. Place 2 terminals. Associated splicing work.
PLAN 601 Between A6 and A7: Abandon BJMB50-24, 40F. Remove 1 terminal and do line transfers. A6 Facility splice. A2 Facility splice: pairs transfer. Step 3: Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 703455 plan 201: 3.1 Verifications (work): Splicing: Verification at each splice; • Identification of all participating cables. OK. • Principle of continuity. OK. • Cable count corresponds to its size. OK. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. : A1. • The pair's energizing works are represented according to the rules (underlining & brackets). 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • Caption stamp elements = complete. Work location: o Street names, permanent location and arbitrary: complete. o Location 700 Plan for the «job» missing, to be added, OR work location sketch on plan missing, to be added; • References: o Municipality name: missing, to be added; o On plan 601. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.38(b)
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
EXERCISE # 1 – ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3: Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 703455 PLAN 601: 3.1 Verifications (work): Work on cables: • Placed and removed cable identifications (origin arrow). • Component lengths (change of direction and vertical) and finales: o A4, PED3303FRANCOIS-LABAILLAGE: should read "UP 3" instead of « LOOP 6 », before the terminal and ' DOWN 3 ' after the terminal. o For removal, it is important to remove as it is represented in the actual existing plant. If there is no components detail, don't add any. • Buried cable installation, trench information: o Distance between the main trench and pedestal is indicated. o No detail on the depth and the type of trench (symbols or note): missing, to be added. o A4: distance between the existing conduit and the private lot boundary, missing, to be added. o Distance between the new pedestals on Place François-Baillarge street and the private lot boundary missing, to be added. o No surface type information, to verify. • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. Splicing: Verification at each splice; • Identification of all participating cables. • Principle of continuity. • Cable count corresponds to its size. Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. o A2, PED1ALFRED DESROCHERS : some cable identifications are missing, to be added. o Underlining and brackets are represented where required. o Cable transfer symbols (TRF 50 pairs from existing) and CTLT are represented (6 working pairs, 1 special service). 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • Caption stamp elements = complete. • Work location: o Street names, permanent addresses and arbitraries: OK o Location 700 Plan for the «job» missing, to be added, OR work location sketch on plan missing, to be added; • References: o Municipality name: missing, to be added; o On 201 plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.38(c)
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
4. “600 PLAN – BURIED AND SUBMARINE” checklist Duration
10 minutes
Instructor's notes
Present the items of the “600 PLAN – BURIED & SUBMARINE” checklist covered in this lesson and highlighted in grey. You may consult the explanations pertaining to these items in the Checklist binder. Since most of these items have already been discussed in previous sections of the course, you can decide what needs more explanation and what can be covered quickly. You should, however, draw attention to item #3, which is the only element specific to submarine cables. There will be no teaching point devoted to the checklist in lesson 2 of this module (Submarine Cables).
Checklist “600 PLAN – BURIED & SUBMARINE”
In your work, to ensure that your plans are complete and the work is illustrated according to standards, use the Bell standardized checklist. Let’s look at the “600 PLAN – BURIED & SUBMARINE” checklist together.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.39
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
CHECKLIST
NETWORK #__________________________
Trench depth, street width, type of ground, repaving if required (9203132-102F), landscaping work etc.
1
BINGO method for duct occupancy
19
Joint use – separation – Exposed network (e.g.: Bell, HQ, TV trench)
2 3
Component and final measurements HDSL and ADTRAN repeater
20 21
4
Full terminal count (e.g., 203-1,451-500)
22
5 6 7 8 9
Assigned pair count of terminal (e.g.: 203-1,476-500)
Insertion of cable identification (each side of splice)
23 24 25 26 27
Submarine cable – installation specifications (630-0200-011F) Presence of services under the surface ( “Attention” caption stamp obligatory) Vertical measurements – up and down Easement, R/W, MC, MTQ (Construction Notes) Cable reel number (if applicable). Names of main and cross streets Arb (OP TIP 98-019)
600 PLAN – BURIED & SUBMARINE 920-3132-102
Wiring limits of terminal (911-1000-103F) Terminal addresses according to IPAIRS) OP TIP 98-019 Taper code
ITEM #
ITEM #
PLAN #
600 PLAN – BURIED & SUBMARINE 920-3132-102
Reference to associated plans (920-3100-102F)
10
Crossconnect terminal address (Construction Notes) Obligatory
28
Caption stamp for access to work or notes for installation details
11
New pairs terminated at a crossconnect terminal (existing or new) FORM P3381/P4235
29
Distance between pole and terminal poles (CG301.2 section 2) – Service code 0202, staking and trimming.
12
CLLI code (Construction Notes)
30
Pair transfer
13
31
CT/LT symbol and form 2861 (920-2000-100A15.doc)
14
Terminals affected (DIP note)
15 16 17 18
Associated network (Construction Notes) network sequence if required and notes New pairs terminated at central office. Addition or replacement of pairs over a length >4575m (work completed) BC3888A to be prepared or IMAP loop report) Work location – 700 plan or drawing on plan
Terminals affected by energizing (DIP note) Terminals affected by pairs cut dead (DIP note) Splicing sequence (700 plan or note) (920-3130-100F)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Other information required on work plan GENERAL: Information on how to issue work plans
6.1.40
32 33 34 35
PLAN #
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
Lesson 1: Buried Cables (plans 600)
Summary Duration
5 minutes The following key points were covered in this lesson: • • •
Instructor's notes
Specifications regarding illustrating buried cables; Main trench and off trench installations; Work on buried cables indicated on 600 plans.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer the participants' questions.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.1.41
Lesson 2: Submarine cables (600 Plans)
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
Lesson 2 Submarine Cables (600 Plans) Duration
15 minutes
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you will be able to: • • • •
Materials
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Read and explain the characteristics of submarine installations on a 600 plan; Show how to illustrate a submarine cable on a 600 plan; Using 600 and 700 plans, identify the work to be performed on submarine cables; Use the checklist to identify discrepancies on a 600 plan.
- M6L2 PowerPoint
6.2.1
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
Preamble Duration
2 minutes Until now you have learned how to illustrate underground, aerial, building and buried cables on work plans. This lesson will cover the last category of cables: submarine. These cables are installed to cross lakes or rivers and are illustrated on 600 plans.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.2.2
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
1. Characteristics of submarine cables Duration
5 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M6L2 PowerPoint presentation to explain the images in this lesson.
M6L2
Introduction
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Submarine cables are installed using a barge (special boat) in lakes and rivers. This type of cable has a special protective sheath (generally steel) that makes it waterproof. To avoid water infiltration, submarine cables must not have splices.
6.2.3
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Illustrating submarine cables
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
Copper and fibre cables may be installed in the submarine network. Just like for all other cables, when a submarine cable is illustrated on a 600 plan, you should find the following information: • • • • •
Alphanumeric cable sequence Pair/fibre count Indication of network category (SUB) Addition of the letters DWA (Double Wire Armoured) or SWA (Single Wire Armoured) in a note Direction of feed arrow
Example:
25,1-2400 CDTC 2400-26/SUB Note: Exceptionally, and depending on certain geographic conditions of the waterway, some submarine cables are placed in a conduit on the floor of the waterway. Length
Just like the other types of cables, the final lengths (mandatory) and component measurements (optional) of submarine cables are indicated on a 600 plan. Up and down cable component measurements must be indicated where required (e.g., up or down a pedestal). It should be noted that as a rule, submarine cables tend to be installed at the same depth.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.2.4
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
There are network category changes based on where the cable is considered submarine. The following are the main cases.
Network category change for submarine cables
On the first diagram below, the buried cable becomes submarine at the buried splice (or the cable marker) and becomes buried again on the pedestal on the other bank. Network category change point (pedestal) Buried cable
Submarine cable
Submarine cable
Buried cable
Network category change point Buried splice or cable marker
On the diagram below, the underground cable becomes submarine at the end of the conduit running out of the manhole (if the conduit measures more than 3 metres). The submarine cable then becomes aerial at ground level on the other bank. Network category change point Ground level Submarine cable
Aerial cable
Underground cable
Submarine cable
Network category change point End of conduit (>3m) Note: If the duct is < 3 metres, the cable will be submarine in the manhole as well.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.2.5
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Work on submarine cables
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
The work generally performed on submarine cables is installation or abandon. •
Installation Just like for other cables, a bold line indicates the installation of a submarine cable. 33,1-2400 CDTC 2400-26/SUB
When installing a submarine cable, you must respect the instructions to obtain the required permits and follow the cable installation methods in practice 630-0200-011. •
Abandon A bold line on which Xs are placed illustrates a submarine cable abandon. It is important to remember that once the abandon work is finished, the cable line remains on the plan crossed out with X’s. (33,1-2400)2400D AB 178F/CDTC 2400-26/SUB
To make it easier to understand the work, notes are generally added on the 600 work plan. A 700 and 800 plan may also help you better identify and understand the work. Before performing the work, you should also always make sure the right of way and necessary permits have been obtained.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.2.6
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
2. Example of a submarine cable (600) Duration
5 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M6L2 PowerPoint presentation to explain the images of this teaching point.
M6L2 Example of a 600 plan with submarine cable
On the following pages, you will find an example of a 600 plan accompanied by a 700 plan illustrating submarine cables.
Instructor's notes
With the participants, find the following elements on the 600 plan on the next page (also on PowerPoint): • Banks • Buried and submarine cables and their junction points • Pull-through manhole (Explain this type of manhole.) • Splices • Conduits • Cable lengths (final length and component measurements) • Work performed on submarine cables (installation)
M6L2
Then explain the details provided on the 700 plan accompanying the 600 plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.2.7
BUR
SUB M
2D
BUR
2D
SERVICE CODE 0202 SERVICE CODE 0202
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
5A MH 7-1 ISOLATED
PULL-THROUGH MH
RIVER
ANGELS
5A MH 7 ISOLATED
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
PULL-THROUGH MH
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
6.2.8
SERVICE CODE 0202
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
NOTE: IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS TO OBTAIN THE PERMITS AND THE INSTALLATION METHODS FOR SUBMARINE CABLE SET OUT IN PRACTICE 630-0200-011. EXAMPLE Expanded section illustrating cable path
Average high water level
Average low water level
The armoured submarine cable in the canal must be at least feet below the average low water levels. Canal 150 feet wide
Horizontal scale of section ft Proposed submarine cable
Vertical scale of section ft
Crosses ______(name of waterway) at ____ Requested by _______________________
700 PLAN
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.2.9
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
“600 PLAN – BURIED & SUBMARINE” checklist
REMINDER: In your work, to ensure that your plans are complete and the work is illustrated according to standards, use the Bell standardized checklist.
Instructor's notes
Review the checklist and clarify points that seem unclear to the participants.
M6L2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.2.10
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
Trench depth, street width, type of soil, repaving if necessary, landscaping work, etc.
PLAN #
BINGO method for duct occupancy
19
Component and final measurements
Reference to associated plan(s) (920-3100-102F)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Address of crossconnect terminal (Construction Notes) Obligatory
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Caption stamp for accessing work or notes for installation details
11
New pairs terminated at a crossconnect terminal (existing or new) FORM P3381/P4235
29
Distance between terminal poles (CG301.2 section 2) – Service code 0202, staking and trimming.
12
CLLI code (Construction Notes)
30
Pair transfer
13
31
CT/LT symbol and form 2861 (920-2000-100A15.doc)
14
Associated network (Construction Notes) plus network sequence if required and notes New pairs terminating at central office. Pair addition or replacement over a length >4575m (work completed) BC3888A to be prepared or IMAP loop report
Terminals affected by transfer (DIP note)
15 16 17 18
Work location – 700 plan or drawing on plan
33 34 35
Joint use – separation – exposed network (e.g., Bell trench, HQ, TV) Submarine cable – installation specifications (630-0200-011F) Presence of services under the surface (“Attention” caption stamp obligatory) Vertical measurements – up and down Easement, R/W, MC, MTQ (Construction Notes) Cable reel numbering, if applicable. Names of main and cross streets Arb (OP TIP 98-019)
Terminals affected by energizing (DIP note) Terminals affected by pairs cut dead (DIP note) Splicing sequence (700 plan or note) (920-3130-100F)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1
PLAN 600 – BURIED & SUBMARINE 920-3132-102
ITEM #
600 PLAN – BURIED & SUBMARINE 920-3132-102
NETWORK # __________________________ ITEM #
CHECKLIST
HDSL and ADTRAN repeater Full terminal count (e.g., 203-1,451-500) Assigned pair count of terminal (e.g., 203-1,476-500) Wiring limits of terminal (911-1000-103F) Terminal address according to (IPAIRS) OP TIP 98-019 Taper code Insertion of cable identification (on each side of splice)
Other information required on work plan GENERAL: Information on how to issue work plans
6.2.11
32
PLAN #
Module 6: Buried and Submarine Networks (600 Plans)
Lesson 2: Submarine Cables (600 Plans)
Summary Duration
3 minutes The following key point was covered in this lesson: •
Instructor's notes
How to illustrate submarine cables.
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer the participants' questions
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6.2.12
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Module 7: Preamble
Module 7 Terminal and wires Duration
3 hours
General objective
At the end of this module, you should be able to: •
Read and interpret information pertaining to terminals and wires indicated on a work plan;*
•
Identify discrepancies regarding the illustration of outside terminals, inside terminals and wires;
•
Identify information about terminals and wires that should be entered or corrected on a work plan.*
* Means reading and interpreting the network map and drafts of plans
To this end, the lessons of this module will cover:
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
•
Outside terminals and wires;
•
Inside terminals.
Show the module title pasted on the outside plant poster.
7.i
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1 Outside Terminals and Wires Duration
2 hours
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you should be able to: • • • •
Define the roles of outside terminals and wires; Determine the elements required to illustrate the different types of outside terminals and wires on a work plan; Show how to illustrate work on outside terminals; Identify and correct discrepancies on a work plan concerning outside terminals and related work.
Materials - Outside plant poster;
- M7L1 PowerPoint (includes all the images, photos and diagrams or graphics in chronological order of this lesson);
- Analysis Method job aid.
BEFORE THE COURSE BEGINNING: Make yourself familiar with the different terminal types available on the panel. You will have to refer to these during the lesson covering the outside & inside terminals.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.1
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Preamble Duration
5 minutes By now you know how to illustrate underground, aerial, building and buried cables. You also know that these cables come from the central office, are spliced at different locations and head towards customers. Subscriber wires are connected to cable pairs through terminals. In this lesson, you will see how to illustrate outside terminals and wires on work plans.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants to locate outside terminals and wires on the outside plant poster. Indicate that fibre termination equipment called FPPA (Fibre Patch Panel Assembly) will be covered in another course.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.2
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
1. Characteristics of outside terminals Duration
5 minutes
Instructor's notes
Use the M7L1 PowerPoint presentation to explain the following photos and images.
Definition
Outside terminals are closures where cable pairs are connected to subscriber wires.
SC
Instructor's notes
Point out that the terminal symbol is a line perpendicular to the cable.
Example of a terminal (on a pole)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.3
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Binding posts, located inside the terminals, allow connecting the cable pairs to the wires that go towards subscriber houses.
Operation
Wire Wire Wire
Wire
SC
Cable
Cable continuation
Note: While the same pairs may be terminated at various terminals, they can only be used in one location.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Use the above diagram to explain the path of the cable signal to the wires.
7.1.4
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
2. Types of outside terminals Duration
20 minutes
Introduction
Outside terminals are found in buried and aerial networks.
Aerial network terminals
Aerial network terminals are found, on poles, building walls or strands. Bell currently installs three types of outside aerial terminals: • QTD8A (25 or 50 pairs) • QTD20AF (5 to 50 pairs) • IDC6000 (25 pairs) Always check your latest TIP for changes. These outside terminals are referred to as “fixed count terminals.” This means that the cable pairs are spliced and all the binding posts are connected to pairs designated by the designer. QTD8A The QTD8A terminal consists of a waterproof closure and one or two terminal blocks. Its capacity is 25 pairs (in the case of 1 block) or 50 pairs (in the case of 2 blocks).
Pole-mounted QTD8A Terminal
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
QTD8A terminal inside view
7.1.5
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Aerial network terminals (cont'd))
QTD20AF QTD20AF terminals have a number of binding posts, which may be increased as needed. In fact, terminal blocks of 5 pairs each (QBN6) may be added. This terminal can hold up to 10 terminal blocks to terminate a maximum of 50 pairs.
QTD20AF terminal inside view
Strand mounted QTD20AF terminal
Adding a connector block (5 pairs)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.6
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Aerial network terminals (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
IDC 6000 The 6000 series IDC terminal is an outside terminal with 25 protected pairs. Note: A protected terminal is equipped with a special mechanism (often carbon blocks) that protects the cable and wires in the event of an electrical fault. The IDC 6000 terminal replaces the following four existing protected terminals: • NC25 (pole-mounted) • QTD6C (wall-mounted) • QTD6D (wall-mounted) • GN25 (wall-mounted)
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.7
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Buried network terminals
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
The CP816 and CP815 are currently used as terminals in the buried network. These models can be equipped with BIX panels (referred to as connectors), as the diagram below shows. The "L" letter, at the end of the pedestal description (i.e.: CP816L) stands for LONG (taller version of the pedestal). This type of pedestal is usually used in rural areas.
Instructor's notes
Explain that as seen earlier, these pedestals may also contain splices.
Terminal inside view
2 CP815 pedestals (One of the two contains a terminal)
Note: The CP815 closure can contain an IDC 25-pair BIX panel. The CP816 closure can contain an IDC 25 or 50-pair BIX panel.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.8
BIX panel
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Buried network terminals (cont'd)
Encapsulation Another technology is used in the buried network: encapsulation. With this technology, you could directly and permanently connect cable pairs and buried subscriber wires. Today, encapsulations are no longer installed but still exist in the network and remain operational. Note: No other customer can use the pairs of customers A and B because they are subsequently cut.
2 pairs for customer B
2 pairs for customer A
Customer A
Customer B
Cable 25, 1-50 25,1 25,2 25,3 etc. 25,46 25,47 25,48 25,49 25,50
2 buried SW 49 - working 50 - spare
Subsequently cut Subsequently cut
2 buried SW 47 - working 48 - spare
Customer A Customer B
F 10 Jones St
An encapsulation on a work plan is illustrated as follows.
10, 301-400
99F
AJTB 100 -26/BUR
AJTB 100 -26/BUR 99
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.9
10, 301-400
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Ready access terminals
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
In the past, Ready access terminals provided access to all the cable pairs in the aerial and buried networks. These terminals are no longer installed, but you will still find them in operation in the network.
49B Ready access terminal (MD 3208)
F 5 Lucie St
Ready access terminals are illustrated as follows
10,301-400
Ready access terminal symbol
10,301-400
BKTB 100-26/AER
BKTB 100-26/AER 50
Instructor's notes
The new Ready access terminal (Slic 3M) is available to replace existing 49A Ready access terminals under very specific circumstances. Ask the participants to have a look on the different terminal types on the panel.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.10
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Summary chart of outside terminals Closure Module
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
The following chart presents a list of existing outside terminals. References: Practices 631-2100-200 and 631-2411-200 Capacity
Protection
Type of Installation
QTD6C*
Modified 25-pair Ready access
Yes
wall
QTD6D*
Modified 25-pair Ready access
Yes
wall
QTD7C*
50 fixed pairs
No
wall or pole
QTD7QA*
50 fixed pairs
No
wall or pole
QTD8A
50 fixed pairs
No
wall or pole
No
strand
No
strand
Aerial Network
QTD10A* Gray closure QTD20A Black closure
5 to 50 fixed pairs QBN3A blocks 5 to 50 fixed pairs QBN6
NF16*
16 fixed pairs
No
strand or pole
NC16*
16 fixed pairs
Yes
strand or pole
NF 25
25 fixed pairs
No
strand or pole
NC25*
25 fixed pairs
Yes
strand or pole
IDC6000
25 fixed pairs
Yes
wall or pole
GN25* **
25 fixed pairs
Yes
wall
GN50*
50 fixed pairs
Yes
wall
MD3207* (49A)
Ready access
No
strand
MD3208* (49B)
Ready access
No
strand
CP125
25 fixed pairs
No
closure
CP180
25 or 50 fixed pairs
No
closure
FC25L
25 fixed pairs
No
closure
FC50L
50 fixed pairs
No
closure
QTD2A
Ready access
No
closure
CP815S & CP815L
Splice 200-24 + connecting panel
No
Splice protector + connection possibility
CP816S & CP816L
Splice 200-24 + connecting panel
No
Splice protector + connection possibility
CP1023 & CP1117
Protector for big splice without connecting panel
No
Splice protector with more than two 90mm conduits
Buried network
*These terminals are no longer installed but still exist in the network. ** The standalone version of GN25 (typically installed on the end wall of townhouses) will be removed from service. The panel mounted model used in buried cables closure will not be removed.
. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.11
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
3. Illustrating outside terminals on work plans 15 minutes
Illustrating terminal placement
The example below illustrates the required elements when placing an outside terminal on a work plan.
QTD20AF 50-50 PF 12 GUY ST W/L : 8-10-12-14-16-18 GUY 23,1-50 TC: 123456 AC:23,1-25
Duration
23,1-50 BKMB 50-24/AER
23,1-50 BKMB 50-24/AER
78 •
Symbol
The symbol for an outside terminal is a straight line placed perpendicular to the cable line.
•
Address
The terminal address must be entered as in IPAIRS with spaces and capital letters. Example: PF 12 GUY ST.
•
Arb
An arb must point to the terminal where the work is to be performed if there is no address identified.
•
Model
The terminal model must be indicated. Example: QTD20AF
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.12
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
•
Capacity
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
The capacity means the number of pairs that can be terminated at the terminal, typically 25 or 50. Note: Because the number of binding posts varies for QTD10A and QTD20A terminals, the capacity depends on the number of terminal blocks (5 binding posts). This is shown by entering the maximum capacity of the terminal (50 pairs) followed by the actual number of binding posts. For example: 50-25 where 50 is the maximum capacity of the terminal (10 5-binding post terminal blocks) and 25 is the number of binding posts currently available (5 binding posts). In the example on the previous page, the capacity indicated is 50-50 (maximum capacity of 50 pairs – 50 binding posts currently available).
•
Count
The terminal count is entered under the symbol. It identifies the pairs terminated at the terminal. Example: 23, 1-50.
•
Assignable count (AC)
The AC indicates the pair groups that can be used in this terminal to serve customers. The AC is determined by the designer. In the previous example, the AC is 23, 1-25 whereas the count for the PF 12 GUY ST terminal is 23, 1-50. This AC means that only pairs 23, 1-25 can be used to terminate subscriber wires at this terminal. The remaining pairs (23, 26-50) are unassignable pairs, i.e., pairs connected to the terminal that are not part of the AC. They are identified by comparing the terminal count and its AC.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.13
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
•
Taper code (TC)
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
The taper code is provided depending on the area (lateral) by the designer and contains six digits. It is entered on the plan near the caption stamp, for example:
311211
•
Wiring Limits (WL)
3 11 2
= = =
1 1
= =
Feeder route number Allocation area number Sequential number of the network section in the allocation area Type of design (1 = residential) Distribution or serving area number
The wiring limits (WL), also referred to as distribution limits, are a list of addresses dedicated to the terminal, as determined by the designer. Example: WL: 12, 14, 16, 18 GUY
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.14
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
4. Work on terminals Duration
15 minutes
Types of work
Five types of work can be performed on outside terminals: • • • • •
Installation Removal Replacement Addition of connection blocks Pair rearrangement.
The symbol used and the elements required will vary somewhat on the work plan depending on the type of work to be performed. Outside terminals are found on 200 plans (aerial network) and 600 plans (buried network).
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.15
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Illustrating work
The following chart shows the graphic and non-graphic data required when illustrating work on outside terminals.
Instructor's notes
Briefly explain this chart. Then present the examples on the following pages.
Required Elements Symbol
Address Arb Model Capacity Count Taper code WL AC
Installing a Removing a Terminal Terminal
Adding Blocks
Rearranging Pairs
9
9
9
9
9
Bold
Bold + X
Bold (installation) & Bold + X (removal)
(thin)
(thin)
9
9
9
9
9
---------------------------------------------Optional--------------------------------------------
9 9 9* 9 9 9
CT/LT symbol Facilities Note
Installing a terminal
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Replacing a Terminal
Rearranging an existing Terminal
9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9
9 9 9 9 9 9
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Sometimes
To illustrate a terminal installation, you must draw the terminal symbol in bold and add the elements illustrated in the example below.
7.1.16
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Removing a terminal
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
To illustrate a terminal removal on a plan, you must place “X’s on the terminal symbol in bold and add the information in the chart. Line transfers are required when removing a terminal. In fact, subscriber wires connected to the terminal to be removed must be relocated to another terminal. This operation, referred to as a line transfer, is illustrated with the CT/LT symbol. Only the lower two boxes of the symbol must be completed when transferring lines. Number of working pairs among the transferred pairs
Number of working pairs assigned to line transfers
High-speed services
Number of transferred working pairs assigned to special services
A Facilities note must also be included on the plan, as follows: “Relocate service wires at R 102 Hubert, 47, 101125.”
47,101-150 BKTB 50-26/AER
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
6
2
25
Facilities Note: Relocate subscriber wires at PR 102 HUBERT ST, 47, 101-125
RM PR 100 HUBERT ST NF25 47,101-125
The example below shows the removal of a terminal with line transfers. The CT/LT symbol indicates that 6 services are assigned to line transfers and 2 of them are special services.
45
Focus on the meaning of the numbers in the CT/LT symbol. 7.1.17
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
7.1.18
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Instructor's notes
Make sure the participants understand the difference between a line transfer and a pair transfer.
Replacing a terminal
Replacing a terminal means installing and removing a terminal at the same location. The elements associated with installation and removal must appear on the plan.
BKTB 50-26/AER
ST R PR M Q 1 47 TD 00 , 1 7C HU 01 -5 B -1 0 E RT 50
W/L : 100, 102, 104 HUBERT
47,101-150 AC:47,101-150
47,101-150
2
QTD8A 50
6
PR 100 HUBERT ST
Example:
45 Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Explain that when replacing a terminal, a bold line with x’s through it illustrates the old terminal.
7.1.19
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Adding connecting blocks
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
To represent the addition of connecting blocks, you must draw the symbol of the existing terminal and indicate the work in the same way as in the following example.
SC
BKTB 50-26/AER
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
44
10,1-50(10,1-25) AC:10,1-50
47,101-150
QTD20AF 50-50(25)
PR 10 LOUISE ST
Example :
47,101-150 BKTB 50-26/AER
Explain the diagram for adding blocks associated with the terminal blocks.
7.1.20
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Rearranging terminal pairs is illustrated on a plan as follows.
Rearranging terminal pairs
1
QTD20AF 50-50
4
14,1-100
41F BKTB 100-26/AER 41
AC:14,51-75
15
(14,1-25)D4001-4025 (14,26-50)14,51-75
PR 435 PINE ST
Example :
14,1-50 BKTB 50-26/AER
1 25
Reminder: The transfer indicator is used with an existing terminal to indicate a pair rearrangement in the terminal. The transfer indicator is still accompanied by the CT/LT symbol.
Instructor's notes
Explain the diagram for rearranging terminal pairs. Ask the participants to explain the meaning of the numbers in the transfer indicator and CT/LT symbol. Explain that this is another example of line transfer. In this example, service wires are transferred on different binding posts in the same terminal. The line transfers must be completed before the pairs are cut dead. Explain that there is a splice at the terminal because the cable size changes.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.21
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
A pair transfer on a cable has an impact on the terminals and the working pairs. You must therefore indicate the list of terminal addresses affected by the transfer in a note.
Cable work: Pair transfer
Example : Facilities Note: Terminals affected by transfer at Arb #1: F 6-8-10-12 LEMIEUX
14,1-50
15,51 -100 BKTB 50 -26/AER
181F
(14,1 -50)15,51 -100
41F
BKTB 50 -26/AER
41
45
45
1
LEMIEUX STREET
50 -
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
PF12 LEMIEUX ST
20
PF10 LEMIEUX ST
0
PF8 LEMIEUX ST
46 0
52 F 52
BKTB 50 -26/AER
PF6 LEMIEUX ST
ROSARIO STREET
The note replaces the illustration below.
7.1.22
45
45
1
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
5. Definition and use of wires Duration
10 minutes
Definition
The cable or cables from the central office feed the wires headed towards subscribers through a terminal.
Wire Wire
Cable
Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire
Wire is not illustrated on plans except when it is used as cable. In fact, in certain locations, the manager can use certain wire rather than cable depending on the network structure. Wire acts as cable when it runs over more than two spans. As an example, along a public road before reaching the customer’s property. This wire does not have the same name and number as cable.
Types of wires
• The aerial or buried service wire consists of three pairs and is not illustrated on plans.
SC
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.23
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
•
Types of wires (cont'd)
6- or 12-pair drop wires consist of 6 or 12 pairs of 22-gauge polyethylene insulated conductors mounted on a 2.41-milimeter 180-grade steel support wire. They serve 2 purposes: - As subscriber wires (directly connect the terminal and the customer). In this case, they are not illustrated on plans; - As cables towards customers (when they run over more than two spans). In this case, they are illustrated on plans.
Instructor's notes
Indicate that wires are used as cables in exceptional situations.
Multiple 12-pair drop wire
Multiple 6 pairs drop wire
Examples : 10,1-50 BKMB 50-24/AER
75F 80
75
10,1-6 MDW 12-22/AER
98F
24,12-23 MDW 12-22/AER
50F
18
1
24,1-50 BKMB 50-24/AER
80F 80
50 2
NOTE TO EXPERTECH: Arb 1 & 2, create sheath to strand bonds
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.24
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Types of wires (cont'd)
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
•
The rural NEZ wire consists of two pairs and can serve one or two customers. Just like the drop wire, it serves two purposes: - As a subscriber wire (directly connects the terminal and the customer). In this case, it is not illustrated on plans; - As a cable towards customers (when it runs over more than two spans). In this case, it is illustrated on plans.
Service wire
NEZ Protector
NEZ wire
Example :
10,1-50 BKMB 50-24/AER
10,1-2 NEZ 2-22/AER
75F 75 1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.25
45F 45
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Wire protector
An electrical protection device, the wire protector is represented by a “V” at the beginning and end of all wires that act as a cable (6- and 12-pair drop wires or rural wires).
Instructor's notes
Show the symbol of the protectors on the three previous diagrams.
Grounding
Just like all cables, certain wires must be grounded for safety reasons.
Instructor's notes
Ask a participant to illustrate the grounding symbol.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.26
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Exercise # 1 Duration
40 minutes
Instructor's notes
PART I: Ask the participants the following question. Correct the exercise as you go along.
Note: The participants can find the answers under the “ANSWERS” tab in their guide. Instruction part I
Answer true or false to each of the following statements and correct the ones that are false.
1. Outside terminals are not always necessary because the encapsulation technique can be used. Answer: True 2. Outside aerial terminals are always placed on the strand. Answer: False, they can be mounted type (pole, wall). 3. Outside terminals are used only with copper cables. Answer: True 4. Outside terminals can terminate more than 100 cable pairs. Answer: False, outside terminals can terminate a maximum of 50 cable pairs.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.27
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Exercise # 1 (part I, cont'd) 5. Inside the terminals, the role of connecting blocks is to connect cable pairs and wires that reach customers. Answer: True 6. A maximum of 10 5-pair blocks may be installed in a QTD20AF. Answer: True
7. The AC identifies pairs terminated at the terminal. Answer: False, it is the count that identifies the pairs.
8. What does 25 means in a fixed count terminal? Answer: That the terminal has a fixed count of a maximum of 25 pairs.
9.
“QTD20AF 50-10” means that the terminal has a 50 pair capacity but, actually, it contains only 2 connectors of 5 binding post each, for a total of 10 available binding posts.
Answer: True
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.28
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Exercise # 1 (cont'd) Instructor's notes
In small groups or individually, ask the participants to analyze the following plans by following the steps in the analysis method
Once the exercise is completed, «verbally» proceed to correction by asking participants' analysis results. Use the following answers, as a reference tool, to make sure that all points have been covered. DO NOT READ THE ANSWERS to the participants. Note : After the correction, tell the participants that the analysis results are under the "ANSWERS" tab in their guide. Directives part II Individually or in small teams, analyze the following work plans and correct any discrepancies. Use the following tools: • •
Analysis Method job aid; Answer grid.
Enter the results obtained at each step in the following pages.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.29
WL
AC
NOTE TO EXPERTECH ARB #2 #2 ORDER 5 QBN 6
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
AC
AC
1st
WL
STREET
2nd
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
STREET
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
7.1.30
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number, plan(s) number(s), switching center. _______________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Work location description. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies) Network category (ies) : __________________________________________________
Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Work description
7.1.31
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note : In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Verification : Write down the verified items.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.32
Missing items: Specify the required action to take if known.
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
EXERCISE # 1 (Part II) - ANSWERS Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number = to follow. Switching center & municipality : missing. Plan(s) number(s) = 201 No 700 location plan for this job. However, a work location sketch is drawn on the plan. Work location description: PLAN 201 : Blais Street between 1st Street and 2nd Street. Following permanent locations: R 6,18 and 20 Blais. 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies). Aerial network : existing aerial cable, work on terminals.
Step 2 : : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1
Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Work description A1 : Place a QTD8A terminal. A2 : Replacement of a ready access terminal by a QTD20AF50-50 and service wire transfers.
PLAN 201 : A3 : Pairs rearrangement in an existing QTD10A50-50 terminal . A4 : Add of 5 connector blocks (5X5=25 pairs) in an existing terminal.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.31(a)
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
EXERCISE # 1 (Part II) – ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. Plan 201: 3.1 Verifications (work) : Work on terminals: A1, R 6 Blais, installation of a QTD8A terminal : • Adjustment of the existing cable components lengths to clarify measurements between equipments. • Terminal size missing. However, it is possible to identify it using the terminal type and its count. • AC and TP are missing, to be added.
A2, R 18 Blais, terminal replacement : • New terminal size 50 pairs doesn't correspond to its pair count (25 pairs). To correct, verify with the designer. • In NetworkX system, « RM » abbreviation will precede the terminal type to be removed . • The CT/LT symbol shows 4 line transfers and 2 of them are special services. A3 Pairs rearrangement in an existing QTD10A50-50 terminal: • Permanent address : missing, to be added. • The proposed after transfer count is not included in the cable count. To correct, verify with the designer. • The TC/LT symbol is missing, to be added. A4 Add connector blocks in an existing terminal : • New count and size 50 underlining missing, to be added. • Note indicating the type of connector blocks to order. 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): • Caption stamp element missing. • Work location: o Street names, permanent location and arbitraries: the permanent location is missing for the terminal A 3, to be added. o Work location sketch on the work plan. • References : o Municipality name : missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.31(b)
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
6. Checklist concerning outside terminals Duration
10 minutes
Checklist
There are specific and different requirements for illustrating terminals. You must check all the elements of terminal-related work on a plan. To this end, the following tools may be useful: •
Checklist for 200 and 600 plans
Note: The suggested analysis tools are prepared from Bell practices to which you may refer if necessary.
Instructor's notes
Explain the items on the 200 and 600 plan checklists associated specifically with outside terminals. These items are highlighted in grey on the following pages 200 Plan items 18-19-20 600 Plan items 15-16-17 Remind the importance of these informations when splicing work is required on cables. Point out that the use of the checklist allows identifying the same discrepancies as the one found during the analysis.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.32
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
920-3130-103 New strand (IMAP/network/misc/strand) on new pole Existing strand Slack span and arrow (931-2002-100) Sheath to strand bond Exposed network - voltage Transfer of attachments Ground (electrical connection (638-0200-910F) Pressurization Reference from one plan to another
PLAN #
920-3130-103
Direction of central office (fibre ring)
10
Pair transfer
11
Address of crossconnect terminal Easement, R/W, MTQ Name, telephone and pager number of manager Name, telephone and pager number of coordinator Name and telephone number of associate Contact for access to site or other locations Cutting and trimming Information pertaining to associated DCT (JOINT USE)number New pairs terminated in crossconnect terminal (form 3381) Pair extension ( > 4.5 Km) and/or assigned in a load coil (form 3888) Up/down a pole
Arb
12
General: Standards for issuing work plans
HDSL repeater
13
CT/LT SYMBOL (900-2000-100A15.doc)
14
Work location
15
Splicing sequence
16
Cable and pair identification
17
Terminals affected by transfer
18
Terminals affected by pair energizing
19
Terminals affected by pairs cut dead
20
Full terminal count
21
AC of terminals
22
Wiring limits (911-1000-103)
23
Terminal address (according to IPAIRS) (OP TIP 98-019)
24
Taper code
25
CLLI code
26
Municipality
27
Associated network
28
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
200 PLAN - AERIAL
7.1.33
ITEM #
200 PLAN - AERIAL
NETWORK #______________ ITEM #
CHECKLIST
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
40
38 39
PLAN #
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
CHECKLIST
NETWORK #______________
Trench depth, street width, soil type, repaving if necessary (920-3132102F), repair work etc.
1
BINGO method for duct occupancy
19
Join-use – separation - exposed network (e.g. : Bell, HO, TV trench)
2
Component and final measurements
20
Submarine cable – installation specifications (630-0200-011F) Presence of services below the surface (Attention caption stamp obligatory Vertical measurements – up and down)
3
HDSL and ADTRAN repeater
21
4
Full terminal count (ex: 203-1,451-500)
22
5
Full assignable count of terminal (e.g.: 203-1, 476-500)
23
Easement, R/W, MC, MTO, (Construction Notes)
6
Wiring limits of terminal (911-1000-103F)
24
Cable reel numbering (if applicable).
7
Terminal addresses (according to IPAIRS) OP TIP 98-019
25
Names of main and cross streets
8
Taper Code
26
Arb (OP TIP 980019)
9
Insert cable identification (on each side of splice)
27
Reference to related plans (920-3100-102F)
10
Address of crossconnect terminal (Construction Notes) Obligatory
28
Caption stamp for access to work or installation notes
11
New pairs terminated at a crossconnect terminal (existing or new) FORM P3381/P4235
29
Distance between terminal poles (CG301.2 section 2) – Service code 0202, staking and trimming.
12
CLLI Code (Construction Notes
30
Pair transfer
13
CT/LT SYMBOL and form 2861 (920-2000-100A15.doc)
14
Terminals affected by transfer (Facilities note)
15
Associated network (Construction Notes) plus network sequence if required and notes New pairs terminated at Central Office. Addition or replacement of a length >4575m (Completed work) BC3888A to be completed or IMAP loop report Work location – 700 plan or plan drawing
Terminals affected by energizing (Facilities note)
16
Other work plan-related information
34
Terminals affected by pairs cut dead (Facilities note)
17
GENERAL: Information on how to issue work plans
35
Splicing sequence (700 plan or note) (920-3130-100F)
18
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.34
600 PLAN– BURIED & SUBMARINE 920-3132-102
ITEM #
ITEM #
PLAN #
600 PLAN– BURIED & SUBMARINE 920-3132-102
31 32 33
PLAN #
Module 7: Terminals and Wires
Lesson 1: Outside Terminals and Wires
Summary Duration
5 minutes The following key points were covered in this lesson: • Role of outside terminals and wires; • Types of outside terminals and wires used in the network; • Illustrating outside terminals and wires on a work plan; • Work on outside terminals and illustrating this work on work plans; • Discrepancies concerning outside work on work plans.
Instructor's notes
Ask the participants whether they have any questions or comments regarding the topics covered in this lesson. Answer the participants' questions
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
7.1.35
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals In cable QTPET
Protected BIX connectors
Building cable
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Lesson 2 Inside Terminals Duration
1 hour
Lesson objectives
At the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
•
Define the role of inside terminals;
•
Determine the elements required to illustrate the different types of inside terminals on a work plan;
•
Explain how to illustrate work on inside terminals;
•
Identify and correct discrepancies concerning inside terminals and related work illustrated on work plans.
7.2.1
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Preamble Duration
2 minutes In the previous lesson you saw that terminals could be installed in aerial and buried networks. In this lesson, you will learn that terminals can also be found in buildings to serve customers. These inside terminals are also illustrated on work plans.
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.2
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
1. Characteristics of inside terminals Duration
10 minutes
Definition
Just like outside terminals, inside terminals are boxes used to terminate a subscriber wire to a copper cable pair from the central office. Inside terminals consist of: • QTPET protector(s); • Mounts (QMBIX 10A); • Connectors (QCBIX1A); • Connector labels: blue for blue field (customer side) and green for green field (central office side); • Designation Strip (QSB1X20A); • Cover; • 6-post ground bracket; • Ground wire #6.
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.3
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Definition (cont'd) In cable QTPET
Protected BIX connectors
Building cable
Installing an inside terminal (BIX) and QTPET
Mount: structure that supports BIX connectors
BIX connector: binding post plate
Mounts and Connectors
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.4
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
QTPET Protector
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Before terminating at BIX connectors, the cable entering the building is generally terminated at a QTPET protector. This equipment is used to protect against lightning and electrical overloads. Note: A QBL-23B box is available to store entrance cable pairs not terminated to connectors.
Protection modules
#6 grounding wire
QTPET out cable
QTPET There are three types of QTPET protectors: • QTPET 25 • QTPET 50 • QTPET 100 The numbers 25, 50 and 100 indicate the quantity of pairs that may be terminated at the QTPET.
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.5
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Connectors (BIX)
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Pairs terminated inside a QTPET protector are then terminated to connectors (BIX). In fact, the entrance cable is terminated to the connectors in the green field (central office side) and the building cables headed towards customers go out through connectors in the blue field (customer side).
Connectors (BIX) Note: In large buildings requiring more than 200 feeder pairs, the in pairs are terminated at verticals and QCM 486 protectors.
QCM 486 Protector
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.6
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
15 minutes
Placement illustration
The example below shows the required elements to illustrate an inside terminal placement on a work plan. DM 89102 COLIN
Duration
Demarcation Point
101-1,1-100 BKMB 100-24/AER 34
99F 15
101-1,1-100 BKMB100-24/BLD
2
3F 3
101-1,1-100
PROT/CONN 100
2. Illustrating inside terminals
12F
ATMM 100-24/BLD
12 3 4
1
Insulating joint inside the splice
PL: 1 PROT/CONN 100 101-1,1-100 AC 101-1,1-100 W.L. 89102 COLIN TERMINATE 200 PAIRS 4 – QCBIX1A 2 – QSBIX20A 2 – GREEN LABELS
•
Symbol
The symbol of an inside terminal and a QTPET is a rectangle with an “X” inside.
•
Address
The address of the terminal must be entered as it is in IPAIRS, with the same spaces and capital letters. For a new installation (since August 1999) of an inside terminal, the terminal address is preceded by the letters “DM” to indicate a demarcation point. For an older installation, the address is preceded by the letters “IN” (Note TIPS 2004-070 for additional info). Example: DM 89102 COLIN
•
Arb
An arb must point to the terminal where the work will be performed (this is only necessary if there is no civic address).
•
Number of QTPET protectors and their capacity
The number of QTPET protectors and their capacity must be indicated. Examples: 1 – PROT/CONN 50 protector) 2 – PROT/CONN 100 protectors)
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.7
(1 50-pair QTPET (2 100-pair QTPET
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
•
Count
The count is written under the terminal symbol. It identifies pairs connected in the terminal. Ex.: 101-1,1-100
•
Assignable count (AC)
Reminder: The AC indicates the group of pairs that can be used in this terminal to serve customers. The remaining pairs are considered unassignable pairs, i.e., pairs connected to the terminal that are not part of the AC.
•
Taper code
Reminder: The designer provides the 6-digit taper code according to the sector (lateral). It is entered on the plan near the caption stamp.
•
Wiring Limit (WL)
Reminder: The wiring limit (WL), also referred to as distribution limit, is a list of addresses dedicated to the terminal. It is determined by the designer.
•
The number and type of mounts to install
The number and type of mount must be indicated. Example: 1 – QMBIX10A
•
The number and type of connectors to install
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
The number and type of BIX connector must be indicated. Example: 1 – QCBIX1A
7.2.8
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
•
Labels and strips
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Information on the labels affixed to the connectors must be indicated. •
Number and type of strip
•
Label number and colour Labels may be green (green field – central office side) or blue (blue field – customer side). • The IN cables are terminated to connectors in the green field (green labels). • The building cables (headed towards building customers are terminated to connectors in the blue field (blue labels).
Example: 2 – QSBIX20A (designation strips) 2 – Green labels •
Number and type of storage box (if required)
The number and type of storage box must be indicated where required. Example: 1 – QBL – 23B
•
Cover
•
6-position ground bracket
•
Ground wire #6
•
Pair termination inside the QTPET and to BIX connectors (ex.: Terminate 200 prs).
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
Protects the BIX connector
Indicate, in a note, the location where the wire must be fixed (ex.: attach the ground wire #6 to the cold water pipe).
7.2.9
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Inside distribution panel hardware
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
The following table shows the list of required material for the inside distribution panel.
INSIDE TERMINAL HARDWARD
« WITH » MECHANICAL PROTECTION
B.I.X HARDWARD
« WITHOUT » MECHANICAL PROTECTION
CABLE = NON-PROTECTED Mount
Mount 31A Nota 4 Connector Strip Label GREEN FIELD Ground bracket (6 positions)
CABLE = PROTECTED
ADD
ADD
Storage box QBL 23B
Nota 1 - The QCABIX32A is a semitransparent cover for the connectors' mechanical protection allowing the labelling reading. The QCABIX28A is not transparent. Nota 2 - The QTPET should not be placed inside H type boxes (ref. B.C.P. 631-4202-211). Nota 3 - Box to use for spare pairs storage, not yet terminated on QTPET – 100 pairs only. (ref. B.C.P. 631-4511-205). Nota 4 - The QMBIX31A includes a QMBIX10C and a bolted cover. N.B.:
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
H 102-202-203 box types are available only for exceptional cases of mechanical protection.
7.2.10
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Ground
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
The QTPET connector must be connected to a ground and illustrated on the plan.
Ground rod clamp
6-post ground bracket
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.11
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
3. Inside terminal work Duration
10 minutes
Types of work
Three types of work can be performed on inside terminals: • • •
Installation Removal Addition of terminal blocks
The symbol used and the elements required vary somewhat depending on the type of work to be performed. You will find inside terminals on 200 plans (building network).
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.12
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
The following chart shows the graphical and non-graphical data required when illustrating work on inside terminals.
Illustrating work
Required Elements Symbol
Address Arb
Installing a Removing a Terminal Terminal
Replacing a Terminal
Rearranging an Existing Terminal Adding Blocks
Rearranging Pairs
9
9
9
9
9
Bold
Bold + X
Bold (installation) & Bold + X (removal)
(thin)
(thin)
9
9
9
9
9
------------------------------------------------------Optional------------------------------------------------------
Number of QTPET + capacity
9
Pair termination
9
Taper code
9 9
Number and type of mounts
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 9
9 9
9 9
Number and type of connectors Number and type of strip Number and colour of labels WL
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
AC
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
CT/LT symbol DIP note
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.13
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
To illustrate a terminal removal on a plan, you must place an “X” on the terminal symbol in bold and add the information listed in the chart. The example below shows the removal of a terminal with line transfers. The CT/LT symbol indicates that 6 services are assigned to line transfers and 2 of these services are special services. Demarcation point
101-1,1-100 BKMB 100 -24/AER 34
99F 15
101-1,1-100
3F
BKBM100 -24/BLD
3
101-1,1-100 ATMM 100 -24/BLD
RM DM 89102 COLIN PROT/CONN 100
Removing a terminal
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
12F 12
6
2
Reminder: When replacing a terminal, line transfers must be made. In fact, the subscriber wires connected to the terminal to be removed must be relocated to another terminal. This operation, referred to as a line transfer, is illustrated with the CT/LT symbol. Only the two lower boxes of the CT/LT symbol are to be completed when transferring lines. Number of working pairs among the transferred pairs
Number of working pairs assigned to line transfers
High speed services
Number of transferred working pairs assigned to special services
A Facilities note is also required on the plan to indicate the required work. Example: “Relocate subscriber wires to R102 Hubert, 47,101-125.”
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.14
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
To illustrate the addition of blocks, you have to draw a symbol of the existing terminal and indicate work in the same way as the following example.
Adding terminal blocks
101-1,1-100 (D3601-3700)101-1, 101-200
101-1,1-100 (D3601-3700)101-1, 101-200 BKMB 200-24/AER
99F
BKBM200-24/BLD
15
3F 3
101-1,1-100 (D3601-3700)101-1, 101-200
ATMM 200-24/BLD
PROT/CONN 200
201
DM 89102 COLIN
Example :
12F 12
PL: 1 PROT/CONN 100 (101-1, 1-100) 101,1-200 (AC 101-1,1 -100) AC 101-1,1-200 W.L. 89102 COLIN TERMINATE 200 PAIRS 4 – QCBIX1A 2 – QSBIX20A 2 – GREEN LABELS RM QBL23B
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.15
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Exercise # 1 Duration
15 minutes
Instruction Individually or in small teams, analyze the following work plan and correct any discrepancies related to the INSIDE TERMINAL only. Use the following tools: • •
Analysis Method job aid; Answer grid.
Enter the results obtained at each step in the following pages.
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.16
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number, plan(s) number(s), switching center. _______________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Work location description. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies) Network category (ies) : __________________________________________________
Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
Work description
7.2.18
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note : In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Verification : Write down the verified items.
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.19
Missing items: Specify the required action to take if known.
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
4. Checklist concerning inside terminals Duration
5 minutes
Quality objective
The requirements for illustrating terminals are different than for the other network elements. You must check all the elements associated with terminal work on a plan to make sure the plan has no discrepancies.
Tools
To this end, the following tools may be useful: • •
Analysis Method job aid Checklist for 200B plans
Note: The suggested analysis tools are based on Bell practices that you may consult if you need.
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.20
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
920-3130-104
200 PLAN - BUILDING
PLAN #
ITEM #
200 PLAN - BUILDING
NETWORK # _____________________
920-3130-104
ITEM #
CHECKLIST
Name of building and civic address (OP TIP 98-019)
1
Work location (800 plan)
21
Diagram of vertical duct work, if required
2
Contact for building access
22
Typical floor plan (if required) 920-3130-104
3
CLLI code (Construction Notes)
23
Reference from one plan to another
4
Component and final measurements
24
Grounding
5
Vertical measurements (up/down)
25
DP Demarcation Point – procedures (OP TIP 00-056)
6
Name of street(s)
26
Arb (OP TIP 98-019)
7
Other information required on work plans
27
Pair transfer
8
General: Standards for issuing work plans
28
CT/LT symbol (900-2000-100A15.doc) – form 2861
9
Transmission standards
29
Full terminal count
10
Full AC of terminal
11
Wiring limits of terminal
12
Terminal address (according to IPAIRS) (OP TIP 98-019)
13
Taper code
14
Splicing sequence
15
Number of connectors and labels required
16
Municipality
17
Associated network
18
Address of crossconnect terminal (Construction Notes) Obligatory
19
Easement, verbal agreement, etc.
20
Note 1: Items in pale grey will be covered later in this course or in another course. Note 2: For more information, consult the complete checklist. Explanations and examples are provided.
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
7.2.21
PLAN #
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Lesson 2 : Inside terminals
Summary Duration
3 minutes The following key points were covered in this lesson:
Students' guide P243 – Work plans
•
Illustrating inside terminals;
•
Inside terminal work
7.2.22
Final exercise
Final exercise
Final exercise Instructor's notes
Before proceeding to the Final exercise: •
Distribute the Final exercise plans (job 531579) to the participants;
•
Ask the participants to open plan 602. Explain that, the arrows containing a date, indicates that there is a 778 form (revision) that has been issued.
In small groups or individually, ask the participants to analyze the plans by following the steps in the analysis method (Job 531579 plans: 501-507, 601-602 and 201). The following scenario could be used: those plans have been started by a colleague and they must be verified and completed before issuing the job. Once the exercise is completed, «verbally» proceed to correction by asking participants' analysis results. Specify that P401 is provided for reference only. Tell the participants not to analyse this plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise.1(a)
Final exercise
Final exercise Duration
3 hours
Instructor's notes
Use the following answers, as a reference tool, to make sure that all points have been covered. DO NOT READ THE ANSWERS to the participants. Note : After the correction, tell the participants that the analysis results are under the "ANSWERS" tab in their guide.
Instruction
Individually or in small teams, analyze the work plans (provided by your instructor) and correct any discrepancies. Use the following tools: • • •
Analysis Method job aid; Basic work plan elements job aid, Answer grid.
NOTE: DO NOT ANALYSE Plan 401. It is provided as a reference plan only.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 1
Final exercise
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number, plan(s) number(s), switching center. _______________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Work location description. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies) Network category (ies) : __________________________________________________
Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Work description
Final exercise. 2
Final exercise
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note : In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Verification : Write down the verified items.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3
Missing items: Specify the required action to take if known.
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location Job number = 531579. Switching Center: Welland. Plan(s) number(s) = 501-507, 601-602 and 201. Place the plans side by side. Work location description: City: Welland. No 700 series plan for entire job location, work location sketches are missing on plans 506, 601,601 & 201, all MH diagrams are missing.
Multiples plan references.
On plan 505, there is a reference to plan 206. On plan 507, there is a reference to plan 609. On plan 201, there are references to plans 202, 603, 604, 605, 607 & 608. Plans 202, 206, 603, 604, 605, 607, 608 & 609 are missing on the job. To verify with designer.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(a)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location (cont'd) 501: Main frame, 90 Division St
502: 2BMH2
504: 2CMH4
505: 2CMH5
503: 2CMH2
506: Underground cable between 2CMH4, 2CMH5 and OPI 10 PERENAC & PED208 BROADWAY AV. 507: 2CMH4 601: OPI 3000 – PED 10 PERENACK AV 302-3 602: PERENACK AV, PED16PEDERACK AV, PED30PEDERACK AV, PED36PEDERACK AV. 201: BROADWAY AVE – From pole 209 Broadway Av to Pole 578 Broadway Av.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(b)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated 2.1
Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved.
Plan 501: Restencil MDF verticals. Plan 502: Removal of a BHAF400-22/UG stub cable, 2 LD1 carrier cases and 1 loading coil case in 2BMH2 Plan 503: Removal of a BHAF400-22/UG stub cable, 2 LD1 carrier cases and cutting 25 pairs dead in an existing loading coils case. Plan 504: Installation of three stubs in 2CMH4: Arb 14 to 16: BKMF 100-24/UG – 5F Arb 16 to 22: BKMF 200-24/UG – 5F Arb 19 to 22: BKMF 900-24/UG – 5F Installation of two cables from arb 22 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 400-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 900-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 Removal of a cable from arb 17 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): Arb 17 to 2CMH4 wall: BKMF 400-24/UG – 1F in 2CMH4
Splicing work: Installation of three plugs (arbs 15, 21 & 23) Arb 14: Splicing of the new cable to the existing ones & cutting 50 pairs dead in existing BHAF 150-22 Arb 16: Splicing of the 2 new cables to the existing ones & cutting 100 pairs dead in existing BHAG 300-22 Arb 17: Energizing of 50 pairs in the existing BKTF 600-26/UG (stub box 2) + removing 400 pairs Arb 18: Energizing of 400 pairs in the existing BKTF 1200-26/UG (stub box 3) + cutting 450 pairs dead in the existing BDMC 1200-24/UG (stub box 1) Arb 19: Splicing of the new cable to the existing ones Arb 20: Energizing of 100 pairs in the existing BKMF 600-26/UG (stub box 4) + cutting 100 pairs dead in the existing BHAG 400-22/UG Arb 22: Splicing of the 4 new cables together
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(c)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan 505: Installation of two cables from arb 22 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): From 2CMH4 wall to arb 2: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 From 2CMH4 wall to arb 1: BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 900-24/UG cable from arb 1 (2CMH5) to OPI 10 PERENACK plan 506 to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 400-24/UG cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to P208 BROADWAY AV plan 506 to be disbursed on plan 506 Removal of a BKMF 400-24/UG – 191F cable from 2CMH4 wall to arb 2 (2CMH5) Removal of a BKMF 200-24/UG – 1F cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to 2CMH5 wall
Splicing work: Arb 1: Splicing of the two new cables Arb 2: Splicing of the two new cables
Plan 506: Installation of two cables from 2CMH4 to 2CMH5: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 900-24/UG – 321F cable from 2CMH5 to OPI 10 PERENACK to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 400-24/UG – 284F cable from 2CMH5 to P208 BROADWAY AV to be disbursed on plan 506 + 8F up pole section of that cable Installation of an OUT BJMB 900-24/BUR – 41F cable from OPI 10 PERNACK to PED 208 BROADWAY Installation of a CP12 pedestal at 208 Broadway No splicing work on that plan. Splicing to be done on associated plans.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(d)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan 507: Removal of a 300-26/AER – 1F cable from arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Removal of a 600-26/BUR – 1F cable from arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Splicing work: Arb 57: Remove 900 pairs from the existing splice.
Plan 601: Installation of an OPI 3000 (302-3) at PED 10 PERENACK AV Installation of an OUT BJMB 50-24/BUR – 3F cable, down cable component into the OPI. NOTE: The two other cables are represented on other plans (505 & 201). Splicing work: OPI3000, PED 10 PERENACK AV: 1850 pairs terminated.
Plan 602: Installation of a buried cable BJMB 50-24 – 142F from OPI PED 10 PERENACK AV to PED 36 PERENACK AV. Installation of 3 CP815 (PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV) Installation of buried service wires. Splicing work: PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV, terminate pairs on terminal connecting blocks.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(e)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan 201: Installation of an aerial BKMB 300-24 - 366F cable from arb 1 to 4 Installation of a 10M Strand – 408m from arb 1 to 4 Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 92F cable from arb 2 to P306B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 92F cable from P306B to P396B (cable type is written on the plan but the label is missing). Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 83F cable from P396B to P500B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 600-24 - 40F cable from P500B to P512B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 600-24 - 80F cable from P512B to P568B. Installation of aerial four aerial QTD8A1A25 terminals at P208B, P212B, P314B & P420B. At P182B, installation of a 32m Anchor, 10m Guy From P182B & P208B, installation of a 10M - ?? meter overhead guy At P568B, installation of a 32m Anchor, 10m Guy. Bonding required at poles PF208B, PF396B, PF500B & PF262B. All other dashed cables & terminals are placed on other plans. Splicing work: Arb 1, splicing of the two new cables. Arb 4, splicing of the two new cables. Arb 2, splicing of the two new cables and the terminal. P212B, splicing of the terminal on the cable. P306B, splicing of the three new cables and the terminal. P314B, splicing of the terminal on the cable. P396B, splicing of the four new cables and the terminal. P420B, splicing of the terminal on the cable. P500B, splicing of the three new cables and the terminal. P512B, splicing of the four new cables and the terminal. P568B, splicing of the three new cables and the terminal.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(f)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 501 : Restencil MDF verticals. 3.1 Verifications (work) : •
Existing cables identification: There are 3 non-identified lines on the right side of the plan. To verify & correct.
•
Next location (forward from SC): Missing for all cables going south. To verify & correct.
•
Permanent address or arbitrary for each work location. OK we can use the vertical numbers as permanent address (V46 & V48).
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o 700 series plan (work location) for the job is missing, to be added, OR location sketch on plan missing, to be added.
•
References: o Plan references; Reference to plan 502 missing, to be added. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(g)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 502 : : Removal of a BHAF400-22/UG stub cable, 2 LD1 carrier cases and 1 loading coil case in 2BMH2. 3.1 Verifications (work) : Work on cables & equipments: • Component & total lengths (origin arrow): OK • Cable identification. Arb 1, the existing cable going south has no label – to be added. • Previous location (toward SC): Missing for the 3 cables at the left of the plan – to verify & correct. •
Next location (forward from SC): Missing for all cables going south. To verify & correct.
•
Permanent address or arbitrary for each work location. OK
Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • • • •
Identification of all participating cables. Arb 1, cable going south has no label. Principle of continuity. Cannot be verified in cable going south Arb 1. Cable count corresponds to its size. Permanent address or arbitrary for each work.
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 501, 503. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(h)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 503 : Removal of a BHAF400-22/UG stub cable, 2 LD1 carrier cases and cutting 25 pairs dead in an existing loading coils case in 2CMH2. 3.1 Verifications (work) : Work on cables & equipments: • Component & total lengths (origin arrow): OK • Cable identification. OK • Previous location (toward SC): Missing for all cables on the plan – to verify & correct. •
Next location (forward from SC): Missing for all cables on the plan - to verify & correct.
•
Permanent address or arbitrary for each work location. OK
Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • • • •
Identification of all participating cables. OK Principle of continuity. OK Cable count corresponds to its size. OK Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. OK
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 502, 504. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(i)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 504 : Cables installation & removal & associated splicing work: Installation of three stubs in 2CMH4: Arb 14 to 16: BKMF 100-24/UG – 5F Arb 16 to 22: BKMF 200-24/UG – 5F Arb 19 to 22: BKMF 900-24/UG – 5F Installation of two cables from arb 22 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 400-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 900-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 Removal of a cable from arb 17 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): Arb 17 to 2CMH4 wall: BKMF 400-24/UG – 1F in 2CMH4 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK. • Cable identification (all cables): OK 1) Arb 14 to 16: BKMF 100-24/UG – 5F = OK 2) Arb 16 to 22: BKMF 200-24/UG – 5F = OK 3) Arb 19 to 22: BKMF 900-24/UG – 5F = OK 4) Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 400-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 • Next location (forward from SC): 2CMH5. • Duct to be used: Field side, to plan 505: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 5) Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 900-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 • Next location (forward from SC): 2CMH5. • Duct to be used: Field side, to plan 505: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). NOTE: If the 2 cables (Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall) are to be placed on plan 506, then, they should be drawn with dashed lines or the total length (5F) should be removed from this plan. To verify & correct. 6) RM Arb 17 to 2CMH4 wall: BKMF 400-24/UG – 1F in 2CMH4 • Next location (forward from SC): 2CMH5. • Existing used duct: o Field side, to plan 505: Duct used = 2 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(j)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 504 (cont'd) Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • • • • •
Identification of all participating cables. OK Principle of continuity. OK Cable count corresponds to its size. OK Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. OK
Manhole diagram (700 series plan): missing: to be added.
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 503, 505, 506 & 507. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(k)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 505 : Cables installation & removal & associated splicing work: Installation of two cables from arb 22 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): From 2CMH4 wall to arb 2: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 From 2CMH4 wall to arb 1: BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 900-24/UG cable from arb 1 (2CMH5) to OPI 10 PERENACK plan 506 to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 400-24/UG cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to P208 BROADWAY AV plan 506 to be disbursed on plan 506 Removal of a BKMF 400-24/UG – 191F cable from 2CMH4 wall to arb 2 (2CMH5) Removal of a BKMF 200-24/UG – 1F cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to 2CMH5 wall 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK. • Cable identification (all cables): OK 1) From 2CMH4 wall to arb 2: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Previous location (toward SC): 2CMH4. • Duct to be used: SC side, from plan 504: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 2) From 2CMH4 wall to arb 1: BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Previous location (toward SC): 2CMH4. • Duct to be used: SC side, from plan 504: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 3) From arb 1 (2CMH5) to OPI 10 PERENACK plan 506: BJMB 900-24/UG - -5F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Next location (forward from SC): OPI 10 PERENACK. • Duct to be used: Field side, from plan 505: Duct to use = 1 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 4) From arb 2 (2CMH5) to P208 BROADWAY plan 201: BJMB 400-24/UG - -5F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Next location (forward from SC): P208 BROADWAY. • Duct to be used: Field side, to plan 201: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). NOTE: Duct #3 should be used only for MAIN duct. In our case, the case should be in a lateral duct going to the pole. To verify. NOTE RELATED TO ALL CABLE PLACEMENT ON THIS PLAN: If ALL the cables are to be placed on plan 506, then, they should be drawn with dashed lines or their total length should be removed from this plan. To verify & correct. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(l)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 505 (cont'd)
5) RM BKMF 400-24/UG – 191F cable from 2CMH4 wall to arb 2 (2CMH5) • Previous location (toward SC): 2CMH4. • Existing used duct: SC side, to plan 504: Duct used = 2 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 6) RM BKMF 200-24/UG – 1F cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to 2CMH5 wall • Next location (toward SC): Missing – to verify. • Existing used duct: Field side, to plan 206: Duct used = 2 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • • • • •
Identification of all participating cables. OK Principle of continuity. OK Cable count corresponds to its size. OK Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. Arb could be added at the removed cables junction.
Manhole diagram (700 series plan): missing: to be added.
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 504, 506, 601, 201 & 206. Plan 206 missing on the job – to verify. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(m)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 506 : Cables installation & associated splicing work: Installation of two cables from 2CMH4 to 2CMH5: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 900-24/UG – 321F cable from 2CMH5 to OPI 10 PERENACK to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 400-24/UG – 284F cable from 2CMH5 to P208 BROADWAY AV to be disbursed on plan 506 + 8F up pole section of that cable Installation of an OUT BJMB 900-24/BUR – 41F cable from OPI 10 PERNACK to PED 208 BROADWAY Installation of a CP12 pedestal at 208 Broadway No splicing work on that plan. 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): Problem with Cable BJMB 40024 form PL505 to P208BROADWAY & Cable BJMB 900-24 OUT cable from OPI, total lengths (see below). • Cable identification (all cables): OK 1) From 2CMH4 to 2CMH5 BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Total length 5 + W-W 193 + 5 = 203F. 2) From 2CMH4 to 2CMH5 BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Total length 5 + W-W 193 + 5 = 203F.. 3) From 2CMH5 to OPI 10 PERENACK BJMB 900-24/UG – 321F cable to be disbursed on plan 506 • Total length 5 + W-OPI 312 + up4 = 321F. 4) From 2CMH5 to P208 BROADWAY AV BJMB 400-24/UG – 284F cable to be disbursed on plan 506 + 8F up pole section of that cable • Total length 5 + W-Pole 283 + 1 (up9-8F on 0195 service code) = 289F. To verify if the 5F in 2CMH5 is to be disbursed on plan 505 our 506. NOTE: If the 5 meters in 2CMH5 is to be disbursed on plan 505, then it has to be represented with a dashed line on plan 506.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(n)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 506 (cont'd)
5) From OPI 10 PERNACK to PED 208 BROADWAY, out BJMB 900-24/BUR – 41F cable • Total length dn4 + 31 + 4 + up2 = 44F. To verify if the 3 meters near the OPI is included in the DN4 component. NOTE: If the 3 meters is included in the DN4 component, then a 1 meter component should be show inside the OPI symbol. Splicing: NO splicing on this plan.
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: None on this plan. o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 504, 505, 601, 602, 401 & 201. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(o)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 507 : Cables installation & associated splicing work: Removal of a 300-26/AER – 1F cable from arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Removal of a 600-26/BUR – 1F cable from arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK • Cable identification (all cables): OK 1) From arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Removal of a 300-26/AER – 1F cable = OK 2) From arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Removal of a 600-26/BUR – 1F cable = OK Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; •
Identification of all participating cables. OK
•
Principle of continuity. The pair counts of the two cables to be removed don't show the splicing work done on other plans. To correct as following: 300-26 (20,1301-1350)D5101-5150 D4151-4200 D4201-4300 (33,701-750)D5801-5850 15,1051-1100
• •
600-26 D5401-5450 15,651-700 D5501-5600 (15,901-950)D5701-5750 (20,901-1000)D5201-5300 15,1001-1050 (33,751-800)D5301-5350 (15,951-1000)D5751-5800 (20,1201-1300)D5001-5100
Cable count corresponds to its size. OK Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. Arb could be added at the removed cables ends.
Manhole diagram (700 series plan): missing: to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(p)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 507 (cont'd)
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK note on plan reference to plan 504. o Street names: OK (see plan 504)
•
References: o References to other plans 504 & 609 = Plan 609 missing on the job. To verify o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(q)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 601 : Installation of an OPI 3000 (302-3) at PED 10 PERENACK AV Installation of an OUT BJMB 50-24/BUR – 3F cable, down cable component into the OPI. NOTE: The two other cables are represented on other plans (505 & 201). Splicing work: OPI3000, PED 10 PERENACK AV: 1850 pairs terminated. 3.1 Verifications (work) : • •
Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK Cable identification (all cables): OK
1) OUT BJMB 50-24/BUR – 3F cable, down cable component into the OPI.= OK 2) The two other cables are represented on other plans (505 & 201). They should be represented with dashed lines on this plan and no total lengths should be displayed. 3) Installation of an OPI 3000 (302-3): Taper code missing for the OPI: To be added. Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • Identification of all participating cables. OK • Principle of continuity. OK • Total of terminated pairs in the OPI: Missing to be added. • Cable count corresponds to its size. OK • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. Arb should be added at the end of the new BJMB 50-24. 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o OPI location sketch: Missing to be added. o Street names: Missing to be added
•
References: o References to other plans 502, 505, 201 & 602 = OK o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(r)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 602 : 3.1 Verifications (work) : Installation of a buried cable BJMB 50-24 – 142F from OPI PED 10 PERENACK AV to PED 36 PERENACK AV. Installation of 3 CP815 (PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV) Installation of buried service wires. Splicing work: PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV, terminate pairs on terminal connecting blocks. Installation of cables : Installation of a buried cable BJMB 50-24 – 142F from OPI PED 10 PERENACK AV to PED 36 PERENACK AV. Installation of buried service wires. • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK • Cable identification: OK • Buried cable installation, trench information: o Pedestals are off trench (3.5 meters). o Min depth of cover = 0.6m. o All distances between the buried cable & physical fixed items are identified on plan. o Ground condition written on the plan. Work on terminals: Installation of 3 CP815 (PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV) • Terminals addresses: OK. • Terminal type and capacity. OK • Count and AC: At all pedestals, the pair counts and the AC should be written on 2 individual lines. • Wiring limits: OK • Taper code: 302300. Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • Identification of all participating cables. OK • Principle of continuity. OK • Cable count corresponds to its size. OK • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. OK Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(s)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 602 (cont'd): 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 601. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(t)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 201: 3.1 Verifications (work) : : Installation of an aerial BKMB 300-24 - 366F cable from arb 1 to 4 Installation of a 10M Strand – 408m from arb 1 to 4 Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 92F cable from arb 2 to P306B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 92F cable from P306B to P396B (cable type is written on the plan but the label is missing). Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 83F cable from P396B to P500B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 600-24 - 40F cable from P500B to P512B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 600-24 - 80F cable from P512B to P568B. Installation of aerial four aerial QTD8A1A25 terminals at P208B, P212B, P314B & P420B. At P182B, installation of a 32m Anchor, 10m Guy From P182B & P208B, installation of a 10M - ?? meter overhead guy At P568B, installation of a 32m Anchor, 10m Guy. Bonding required at poles PF208B, PF396B, PF500B & PF262B. All other dashed cables & terminals are placed on other plans. Cables & stand installation : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK • Cable identification: The cable number 302-3 is missing on the BKMB300-24. To be added. • Permanent addresses or arbitraries for all work: OK • Strand installation: Stand 408m doesn't correspond to the cable aerial length. Work on terminals: • • • • •
Terminals addresses: OK. Terminal type and capacity. OK Count and AC: At all terminal, the pair counts and the AC should be written on 2 individual lines. Wiring limits: OK Taper code: 302300.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(u)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 201 (cont'd): Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • Identification of all participating cables. OK • Principle of continuity. OK • Cable count corresponds to its size. OK • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. OK
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 506, 601, 202, 603, 604, 605, 607 & 608. Plans 202, 603, 604, 605, 607 & 608 missing. To verify with the designer. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(v)
Job example (Drafts & finalized plans)
Job example
DRAFT 1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 1
Job example
DRAFT 2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 2
Job example
DRAFT 3
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 3
Job example
DRAFT 4
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 4
Job example
DRAFT 5
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 5
Job example
DRAFT 6
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 6
Job example
DRAFT 7
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 7
Job example
DRAFT 8
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 8
Job example
DRAFT 9
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 9
Job example
DRAFT 10
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 10
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 401
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 11
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 402
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 12
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 403
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 13
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 404
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 14
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 405
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 15
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 501
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 16
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 502
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 17
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 503
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 18
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 504
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 19
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 505
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 20
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 506
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 21
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 507
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 22
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 508
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 23
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 509
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 24
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 201
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 25
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 601
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 26
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 602
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 27
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 603
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 28
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 604
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 29
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 605
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 30
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 606
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 31
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 701
CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. Minimum depth of cover 0.76m. 2. Restore all surfaces to original condition. 3. All conduit is PVCD1 unless otherwise noted. 4. All charges to go to 628687 except for where noted to be charged to 629093. 5. All work to be co-ordinated with the MTO's rebuilding of the highway.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 32
Closing remarks Legend Feeder cable Distribution cable
Module 2 : Cables representation
Crossconnecting Box 12
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Central Office 7 1 3
4
Module 3 : Underground network
2 5
Module 4 : Splicing 6 9
Fish River
11
Module 5 : Aerial & building networks
8
10
Module 6 : Buried and submarine networks
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Closing remarks
Closing remarks Duration
15 minutes
Summary
The P243 course – Work plans – is now completed. You should now be able to analyze Bell Canada work plans showing work to be performed in the existing network. More specifically, you should be able to: •
Read and interpret work plans* where underground, aerial, building and submarine cables, as well as the structures supporting them are illustrated;
•
Read and interpret work plans* where terminals are illustrated;
•
Detect discrepancies on these plans;
•
Correct the discrepancies.
* Means reading and interpreting the network map and drafts of plans.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that P243 course is a basic course and that many other courses will allow them to consolidate their competences and to acquire other new ones.
End.1
Closing remarks
Summary
Instructor's notes
To reach those objectives, you have seen 7 modules. You can remind them by looking the outside network poster: •
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
•
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
•
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 plans)
•
Module 4 : Splicing
•
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 plans)
•
Module 6 : Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
•
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Show modules 1 to 7 titles pasted on the outside network poster. After, briefly present the next work plans course content by showing grey module titles pasted on outside network poster.
Next course…
In the next work plans course, you will see other types of equipments that you can find in the Bell outside plant: crossconnecting boxes, pressure equipments, casings, central office equipments and remote terminals.
Instructor's notes
Ask participants to fill-in and to give you back the "end of course evaluation sheet". Thank participants for attending and give them their certificate.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
End.2
Alphanumeric Sequence Copper cable
L1L2L3L4 GGG-CC (E.g.: BKTF 200-26) L1
Design sequence
L2
Type of wire pair insulation B: Polyethylene-polyvinyl chloride C: Plastic foam D: Paper pulp or tape H: Solid polyethylene (19- and 22-gauge) J: Jelly filled K: Solid polyethylene (24- and 26-gauge) T: Expanded polyethylene-polyvinyl chloride
L3
Pair gauge B: 19 A: 22 M: 24 T: 26
L4
Boys Always Make Trouble
Type of sheath: A: Alpeth B: Sealed alpeth C: Stalpeth D: Lepeth E: Lead coated polyethylene F: Sealed PAP (pressurized cable)
G
G: PAP H: PASP L: Lead M: Alplast Z: Sealed stalpeth
Cable size (number or pairs) Calculation based on the pair count: Size = # of last pair- # of first pair + 1 E.g. : For count 101-300, there are 300-101=199+1 = 200 pairs (size)
C
Pair gauge B: 19 A: 22 M: 24 T: 26
Job aid P243 – Work plans
1
Alphanumeric Sequence Fibre cables
S1S2S3S4S5S6 – NNN (Ex.34N2LT-024) S1
Fibre characteristic 2 or 3: single mode fibres
S2
Attenuation 4: 0.4 dB/km X: Restoration grade
S3
Strand and sheath characteristics N: Dielectric strand +D +PSP
1: Dielectric strand + D + P 2: Dielectric strand + D + PKP R: Dielectric strand + D+PSP+ RPA S: Submarine cable M: Dielectric strand + PSP X: Dielectric strand + PSP + RPA
S4
Copper pair and pulling tension 2: No copper pair E: One 22-gauge copper pair Tension of 2.67kN (600 pounds) Tension of 4.45kN (1,000 pounds) 3: No copper pair Tension of 4.45kN (1,000 pounds) F: 2 22-gauge copper pairs C: One 22-gauge copper pair Tension of 4.45kN (1,000 Tension of 2.67kN (600 pounds) pounds)
S5
Type of construction L: Lite tube (flexible tubes) H: Tubestar (jelly filled) X: Tubestar (air filled)
S6
Number of fibres in each tube T: 12 fibres per tube
NNN
Total number of fibres or size Based on the fibre count: Size = # of last fibre - # of first fibre + 1 E.g.: For the count 13-36, there are 36-13=23+1 = 24 fibres (size)
Job aid P243 – Work plans
2
Analysis method
Steps
Action
1. Get a general idea of the project
1.1
Determine the work location.
a) Identify the network number (if available). b) Look at the 700 plan or the work location diagrams. If required, place all the plans aside to have a general idea of the project and situate the work.
c) Identify the references to other plans and/or jobs as well as the indication of subsequent and previous locations (direction of central office). d) Pay particular attention to street names on each plan. 1.2
2. Identify the work
Identify shown network category (ies) and make sure that the plans are well numbered. • Submarine
•
Building
•
Aerial
•
Underground
•
Buried
2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Pay attention to the following elements :
a) width of the lines and symbols (thin, bold, with « X » or brackets) ; b) cables and pairs numbering associated to cables or equipment (note any instance of brackets, underline, transfer boat or WCPT symbols); c) permanent addresses and arbitraries; d) notes written on the work plan.
Job aid P243 – Work plans
1
Analysis method (cont'd)
Steps (cont'd)
Action
3. Check whether the work is correctly illustrated.
3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. When required : • •
correct and/or complete work illustration;
refer to originator. Consult your guide and P243 course job aid. NOTE : In the field, different intranet sites and Bell practices are also available.
3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements : •
caption stamp information (at the bottom of plan).
•
Location details, for example : job location 700 plan ;
o OR o
work location sketch on each plan ;
o
street name and permanent address;
o
location sketch for manholes.
•
job associated request references (name of municipality, right of way, Power company, TV, etc…) ;
•
details pertaining to users (Facilities, Expertech, contractors/conduits, property developer, etc.) .
Use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Job aid P243 – Work plans
2
Final exercise
Final exercise
Final exercise Instructor's notes
Before proceeding to the Final exercise: •
Distribute the Final exercise plans (job 531579) to the participants;
•
Ask the participants to open plan 602. Explain that, the arrows containing a date, indicates that there is a 778 form (revision) that has been issued.
In small groups or individually, ask the participants to analyze the plans by following the steps in the analysis method (Job 531579 plans: 501-507, 601-602 and 201). The following scenario could be used: those plans have been started by a colleague and they must be verified and completed before issuing the job. Once the exercise is completed, «verbally» proceed to correction by asking participants' analysis results. Specify that P401 is provided for reference only. Tell the participants not to analyse this plan.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise.1(a)
Final exercise
Final exercise Duration
3 hours
Instructor's notes
Use the following answers, as a reference tool, to make sure that all points have been covered. DO NOT READ THE ANSWERS to the participants. Note : After the correction, tell the participants that the analysis results are under the "ANSWERS" tab in their guide.
Instruction
Individually or in small teams, analyze the work plans (provided by your instructor) and correct any discrepancies. Use the following tools: • • •
Analysis Method job aid; Basic work plan elements job aid, Answer grid.
NOTE: DO NOT ANALYSE Plan 401. It is provided as a reference plan only.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 1
Final exercise
Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location. Job number, plan(s) number(s), switching center. _______________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________ Work location description. ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________ 1.2 Identify shown network category (ies) Network category (ies) : __________________________________________________
Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated. 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan(s) # Arbitrary or note
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Work description
Final exercise. 2
Final exercise
Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. 3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements. Note : In your office, use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Verification : Write down the verified items.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3
Missing items: Specify the required action to take if known.
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location Job number = 531579. Switching Center: Welland. Plan(s) number(s) = 501-507, 601-602 and 201. Place the plans side by side. Work location description: City: Welland. No 700 series plan for entire job location, work location sketches are missing on plans 506, 601,601 & 201, all MH diagrams are missing.
Multiples plan references.
On plan 505, there is a reference to plan 206. On plan 507, there is a reference to plan 609. On plan 201, there are references to plans 202, 603, 604, 605, 607 & 608. Plans 202, 206, 603, 604, 605, 607, 608 & 609 are missing on the job. To verify with designer.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(a)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 1 : Get a general idea of the project. 1.1 Determine the work location (cont'd) 501: Main frame, 90 Division St
502: 2BMH2
504: 2CMH4
505: 2CMH5
503: 2CMH2
506: Underground cable between 2CMH4, 2CMH5 and OPI 10 PERENAC & PED208 BROADWAY AV. 507: 2CMH4 601: OPI 3000 – PED 10 PERENACK AV 302-3 602: PERENACK AV, PED16PEDERACK AV, PED30PEDERACK AV, PED36PEDERACK AV. 201: BROADWAY AVE – From pole 209 Broadway Av to Pole 578 Broadway Av.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(b)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated 2.1
Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved.
Plan 501: Restencil MDF verticals. Plan 502: Removal of a BHAF400-22/UG stub cable, 2 LD1 carrier cases and 1 loading coil case in 2BMH2 Plan 503: Removal of a BHAF400-22/UG stub cable, 2 LD1 carrier cases and cutting 25 pairs dead in an existing loading coils case. Plan 504: Installation of three stubs in 2CMH4: Arb 14 to 16: BKMF 100-24/UG – 5F Arb 16 to 22: BKMF 200-24/UG – 5F Arb 19 to 22: BKMF 900-24/UG – 5F Installation of two cables from arb 22 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 400-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 900-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 Removal of a cable from arb 17 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): Arb 17 to 2CMH4 wall: BKMF 400-24/UG – 1F in 2CMH4
Splicing work: Installation of three plugs (arbs 15, 21 & 23) Arb 14: Splicing of the new cable to the existing ones & cutting 50 pairs dead in existing BHAF 150-22 Arb 16: Splicing of the 2 new cables to the existing ones & cutting 100 pairs dead in existing BHAG 300-22 Arb 17: Energizing of 50 pairs in the existing BKTF 600-26/UG (stub box 2) + removing 400 pairs Arb 18: Energizing of 400 pairs in the existing BKTF 1200-26/UG (stub box 3) + cutting 450 pairs dead in the existing BDMC 1200-24/UG (stub box 1) Arb 19: Splicing of the new cable to the existing ones Arb 20: Energizing of 100 pairs in the existing BKMF 600-26/UG (stub box 4) + cutting 100 pairs dead in the existing BHAG 400-22/UG Arb 22: Splicing of the 4 new cables together
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(c)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan 505: Installation of two cables from arb 22 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): From 2CMH4 wall to arb 2: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 From 2CMH4 wall to arb 1: BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 900-24/UG cable from arb 1 (2CMH5) to OPI 10 PERENACK plan 506 to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 400-24/UG cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to P208 BROADWAY AV plan 506 to be disbursed on plan 506 Removal of a BKMF 400-24/UG – 191F cable from 2CMH4 wall to arb 2 (2CMH5) Removal of a BKMF 200-24/UG – 1F cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to 2CMH5 wall
Splicing work: Arb 1: Splicing of the two new cables Arb 2: Splicing of the two new cables
Plan 506: Installation of two cables from 2CMH4 to 2CMH5: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 900-24/UG – 321F cable from 2CMH5 to OPI 10 PERENACK to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 400-24/UG – 284F cable from 2CMH5 to P208 BROADWAY AV to be disbursed on plan 506 + 8F up pole section of that cable Installation of an OUT BJMB 900-24/BUR – 41F cable from OPI 10 PERNACK to PED 208 BROADWAY Installation of a CP12 pedestal at 208 Broadway No splicing work on that plan. Splicing to be done on associated plans.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(d)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan 507: Removal of a 300-26/AER – 1F cable from arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Removal of a 600-26/BUR – 1F cable from arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Splicing work: Arb 57: Remove 900 pairs from the existing splice.
Plan 601: Installation of an OPI 3000 (302-3) at PED 10 PERENACK AV Installation of an OUT BJMB 50-24/BUR – 3F cable, down cable component into the OPI. NOTE: The two other cables are represented on other plans (505 & 201). Splicing work: OPI3000, PED 10 PERENACK AV: 1850 pairs terminated.
Plan 602: Installation of a buried cable BJMB 50-24 – 142F from OPI PED 10 PERENACK AV to PED 36 PERENACK AV. Installation of 3 CP815 (PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV) Installation of buried service wires. Splicing work: PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV, terminate pairs on terminal connecting blocks.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(e)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 2 : Identify the work illustrated 2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Plan 201: Installation of an aerial BKMB 300-24 - 366F cable from arb 1 to 4 Installation of a 10M Strand – 408m from arb 1 to 4 Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 92F cable from arb 2 to P306B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 92F cable from P306B to P396B (cable type is written on the plan but the label is missing). Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 83F cable from P396B to P500B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 600-24 - 40F cable from P500B to P512B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 600-24 - 80F cable from P512B to P568B. Installation of aerial four aerial QTD8A1A25 terminals at P208B, P212B, P314B & P420B. At P182B, installation of a 32m Anchor, 10m Guy From P182B & P208B, installation of a 10M - ?? meter overhead guy At P568B, installation of a 32m Anchor, 10m Guy. Bonding required at poles PF208B, PF396B, PF500B & PF262B. All other dashed cables & terminals are placed on other plans. Splicing work: Arb 1, splicing of the two new cables. Arb 4, splicing of the two new cables. Arb 2, splicing of the two new cables and the terminal. P212B, splicing of the terminal on the cable. P306B, splicing of the three new cables and the terminal. P314B, splicing of the terminal on the cable. P396B, splicing of the four new cables and the terminal. P420B, splicing of the terminal on the cable. P500B, splicing of the three new cables and the terminal. P512B, splicing of the four new cables and the terminal. P568B, splicing of the three new cables and the terminal.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(f)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 501 : Restencil MDF verticals. 3.1 Verifications (work) : •
Existing cables identification: There are 3 non-identified lines on the right side of the plan. To verify & correct.
•
Next location (forward from SC): Missing for all cables going south. To verify & correct.
•
Permanent address or arbitrary for each work location. OK we can use the vertical numbers as permanent address (V46 & V48).
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o 700 series plan (work location) for the job is missing, to be added, OR location sketch on plan missing, to be added.
•
References: o Plan references; Reference to plan 502 missing, to be added. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(g)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 502 : : Removal of a BHAF400-22/UG stub cable, 2 LD1 carrier cases and 1 loading coil case in 2BMH2. 3.1 Verifications (work) : Work on cables & equipments: • Component & total lengths (origin arrow): OK • Cable identification. Arb 1, the existing cable going south has no label – to be added. • Previous location (toward SC): Missing for the 3 cables at the left of the plan – to verify & correct. •
Next location (forward from SC): Missing for all cables going south. To verify & correct.
•
Permanent address or arbitrary for each work location. OK
Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • • • •
Identification of all participating cables. Arb 1, cable going south has no label. Principle of continuity. Cannot be verified in cable going south Arb 1. Cable count corresponds to its size. Permanent address or arbitrary for each work.
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 501, 503. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(h)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 503 : Removal of a BHAF400-22/UG stub cable, 2 LD1 carrier cases and cutting 25 pairs dead in an existing loading coils case in 2CMH2. 3.1 Verifications (work) : Work on cables & equipments: • Component & total lengths (origin arrow): OK • Cable identification. OK • Previous location (toward SC): Missing for all cables on the plan – to verify & correct. •
Next location (forward from SC): Missing for all cables on the plan - to verify & correct.
•
Permanent address or arbitrary for each work location. OK
Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • • • •
Identification of all participating cables. OK Principle of continuity. OK Cable count corresponds to its size. OK Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. OK
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 502, 504. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(i)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 504 : Cables installation & removal & associated splicing work: Installation of three stubs in 2CMH4: Arb 14 to 16: BKMF 100-24/UG – 5F Arb 16 to 22: BKMF 200-24/UG – 5F Arb 19 to 22: BKMF 900-24/UG – 5F Installation of two cables from arb 22 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 400-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 900-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 Removal of a cable from arb 17 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): Arb 17 to 2CMH4 wall: BKMF 400-24/UG – 1F in 2CMH4 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK. • Cable identification (all cables): OK 1) Arb 14 to 16: BKMF 100-24/UG – 5F = OK 2) Arb 16 to 22: BKMF 200-24/UG – 5F = OK 3) Arb 19 to 22: BKMF 900-24/UG – 5F = OK 4) Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 400-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 • Next location (forward from SC): 2CMH5. • Duct to be used: Field side, to plan 505: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 5) Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall: BJMB 900-24/UG – 5F in 2CMH4 • Next location (forward from SC): 2CMH5. • Duct to be used: Field side, to plan 505: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). NOTE: If the 2 cables (Arb 22 to 2CMH4 wall) are to be placed on plan 506, then, they should be drawn with dashed lines or the total length (5F) should be removed from this plan. To verify & correct. 6) RM Arb 17 to 2CMH4 wall: BKMF 400-24/UG – 1F in 2CMH4 • Next location (forward from SC): 2CMH5. • Existing used duct: o Field side, to plan 505: Duct used = 2 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(j)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 504 (cont'd) Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • • • • •
Identification of all participating cables. OK Principle of continuity. OK Cable count corresponds to its size. OK Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. OK
Manhole diagram (700 series plan): missing: to be added.
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 503, 505, 506 & 507. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(k)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 505 : Cables installation & removal & associated splicing work: Installation of two cables from arb 22 (2CMH4) to plan 505 (2CMH5): From 2CMH4 wall to arb 2: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 From 2CMH4 wall to arb 1: BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 900-24/UG cable from arb 1 (2CMH5) to OPI 10 PERENACK plan 506 to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 400-24/UG cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to P208 BROADWAY AV plan 506 to be disbursed on plan 506 Removal of a BKMF 400-24/UG – 191F cable from 2CMH4 wall to arb 2 (2CMH5) Removal of a BKMF 200-24/UG – 1F cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to 2CMH5 wall 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK. • Cable identification (all cables): OK 1) From 2CMH4 wall to arb 2: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Previous location (toward SC): 2CMH4. • Duct to be used: SC side, from plan 504: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 2) From 2CMH4 wall to arb 1: BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Previous location (toward SC): 2CMH4. • Duct to be used: SC side, from plan 504: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 3) From arb 1 (2CMH5) to OPI 10 PERENACK plan 506: BJMB 900-24/UG - -5F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Next location (forward from SC): OPI 10 PERENACK. • Duct to be used: Field side, from plan 505: Duct to use = 1 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 4) From arb 2 (2CMH5) to P208 BROADWAY plan 201: BJMB 400-24/UG - -5F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Next location (forward from SC): P208 BROADWAY. • Duct to be used: Field side, to plan 201: Duct to use = 3 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). NOTE: Duct #3 should be used only for MAIN duct. In our case, the case should be in a lateral duct going to the pole. To verify. NOTE RELATED TO ALL CABLE PLACEMENT ON THIS PLAN: If ALL the cables are to be placed on plan 506, then, they should be drawn with dashed lines or their total length should be removed from this plan. To verify & correct. Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(l)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 505 (cont'd)
5) RM BKMF 400-24/UG – 191F cable from 2CMH4 wall to arb 2 (2CMH5) • Previous location (toward SC): 2CMH4. • Existing used duct: SC side, to plan 504: Duct used = 2 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). 6) RM BKMF 200-24/UG – 1F cable from arb 2 (2CMH5) to 2CMH5 wall • Next location (toward SC): Missing – to verify. • Existing used duct: Field side, to plan 206: Duct used = 2 (Bingo method not required as the duct formation graphic is shown on the plan). Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • • • • •
Identification of all participating cables. OK Principle of continuity. OK Cable count corresponds to its size. OK Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. Arb could be added at the removed cables junction.
Manhole diagram (700 series plan): missing: to be added.
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 504, 506, 601, 201 & 206. Plan 206 missing on the job – to verify. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(m)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 506 : Cables installation & associated splicing work: Installation of two cables from 2CMH4 to 2CMH5: BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 900-24/UG – 321F cable from 2CMH5 to OPI 10 PERENACK to be disbursed on plan 506 Installation of a BJMB 400-24/UG – 284F cable from 2CMH5 to P208 BROADWAY AV to be disbursed on plan 506 + 8F up pole section of that cable Installation of an OUT BJMB 900-24/BUR – 41F cable from OPI 10 PERNACK to PED 208 BROADWAY Installation of a CP12 pedestal at 208 Broadway No splicing work on that plan. 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): Problem with Cable BJMB 40024 form PL505 to P208BROADWAY & Cable BJMB 900-24 OUT cable from OPI, total lengths (see below). • Cable identification (all cables): OK 1) From 2CMH4 to 2CMH5 BJMB 400-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Total length 5 + W-W 193 + 5 = 203F. 2) From 2CMH4 to 2CMH5 BJMB 900-24/UG – 203F to be disbursed on plan 506 • Total length 5 + W-W 193 + 5 = 203F.. 3) From 2CMH5 to OPI 10 PERENACK BJMB 900-24/UG – 321F cable to be disbursed on plan 506 • Total length 5 + W-OPI 312 + up4 = 321F. 4) From 2CMH5 to P208 BROADWAY AV BJMB 400-24/UG – 284F cable to be disbursed on plan 506 + 8F up pole section of that cable • Total length 5 + W-Pole 283 + 1 (up9-8F on 0195 service code) = 289F. To verify if the 5F in 2CMH5 is to be disbursed on plan 505 our 506. NOTE: If the 5 meters in 2CMH5 is to be disbursed on plan 505, then it has to be represented with a dashed line on plan 506.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(n)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 506 (cont'd)
5) From OPI 10 PERNACK to PED 208 BROADWAY, out BJMB 900-24/BUR – 41F cable • Total length dn4 + 31 + 4 + up2 = 44F. To verify if the 3 meters near the OPI is included in the DN4 component. NOTE: If the 3 meters is included in the DN4 component, then a 1 meter component should be show inside the OPI symbol. Splicing: NO splicing on this plan.
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: None on this plan. o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 504, 505, 601, 602, 401 & 201. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(o)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 507 : Cables installation & associated splicing work: Removal of a 300-26/AER – 1F cable from arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Removal of a 600-26/BUR – 1F cable from arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall 3.1 Verifications (work) : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK • Cable identification (all cables): OK 1) From arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Removal of a 300-26/AER – 1F cable = OK 2) From arb 57 to 2CMH4-1 wall Removal of a 600-26/BUR – 1F cable = OK Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; •
Identification of all participating cables. OK
•
Principle of continuity. The pair counts of the two cables to be removed don't show the splicing work done on other plans. To correct as following: 300-26 (20,1301-1350)D5101-5150 D4151-4200 D4201-4300 (33,701-750)D5801-5850 15,1051-1100
• •
600-26 D5401-5450 15,651-700 D5501-5600 (15,901-950)D5701-5750 (20,901-1000)D5201-5300 15,1001-1050 (33,751-800)D5301-5350 (15,951-1000)D5751-5800 (20,1201-1300)D5001-5100
Cable count corresponds to its size. OK Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. Arb could be added at the removed cables ends.
Manhole diagram (700 series plan): missing: to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(p)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 507 (cont'd)
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Manhole location sketch: OK note on plan reference to plan 504. o Street names: OK (see plan 504)
•
References: o References to other plans 504 & 609 = Plan 609 missing on the job. To verify o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(q)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 601 : Installation of an OPI 3000 (302-3) at PED 10 PERENACK AV Installation of an OUT BJMB 50-24/BUR – 3F cable, down cable component into the OPI. NOTE: The two other cables are represented on other plans (505 & 201). Splicing work: OPI3000, PED 10 PERENACK AV: 1850 pairs terminated. 3.1 Verifications (work) : • •
Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK Cable identification (all cables): OK
1) OUT BJMB 50-24/BUR – 3F cable, down cable component into the OPI.= OK 2) The two other cables are represented on other plans (505 & 201). They should be represented with dashed lines on this plan and no total lengths should be displayed. 3) Installation of an OPI 3000 (302-3): Taper code missing for the OPI: To be added. Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • Identification of all participating cables. OK • Principle of continuity. OK • Total of terminated pairs in the OPI: Missing to be added. • Cable count corresponds to its size. OK • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. Arb should be added at the end of the new BJMB 50-24. 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o OPI location sketch: Missing to be added. o Street names: Missing to be added
•
References: o References to other plans 502, 505, 201 & 602 = OK o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(r)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 602 : 3.1 Verifications (work) : Installation of a buried cable BJMB 50-24 – 142F from OPI PED 10 PERENACK AV to PED 36 PERENACK AV. Installation of 3 CP815 (PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV) Installation of buried service wires. Splicing work: PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV, terminate pairs on terminal connecting blocks. Installation of cables : Installation of a buried cable BJMB 50-24 – 142F from OPI PED 10 PERENACK AV to PED 36 PERENACK AV. Installation of buried service wires. • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK • Cable identification: OK • Buried cable installation, trench information: o Pedestals are off trench (3.5 meters). o Min depth of cover = 0.6m. o All distances between the buried cable & physical fixed items are identified on plan. o Ground condition written on the plan. Work on terminals: Installation of 3 CP815 (PED 16 PERENACK AV, PED 30 PERENACK AV, PED 36 PERENACK AV) • Terminals addresses: OK. • Terminal type and capacity. OK • Count and AC: At all pedestals, the pair counts and the AC should be written on 2 individual lines. • Wiring limits: OK • Taper code: 302300. Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • Identification of all participating cables. OK • Principle of continuity. OK • Cable count corresponds to its size. OK • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. OK Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(s)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 602 (cont'd): 3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 601. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(t)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 201: 3.1 Verifications (work) : : Installation of an aerial BKMB 300-24 - 366F cable from arb 1 to 4 Installation of a 10M Strand – 408m from arb 1 to 4 Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 92F cable from arb 2 to P306B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 92F cable from P306B to P396B (cable type is written on the plan but the label is missing). Installation of an aerial BKMB 900-24 - 83F cable from P396B to P500B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 600-24 - 40F cable from P500B to P512B. Installation of an aerial BKMB 600-24 - 80F cable from P512B to P568B. Installation of aerial four aerial QTD8A1A25 terminals at P208B, P212B, P314B & P420B. At P182B, installation of a 32m Anchor, 10m Guy From P182B & P208B, installation of a 10M - ?? meter overhead guy At P568B, installation of a 32m Anchor, 10m Guy. Bonding required at poles PF208B, PF396B, PF500B & PF262B. All other dashed cables & terminals are placed on other plans. Cables & stand installation : • Component & total lengths (origin arrow) (all cables): OK • Cable identification: The cable number 302-3 is missing on the BKMB300-24. To be added. • Permanent addresses or arbitraries for all work: OK • Strand installation: Stand 408m doesn't correspond to the cable aerial length. Work on terminals: • • • • •
Terminals addresses: OK. Terminal type and capacity. OK Count and AC: At all terminal, the pair counts and the AC should be written on 2 individual lines. Wiring limits: OK Taper code: 302300.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(u)
Final exercise
FINAL EXERCISE - ANSWERS (cont'd) Step 3 : Check whether the work is correctly illustrated. 531579 Plan 201 (cont'd): Splicing: Verifications at each splice where work is performed; • Identification of all participating cables. OK • Principle of continuity. OK • Cable count corresponds to its size. OK • Permanent address or arbitrary for each work. OK
3.2 Verifications (basic plan elements and general information): •
Caption stamp elements: OK complete.
•
Work location: o Street names: OK
•
References: o References to other plans 506, 601, 202, 603, 604, 605, 607 & 608. Plans 202, 603, 604, 605, 607 & 608 missing. To verify with the designer. o Municipality name: Missing, to be added.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Final exercise. 3(v)
Job example (Drafts & finalized plans)
Job example
DRAFT 1
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 1
Job example
DRAFT 2
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 2
Job example
DRAFT 3
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 3
Job example
DRAFT 4
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 4
Job example
DRAFT 5
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 5
Job example
DRAFT 6
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 6
Job example
DRAFT 7
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 7
Job example
DRAFT 8
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 8
Job example
DRAFT 9
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 9
Job example
DRAFT 10
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 10
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 401
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 11
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 402
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 12
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 403
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 13
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 404
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 14
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 405
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 15
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 501
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 16
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 502
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 17
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 503
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 18
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 504
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 19
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 505
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 20
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 506
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 21
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 507
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 22
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 508
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 23
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 509
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 24
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 201
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 25
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 601
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 26
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 602
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 27
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 603
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 28
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 604
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 29
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 605
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 30
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 606
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 31
Job example
FINALIZED PLAN 628687-629093 plan 701
CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. Minimum depth of cover 0.76m. 2. Restore all surfaces to original condition. 3. All conduit is PVCD1 unless otherwise noted. 4. All charges to go to 628687 except for where noted to be charged to 629093. 5. All work to be co-ordinated with the MTO's rebuilding of the highway.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Job example. 32
Closing remarks Legend Feeder cable Distribution cable
Module 2 : Cables representation
Crossconnecting Box 12
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
Central Office 7 1 3
4
Module 3 : Underground network
2 5
Module 4 : Splicing 6 9
Fish River
11
Module 5 : Aerial & building networks
8
10
Module 6 : Buried and submarine networks
Module 7 : Terminals and wires
Closing remarks
Closing remarks Duration
15 minutes
Summary
The P243 course – Work plans – is now completed. You should now be able to analyze Bell Canada work plans showing work to be performed in the existing network. More specifically, you should be able to: •
Read and interpret work plans* where underground, aerial, building and submarine cables, as well as the structures supporting them are illustrated;
•
Read and interpret work plans* where terminals are illustrated;
•
Detect discrepancies on these plans;
•
Correct the discrepancies.
* Means reading and interpreting the network map and drafts of plans.
Instructor's notes
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
Tell the participants that P243 course is a basic course and that many other courses will allow them to consolidate their competences and to acquire other new ones.
End.1
Closing remarks
Summary
Instructor's notes
To reach those objectives, you have seen 7 modules. You can remind them by looking the outside network poster: •
Module 1 : Basic Work Plan Elements
•
Module 2 : Illustrating Cables
•
Module 3 : Underground Network (400 and 500 plans)
•
Module 4 : Splicing
•
Module 5 : Aerial and Building Networks (100 and 200 plans)
•
Module 6 : Buried and Submarine Networks (600 plans)
•
Module 7 : Terminals and Wires
Show modules 1 to 7 titles pasted on the outside network poster. After, briefly present the next work plans course content by showing grey module titles pasted on outside network poster.
Next course…
In the next work plans course, you will see other types of equipments that you can find in the Bell outside plant: crossconnecting boxes, pressure equipments, casings, central office equipments and remote terminals.
Instructor's notes
Ask participants to fill-in and to give you back the "end of course evaluation sheet". Thank participants for attending and give them their certificate.
Instructor's guide P243 – Work plans
End.2
Alphanumeric Sequence Copper cable
L1L2L3L4 GGG-CC (E.g.: BKTF 200-26) L1
Design sequence
L2
Type of wire pair insulation B: Polyethylene-polyvinyl chloride C: Plastic foam D: Paper pulp or tape H: Solid polyethylene (19- and 22-gauge) J: Jelly filled K: Solid polyethylene (24- and 26-gauge) T: Expanded polyethylene-polyvinyl chloride
L3
Pair gauge B: 19 A: 22 M: 24 T: 26
L4
Boys Always Make Trouble
Type of sheath: A: Alpeth B: Sealed alpeth C: Stalpeth D: Lepeth E: Lead coated polyethylene F: Sealed PAP (pressurized cable)
G
G: PAP H: PASP L: Lead M: Alplast Z: Sealed stalpeth
Cable size (number or pairs) Calculation based on the pair count: Size = # of last pair- # of first pair + 1 E.g. : For count 101-300, there are 300-101=199+1 = 200 pairs (size)
C
Pair gauge B: 19 A: 22 M: 24 T: 26
Job aid P243 – Work plans
1
Alphanumeric Sequence Fibre cables
S1S2S3S4S5S6 – NNN (Ex.34N2LT-024) S1
Fibre characteristic 2 or 3: single mode fibres
S2
Attenuation 4: 0.4 dB/km X: Restoration grade
S3
Strand and sheath characteristics N: Dielectric strand +D +PSP
1: Dielectric strand + D + P 2: Dielectric strand + D + PKP R: Dielectric strand + D+PSP+ RPA S: Submarine cable M: Dielectric strand + PSP X: Dielectric strand + PSP + RPA
S4
Copper pair and pulling tension 2: No copper pair E: One 22-gauge copper pair Tension of 2.67kN (600 pounds) Tension of 4.45kN (1,000 pounds) 3: No copper pair Tension of 4.45kN (1,000 pounds) F: 2 22-gauge copper pairs C: One 22-gauge copper pair Tension of 4.45kN (1,000 Tension of 2.67kN (600 pounds) pounds)
S5
Type of construction L: Lite tube (flexible tubes) H: Tubestar (jelly filled) X: Tubestar (air filled)
S6
Number of fibres in each tube T: 12 fibres per tube
NNN
Total number of fibres or size Based on the fibre count: Size = # of last fibre - # of first fibre + 1 E.g.: For the count 13-36, there are 36-13=23+1 = 24 fibres (size)
Job aid P243 – Work plans
2
Analysis method
Steps
Action
1. Get a general idea of the project
1.1
Determine the work location.
a) Identify the network number (if available). b) Look at the 700 plan or the work location diagrams. If required, place all the plans aside to have a general idea of the project and situate the work.
c) Identify the references to other plans and/or jobs as well as the indication of subsequent and previous locations (direction of central office). d) Pay particular attention to street names on each plan. 1.2
2. Identify the work
Identify shown network category (ies) and make sure that the plans are well numbered. • Submarine
•
Building
•
Aerial
•
Underground
•
Buried
2.1 Analyse and identify the work illustrated and network elements involved. Pay attention to the following elements :
a) width of the lines and symbols (thin, bold, with « X » or brackets) ; b) cables and pairs numbering associated to cables or equipment (note any instance of brackets, underline, transfer boat or WCPT symbols); c) permanent addresses and arbitraries; d) notes written on the work plan.
Job aid P243 – Work plans
1
Analysis method (cont'd)
Steps (cont'd)
Action
3. Check whether the work is correctly illustrated.
3.1 Verify each plan in order to have work represented according to the established rules. When required : • •
correct and/or complete work illustration;
refer to originator. Consult your guide and P243 course job aid. NOTE : In the field, different intranet sites and Bell practices are also available.
3.2 Check for presence of basic plan elements : •
caption stamp information (at the bottom of plan).
•
Location details, for example : job location 700 plan ;
o OR o
work location sketch on each plan ;
o
street name and permanent address;
o
location sketch for manholes.
•
job associated request references (name of municipality, right of way, Power company, TV, etc…) ;
•
details pertaining to users (Facilities, Expertech, contractors/conduits, property developer, etc.) .
Use the standardized Bell checklist to make sure you have identified and corrected all the discrepancies on each plan.
Job aid P243 – Work plans
2
Basic Work Plan Elements Caption Stamp Elements
References
• Issue and revision dates
• Name of municipality (optional)
• Originator
•
Reference to other plans
• Telephone number
•
Reference to other networks
• Name of telephone exchange
•
Reference to internal requests
• Name of central office
•
Reference to external requests
• Network number
Surface Details
• Plan number
• Type of surface
• Right of way number
•
Underground services
•
Installation depth
Work Location • Street names
•
Trench details
• Permanent locations
•
Repair
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
1
Cable Numbering
Type of Network Definition
Copper Fibre
Local
Serving customers within the boundaries of a central office territory
10 to 99
Trunk
Connects 2 central offices
100 to 599 F100-F199
Toll
Connects several central 600 to 999 F 200-F699 offices
Fibre rings
Fibre cable loop running through two central offices
-
FA01-FA99
Local fibre rings
Fibre cable loop running through 1 central office
-
FAL01-FAL99
Transcanada fibres
Fibre rings connecting different telecommunications networks (rare)
-
F99
Partnership fibres
Cable in which certain fibres are used by Bell and others are leased to a partner
F01-F99
If Bell is manager: HQ,1-36 FP181,1-24 If Bell is not manager: OTH,1-36 FP181, 1-24 Notes: 1) Bell fibres: FP followed by the numbers associated with the types of networks mentioned above. The name of the manager must be indicated above the alphanumeric sequence.
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
1
Cable numbering, continued Local distribution cables are numbered according to the equipment from where they begin and the route number.
DISTRIBUTION Network
For distribution cables, we need to add, to the alphabetical characters designating the installation type ID, a number included between 1 to 99 to identify the placement sequence of the equipment according to the placement type ID. When numbers 1 to 99 are all affected, use A0 to Z9 and after AA up to ZZ.
Equipment type
Definition
Numbering
Distribution cable coming from an OPI interface.
Precede the pair numbering by the SA number (i.e.: 101) followed by the SD number (i.e.: 1)
OPI
101-1,1-200 DMS-1U
Distribution cable coming from DMS-1U equipment.
CM01-CM99
SCM-100U
Distribution cable coming from SCM-100U equipment.
SM01-SM99
OPM
Distribution cable coming from OPM equipment.
RM01-RM99
Access Node
Distribution cable coming from Access Node equipment.
AN01-AN99
LCRV
Distribution cable coming from LCRV equipment.
LC01-LC99
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
2
Direction of Feed Arrow and Lengths
Where are the direction of feed arrow ?
Direction of Feed The direction of feed arrow indicates the direction in which cables are deployed (from the central office to the customers). It points towards the customers (direction away from the central office)
• Before a splice/fusion
Example 1:
• At all network category change points
Central office
BKTB 200-26/AER
Customers BKTF 200-26/AER
BKTF 200-26/UG
Example 2: Customers
•
At the end of a cable or end of a cable section.
Central office
BKTF 200-26/AER
Job aid P243 – Work plans
AJTB 200-26/BUR
1
Direction of Feed Arrow and Lengths Final lengths (graphic representation ) Final lengths are required: • Between two successive splices/fusions 210F
BKTF200-26/AER
BKTF200-26/AER
155F
Exception: underground cable (see Lesson 3 of Module 3)
• Between a splice/fusion and a network category change point 47F
BKTF200-26/UG
54F 34N2LT-012/BUR
BKTF200-26/BUR
63F
35F 34N2LT-012/UG
• Between two network category change points 76F 34N2LT-024 / UG
24F 34N2LT-024 / BUR
50F 34N2LT-024 / AER
• Between a splice/fusion and the end of a cable 58F
BKTB 200-26/AER
• Between a network category change point and the end of a cable. BKTF 200-26/BUR
54F
54F 34N2LT-048 / BUR ENF
•
BKTF 200-26/AER
29F
60F 34N2LT-048 / AER
Other used methods • Cable stub label
UG
• Cable stub box label
UG
• Leader line label
UG
Component lengths
Job aid P243 – Work plans
Tie-in measurements
2
Direction of Feed Arrow and Lengths The components lengths are entered below the cable line at the end furthest away from the central office. This is additional information on the cable path and/or the distance separating equipment installed on the cable. The sum of these lengths corresponds to the final length of a cable. Example: 40, 30, 20 et 25
Tie-in measurements are entered with arrows. They make it possible to accurately locate the Bell network in relation to other elements located nearby. Example::
5F 11 25
15,101-200 BKTB 100-26/AER
Job aid P243 – Work plans
40
30
20
3
5
Landbase Elements Landbase Elements Elements
Symbols
Elements
Property line
Railroad (grey)
Street line
Symbols (grey)
Water system (grey)
(grey)
Sidewalk line
Sewer
S
(grey) (grey)
Fence line
Gas line (grey)
Street intersection
(purple)
Services
(grey)
(grey)
Highway
Fire hydrant
(grey)
(grey)
Lake
Municipal border (lime green)
(blue) LATREILLE STREET
Private entrance
River Private entrance
(blue)
N.B.: In NetworkX, the name of the municipal element appears when the cursor is placed on it. Job Aid P243 – Work plans
1
Manholes and conduits Element
Symbol
Bell manhole
Other manholes Bell Conduits Ex. 2m 2D/PVCD1/90 (2 cond. type PVCD-1 of 2m) Other Conduits Horizontal bend
Y fitting
Split Y fitting
Bingo Method 01 02 04
F
2
A
B
5
6
1
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
2
1 8
D
4 2
B
3
A
1
1
01 02 2
B
A
A
01
B
C
A
Job aid P243 – Work plans
Example: Third manhole on route 1A
1AMH3
Ducts
Numbering
Main duct Connects the central office and the manhole OR connects several manholes.
Number (e.g. 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5)
termination point
Examples: • Duct 5 = C2 • Duct F = D3 • Duct 3 = C1
Examples: • Duct 8 • Duct 01 • Duct A
Numbering 1A MH 3
: Route : Manhole : 3rd manhole
Lateral terminated or If between MH and … unterminated duct • Building: Connected at one end Letter or number to a main duct (e.g. A – B or 1 –2) formation and to termination point at the • Pole or pedestal: other. Letter (e.g. A – B – Terminated: If it stops C) ≤ 1 metre from the termination point • Crossconnecting terminal: Unterminated: If it 0 + number stops more than 1 (e.g. 01 – 02) metre from the
Vertical bend
3
Manhole
= A1 = B2 = B1
•
•
Incidental ducts Not included in definitions of main duct and a main lateral duct. Used to protect cables.
In this formation: • Duct 3 = A1 • Duct 1 = C1 • Duct A = D2
1
Remote terminal: DMS: D + number (ex. D1 – D2 – D3) AN: A + number (e.g. A1 – A2 – A3) WIC or CEV: 0 + number (e.g. 01 – 02 – 03) Electrical ducts: EL
Letter (e.g.: A – B – C – D) If dead: D + number (e.g.: D1 – D2 – D3)
Network Category Change Change Points •
Building entrance (general)
Diagrams 1. Building
Network category change i Building entrance even if the conduit enters inside the building
Building cable
Buried or underground cable
2. Network category change point: Building entrance Aerial cable
Building cable
Building
3. Network category change point: When the cable enters the building through a hole in the building wall it becomes a building cable. Aerial cable
Cable attached to exterior wall = Aerial cable Building
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
1
Network Category Change Change Points •
Pedestal
Diagrams 4. Network category change Point if < 3m : splice Pedestal Part of loop between duct exit and splice Network category change point if > 3m : Duct exit
Underground cable In a conduit
Buried cable towards customers
Note: If cable length between duct exit and splice: • < 3 metres -> category changes at splice • > 3 metres -> category changes at duct exit
Ground level (general)
5. Aerial cable
Network category change point: Ground level
6
DOWN 7
•
1
Buried or underground cable
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
2
Network Category Change Change Points •
Ground level (general)
Diagrams 6. Pole of more than 5m Aerial cable
Aerial cable
Network category change point: Ground level
Buried or underground cable
•
Ground level (exception)
Buried or underground cable
7. Pole of less than 5m
Buried cable (in incidental duct or directly in ground)
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
Network category change point: Ground level
3
Buried cable (in incidental duct or directly in ground)
Network Category Change Change Points •
Ground level (exception)
Diagrams 8. Terminal, equipment or splice closure
Buildingwall or Pole or Pedestal
•
Ground level and building entrance
Buried or underground cable Buried or underground cable
9. Network category change point Building entrance
Network category change point Ground level
Aerial cable (if > 3m)
Building cable
Building
Buried or underground cable
Note: If the cable between ground level and the building entrance measures 3 metres or less, it remains a buried or underground cable.
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
4
Network Category Change Change Points •
None (bridge)
Diagrams 10. Bridge Aerial cable
Aerial cable
Aerial cable
11. Bridge Buried or underground cable Buried or underground cable
•
Buried or underground cable
Ground level (bridge) 12. Bridge
Aerial cable
Network category change point: Ground level
Buried or underground cable Aerial cable
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
5
Network Category Change Change Points •
Diagrams
13. With submarine cable: Buried splice, cable marker, pedestal, end of Buried cable underground duct or ground level.
Network category change point: Pedestal Submarine cable
Submarine cable
Buried cable
Network category change point: Buried splice or cable marker
14. Network category change point: Ground level Underground cable Submarine cable
Aerial cable
Underground cable
Network category change point: End of duct ( >3m)
Submarine cable
Note: If duct is < 3 metres, the cable remains submarine in the manhole
Network Categories
Letters
Service code
Submarine
SUB
0205
Building
BLD
0197
Aerial
AER
0195
Buried
BUR
0202
Underground
UG
0199
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
6
Splicing When you have a splice or fusion, you must check two important elements.
Verification
1. Pair/fibre count = cable size (# of last pair/fibre) – (# of 1st pair/fibre) + 1
BKTF 1200-26
36,1-1000 100D D4101-4200
2. The principle of continuity is respected (live pairs) The pair or fibre count of the cable furthest from the central office (customer side) must always be included in the pair or fibre count of the cable from the central office to which it is spliced.
36,1-100 36,451-1000 250D BKTF 900-26
BKTF 400-26
36,251-450 D4501-4700
50 1-2 50 ,10 41 36 10126 00D4 F2 T BK
Cable count (customer side) Right cable
Is it included in the count of the cable from the central office?
36,1-100
Yes: included in 36,1-1000
36,451-1000
Yes: included in 36,1-1000
250D
No
Lower cable 36,251-450
Yes: included in 36,1-1000
D4501-4700
No (bulk dead pairs at the splice)
Left cable 36,101-250
Yes: included in 36,1-1000
D4101-4150
Yes: included in D4101-4200
Is the principle of continuity respected at this splice? YES
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
1
Splicing Bulk dead pairs
The bulk dead pairs/fibres are not energized by the central office and are not connected to splices or fusions. Central office Customers
Live pairs or fibres
Bulk dead pairs or fibres
Dead count =
Connected dead pairs/fibres
•
Number of pairs + “D”
•
Number of fibres+ “D”
Dead pairs and fibres are not energized by the central office but are spliced or fused together at no less than one splice or fusion. Central office Customer
Live pairs or fibres
Connected dead pairs or fibres
Fictitious dead count = •
“D” + # 1st pair + # of last pair
•
“D” + # 1st fibre - # of last fibre
Formula for calculating the number of pairs in a fictitious dead count: # of last dead pair/fibre - # of first dead pair/fibre + 1
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
2
Splicing Multiple network
The multiple network allows live pairs to be available in several locations. However, each pair can only be used in one location. At the splice, the pairs of the cable from the central office are spliced to the pairs of two different cables. Example:
39,1-50 BKTF 50-26
Pairs 39,1-50 Available here
39,1-50 BKTF 50-26
39,1-50 BKTF 50-26
Pairs 39,1-50 Available here
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
3
Splicing Types of Splices
Straight splice or fusion: Connection between 2 new cables Example: 621,1-500 100D
621,1-500 100D
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 600-26
Important: The order in which the lines of pair/fibre counts is entered must be respected.
34N2LT-012
F19,37-48
Branch splice or fusion: Connection between 3 or more new cables
F19,1-48 D149-160
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
4
34N2LT-024
F19,25-36 D149-154 6D
34N2LT-060
Splicing
Types of Splices (continued)
Miscellaneous splice: Other than straight, branch or facility splice. Examples: Clear & Cap and store slack splice
Clear & Cap
UG
Store Slack
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
5
Splicing Types of Splices (continued)
Facility splice or fusion: ♦ Opening an existing splice/fusion or ♦ Opening a cable sheath to create a new splice/fusion where work may be performed. This type of splice always involves at least one existing cable. Possible work: 9 Cable installation, removal or replacement
9
Energizing pairs/fibres
Energizing involves splicing dead pairs or fusing dead fibres to live pairs or fibres of a cable from the central office.
By connecting a “dead” pipe to an active water supply pipe, the “dead” pipe becomes active.
You have to enter the old count (dead or fictitious dead) in brackets followed by the new underlined count. The count is underlined only at the first splice/fusion where physical splicing work must be performed. Job Aid P243 – Work plans
6
Splicing Types of Splices (continued)
Example with dead count: Underline the new count to indicate that physical work must be performed at the previous fusion (with the cable from the central office)
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (12D) F46,13-24
Fibres 12D must be fused to F46,13-24
Fibres 12D must be fused to F46,13-24
Fibres 12D must be fused to F46,13-24
F46,1-24
F46, 1-24
F46, 1-12 (12D) F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (12D)F46,13-24
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024 3
2
1
Example with a fictitious dead count: Underlining a new count means that physical work must be performed at the previous fusion (with the cable from the central office)
F46,1-24
The new count is not underlined because no physical work is required at the previous fusion (the fusions are already done)
F46, 1-12 (D113-124)F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (D113-124)F46,13-24
Fibres D113-124 must be fused to F46,13-24
Firbes D113-124 are already fused and automatically become F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (D113-124)F46,13-24
Firbes D113-124 are already fused and automatically become F46,13-24
F46, 1-24
F46, 1-12 (D113-124)F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (D113-124)F46,13-24
F46, 1-12 (D113-124)F46,13-24
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
1
Example of energizing with double brackets: Note: The count in double brackets must be dead or fictitious dead and the underlined count must be live for the operation to be considered as energizing. Energize 50 pairs
Energize 50 pairs 10,1-50 11,1-50
1
BKTF 100-26
10,1-50 (D3601-3650) 11,1-50 BKTF 100-26
77,1-100 BKTF 100-26 2
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
7
3
10,1-50 ((D3601-3650))(11,1-50) 77,1-50 BKTF 100-26
Splicing
Types of Splices (continued)
9
Cutting pairs/fibres dead
Involves cutting live pairs/fibres at a splice. The cut pairs become dead (unenergized) I don’t need water anymore
By disconnecting the …water no longer goes pipes... to the customer .
You must indicate the live pair/fibre count to be cut dead in brackets followed by a fictitious dead count. The new count is underlined only at the first splice/fusion where the physical splicing work must be performed. Example: 46,1-300 (46,301-400) D3601-3700
46,1-400
46,1-300 (46,301-400)D3601-3700
Work not necessary at this splice (Pairs already spliced.)
46, 1-400
46, 1-300 (46,301-400)D3601-3700
46, 1-300 (46,301-400)D3601-3700
BKTF 400-26
BKTF 400-26
BKTF 400-26
1
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
8
Splicing Types of Splices (continued)
Example of cutting pairs/fibres dead with double brackets: Note: The count in double brackets must be live and the one underlined must be fictitious dead (or dead) for the operation to be considered as cutting pairs dead. 44
0
0
6
10,1-50 11,1-50
50
2 1
BKTF 100-26
9
Cut 50 pairs dead
Transfer 50 pairs
(11,1-50)10,1-50
((11,1-50))(10,1-50) D3601-3650
BKTF 50-26
BKTF 50-26
Transferring pairs/fibres
A pair/fibre transfer occurs when live pairs/fibres are cut and then energized by other pairs/fibres from an existing cable or a new cable from the central office. You have to indicate the initial pair/fibre numbers (followed by their new numbers). The new count is underlined only at the first splice/fusion where the physical splicing work must be performed. Note: Pair/fibre transfers before and after transfer must correspond to the cable size and respect the principle of continuity.
Transfer indicator: D: Arbitrary Designation number D N E
N:
Number of pairs/fibres transferred to a new cable
E:
Number of pairs/fibres transferred to an existing cable
CT/LT: Number of working pairs among the transferred pairs CT
LT
Number of working pairs assigned to line transfers
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
9
High-speed services HS
SS
Number of transferred working pairs pairs assigned to special services
Splicing Types of Splices (continued)
Example of transfer: F10,1-24
F10,1-12 (F10,13-24) F31,1-12
F10,1-12 (F10, 13-24)F31,1-12
F10,1-12 (F10, 13-24)F31,1-12
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
34R2LT-024
2 12
F31,1-12
0
0
0
0
34R2LT-012 1
The underlining indicates that physical work must be performed at the previous fusion (towards the central office).
F10,1-24
The count is not underlined because no physical work is performed at these fusions.
F10, 1-12 (F10, 13-24) F31,1-12
F10, 1-12 (F10, 13-24)F31,1-12
Fibres F10,13-24 must be transferred to fibres F31,1-12 of the new cable.
Fibres F10,13-24 automatically become F31,1-12.
F10, 1-12 (F10, 13-24)F31,1-12
F31,1-12 New cable Fibres F10,13-24 automatically become F31,1-12.
Example of simultaneous transfers to different splices: 20
0
35
0
0
8
0
10
50
13,1 -200 14,1 -100 15,201 -300
50
13,1 -50 (13,51 -100)15,201 -250 14,51 -100 D6001 -6050
1
(13,1 -50)14,51 -100 (13,51 -100)15,201 -250 D6001 -6100
2
BKMB 200 -24
BKMB 200 -24 1st transfer (continued) (not underlined)
14,51-100 BKMB 50-24
1st transfer (underlined)
14,1-50 BKMB 50-24
BKMB 400 -24
2nd transfer (underlined)
Example of a double transfer: Note: To indicate a double transfer, brackets are added to the count before the transfer and to the count for the first transfer. As well, the new cable count is underlined. 22
0
0
4 50
10,1-50 11,1-50
(10,1-50) 11,1-50
BKTF 100-26
BKTF 50-26 1
22
0
0
4
23,1-50 BKTF 50-26
50 2
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
10
3
((10,1-50))(11,1-50) 23,1-50 BKTF 50-26
Splicing Types of Splices (continued)
Example of simultaneous transfers at the same splice: 25 pairs 20,1-25 transferred to existing cable 21,1-25 25 pairs 20,26-50 transferred to new cable 53,126-150
25
40
0
0
8
25
20,1-50 21,1-50
(20,1-25) 21,1-25 (20,26-50) 53,126-150
2
BKTB 50-26
BKTB 100-26 53,101-150 BKTB 50-26 1
F12,1-12 F13,13-24
34N2LT-024
(F13,13-24)F45,13-24
When two or more transfers to a new cable are performed at a same splice or fusion, you have to enter the sum of the pairs/fibres transferred to an existing cable in the middle box of the transfer indicator. Example:
(F12,1-12) F45,1-12 D13-24 34N2LT-024
RM 200F/34N2LT-024
24
F45,1-24 34N2LT-024
2
3
0
0
0
0
1
10,1 -200 11,1 -200 13,1 -200
BKTF 200-26
(10,1-100) 11,101-200 11,1-100
When 2 or more transfers to an existing cable are performed at a same splice or fusion, you have to enter the sum of the pairs/fibres to an existing cable in the last box of the transfer indicator. Example:
(13,1 -100) 10,1 -100 D3601 -3700
BKTF 600 -26
BKTF 200 -26 1
167
0
0
46 200
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
11
Splicing Types of Splices (continued)
When the post-transfer pair counts (underlined) are the same on both cables, you have to enter the number of pairs transferred in the transfer indicator as if it were just one transfer.
BKTF 200-26
10,301-450 20,501-750 D3601-3800
-
10,301-450 (20,501-550)20,701-750
Example:
(20,601-650)20,701-750 D3601-3650 BKTF 600-26
BKTF 600-26 1 18
0
0
6 50
9
Adding and removing slack
It is sometimes necessary to add or remove a length of copper cable. This cable length is referred to as “SLACK.” A
10,1-350 50D
BKTB400-26
1F
10,1-350 50D
BKTB400-26 2
A
9
BKTB400-26
B
1
BKTB 400-26 10, 1-350 50D 3F
B
10,1-350 50D
3
BKTB 400-26 10, 1-350 50D 5F
Cable rearrangement (N/C)
A cable is rearranged when a splice/fusion is moved to another splice/fusion without the addition of cable. 20,201-250
20,201-250
BKTF 50-26
RM 53F/BKTF 50-26
N/C
2
10, 1-600
(50D) 20,201-250 10,1-350
BKTF 600-26
BKTF 400-26
1
Job Aid P243 – Work plans
12